-7.

-.

MITSUBISHI CNC
/MELDB 330HM-V/335M-V
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ADVANCED AND EVER ADVANCIN

MITSUBISHI ELECTRI8
INTRODUCTION .

INTRODUCTION
This Instruction Manual has been prepared with all the information needed in order to operate the
MELDAS 330HM/335M/330HM-V/335M-V software-fixed types of CNC systems which are designed to
execute high-performance contour control with milling machines and machining centers.
The manual describw the procedures conducted for set-up, operation, control, programming and daily
maintenance. Operators of the MELDAS system should familiarize themselves with these procedures
before attempting to operate the system.
The manual contains details on all the functions of the MELDAS 330HM, MELDAS 335M, MELDAS
330HM-V and MELDAS 335M-V systems, but the system actually ordered may not necessarily be
provided with all the options mentioned. When the system is used, therefore, not all the options may
necessarily be operational and, in any event, reference should be made to the Specifications M anual issued
by the machine builder.

POINTS TO BE OBSERVED WHEN READING THIS MANUAL

( 1 ) This manual contains general descriptions as seen from the standpoint of numerical control and thus
reference should be made to the Instruction Manual issued by the machine builder for descriptions
of individual machine tools. The Instruction Manual issued by the machine builder takes<preference
over this manual when any mention of “restrictions, “ “usable states” or such details are mentioned.
(2) As much information as possible on special procedures has been included in this manual, and it may
be considered that any procedures not mentioned cannot be undertaken.
(3) Reference should be made to the separate documentation below for details on programming.
MELDAS 300 Series Programming Manual ..... BNP-A2856
MELDAS 300 Series Programming Manual (based on M2/MO format) ..... BNP-A2849
MELDAS 300V Series Programming Manual ..... BNP-A2943
MELDAS 300V Series Programming Manual (based on M2/MO format) ..... BNP-A2944
(4) Refer to the following documentation for further details on automatic programming,
MELDAS 335M Automatic Programming Instruction Manual ..... BNP-A2844
(5) The screens and functions, etc. may differ according to the version of the system.
 CONTENTS .

CONTENTS
I CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS

1. SETTING ~DDISPWY UNIT CONTROL ..............................................................................l

1.1 EXTERIOR OF 14-INCH CRT SETTING AND DISPLAY
UNIT ................................................................................................................................ ...... 1
1.2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 2
1.3 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS ................................................................................ 4
1.3.1 SCREEN TRANSITION WITH POWER-ON ................................................................ 4
1.3.2 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS ........................................................................... 5
1.4 SCREEN SELECTION PROCEDURE ............................................................................... ‘7
1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD .............................................................................................. 10

2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR ................................................................................................ 14

2.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREEN (COORDINATES) ................................................... 15
2.2 POSITION ............................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.1 CLEARING THE ENTIRE CRT SCREEN .................................................................. 18
2.2.2 PRESENT VALUE DISPLAY COUNTER ZERO AND
ORIGIN ZERO ............................................................+.................................................. 18
2.2.3 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS (S, T, M, B) ................................................ 19
2.2.4 DISPLAY OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION PROGRAMS ......................................... 22
2.3 PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.1 BUFFER CORRECTION .............................................................................................. 24
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH ...................................................................................................... 28
2.4.1 MEMORY SEARCH ...................................................................................................... 29
2.4.2 TAPE SEARCH .............................................................................................................. 30
2.4.3 COLLATE STOP ............................................................................................................ 32
2.5 OPERATION MODES ........................................................................................................ 38
2.5.1 OPERATION MODAL MONITOR AND RUN-OUT TIME
DISPLAY ......................................................................................................................... 38
2.5.2 RUN-OUT TIME SETTING .......................................................................................... 40
2.6 PLC SWITCHES .................................................................................................................. 40
2.7 CONTROL PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 40
2.8 COMMON VARIABLES .................................................................................................... 41
2.8.1 COMMON VARIABLE DISPLAY ............................................................................... 42
2.8.2 COMMON VARIABLE SETTING ............................................................................... 43
2.8.3 COMMON VARIABLE DELETION ............................................................................ 43
2.9 LOCAL VARIABLES ......................................................................................................... 44

I
 ,.

CONTENTS .

2.9.1 LOCAL VARIABLE DATA DISPLAY ........................................................................ 45

2.10 PROGRAM RESTART ...................................................................................................... 47
2.10.1 OPERATION SEQUENCES FOR PROGRAM RESTART ........................................ 48
2.10.2 RESTART SEARCH OPERATION .............................................................................. 50
2.10.3 RESTART POSITION RETURN SYSTEM ................................................................. 53
2.10.4 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS WITH PROGRAM
RESTART ....................................................................................................................... 54
2.10.5 CHECKPOINTS .............................................................................................................. 55
2.11 OFFSET AMOUNTS .......................................................................................................... 55
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION ............................................................................. 56
2.12.1 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION SETTING ...................................................... 57
2.12.2 EXAMPLES OF MACHINING TIME CALCULATION
OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................ 58
2.12.3 CRT DISPLAY DATA FOR MACHINING TIME
CALCULATION OPERATION .................................................................................... 64
2.12.4 CHECKPOINTS FOR MACHINING TIME CALCULA-
TION ................................................................................................................................ 65
2.12.5 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION OPERATIONS ON
GRAPHIC SCREEN ....................................................................................................... 66
2.12.6 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION FOR CNC
FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 67

3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM .................................................................................. 71

3.1 TOOL OFFSET ................................................................................................................... 72
3.1.1 TOOL OFFSET DATA SETTING ................................................................................ 73
3.1.2 TOOL OFFSET DATA DELETION ............................................................................. 74
3.1.3 TOOL OFFSET DATA SETTING MODE
(ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL VALUE SETTING) ................................................... 74
3.2 MANUAL TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT .............................................................. 76
3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION .................................................................................................... 79
3.3.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................... 79
3.3.2 TOOL REGISTRATION INTO MAGAZINE POT ..................................................... 79
3.3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION INTO HEAD, NEXT, INDEX ........................................... 80
3.3.4 TOOL REGISTRATION DATA DELETION .............................................................. 81
3.3.5 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND OPERATIONS
(M, T) ON TOOL REGISTRATION SCREEN ............................................................ 81
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING ............................................................................................. 82
3.4.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................... 82
3.4.2 TOOL LIFE SCREEN DATA DISPLAY ...................................................................... 83

II
 CONTENTS .

3.4.3 TOOL LIFE MONITORING DATA DISPLAY AND

SETTING (Tool life monitoring data screen page) ....................................................... 87
3.4.4 DELETION OF ALL TOOL LIFE MONITORING DATA
(HEAD, NEXT, GROUP File page 1) ........................................................................... 88
3.5 WORK COORDINATES .................................................................................................... 89
3.5.1 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA
SETTING ......................................................................................................................... 90
3.5.2 EXTERNAL WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET
DATA SETTING ............................................................................................................ 90
3.5.3 MACHINE POSITION DATA DISPLAY .................................................................... 90
3.5.4 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS (M, T) ON WORK
COORDINATE OFFSET PAGE ................................................................................... 90
3.5.5 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA
SETTING MODE
(ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL VALUE SETTING) ................................................... 91

4. PARAMETERS (USER) ................................................................................................................ 93

4.1 PLC SWITCHES .................................................................................................................. 94
4.1.1 PLC SWITCH ON/OFF OPERATION ......................................................................... 94
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 95
4.3 AXIS PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................... 102
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS ........................................................................................ 104

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI) ................................................................... 109

5.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 109
5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 1~()
5.2.1 MDI SCREEN MENU FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 110
5.2.2 EDITING SCREEN MENU FUNCTIONS ................................................................ 113
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS ........................................................................... 115
5.3.1 DATA DISPLAY UPDATING
(PAGE-BY-PAGE SCROLLING) ................................................................................ 115
5.3.2 DATA DISPLAY UPDATING
(LINE-BY-LINE SCROLLING) ................................................................................... 116
5.3.3 ALTERING DATA ....................................................................................................... 117
5.3.4 INSERTING DATA @NSERT]) ................................................................................. 118
5.3.5 DELETING SINGLE CHARACTERS (~ELETE]) ................................................... 119
5.3.6 DELETING SINGLE BLOCKS ([C.B CAN]) ............................................................. 120
5.3.7 DELETING SINGLE PAGES OF DATA
([SHIFT] [C.B CAN]) ..................................................................................................... 121
5.4 MDI PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 122
5.4.1 MDI DATA ENTRY INTO MEMORY (~DI-ENT]) ............................................... 122

111
CONTENTS .

5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS ............................................................. 123

5.5.1 EDITING DATA CALL (JSEARcI-q) ......................................................................... 123
5.5.2 NEW PROGRAM ENTRY AND PREPARATION
(PROGRAM]) ............................................................................................................... 127
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU ......................................................................................... 128
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION ........................................................................................ 137
5.7.1 KN SWITCH VOICE OUTPUT ................................................................................ 138
5.7.2 MACHINING PROGRAM VOICE OUTPUT ........................................................... 139

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT ................................................................................................... 146

6.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (PROGRAM FILE) ............................................. 147
6.2 DATA INPUT ................................................................................................................... 148
6.2.1 INPUT/COMPARE SELECTION ................................................................................ 149
6.2.2 MACHINING PROGRAM INPUT ............................................................................ 150
6.2.3 TOOL OFFSET DATA INPUT ................................................................................... 152
6.2.4 PARAMETER TAPE INPUT ...................................................................................... 153
6.3 DATA OUTPUT ..Q............................................................................................................. 154
6.3.1 MACHINING PROGRAM OUTPUT ......................................................................... 156
6.3.2 TOOL OFFSET DATA OUTPUT ............................................................................... 159
6.3.3 PARAMETER TAPE OUTPUT .................................................................................. 160
6.4 PROGRAM COPYING .................................................................................................... 161
6.4.1 MACHINING PROGRAM COPYING (copying) ...................................................... 161
6.4.2 MACHINING PROGRAM CONDENSING (condensing) ......................................... 162
6.4.3 MACHINING PROGRAM MERGING (merging) ..................................................... 163
6.4.4 MACHINING PROGRAM NUMBER CHANGING ................................................ 164
6.5 PROGRAM ERASE .......................................................................................................... 165
6.6 PROGRAM FILES ................................................................................................e..moo...
o.. 169
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS ...........................................................................+....... 170
6.7.1 BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS .................................................................. 17CI
6.7.2 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE PARAMETERS .............................................................. 172
6.7.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 175
6.8 RS-232-C 1/0 DEVICE CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS .................................. 177
6.8.1 TAPE READER, TAPE PUNCHER, PRINTER, AND FLD
CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 177

6.8.2 PARALLEL PUNCHER CONNECTIONS WITH TAPE

OUTPUT ........................................................................................................................ 179

6.9 DATA PROTECTION ...................................................................................................... 180

6.9.1 DATA PROTECT KEYS .............................................................................................. 180
 CONTENTS .

6.9.2 EDIT LOCK B, C ......................................................................................................... 182

7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION ................................................................................................... 184

7.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION .............................................................................................. 184
7.2 MENU FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 185
7.3 USING THE TRACE MODE ~RACE]) ........................................................................ 187
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE .......................................................................................... 188
7.5 DISPLAY MODE ([GRF MODE]) ................................................................................... 198
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE ([SCALE]) .......................................................................................... 200
7.6.1 HOW TO CHANGE THE SCALE .............................................................................. 200
7.6.2 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY POSITION ...................................................... 201
7.7 STANDARD RANGE ([STANDARD]) ........................................................................... 205
7.8 ROTATION (~OTATION]) ............................................................................................. 206
7.9 DELETION (~RASE]) ..................................................................................................... 207
7.10 PROGRAM (~ROGRAM]) .............................................................................................. 208

8. DIAGNOSIS ................................................................................................................................ . 209

8.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (ALARM MESSAGES) ....................................... 210
8.2 COORDINATE VALUES ................................................................................................. 212
8.3 OPERATION MODES ...................................................................................................... 213
8.4 SERVO MONITOR ........................................................................................................... 214
8.5 SPINDLE MONITOR ....................................................................................................... 216
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS ...................................................................................... 218
8.6.1 INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS SETTING AND DISPLAY ............................................ 218
8.6.2 PLC DEVICE DATA DISPLAY .................................................................................. 221
8.6.3 PLC INTERFACE SIGNAL FORCIBLE DEFINITION
(ONE-SHOT TYPE) ...................................................................................................... 222

8.6.4 PLC INTERFACE SIGNAL FORCIBLE DEFINITION

(MODAL TYPE) ........................................................................................................... 223

8.6.5 DIAGNOSIS DURING EMERGENCY STOP STATUS ......................................... 224

8.7 NC SPECIFICATIONS LISTING .................................................................................... 226

8.7.1 OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS LISTING ................................................................. 226

8.7.2 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT NUMBER LISTING ............................................... 226

8.8 POWER MONITORING .................................................................................................. 227
8.9 KEY INPUT MONITORING .......................................................................................... 228
8.10 HARDWARE MONITORING 1 ...................................................................................... 229
8.11 HARDWARE MONITORING 2 ...................................................................................... 230

8.12 PLC AXIS MONITORING .............................................................................................. 231

v
CONTENTS .

9. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (335M/335M-V) ................................................................... 233

9.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 233
9.2 INTERMEDIATE FILE (INTERACTIVE DATA)
HANDLING ...................................................................................................................... 235
9.3 NC OPERATION FOR SYSTEM LOADING ................................................................ 237
9.4 AUTO PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE CONTROL NUMBER
DISPLAY ........................................................................................................................... 238

10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING

(BUILT-IN PLC SPECIFICATIONS ONLY) ............................................................................ 239
10.1 PARAMETER SETTING ................................................................................................, 239
10.2 MENU FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 240
10.3 CIRCUIT READ FUNCTION ......................................................................................... 242
10.4 MONITOR SCREEN DISPLAY METHOD ................................................................... 243
10.5 CIRCUIT MONITORING ................................................................................................ 244
10.6 TYPES OF MONITORING OPERATION ..................................................................... 245
10.7 SCREEN STOP BY MONITORING STOP TRIGGER POINT .................................... 247
10.8 ENTRY MONITORING ................................................................................................... 249
10.9 DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL PRESENT VALUE
MONITORING ................................................................................................................. 250

11. CHECKPOINTS FOR CONTROL AND OPERATION ........................................................... 251

11.1 VALID CONDITIONS FOR STORED STROKE LIMIT .............................................. 251
11.2 DECELERATION CHECK .............................................................................................. 252
11.2.1 FUNCTION ................................................................................................................... 252
11.2.2 DECELERATION CHECK TYPES ............................................................................ 252
11.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ........................................................... 254

II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1. OPERATING STATUSES ........................................................................................................... 256

1.1 DIAGRAM OF OPERATING STATUS CORRELATION ........................................... 256
1.2 POWER OFF STATUS ..................................................................................................... 256
1.3 OPERATION NOT READY STATUS ............................................................................ 257
1.4 OPERATION READY STATUS ...................................................................................... 257
1.4. 1 RESET STATUS ........................................................................................................... 257
1.4.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION START STATUS ......................................................... 257
1.4.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION PAUSE (FEED HOLD)
STATUS ......................................................................................................................... 257
1.4.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATUS ............................................................ 258

VI
 CONTENTS .

2. DISPLAY LAMPS ........................................................................................................................ 259

2.1 CONTROL UNIT READY .............................................................................................. 259
2.2 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...................................................................................... 259
2.3 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION START ........................................................................ 259
2.4 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION PAUSE (FEED HOLD) ............................................. 259
2.5 REFERENCE POINT ARRIVAL .................................................................................... 259
2.6 NC ALARM ...................................................................................................................... 259
2.7 MOO..................................................................................................................................... 260
2.8 M02/M30 ............................................................................................................................ 260

3. RESET SWITCH AND EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON SWITCH ......................................... 261

3.1 RESET SWITCH ............................................................................................................... 261
3.2 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON SWITCH ...................................................................... 261

4. OPERATION MODES ................................................................................................................. 262

4.1 MODE SELECTOR SWITCH .......................................................................................... 262
4.2 JOG FEED MODE ............................................................................................................ 262
4.3 RAPID TRAVERSE MODE ............................................................................................. 263
4.4 REFERENCE POINT RETURN MODE ........................................................................ 264
4.5 INCREMENTAL FEED MODE ...................................................................................... 266
4.6 HANDLE FEED MODE .................................................................................................. 267
4.7 MEMORY MODE ................................o........................................................................... 268
4.8 TAPE MODE ..................................................................................................................... 269
4.9 MDI MODE ....................................................................................................................... 270

5, FUNCTION SWITCHES IN OPERATING MODES ...o............................................................ 271

5.1 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE .................................................................................... 271
5.2 CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE ........................................................................................ 271
5.3 MANUAL FEED RATE ................................................................................................... 271
5.4 HANDLWINCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION ............................................... 272
5.5 HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT ..................................................................................... 272

5.6 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR ................................................................................... 272

5.7 CYCLE START AND FEED HOLD ................................................................................ 273
5.8 FEED AXIS SELECT ....................................................................................................... 273

6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................ 274

6.1 ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK .......................................................................................... 274

6.2 DISPLAY LOCK ............................................................................................................... 274

6.3 Z-AXIS CANCEL .............................................................................................................. 274

—,

CONTENTS .

6.4 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK ........................................................................ 275

6.5 SINGLE BLOCK ............................................................................................................... 275
6.6 DRY RUN ......................................................................................................................... 275
6.7 MANUAL OVERRIDE .................................................................................................... 275
6.8 OVERRIDE CANCEL ...................................................................................................... 275
6.9 OPTIONAL STOP ............................................................................................................. 275
6.10 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ............................................................................................... 276
6.11 MANUAL ABSOLUTE .................................................................................................... 277
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE ............................................................................................................. 278
6.13 ERROR DETECT ............................................................................................................. 285
6.14 FOLLOW-UP FUNCTION ............................................................................................... 285
6.15 AXIS RELEASE ................................................................................................................ 285
6.16 F1-DIGIT FEED ............................................................................................................... 286
6.17 SIMULTANEOUS MANUAL)AUTOMATIC FEED .................................................... 286
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT ................................................................................................... 286
6.18.1 OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................... 286
6.18.2 INTERRUPT ENABLING CONDITIONS ................................................................. 287
6,18.3 INTERRUPT VALID AXES ........................................................................................ 287
6.18.4 AXIS MOVEMENT SPEED ON INTERRUPT ......................................................... 287
6,18.5 PATH AFTER INTERRUPT ....................................................................................... 288
6.18.6 DURING CUTTER COMPENSATION ..................................................................... 29Q
6.18.7 INTERRUPT AMOUNT RESETTING ...................................................................... 292
6.18.8 OPERATING PROCEDURE ....................................................................................... 292

III SET-UP AND MAINTENANCE

1. CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................... 295

1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 295
1.2 TABLE OF UNITS CONFIGURING SYSTEM ............................................................. 296

2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE SWITCHING ON POWER ............................................................ 297

2.1 CONNECTION SYSTEM DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 297
2.2 TABLE OF CABLES ......................................................................................................... 299
2.3 DRIVER AMPLIFIER WIRING CHECK ...................................................................... 300
2.4 CHECKING THE INPUT POWER SUPPLY ................................................................. 301
2.4.1 INPUT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM DIAGRAM ...................................................... 301
2.4.2 CHECKING THE INPUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE ........................................................ 301

VIII
 CONTENTS .

2.5 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION ............................................................ 302

2.5.1 CHECKING FOR POWER SUPPLY SHORTCIRCUITING ................................... 302
2.5.2 CHECKING THE POWER-ON/OFF SIGNALS ........................................................ 303
2.6 CHECKING THE GROUNDING ................................................................................... 304
2.6.1 SIGNAL CABLE GROUNDING ................................................................................ 304
2.6.2 NC GROUNDING CHECK ........................................................................................ 304

3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING POWER ON ..........................................................................+305

3.1 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR CONTROL SECTION
ONLY ................................................................................................................................ . 305
3.2 CHECK BASED ON INTERFACE CHECK SCREEN ................................................. 307
3.2.1 FLOW OF INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS ..................................................................... 307
3.2.2 CHECKING THE INPUT SIGNALS .......................................................................... 308
3.3 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR ENTIRE SYSTEM ................................................... 310
3.4 OPERATIONAL CHECKS ............................................................................................... 311
3.4.1 CHECKING THE MOVEMENT DIRECTIONS ....................................................... 311
3.4.2 CHECKING THE LIMIT SWITCH OPERATIONS .................................................. 311

4. DRIVE SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................+.. 313

5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................. 314

5.1 REFERENCE POINT RETURN OPERATION ............................................................. 314
5.2 SETTING THE GRID INTERVALS ............................................................................... 315
5.2.1 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION ....................................................................... 315
5.2.2 RELATIVE POSITION DETECTION ........................................................................ 315
5.3 SETTING THE GRID MASK .......................................................................................... 316
5.3.1 SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 316
5.3.2 HOW TO MEASURE THE GRID MASK AMOUNT .............................................. 317
5.4 SETTING REFERENCE POINT SHIFT AMOUNT ..................................................... 318
5.5 REFERENCE POINT RETURN CREEP SPEED SETTING ........................................ 318
5.6 REFERENCE POINT RETURN PARAMETERS ......................................................... 319

6. PARAMETER SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 320

6.1 BASIC MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53)
SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 320
6.2 STORED STROKE LIMIT (I) SETTING ....................................................................... 321
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS ..................................................... 322
6.3.1 BACKLASH COMPENSATION ................................................................................. 322
6.3.2 MEMORY-TYPE PITCH ERROR/RELATIVE POSITION
COMPENSATION ........................................................................................................ 323

IX
 6.3.3 SETTING PROCEDURE ............................................................................................. 324

7. REGULAR MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................... 328

7.1 REGULAR TAPE RI%4DER INSPECTIONS AND
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 328
7.2 CHECKING THE EXTERIOR ........................................................................................ 329
7.3 CHECKING INSIDE THE CABINET ............................................................................ 329

8. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................ 330

8.1 CHECKING OUT TROUBLE ......................................................................................... 330
8.2 EXAMPLES OF TROUBLE ............................................................................................. 331

9. BATTERY REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 332

10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................. 334
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION ............................................................................ 334
10.1.1 DATA FORMAT .......................................................................................................... 335
10.1.2 CNC DATA, APLC OUTPUT ..................................................................................... 337
10.1.3 CNC DATA, APLC DATA INPUT, COMPARE ....................................................... 343
10.1.4 LIST OF ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................... 348

IV APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1 MACHINE PARAMETERS

(M330HM/335M/330HM-v/335-v) .......................................................................... 350
1.1 MACHINE PARAMETER SELECTION ........................................................................ 351
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS ..................................................................... 353
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS ........................................................................ 364
1.4 ZERO (REFERENCE) POINT RETURN PARAMETERS ........................................... 370
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS ................................................................................................... 3’72
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION ......................................................................... 380
1.6.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................... 381
1.6.2 COMPENSATION DATA SETTING METHODS ..................................................... 383
1.6.3 SETTING EXAMPLES FOR LINEAR AXIS AS BASIC
Axis .............................................................................................................................. 384
1.6.4 WHEN BASIC JKKIS IS A ROTARY AXIS ............................................................... 386

1.7 MACRO FILE ................................................................................................................... 387

1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 389
1.9 PLC CONSTANTS ............................................................................................................ 397
1.10 PLC TIMER ....................................................................................................................... 398

1.11 PLC COUNTER ................................................................................................................ 399

x
 CONTENTS .

1.12 PLC BIT SELECTION ...................................................................................................... 400

1.13 PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 401

APPENDIX 2 ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE

PROGRAMS ............................................................................................................. 406
2.1 PARAMETERS FOR CANNED CYCLE OPERATION ............................................... 406
2.2 INPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS .............................................................. 407
2.3 OUTPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS .......................................................... 408
2,4 CLEARING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS ............................................................... 409
2.5 STANDARD CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS .............................................................. 410

APPENDIX 3 EXAMPLES OF RS-232C 1/0 DEVICE PARAMETER

SETTINGS AND CABLE CONNECTIONS .......................................................... 415

APPENDIX 4 OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND

DISPLAY UNIT ....................................................................................................... 416

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARMS .................................................................................................. 425

5.1 OPERATION ALARMS .............+..................................................................................... 425
5.2 STOP CODES .................................................................................................................... 430
5.3 SERVO ALARMS ............................................................................................................. 433
5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS ....................................................+.................................................... 440
5.5 MCP ALARMS ............................................................................................+..................... 445
5.6 SYSTEM ALARMS ........................................................................................................... 449
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS ..............................................+................................++o
.....moo..+.<co<.m..m
452
5.8 MESSAGES FOR EMERGENCY STOP ......................................................................... 465

APPENDIX 6 PLAYBACK .............................................................................................................. 466

6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION .............................................................................................. 467
6.1.1 PLAYBACK SCREEN ................................................................................................. 467
6.1.2 PLAYBACK EDITING ................................................................................................ 469
6.1.3 PLAYBACK CHECKPOINTS .....................................+.................o............................. 470
6.1.4 PLAYBACK COUNTER DISPLAY ............................................................................ 471
6.1.5 COORDINATE VALUES ENTERED IN MEMORY ............................................... 471
6.2 EDITING OPERATIONS ................................................................................................. 472
6.2.1 CURSOR MOVEMENT ............................................................................................... 472
6.2.2 BLOCK INSERTION ................................................................................................... 473
6.2.3 BLOCK DELETION ..................................................................................................... 473
6.2.4 ADD PROGRAM DELETION ([C.B CAN]) .............................................................. 473
6.3 RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................................................... 474

9004

XI
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.1 EXTERIOR OF 14-INCH CRT SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL

1.1 EXTERIOR OF 14-INCH CRT SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

As shown in the figure below, the setting and display unit consists of a 14-inch color CRT display, keys
and menu keys.

Alphanumeric and
CRT display symbol keys Reset key
Function RE#@Y SHIFT
‘lwtOr ‘qs LED kw

-&
I
+ ,
I, ,
r+

MITSUBISHICNC @BaR&Il
“ - @@@@@
P‘OWER
I GmmIml
Ill
KIKIBCJXI
~ GxmzlmID
mmml
mm ‘J a
“ - am R ‘~

‘ml @
8 ‘ml @ “
“ma
@
I I I
w-cl o
Clnnmnnnnnmcl EEKElcALc
El
vi ))
m+’(+ p
r
,j +- -+ + 4f.
I I
CALC
— 7 key’11
Brightness control Menu keys Page keys Cursor INPUT Dnta
move- key correc.
tion
ment keys
keys

-1-
1. SETTING- AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTR (3L
1.2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

1.2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

The CRT screen display is divided into four areas.
(1) Data display area
(2) NC operation status/mode and alarm message area
(3) Menu display area
(4) Setting area and key operation message area

The data displayarea is subdividedinto the leftand righthalves.Sometimesthe lefthalf

may functionalthe basicdata displayarea and the righthalfas the menudata display
area,and sometimesthewholescreenmayfunctionas the menudata display.

\
\ I N f I’C)R3. 1/7

T
~ .—.
fu:%o: - ---b’
I M.axinmm
number
of pages
Page
number
Menu
1 number
21 Basic data display area by Menu data display area Function
lines screen function
I

r
NC operation status/mode
and alarm display area
Menu display area
operation
-l-&aY!!ey

Operation status/mode and menu display (during normal operation)

I 1 1
s t ......... s t 8 Operation mode 1 I
ENU 4 MENU5 MENU 6 MENU 7 MENU 8 MENU This appears when there
j+ are 10 or more menus,

Alarm message display (during alarm)

w“’=’’;”
Alarm 1 ..... alarm 4 Alarms are shown in
red and messa es
I 1
MENU1 MENU2 MENU3MENU 4 MENU 5 h$ENU6 MENU 7 h4ENU8 MENU 9 (alarms) in yelf ow.

-2.
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

Operation status displays

Position Display Details

ST1 EMG In-emergency stop
RST In-NC reset
LSK NC system’s paper tape reader in label skip mode
I n II J Normal NC operation mode
ST2 mm Metric command
in. Inch command
ST3 ABS Absolute value command mode G90
INC Incremental value command mode G91
ST4 ~ Subprogram not now being run.
SB1 Running of machining program now being controlled by
subprogram data; 1-8 denote depth (nesting level) of
I subprogram.
SB8
ST5 G54 Selection of work coordinate systems
(
G59
ST6 G40 Cutter compensation cancel mode
G41 In cutter compensation (left)
G42 In cutter compensation (right)
ST7 fix Canned cycle now being executed
I-.LJu Canned cycle not being executed
ST8 ~u Computer link off-line mode
LIN Computer link on-line mode
LNK In computer link communication

NOTE k “ , “ ~ i “ denotes blank display.

-3-
1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.3 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS

1.3 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS

1.3.1 SCREEN TRANSITION WITH POWER-ON

—
~m Display

0,.1234 N1234S

El
X-lZYJ). tXll M3
Y-w.cxx) Slm
Z-!WLXKI T12 \

(1) The “title screen” appears when the NC power is switched on. Press the function selector keys to
select the various disulav screens from this screen.
(2) To set the “blank sc&~” from the various display screens, select the “MONITOR 1“ screen and
then press the [C.B CAN] key following the [SHIFT] key.
Press the function selector keys to select the various display screens from the “blank screen.”

-4-
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.3 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS

1.3.2 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS

Monitor menu 1 2 3 5
I Preeent , Programs ,Opemtion ,PLC
, values search !switches
1 #
xl II 2
9 10 11
Restart Compen
‘ search ‘sation
i I amounts
I i
ml 3

m El
Tool/offset amount menu 1 .
L 3 4 5

El
Tool ,Tool Tool
length compen- registration
measure- sation
ment ,
“Q H
El
Parameter menu 1 2 3 4
PLC switches Control Axis Machining
parameters parameters parameters

rl @ El n
Menu 1 2
Editing
@ ~1

uI
~MDI expansion I

--------l-r=d=:~
~operation menu 1

Basic data/menu
-— data
1
FILE ,
DATA
IN/OUT II
3r
I
i!
i__J
Data inputloutput menu 1

EBHHDH

-5-
 ,.,

1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL

1.3 SCREEN TRANSITION DIAGRAMS

mGRA
HIC
Graphics

i
I >
-E
--- ---- ---
STAND-GRF ROTA-
TION1
Graphic operatio;-~&~

Basic datalmenu data

Alarm ‘-’~
messagks
DIAGN
!;
or I
U_--d
6
4 5 i

n
Diagnosis menu 1 2 3
,C-MOD SERVO PLC
1COORDI
SPINDLE
,MONITOR , MONITOR ‘ I/F ‘&%CIFI-
CATION
1I
I 1 I
ml i--l 00 3 I

r Automatic
programming
pa e
(J 335M/
M335M-Vonly)

User release
screen
l-l
Ladder monitor

-6-
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.4 SCREEN SELECTION PROCEDURE

1.4 SCREEN SELECTION PROCEDURE

The screens are selected as follows.
1 ) Select the desired function screen (using the function selector keys).
2 ) Select the desired menu screen from among the screens of the selected function (using the menu
keys).
3 ) Select the desired pages among the selected menu pages (using the screen keys).

Func-
tions
n

II
i--!
( 1 ) Selecting the function screen

@@@m@ B@@
Press the desired scrcxm key among D’ 012345678 N12345–12
<SLlB>017M%n N12LA512
[PROGRA\! FILE]
m
*’Ox’TOR 3“’”
lax
~O~O\IW\$HJEl : 21 1% lml
the above function screen selector $)RK CC#~lS
]Zlm
T lm.fxO 7 O,KO r mum 4 21 13 ;=
keys. z .?m.m 1 0,C41 z -m.aa 5
6
24
z
tu
153 J%
c .2?J.DX c O,m c --VI.KU
Examplex Press the ~ONITOR] > % ,s4 mm

key. FC24KU.M i
10
iiitii?
a 2<
S12345678 M1234 ; EE
:; 2!0 a
T12345678 B1234 1>32 Z-IX
14
HI G91 C40: 15
B2cia 20:
1) The menu screen which was displayed the X3 628 10 ro:
M4 “%! ?12ml [Iol-l?slu-xas 103-83
[COLLATIOX BLOCK]
0!2n%n M12245[COLL EXEC]
previous time now appears in the data >110--15.0s lll-.m. t
0[ D, W: 1-1 kOLl , ,A,T(0)
display area. COM- LOC-

2) The screen of menu 1 is the first to appear

after the power has been switched on.

~~~-’”
When the same function selector 012345676N12345–1
z lposl~l 0.0
h40hlTOR
::
I

<SU15>OID4S678 ?+1224512
IIV? RK:oG# ,
mm r O.(W
1 Imlla Y O.LOI Y lm. n3 ‘t -100.0 ;;
z -m,nm 1 D.m 2 .m.m
c -Zm.cw c O.r.m c .Z7n.mx
z -200.0 ,,
PC2dm2.m
c -270.0 ;:
S12345678 M1234
[HEAD] [XEXT)
T12345678 B1234
12345-23456
N1G91 cm:
92 cm to: [FEED RATE OYR]ICWM
*3C22 :OYk
M4 U-f 1~1,101- 12,1~-~,lti-83 [SP!XOLE LOAD] $0%
1110--ls,Os 111..24,0:

-7-
 .,, ,

1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL

1.4 SCREEN SELECTION PROCEDURE

(2) Selecting the menu screen among the various functions

The menu is divided into 9 functions. When the menu keys underneath the menu display are pressed,
the corresponding menu screen appears.

012345678N12345-12 ~P~oG~A~
r,~~l ~40>1T0R
3.11’
Press the menu key corresponding to G’ (<sti
B>Dlm%n
:\V?RKo~&][~lS
N?zw-l?
~~&O~[MA$H&N E) ;
m
2t 1$
Iml
lm!
the menu display. v !m.c.x r O.CCO T lmbx
3
z 1$? ;E
z -Za.ao z 0.C20 z -XO. aa : ?4
c -Zu.m c O,m c -z?a.Lm 625 ;; J%
21OX
Menu display (Pm I&%- kkW@C-MODAL
I i
26
27 ~% s2s20
Fc24LW.DI 9 28 Isa 2XW
23 1s0 24C03
S12345678 M1234 :: MmEac
Menu key I ((’4 I 1 T 12345678 B1234 12
!3
1*
31

;Zxlm
210
mLma
Zm31

Ml CM r,40: !5 34 240 4ma

12G22 20,
a]ciz XD 70, [COLLATION BLOCK]
1 ) The selected menu screen now appears in the ,4 U~P12Z1S 101-12#l W-~,
,110--15.01 111-- ?3.0;
103-83 012ws2 u 12345[coLL ExEc]

data display area. 0[

ti # : I-I )COL(
T.?E1O)
2 ) The selectwl menu display area is now COW
DA Ll[, LC.S\\f[CO&TRQLl v,, R
LOC-
I VA R

highlighted.

When MENU on the far right of the screen is displayed, it means that there are menus other than those
indicated. Press the menu key beneath MENU to select the menu and then select the desired menu screen.
!,lOS ITOR 3.!,1
012345678 N12345-l Z [PROGR,\\l FILE]
<SL, B>o ImA%?z , 1234.1? so Ku)
$)RK G&#~lS JOmGO~Ikl .\$:tiNE] ;
3
21
n Im
1: ml
K@.
1 Im.cm Y O.cco Y Im.ox 4 23 133 l(n)
z .E-w.m 1 O,DX 2 .ZO.aa 5 24 %40
c .Zm.m c O.ccc c -mm 6 2$ 1* J%
7 S8 lfm 21QX
8 27
;1 23m
rc 2Kcu.m 9 20
24a0
S12345678M1234 ;: 29
m %Zao
12 31 210 xm
T12345678 B1234 13 S2Z?lnxc
14 ;231W’I
Ml G91 G40, 15 w Krca
02 Ciz 10:”
,3 cm 10 !0: ICOLLATION BLOCKI
1 ) The display changes only for the menu ti4 “B?l?m ,lOt. n2sm-ms
SIID-. I5.O1 !!l --33.0,
B03-83 0\BA%7a u 12345fCOLL, EXEC]

display area, and the following menu ap- of a n; i-$ kol.t . TAmlol
R E-
pears. 3#.RCH I lDFFSEll I I I 1 I klENU

).1OS ITORI1 1/7

‘012345678 N12345–12 ITOOL OFFSET)
Press the menu key corresponding to Ilw
<SLIII>012W671 u 123451?
\ ~RK,o~&l] [1;1S T{~,~] [;1 ACW&E]
t LEWi {YEAR RADII’S N’E.AR
I -Iw.m O.m m.m 10,W3
the menu display. Y lm.tn 7 0.(20 1 lEII.123
2 -Im.m
3 -Im.ca
O.cci m.col
O.EW im.am
O.m
o.010
2 -XO.m z O.LM z -mm 4 -2U.W 0.W5 lW.UO O.Las
c -m.rxu < O.cco c -Zm.(ml 5 -am 0.5?0 153.COI !.0s3

6 -XO.cm D.OQ 2%1.COI 0.111

R mao.m 7 -ZO.KO O.m 2SJ.OZ O.LCCI
S12345678 Al 234 8 .I!a.cul 0.U6 Im.ao O,LC$
9 -XO.LW Owl Iw.m O,col
!0 -EC&m n.bs7 ltco. ao 2u&!
T12345678 B1234
II -B.m O.Cm! m.ox O.m
WI 691 C40: ~; .,o,m
-6.m ~ ~,
O.ca SO.CCO O,m
U2 G22 10: B.cn) 0.011
u] Gm 10 ,0: 14 -Io. m D:(9J S.KO O.m
114 uw,jml s101.12z ux.xoslo 3.83 1$ - tz.cm o.ta lm.cm 0.s47
*l! O--1 S.O, II1.-W3,
t LEXG iVEAR RADIUS WEAR
s:::::

-8-
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.4 SCREEN SELECTION PROCEDURE

(3) Selecting a page from among the menu screens

When there are a multiple number of pages in the menu screens, they can be turned in succession
using the page keys. The page key on the far right is the NEXT PAGE selector key, and the page
key on the far left is the PREVIOUS PAGE selector key.

Turningthe pageswith the NJX1

I PAGEkeyat the far right

Page 1 _ Page 2 ~ Page 3 ~ Page 4 * Page 5

r >{ J’ 1’ >“ \

~Y “r T “r r “r “r “r “r “r
#lo *2O #30 *40 #50 #60 #70 #80 *9O * lm

L A )( JL ,$ J

TurningthepngmwiththePRbVICN_JS
PAGEkevat thefarleft

-9-
1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD

1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD

012345678 N12345-12 MONITOR 7. 1/

(1) Outline of data setting $UE) o N-
The data is set mostly in the sequence of (1) data iOO -123456.1234 110
number entry, (2) cursor movement, (3) data key entry 101 12.3450 111
102 0.0000 112
and (4) input key entry. 103 0.0000 113
When the screen has been selected, the cursor appears 104 0.0000 114
105 115
on the far right within the first set of parentheses in the 106 116
data setting area. 107 117
108 118
109 119

Data setting area _ $( ) NAME{ )

Cursor

(1) Data number entry

Key in the data number to be set. B

Example To set data in #104
Key in [1] [0] [4].

(2) Cursor movement

Press the [+] key to move the cursor to the Ilw

next set of parentheses.

(3) Data key entry

Key in the data to be changed while B #(lo4pATA( 12.345 )N~E ( ~

observing the contents of the data display
area.
Example To change to 12.345
Key in [1] [2] . [3] [4] [5].

(4) Input key entry

012345678 Nl 2345-12 MONITOR7. 1~ ~

D $UB) o N-
Cheek the settings indicated in the setting
100 -123456,1234 110
area and set the data by the following 101 12.3450 111
operation. I02 0.0000 112
Press the ~NPUT] key. 103 0.0000 113
104 12.3450 114
105 115
106 116
107 117
1) The data settings are processed in accordance 108 118
109 119
with the settings in the setting area and the
results appear in the data display area.
2) The data number in the setting area is
incremented by 1, and the cursor appears on
the far right of the second set of parentheses.
The data number is not displayed, however,
after the final data number has been input
and the cursor appears on the far right within
the first set of parentheses.

-1o-
 1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD

3) Repeat steps (3) and (4) when continuing with the data setting.
4) To change the data number, press the ~NPUT] key and the number will be incremented by 1.
It is also incremented by 1 when the [ $ ] key is pressed. It is decremented by 1 when the [ ~ ]
key is pressed. Alternatively, move the cursor to the data number setting area and change the
data number directly.

NOTE Until the ~NPUT] key is pressed, the data in the setting area will simply remain on the display
and will not beset in the memory. If another screen is selected before this key is pressed, the data
in the setting area will be invalid.
(2) Cursor control and examples of operation
1) Data is written (keyed in) on the display screen exactly where the cursor is located.
Key entry is invalid when the cursor-is ‘not displayed. ”

/L
~
Cursor
Key entry is possible here.
2) When numbers are keyed in, the data already displayed is moved to the left by one frame and
the keyed in data appears at the cursor position.
DATA ( 1 [2])
Pressing the [3] key results in: DATA ( 12 [3])
3) When there is a multiple number of parentheses in the data setting area, pressing the [+] key
will move the cursor to the far right of the next set of parentheses if it is located at the far right
of a set of parentheses.

o+ Cursor is moved to far right of next parentheses by [+] key.

to far right of previous parentheses by

4 ) When the IDELETE1 key is pressed, the data at the cursor position will be deleted, and so this
operation ;S ccmduct-~, ‘for ;nstance, when canceling a sin~le keyed-in character.

Ez2ezEl~
Every time the ~ELETE] key is pressed, the data at the cursor position will be deleted
and the data on the left will move in succession one frame at a time toward the right.

-11-
1. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL
1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD

5 ) The data in the parentheses where the cursor is positioned is deleted by the [C.B CAN] key.

The data appears in the setting area OR

as shown on the right.
~

When the [C.B CAN] key is pressed:

‘“ ~

(5) All the data in the parentheses of the setting area is deleted by the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN]
keys.

The data appears in the setting area

as shown on the right.
,’” ~

When the [C.B CAN] and [SHIFT] IF

keys are pressed:
~

7 ) The cursor is movkd one frame at a time to the left or right inside the parentheses by the [*]
and [+] keys. Any character in the keyed-in data can be corrected.

The data appears in the setting area up

as shown on the right.
~

When the [+] key is pressed 4 times: jlp

When [3] is keyed in:

‘“ ~
“2” is rWJac~ by “3” and the cursor moves one frame to the right.

When the [+] key is pressed:

: ‘“ ~
The cursor simply moves one frame to the right.

When [0] [0] [0] is keyed in:

‘“ ~
The character at the cursor position is rewritten and the cursor moves one frame to the
right, and so the data can be corrected in sequence.
NOTE Pressing the [=-] key when the cursor is at the far right within the parentheses or pressing the [+]
when it is at the far left moves the cursor to the far right of the next set of parentheses.

-12.
 1. SETTING AND D15’PLA Y UNIT CONTROL
1.5 DATA SETTING METHOD

8 ) When the [-+ key is premed with the cursor at any position inside the parentheses, the cursor
will move to the far right of the next set of parentheses.

“(‘2[@f=3P @
Cursor is moved to far right of next
Parenth~=bYthe[++lkeY

Cursor is moved to far right of previous

~1 @ parenthesesbythe[e+] lmy.

(3) Other details

1) Other special data setting methods are also available. Refer to their respective sections. (I’he-se
include, for instance, manual numerical value command setting which is a highlighting display
setting method.)
2) When an illegal key is entered during setting within the parentheses, a setting error results
during input and the key entry is not acknowkxlged. Proceal again with the proper data
setting.

,,

-13-
 ,, .).

2. POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR

2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR

The following menu eonfiguration results when the ~ONITOR] function seleetor key is pressed.

MONITOR menu
displays
(Na9 ’11)
~. . ..-. ------ --------- ------ ------- k-------- ------ ----------- I ---=
)/ ;REW,4RC~ I OFFSEXI ] I II ! MENUj
(Nal-8) ‘ PROORAMISEARCH] GMoDAL I PLGSW I CONTROLICOM-VARI LOGVAR I MENU
\PDSTTIONl

a aq!lmamaalmmn

I Q Menu
selectorkeys I
PREVIOUS PAGE key NEXT PAGE key

•1 mK1 3 i33i!+!El
Basic Present ?F--
data ‘values Basic “~l%;g;ym :;s ifL’L’- Basic ‘ j~u,
data I
COOnii-Ix
data ,Modal
We’y
values z
‘ :~gmm infOnna-
tion

u
Progmm Run-
I!EE.IY!2J files

●
U
out
time
.
●
.
Uu

.—. —-

~rlor]

‘0
u uu310;WJ
# 1-#Is
●
.

u
●

1 .— -—-
mm

-14-
 2. P OSITIOIV DISPLAY MONITOR
2.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREEN (COORDINATES)

2.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREEN (COORDINATES)

On the ~ONITOR] position display page, the coordinate value data can be kept on the left half of the
screen and the desired display can be selected by the MENU] key for indication on the right half of the
screen.

MONITOR 1
012345678 Ill2345–12 : ~OSITION]
<SUB> O 5678 N 45-12 x -345.678
WORK: GM] ~IS TO GO] ~ACHINE]
X -345.678 X X -345.678
Y 345.678 Y
0.000
0.000 Y 345.678 Y 345.678
0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000
: 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000
z 0.000 #1

0.00 \
c 0.000
s 2345 M 5: j
[SPINDLE] ~EXTl
T 1234 131234 ;
12345-23456
G00 X-345.678 ‘f345.678:
m1234: FEED RATEOVR]100%
N1OOS5000 M3;
N200 GOOZ-1OO.; [SE LOAD] 50%

PROGRAM
] SEARCHIC-MODAL
I PLC-SW[ CONTROL
ICOM-VAR
I LCC-VARI MENU

Display item Description

012345678 N12345-12 These indicate the program number, sequence number and
block number now being executed.
< SUB> 05678 While a subprogram is running, these indicate the program
N45–12 number, sequence number and block number of the
subprogram.
WORK: G54] These indicate the G54–G59 work coordinate system modal
X –345.678 numbers and the work coordinates in that system.
Y 345.678
z 0.000
c 0.000

-15-
2. POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR
2.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREEN {COORDINATES j

Display item Description

~IS TO GO] During automatic start and automatic pause (feed hold),
x 0.000 these indicate the remaining distances (incremental distances
Y 0.000 from present position to end point of block) of the
z 0.000 movement command being executed.
c O.000 When there is a following command in the block stop mode,
they indicate the incremental amounts of the following com-
mand.
~ACHINE] These indicate the coordinate values of each axis in the basic
X –345.678 machine coordinate system whose zero point is the inherent
Y 345.678 position determined by the machine itself.
z 0.000
c 0.000
S 2345 Indicates the spindle rotation command value.
T 1234 Indicates tool command value.
M 56 Indicates miscellaneous function command value.
B 1234 Indicates 2nd miscellaneous function command value.
FC 0.00 Indicates the speed in the vector direction during present
movement in interpolation feed.
Indicates the speed for the fastest axis during independent
axis feed.
GOOX-345.678Y345.678 ; Indicates the program now being run in 4 blocks.
T1234 ; The head block is the program already run.
N1OO S5000 M3 ; The block with the E cursor is the program now being run.
N200 GOOZ–1OO. ; The following 2 lines indicate the programs after the follow-
ing block.

-16-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.2 POSITION

2.2 POSITION
The position semen appears when the ~OSITION] menu key is pressed.

~OSITION] MONITOR 1
012345678 N1 2345-12
<SUB> o 5678 N 45-12 ‘x --345.678
~~RK5 O&~ ~/lISTO GO] ~ACIiINE]
x X -345.678
Y 345:678 Y ;%!) Y 345.678 Y 345.678
z 0.000 z o. coo z 0.000
c 0.000 c o. coo c 0.000
z 0.000 #1

0,00
c 0.000
s 2345 M 5:
[SPINDLEl ~EXTl
T 1234 B 1234
12345-23456
G00 X-345.678 Y345.678;
~1234; FEED RATEOVR] 100%
N1OO S5000 M3;
N200 GOO 2-100. ; [S= LOAD] 50%

PROGRAM
] sEARCH Ic-MoDALI PLC-W ICONTROL
I COM-VAR
I LOC-VARI MENU

Display item Description

~OSITION] These indicate the position being exeeuted and the abbrevia-
X -345.678 tion when that position is in a specially defined position or
Y 345.678 status.
z 0.000 #1 #1—#4 denote the 1st to 4th reference point positions, the
c 0.000 servo OFF mode and MR mirror image.
[SPINDLEl NEXT] [SPINDLE]
12345–23456 These indicate the numbers of the tools which are installed
~EED RATE OVR] on the spindle.
NEXT]
[SPINDLE LOAD] These indicate the numbers of the tools which are installed
on the magazine pot to be changed next. A bar graph display
is featured both for the feed rate override and spindle load.
* This function is prepared by user PLC and so will differ
accordin~ to the machine builder.

The following operations are possible on the POSITION menu page.

1 ) Deletion of the entire CRT screen
2 \ The ori~in set and Dresent value data for each axis can be set to zero.
3 \ The ma&al numer~cal commands and MST or other miscellaneous function outputs can be set
from the CRT screen.

-17-
2. POSITION .DISPLA Y M ONITOR
2.2 POSITION

2.2.1 CLEARING THE ENTIRE CRT SCREEN

In the interest of preventing deterioration of the CRT, the entire CRT screen should be cleared when there
are no plans to use it for a prolonged period of time.
( 1 ) The entire CRT screen can be cleared when the ~OSITION] menu key on page 1 of the position
display is selected and the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys are pressed.
(2) If the screen is to be displayed after it has been entirely cleared, press the ~ONITOR] or other such
function key and the pages on the screen will appear.

2.2.2 PRESENT VALUE DISPLAY COUNTER ZERO AND ORIGIN

ZERO
counter zero
Only the present values displayed are set to zero while the absolute value data remains unchanged.
The present value (2) display also remains unchanged.
Origin zero
Both the present value display
. . and the absolute value data are set to zero. This is muivalent to G92
Xo Yo Zb.
The position (2) display is also set to zero. >

In the following operations, the [INPUT] key X-12345.678

functions for counter zero and the [C.B CAN] Y 1.234
key for origin zero (set zero). z 12.345
c 123.456

Ow
Press the ~] address key. ~-1234;. ~z~
I I
z 12:345
1 ) The address display for the axis name c 123.456
corresponding to the key is highlighted.

w
Press the ~NPUT] key for counter zero) 0.000
or the [C.B CAN] key (i or origin zero). ~ 1.234
12.345
c 123.456

1) The position data of the axis is set to

zero and the name of the next axis is
highlighted.
2) The position data of each axis can be
cleared to zero by repeatedly pressing x 0.000
the ~NPUT] or [C.B CAN] key.
~ ,;:: g
3) The highlighting is cleared once the
.
data of the last axis has been cleared to
zero.
4) When the axis address key is pressed at
any time, the designated axis address is
highlighted.
5 ) When any key except the axis address
key is pressed, the highlighting is
cleared.

-18-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.2 POSITION

2.2.3 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS (S, T, M, B)

The commands for the spindle functions S, tool functions T, miscellaneous functions M and second
miscellaneous functions B (A, C) can easily be executed by CRT screen operations.
This involves commanding by key-in the same operations which execute the S, T, M and B (A, C)
commands in a program.
( 1 ) Conditions for executing manual numerical commands
1 ) The manual numerical command option must be provided.
2 ) Operation must not already be in an M, S, T or B (A, C) command sequence.
For instance, manual numerical commands can be executed even during automatic start or
automatic pause provided that the above conditions are satisfied.
(2) Operating procedure for manual numerical commands
1 ) Select the ~OSITION] menu key on the position display screen.
2 ) When the address key corresponding to the command is pressed, the corresponding command
value display area is highlighted and the manual numerical commands can now be input. [S]
applies for the spindle functions, ~] for tool functions, [M] for miscellaneous functions and,
depending on the code used, [A], @3]or [C] for the second miscellaneous functions.
3 ) Key in the numerical values commanded.
4 ) Press the ~NPUTl key.
(Examule)
. . . Given below is an example in which S1200 is executed by a manual numerical command. First,
select the POSITION p-age on ihe MONITOR screen.’

UP
The command value executed last
appears at the top of the screen.

Ilw
Press the [S] address key.

1 ) The address corresponding to the key

and the numerical setting area are
highlighted.

UP
The numerical values are set by the
number keys. [1] [2] [0] [0]

1 ) The numbers which are set are

sequentially highlighted.

fiL7
Press the ~NPUT] key.
s 1200

1 ) The S command is now executed.

2 ) The CRT screen reverts from the
highlighting to the normal display.

-19-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.2 POSITION

(3) Operations to set incorrect values or reset values

There are two methods.
Method (1) Press the ~ELETE] key to delete the set numbers one at a time and enter the correct
values.
Method (2) Repeat the input procedure from the step when the commanding address key is pressed.
(Example)
It is assumed that the value on the right is to be reset to S1500.

Method (1)
1
Press the ~EL~E] key three times
to delete the incorrectly set values.
I

NOW key in [51[0] [0] .

Method (2)
1
Press the [S] address key to set to the
initial state.

I Now key in [1] [5] [0] [0].

( 4 ) Manual numerical command setting and output range

Depending on the machine parameters, there are three data types which are output from the NC
system in sequence and which apply to the M, S, T and B (A, C) commands.
1) BCD output
2) Unsigned binary output
3) Signed binary output
The table below shows the settings and output ranges of the manual numerical commands for
each of the three types of specifications.

L
Unsigned BCD/binary Signed binary
M o–9999 * 9999
s o–99999999 * 99999999
T I o–99999999 I &99999999 I
B (A. Cl I 0–!3999 I & 9999 I
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.2 POSITION

NOTE 1: If a negative number has been set with the BCD output or binary without code specifications,
a value converted into a positive number will be output.

(l%ample) Manual numerical command

55&l E
NOTE 2 When an attempt is made to assign a value with more digits than the setting range, the most
significant digit-is dropped.

@ample)

mn yl
_5 ... ...
$3- :.-!--i ‘his‘igit
‘s
‘roppd”
(5) Other points relating to operation
1 ) When setting a minus command
Press the minus key before setting the value.
(&ample) When commanding S-150

F5E5iF70“
roceed ~o press the [–], [1], [5] and

\ J

Press the ~NPUT] key,

I I
S-150
I I

( 1 ) The minus value is now set.

NOTE k With the BCD output or unsigned binary specifications, a value converted into a positive
number will be output.
2) When suspending the manual numerical command operation
To suspend operation at any time after the address key is pressed until input, press any key
except the number keys.
● When an address key for the manual numerical command (M, S or T, etc.) is pressed, the
previous operation is suspended but then the next manual numerical command is entered.
● When an axis address key (X, Y or Z etc.) is pressed, the manual numerical command is
suspended and the origin zero or counter zero mode is established.
● When the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys are pressed, the manual numerical command is
suspended and the MONITOR screen goes blank.
● Operation is not suspended by any of the following keys
1 ) ~ONITORl function key on POS1TION screen
2 ) [ - ] key before the numerical value is set (in which case a minus command is executed)
3 ) ~ELETE] key when the numerical value has been set (in which case the set data will be
deleted)
3) When the MELDAS 300 series stanclard format is used as the program command format, the
macro interrupt command codes (M96, M97) and subprogram call codes M98 and M99 will
not be processed even if they are assigned.
4) Peripheral speed commands cannot be issued.
In the constant peripheral speed control mode, no processing results even if commands are
issued.

-21-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.2 POSITION

2.2-4 DISPLAY OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION PRO GRAMS

( 1 ) Display of operation program during automatic operation
During memory, tape or MDI operation, up to 4 blocks of the command program can be displayed,
The display encompasses the block being executed or completion block. The cursor winks at the
head of the block being executed or completion block.
(2) Display of operation programs after operation search
For displaying operation program immediately after “operation search,” the search command block
serves as the command program to be executed next.
(3) Display of operation program with return from subprogram when operation branches to a
subprogram
As soon as the branching command (M98) block is executed, the display changes to the subprogram.
Alternatively, as soon as the return command (M99) command is executed, the display changes to
the main program.
(4) Differences between a block in machining program and an execution block
1 ) A command block consisting of EOB only or a command program consisting of a comment
statement only is not considered as a single execution block, and processing continues to the
program assigned next.
2 ) A command block without a movement command or M, S, T command such as a variable
command, is not considered as a single execution block, and processing continues as far as a
block with a movement command or a block containing an M, S or T command.

NOTE When the “macro single” parameter is ON, the variable command block is executed as a single
block.

,, ,,

,,

-22-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.3 PROGRAM

2.3 PRO GRAM

The program screen appears when the PROGRAM] menu key is pressed.
The following operation can be conducted on the program page.
1 ) Buffer correct ... The following command data can be corrected during block stop or stop
resulting from a program error.

~ROGRAM] MONITOR 2
II 2345678 N 12345–12
:SUB> O 5678 N 45-12 ~OSITION] ~OSITION(2)] ~ANUAL lT]
WORK:G54] ~IS TO GO] ~ACH[NE] X -345.678 X -345.678 X 0.000
-345.678 X 0.000 X -345.678 Y 345.678 Y 345.678 Y 0.000
345,678 Y 0.000 Y 345,678
0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000
0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000 ; 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000
0:000 c Ciooo c 0.000
GO X -345.678 Y345. 678;
m1234;
NICQ S5000 M3;
N200 GO Z-1OO;
; 2345 M 5; O.OO N3C0 GO1 X1OO. F500;
. N400 Y1OO;
1234 B1234 N 500 G02 X 200, R 200. ;
N600 G28 ZO:
~ N700 G28 XO’ YO;
~ N800 M6 T2345;
/ N900 G5000 M3;
: N1OOO GOO Z-300. ;

SEARCHI C-MODAL
I WC-SWI CONTROL
I COM-VAR
I L~-v~ ,\ M~u

Display item Description

~OSITION] These indicate the position being executed and the status
X –345,678 abbreviation of the axis.
Y 345,678 Details are the same as for the POSITION screen.
z 0.000 #1
c 0.000
go:~g (2)] ~OSITION] - TOOL OFFSET = POSITION (2)]
These indicate the values produced by subtracting the tool
Y 345:678 offset amount which has been compensated from the now
z 0.000 #l executed position of each axis.
c 0.000
~ANUAL IT] These indicate the amounts shifted by the manual mode with
x 0.000 the manual absolute switch at the OFF position.
Y 0.000 The interrupt amount is cleared by the reset key when the
z 0.000 interrupt reset control parameter is ON.
c 0.000

.23.
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.3 PROGRAM

Display item Description

GOX–345.678Y345 .678 ; These indicate the program being run.
T1234 ; The cursor moves to the head of the block now being
executed.
N1OO S5000 M3 ; When the running of the program reaches N800, the cursor
moves the head of N800.
N2011 GOZ-1OO.; When the N900 block is executed, the N900 block is indic-
ated from the head and the cursor also moves to the head.
Even during tape operations, the data which has been read is
displayed in the same way.
N900 S5000 M3 ; These appear in the buffer correction area during buffer
N1OOO GOOZ–300. ; correction. For further details, refer to the section on buffer
correction.

2.3.1 BUFFER CORRECTION

( 1 ) Outline
During automatic operation (memory or tape operation) and MDI operation, this functions enables
block stop, and the following command can be corrected or changed.
When a rmomam error has occurred. the block in which the error has occurred can be corrected and
operatio; c&tinued without NC r&etting.

Tape mode

Memory mode L-o Read

Machine
Memoq4 ---- . tion
----- ----- control
block
r
I
I
1 !I
I I

I
I
1 MDI mode ~
MD I
- ----- -— --- - -1
Buffer correction

(2) Details
1) The following command can be corrected by the two sequences below.
● During single block stop, when the machining program to be corrected is in the next command
● During automatic operation, when there is an error (program error) in the machining program
of the next command and the machine has stopped
2) With memory or MDI operation, not merely the buffer data displayed but also the
memory/MDI contents are corrected by buffer correction.
3) It is possible to correct simultaneously a multiple number of blocks following the nmt
command. (This applies only to the range displayed on the screen.)
4) When an error occurs in the read ahead block, the block in which that error has occurred can
be corrected.

-24-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.3 PROGRAM

(3) Operation
During single block stop or program error stop, the next command is rewritten by the following
operations and operation can be continued.
1) Select PROGRAM] on page 2 of the POSITION screen.
2) When any of the cursor keys ( [ T], [ J], [=+-],[==]) or either of the tab keys ( [*+], [++])
is pressed, the buffer corredion mode is established and the next command appears starting
from the head of the buffer correction area (see *).
3) Correct the program in the same way as for normal program editing.
4) The next command is then corrected when the ~NPUT] key is pressed. When a program error
has occurred, the program error will be cleared by this operation.
5) When it is checked that the following command data is correct and operation is restarted,
execution is resumed from the corrected data.
* Buffer correction area (39 characters x 6 lines)
Normally, the execution program appears in this area (7 lines more than the buffer correction area,
a maximum of 13 lines are displayed).
Command prior to
* previous command
N121 G28 XO + Previous command
20 ......; ......... ..... .... ............. ... ...... .... ......
.. -----............... .... .........
~ ....--------.....
122 T1212 .............
; + Command being executed
..... ...... ................ ............... ..... ..... ..........
~ Next command and
N123 S1230 M3 ; subsequent commands
N124 GOO X68. 2201. ;
N125 GO1 X80. 2195. F50 ;
N126 Z 150. ;
N127 G02 X1OO. 2185. R20 ;

During buffer correction, the display changes so that the next command appears at the top of the area,
and the whole buffer correction area is highlighted, The background color turns blue.) The cursor first
blinks at the head of the next command although it can then be moved freely in the buffer correction area
using the cursor keys. (6 lines)

~ Next command and

subsequent commands

-25-
2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.3 PROGRAM

@ample) The next program has been prepared and is about to be executed
An error (P62, F-CMD. NOTHING) has arisen in the N125 block.

N121 G28 XO 20; N123 S1230 M3:

N122 T1212 ; ~124 GOO X68. “ 2201.
N125 GO1 X80. 2195.
N123 S1230 M3 ; N126 2150.;
N124 GOO X68. 2201. N127 G02 X1OO. 2185 R20 . ;
N125 GO1 X80. 2195.
N128 GO1 X11O.;
:.
N126 Z 150. ;
N127 G02 X1OO. Z 185. R20. ; P62 F-CMD. NOTHING
N128 GO1 X11O. ;

+
10
1) As soon as the cursor key is pressed, the
display area for the program being
executed changes to the buffer correc-
tion area (and the buffer correction BUFFER EDIT
mode is established).
2) The BUFFER EDIT message appears. P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

Dw

BUFFER EDIT

P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

c1
6MPU Ilw
I N123
R124
S1230 M3;
GOO X68. 2201.;
N125 GO1 X80. 2195. F50;
1 ) As soon as the input key is pressed, the N126 2150.;
buffer corrwtion is completed and the N127 G02 X1OO. 2185. R20, ;
display returns to the program being N128 GO1 X11 O.;
executed (and the buffer correction .
mode is released).
2 ) The message is cleared.

When operation is restarted, execution is

resumed from the N125 block.
I

-26-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.3 PROGRAM

(4) Supplementary notes

1 ) The buffer correction mode will not be established even when the cursor keys are pressed either
during automatic start or when the next command data is not present.
2 ) The key operations for corrections in the buffer correction mode are the same as those for
program editing. However, it is not possible to use the NEXT PAGE] or ~REVfOUS PAGE]
key to display a different page or to scroll the page using the cursor keys in order to display
any block except the block displayed in the buffer correction area.
3 ) Even if buffer correction is being undertaken, operation can be returned to the original next
command at any time using the NEXT PAGE] or @?REVIOUS PAGE] key if this comes
before the [INPUT] key is pressed, In this case, the buffer correction mode remains established.
4 ) To suspend or cancel buffer correction, first press the NEXT PAGE] or PREVIOUS PAGE]
key and then press the ~NPUT] key, Operation will then return to the original mode.
5 ) If another screen is selmted or resetting is undertaken during buffer correction, the buffer
correction will be canceled.
6 ) Operation cannot be started during buffer correction.
7 ) When the ~NPUT] key has been pressed, the correction is automatically added to the data in
the last corrected block provided that there is no EOB ~) sign.
8 ) When the buffer correction mode has been established and when the last block displayed in the
buffer correction area is long, the whole block up to EOB ~) may not enter the display area,
resulting in only part of the block being displayed.
To correct such a block:
a ) When EOB @ is added onto the end of the data displayed, the latter part of the data not
displayed is made into a separate block.
b ) Unless EOB ~) is added onto the end of the data displayed, the latter part of the data not
displayed will remain in its original form as the continuation of the part which is
displayed.
c ) When one block is deleted with the [C.B CAN] key, the latter part (up to ;) of the data
will also be deleted.
9 ) The maximum number of characters which can be entered at one time is 234 (39 characters x
6 lines). This represents the combined total of the characters increased (or reduced) by buffer
correction and the characters of other blocks displayed in the correction area. Therefore, when
data is to be added, it will not be possible to add further characters if there is no room for them
in the correction area and so the ~NPUT] key should be pressed. The data will be displayed
again word by word and block by block, and so the buffer correction mode should be
established again and the data added.
10) When the buffer correction mode is established while an error has occurred in the read ahead
block, the block in which the error has occurred appears at the head of the area.

-27-
2. POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

The operation search screen appears when the [SEARCH] menu key is pressed.
The program, sequence and block numbers for automatic operation can be calld on the search screen
from among the machining programs stored in the memory (or on paper tape).
Collate stop can be set for a block stop during automatic operation at the sequence number block of the
desired program number.
h

)12345678 N1 2345–12 ;
, PROGRAMFIIXJ MONITOR 3.1/l

<SUB>0 5678 N 45-12

W(3J:5 :7;] ~IS TO GO] ~ACHINE] \ ; 1%/
x 0.000 X -345.678 ; 3 5678
r 345:678 Y 0.000 Y 345.678 ; 4 9CO0
0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000 ; : 12345678
0. CQo c 0.000 c 0.000 j
7
8
0.00 ~

s 2345 M 5: ~ ;!
T 1234 B1234 ; j;
14
; 00 X -345,678 Y 345. 678; 15
fl1234; ~ [COLLATEBLOCK]
J1OO S5000 M3;
1200 GOO Z-1OO.;
lo N-

! 0( ~)N ( )-( )cCIL( )TAPE (0)

POSITIONI PROORAM

Display item Description

PROGRAM FILE] This indicates the file of the numbers of the machining
1 500 programs entered in the memory.
2 1234 They are indicated in ascending order from 1 to 99999999.
3 5678 If the number of programs overflows from page 1, the
. programs will be indicated on other pages.

~COLLATE BLocK] This is indicated during the collate stop check for collate
ON– stop, and the collate stop program number and sequence
number are indicated.
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

2.4.1 MEMORY SEARCH

This function enables machining programs to be called before actual machining from among the programs
entered in the memory.
The program, sequence and block numbers to be called are set. The tape search setting area is set to zero.
Memo~ search is performed upon initialization when the power has been switched on.

The number of the program to be

called is set. If necessary, the sequ-
ence number and block number are
set.
Example Calling the 01234 N20
block

G?E?!clO” @( 1234) N ( 20)-( )COL ( ) TWE (0) J

I
~
Press the ~NPUT] key, I ““ilr3 I
Q( 1234) N ( 20)-(
SEARCH EXECUTION

)COL ( ) TAPE (0)

I
J

1) Start the search.

2) When the designated program
number, sequence number and 0 1234 N 20-0
block number are located, the (SUB) O N -
SEARCH COMPLETE mess-
age appears.
The searched numbers appear in
O and N, and the data of the
searched blocks appears in the
display area of the machining
program.
N20 G91 G28 XO YO ZO;
SEARCH COMPLETE
p( ) N( )-( )COL( )TflE (0)

NOTE k When any of the following operations are conducted on the editing screen after memory search,
nothing is searched and operation is disabled. In these cases, proceed again with the search.
e The program, which was searched, has been deleted.
e The sequence number, which was searched, has been deleted.
o The block corresponding to the block number, which was searched, has been deleted.

-29-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

2.4.2 TAPE SEARCH

This function enables the squence number to be be searched before proceeding with the machining
operation using the paper tape.
Before using the tape reader, the tape reader setting and 1/0 parameter setting for the NC system must be
matched. The I/O basic parameters and 1/0 device parameters are set on the data 1/0 screen.
Install the paper tape in the tape reader and proceed with the search operation as follows.
1 ) Set the program number to be searched in O ( ), the sequence number to be searched in
N ( ), the block number to be searched in – ( ), and “l” in TAPE ( ).
2 ) Press the ~NPUT] key.
(Example)

TAPE (~)
0( IO)N( 1)-( )COL ( )TAPE( 1)

(G28
I
xo Yo 20;
SEARCH EXECUTION
Press the @NPUT] key. w
\O( 1O)N( 1)-( )COL ( ) TAPE( 1)

1) Start the search. The paper tape

reader will now start to operate
and the paper tape will run. ) 10 N 1-0
2) During the search, the data of (SUB) O N -
the machining program being
read appears above the setting
area and the SEARCH
EXECUTION message is
displayed.
3) When the designated program
number is located, the
SEARCH COMPLETE mess-
age appears.
The searched numbers appear in N1 G28 ZO T5;
SEARCH COMPLETE
O and N, and the data of the
searched blocks appears in the 2( )N( )-( )COL( )TAPE (l)
display area of the machining
program.

-30-
 2. P OSITIOiV DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

(Supplementary notes)
1 ) The search commences from the position which was set in the tape reader. (h the label skip
mode, everything up to the first EOB is skipped.)
2 ) Upon completion of the search, the block searched is read and the tape reader stops.
3 ) When resetting is performed during a search, the search is suspended. When it is performed
upon completion of a search, the non-search status is established.
4 ) When all the data up to EOR is read and the designated block is not located, theE13 (NB NOT
FOUND) message appears. If the”% RWD (SEARCH)” control parameter is OFF, the tape
stops at the program end EOR position; if it is ON, the tape is rewound as far as EOR at the
program beginning and then it stops.

NOTE Even when the “910 RWD (SEARCH)” control parameter is ON, the tape is not rewound unless
the “rewind code” 1/0 device parameter has been properly set.
The rewind code differs according to the 1/0 device used and so reference should be made to the
Operating Instructions of the 1/0 devices for further details.
~amde)., When N1 is searched from a Point midway along the tape and it is not found until the end
(when the”% RWD (SEARCH)” parameter is ON)

/ /
( % ; N 1 G-”.””,. ”-” ; N 2 “..”’””””..”; N 3 ““””.””.””.”
; % {
\ \
..+
1A A --”--”-””’’-’-”--””---””””-”-”””--”----:
Position after tape Search start position
rewinding
... ................................ ........... ........... .. ....... ........... ..... ...
Tape rewinding t
t Error (E13: NB NOT FOUND)
N1 is searched when the ~NPUT] key is pressed after the tape has been
rewound.

5) When the program number to be searched is not designated, only NB is searched, regardless
of the program numbers on the tape.
6) When a different NB is set again and the ~NPUT] key is pressed upon completion of the
normal search by tape search, the search is conducted. However, upon completion of the
search, tape search cannot be conducted even if the block stop mode has been establishwl after
the automatic start button is pressed once and after the automatic operation mode has been
established.
7) “l” is kept in the setting area of the tape parentheses even upon completion of the tape search
and so there is no need to set this with every tape search. To conduct a memory search, set “O”
into this setting area.
8) The “LSK” display is cleared when the first EOB is read and it appears with resetting and with
EOR reading.

-31-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

2.4-3 COLLATE STOP

The single block stop mode can be established at any block without the need to set the SINGLE BLOCK
switch to ON.
The kind of operations outlined below can be performed using the collate stop function.

GOO 2–150. ;
DN1OO G81 X–1OO. Z–1OO. R–50. F1OO ;
N101 X –100. ;
N 102 X – 100. ;
N103 Y – 100. ;
N 104 X – 100. ;
N105 X – 100. ;
\

As shown in Fig. 1.1, collate stop is performed

when one hole has been drilled (u on
completion of the N1OOblock). T [ e hole depth
is measured and a check conducted to veri$
that the dimensions tally. If they do not tally,
change the tool length compensation amount.
The hole can then be drilled properly by
proceeding again with the machining from the
head of the program.

ii
I I
II
I i 4
II
II
II
II
L. J 1

Fig. 1.1

.32.
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

( 1 ) Collate stop setting

01
To perform collate stop in the tape ~ PROGRAM FILE] MONITOR 3,1/1
or memory mode, set the program
number, sequence number and 11
block number, and set “l” in the 2 1%!
3 5878
COLLATE parentheses. 4
5 12345678
6
7
8

1;
11
12
I 13
b
I 14
When “l” is set in the COL parentheses, I 15
I
the tape ( ) setting is ignored. ~ [COLLATEBLOCK]
I

:0 N–
I

: 0 (1234) N (20) - (3)C0L (1) TAPE ( )

I

To perform collate stop in an MDI

program, set “O” as the program
number.
i
(Example) To perform collate stop at
1 FROGRAM FILE] ‘ONmOR 3“l/1
8

N1O-2 during MD1 I

I
1
I
; l%
0( (!j)N(liJilj )-(~) 1 5878
1
1
:WXl
COL ( 1 ) TAPE( ) 1
1
5 12345678
1 6
1
I
7
t 8
t
When “l” is set in the COL parentheses, I

the tape ( ) setting is ignored. I

1
1:
t 11
I
1
12
I 13
1
1 14
I 15
j [COLLATEBLOCK]
I
I
:0 N-
1
: 0( O) N(10)-(2)OX(I)’UW’I3 ( )
I
PLC-SWCONTROLCOM-VARLOGVAR MENU

-33-
2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

I 1

I
1
Press the ~NPUT] key.
I,
/ 1 PROGRAM
1
1
1
I
;
FILE]

1%
‘ONmOR 3“1/1

In the tape or memo~ mode, the program 1 3 5678

I 4 9000
number, sequence number, block number I
1 5 12345678
and the “COLL. EXEC” message appear 1 6
1
in COLLATE BLOCK, and the setting 1 7
1

area goes blank. I 8

I
I
1 1:
1
I 11
1 12
I
1 13
1 14
1
1 15
1
~ [COLLATEBLOCK] ~
1
: 0 1234N 20-3
1
;0( )N( )-( WW )TIQ’E( )
I
PLC-SW CONTROL
COM-VARLX-VAR MENU
/1

In the MDI mode, “MDI” appears I ~ PROGRAM FILE] MONITOR 3.1 /1

instead of the program number, collate I 500
stop is performed, and the sequence I
1 ; 1234
number and block number for collate t
# 3 5678
stop as well as the “COLL. EXEC” i
4
1
message appear. As in the tape or I 5 1234%i
,
memory mode, the setting area goes 6
blank. 7
, 8
i
I
t 1:
11
12
13
14
15

; [COLLATEBLOCK] ~
t
: 0 MDI N 10-2
I
: 0( )N( )-( )COL( )TAPE ( )

PLC-SW CONTROL COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

-34-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

@ Press the CYCLE START switch and proceed with operation. When the set block appears, the single
block stop mode is established immediately after that block has been executed.

When the single block stop mode is ~ ~ROGRAM FILE] MONITOR 3.1 /1
established by collate stop, the program /
1

I
number, sequence number and block 8
5500
I ; 1234
number appearing in COLLATE I 3
I 567a
BLOCK as well as the “COLL. EXEC” 1
4

1!
message are cleared. 5 1234i~
t 6
I 7
8
1
I
I 1:
t
I 11
I
1
12
\ 1 13
\ 1
t 14
t 15
I
; [COLLATEBLOCK]
8
:0 N–

[ 0( )N( )-( )COL( )TAPE ( )

I
II PLC-SWCONTROLCOM-VARLOC-VAR MENU
Press the ~IAGN] function selector
key, and check that c STOP CODE> is
set to collate stop. 1
<NC ALARM > 1
1

< STOP CODE> 1

T04 COLLATE STOP 0401 {

1
1
< ALARM MESSAGE> i
i
1
I
t
1
I
I
1
1
I
I
t
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> I
1
4
I
1
I
I
#
I
I
#
I
1

- C-MODAL
t =Rvo I SPINDLE\ PLC-I,F I

-35-
2. POSITION DISPLA Y M ONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

(2) Canceling the collate stop setting

To cancel the collate stop setting at

any time, set “O” in the COLLATE I ; PROGRAM
1
FILE] ‘ONHOR 3-1/1

parentheses on the operation search 2 1::

screen. 3 5678
1
4
0( )N( )–( )
I
I
I
5 1234?%
1 6
COL( O ITAPE( ) t 7
t
I I I 8
t
I
i 1:
1
# 11
1
1 12
I 13
I
I 14
1 15
1
I
I [COLLATEBLOCK] l~j
I
1
: 0 1234N 20-3
[
:0( )N( )-( )COL(0)TAPE( )

PLGSW tCONTROL
ICOM-VAR
! LOGVAR! MENU

Press the ~PUT] key.

1
‘1 PROGRAM FILE] ‘ONmOR 3“1/1
/ I
1
The program number, sequence number I 1
1 500
and block number settings as well as the I 2 1234
1
I 3 5678
“COLL. EXEC” message are cleared. 8 4 9000
8
1 5 12345678
I
t 6
I 1 7
8
I 8
I
4
I 1;
I
I 11
t
:
12
1
I
I Ii
1 15
I
I
I
I
[COLLATEBLOCK]
I

:0 N-

i 0( )N( )-( )COL( )TAPE( )

-36-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.4 OPERATION SEARCH

(3) Detailed description of function

1 ) The collate stop function is made operational by setting “l” in the COL parentheses on the
operation search screen.
2 ) Collate stop can be set and canceled even during automatic start.
3 ) When the preset block appears, collate stop is set to the single block stop mode immediately
after that block has been executed.
4 ) When there are several identical sequence numbers and block numbers in a program, collate
stop results after the first corresponding block in the sequence of execution has been executed.
5 ) The collate stop setting is canceled in the following cases.
1 ) When collate stop has been performed
2 ) When “O” has been set in the COL parentheses on the operation search screen
3 ) When the reset mode has been established
6 ) When only the program number has been set, collate stop results if the head of that program
is a label.
7 ) When the program and sequence numbers have been set and the block number has not been
set, the block number is considered to be “O.”
(4) Checkpoints
1 ) Collate stop cannot be performd for blocks being executed or blocks already read into the
preread buffer.
2 ) Even if a block not included in the execution program is assigned, no check is conducted to
verify whether it exists in the program.
3 ) Collate stop is not performed in the tapping mode.
4 ) Collate stop cannot be performed for automatic tool length measurement (G37) blocks.

-37-
 ,,,

2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR

2.5 OPERATION MODES

2.5 OPERATION MODES

2.5.1 OPERATION MODAL MONITOR AND RUN-OUT TIME DISPLAY

The operation mode page appears when the [C-MODAL] menu key is pressed.
The program tree and medals are shown on the first page.

PROGRAM
TREE/MODALMONrrOR4.1/2
012345678 N12345–12 (0) (N) (L) <MODE>
<SUB>IJ 5678 N 45-12 MAIN 12345678 12345-12 MEMORY
WORK: G54] ~IS TO GO] [MACHINE] 1 5678 45-12 2
x -345.678 X 0.000 X -345.678
Y 345.678 Y 0.000 Y 345.678
z 0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000
c 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000

FC 0.00

s 2345 M 56
GO1 G17 G90 G22 G94
T 1234 B 1234 G21 G80 G98 G54 G61
G66.1G69 G97 G50.1
G 00 X -345.678 Y 345. 678; G50 : P= O.000001 G68 : R=50.000
ml 234; G41 : D 1= 30.000:0.040 G05 : PO
i100 S5000 M3; G43 : Z H20=220. 550:0.240
N200 GOO Z-1OO. :
F A 200.00 S 2345 M56 35
FM1200.00 T1234 10 40
B 1234
~o~lmoN~Rmw ~wcH
PLC-SW CONTROLCOM-VARLOC-VAR MENU

The run-out time page appears next when the NEXT PAGE] key is pressed.
>
MONITOR 4.2/2
012345678 N12345–12 ~ ~MER]
<SUB>O 5678 N 45-12
WORK: G54] ~IS TO GO] ~ACHINE] :#lPo~~ o~l234:59:59
x -345.678 x 0.000 x -345.678 ~ 2A~o op o: 0: 0
Y 345.678 Y 0.000 Y 345.678 ~ 3.4~osm 0: 0: 0
z 0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000 \ 4EXTTSME1O: 0: 0
c 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000 ( 5EXT’TIME2 O: 0: 0

0.00

s 2345 M 5;
T 1234 B 1234
G 00 X -345.678 Y 345. 678;
m1234J
N1OO S5000 M3;
N200 GOO Z-1OO. :

# ( )DATA( )( )( )

POSITIONI PROORAM I SEARCH PLC-SW ] CONTROL I COM-VAR I LOC-VAR I MENU

-38-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.5 OPERATION MODES

TXst31avitem
—.- .— .. ---- I Description
r . .

‘ROGRAM TREE This indicates the nesting structure for the main program and
cO> <N> <L> <MODE> subprograms, MDI interrupts and user macro calls.
LAIN The information is retained even when the NC power is
switched off and so this function is useful for restarting the
running of a program.
The program number, sequence number and block number of
the main program being run and the operation mode are
.0 indicated. “1 —10” denote the called subprogram, user macro
call and MDI interrupt programs.
e L > indicates the number of remaining repetitions for the
subprogram.
vfODAL These indicate the modal states of the G commands being
301 ..... G94 executed,
1 (Note) During operation of a canned cycle
366.1 .... G50.1 When a canned cycle command is executed, the G
commands in the subprogram used to control the can-
ned cycle do not affect the G modal commands in the
original program in which the subprogram is called.
368: R =50.000 This indicates the angle of coordinate rotation across a range
of &360°.
350: P = 0.000ml This indicates the scaling factor,

S41 : D1 = 30.000:0.040 This indicates the cutter compensation modal, offset number
and wear amount.
G43 : H20 =220.550 :0.240 This indicates the tool length offset, offset number and wear
amount.
G05 : PO This indicates the high-speed mode modal.
t?A 200.00 This indicates the program command F modal value now
being executed.
FM 1200.00 This indicates the manual feed rate.
S 2345 This indicates the program command S modal value now
being executed.
T 1234 This indicates the program command T modal value now
being executed.
M This indicates the program command M modal values (up to
4 sets) now being executed.
B 1234 This indicates the 2nd miscellaneous function modal value.
~IMER] The total run-out time in each of the NC operating modes is
indicated,
#1 POWER ON 1234:59:59
2 AUTO OP 0:0:0
3 AUTO STL 0:00
4 EXT TIME1 0:0:0 This depends on the PLC sequence.
5 EXT TIME2 00:0 This depends on the PLC sequence.

-39-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.6 PLC S WITCHES

2.5.2 RUN-OUT TIME SETTING

The numbers as well as hours, minutes and seconds, which correspond to the run-out times to be set, are
set.
———————————.— ———
OF’ ,
Set 1 into the # ( ) parenthesa. I
Set O into the data parentheses.
Set O into the data parentheses. I #(l) DATA(0) (O) (II) 1
Set O into the data 1 parentheses. I
PLC-SW ICONTROL
{COM-VAJt
\ LOC-VAR
I MENU
I

\
UP F tTIMER]
Press the ~NPUT] key. #l POWERONO: 0: 0
——— —.— ——— ——— — ——

POWER ON: This is the total time added up per revolution from when the NC power is switched
on until it is switched off. - -
AUTO OP: This is the total added time for each machining time from when the automatic start
button is pressed in the memory (tape) mode until the M02 or M30 command is
issued or the reset button is pressed.
AUTO STL: This is the total added time during automatic start from when the automatic start
button is pressed in the memory (tape) or MDI mode until feed hold stop or block
stop or until the reset button is pressed.

2.6 PLC SWITCHES

Reference should be made to the parameters in Section 4.

2.7 CONTROL PARAMETERS

Reference should be made to the parameters in Section 4.

-40-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.8 COMMON VARIABLES

2.8 COMMON VARIABLES

The common variable screen appears when the [COM-VAR] menu key is pressed. The common variables
are indicated for the variable commands in the machining program.
The common variable data can be set and changed by o~e~ati;ns conducted on this screen.
The common variables have a configuration which differs according to the number of sets stipulated by
the specifications. With 100 sets from #100 to #149 and from #500 to #549, they span 4 pages.

-)
+[COMMON
VARIABLE] MONITOR7. 1 /4
)12345678 N12345 -12 ; # ~~f -123456.1234 120 -123456.7890
<SUB> fJ 5678 N 2-O 12.3450 121 0. Ooixl
\WORKoG&4J~PIST: oc~ ~ACHINE] ~ 102 122
103 123
Y 10d 123 Y 0000 Y lJ$!! \ 104 124
z -200.000 z 0,000 z -200.000 : 105 125
C -270.030 C 0. ~0 C -270,000 ~ 106 126
107 127
108 128
0.00 : 109 129
s 2345 M 5;C ; jj~
130
131
112 132
T 1234 B1 234 113 133
114 134
N1 G91 G40; 115 135
~2 #101 =12.345; 116 136
N3 GO4X1O: 117 137
N4 M98 P12301 #105=12 #106=200 $107=83 ! 118 138
#llo=-15. o #ill =-30. o; 119 139

j # (I) DA-I-A( )NAME ( )

POSITION
I PROORAM
I SEARCHI C-MODAL
I PLC-SWI CONTROL

Display item Description

# The variable numbers and their contents are displayed.
100-123456.1234 When the variable data is “empty,” the data display area
101 12.3450 will go blank. Exponential display applies for large
102 numbers of digits (6 digits above decimal point or 4 digits
below.)

-41-
 ;,.,

2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR

2.8 COMMON VARIABLES

2.8.1 COMMON VARIABLE DISPLAY

(.,1 \ When there is a common variable command. the results of its execution are indicated when the block
of that command is executed.

#
100-123456.1234
101 0.0000
102
(Example) ~e~-~he machining program
.—— — ——— ——— ——— .
$“
# 101=12. 345 ;
0
\
#
100 –1 23456.1234
I
101 12.3450
102

.—— — ——— --- --- J

(2) When there is a command which sets the variable name into any common variable from #500
through #519 by means of a user macro, the name of this variable which has been set will be
displayed when its block is executed.
Variable name settings and quotation commands both require the user macro specifications and they
are limited to 20 variables (#500 to #f519). The variable names are composed of not more than 7
abhanumerics eommencin~ with a letter. The variable numbers, data and variable names auuears as
follows for common variables #500 through +4519.

#
500-123456.1234 ABCDEFG
501 100.0000
502 999.9000

LLi==’1
(Example) Run the machining program
-——— ——— —-— —— --

\
0
I*
;00 -123456.1234 ABCDEFG
501 100.0000 POINTER
502 999.9000 COUNTER

L-- ——— ——-— --—

.42.
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.8 COMMON VARIABLES

2.8.2 COMMON VARIABLE SETTING

( 1 ) Setting the common variable data
Set the variable number inside the # ( ) parentheses and the common variable data inside the data
( ) p~renthesfi. The data can now be set by pressing the ~NPUT} key.
(2) Setting the #500-#519 common variable names
Set the variable number inside the # ( ) parentheses and the variable name inside the name ( )
parentheses. The name can now be set by pressing the ljINPUT] key. Only 20 variable names can be
set from #5Ml through #519. The variable names are composed of not more than 7 alphanumerics
commencing with a letter.
If both the data and variable name are set for the variable number (#500 -#519), it is possible to set
the data and variable name simultaneously.
(3) When the ~NPUT] key is pressed after the variable number and data (or variable name) have bmn
set, the set data (or name) will appear at the position of the corresponding variable number. The
variable number inside the # ( ) parentheses of the setting area will advance automatically to the next
number, and the eontents of both the data and name parentheses will be cleared.
( 4 ) When a variable number and data (or variable name) not displayed on the seleetcd page have been
set, the page corresponding to the variable number set is sehxted by pressing the ~NPUT] key once.
When the same key is pressed again, the data (or name) is set and indicated at the position of the
corresponding variable number.
(5) By pressing the [ $ ] or [ t ] key, the variable numbers can be continuously incremented or
decremented by 1 from the numbers indicated in the # ( ) parentheses.

2.8.3 COMMON VARIABLE DELETION

In order to delete a group of data set into the common variables, first press the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN]
keys and then press the [INPUT] key. This will delete the data displayed on one page.
Since the data on the other pages will not be deleted, delete the data page by page in sequence if all the
data is to be deleted.
The data is easily cleared by pressing the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys. The variable data is deleted by
pressing the ~NPUT] key.
The common variable data will be made “empty” by this deletion operation.

NOTE When the “COM-VAR RST CL” parameter is ON, the common variable data will be cleared
when the system is reset. Furthermore, when the “COM-VAR PWR CL” parameter is ON, the
common variable data will be cleared when the power is switched on.

II ,,

-43-
 .,,

2. POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR

2.9 LOCAL VARIA13LES

2.9 LOCAL VARIABLES

The local variable screen appears when the ~OC-VAR] menu key is pressed. Local variables from #1
throwzh #32 are available for each user macro suburomamm call level. A total of 32 local variables acmear
.4
per p~ge and there are 5 pages (1 page each for kwe~ O through 4).

012345678 N12345 -12 &OCALVARIABLE(0)] ‘ONnOR 8. 1‘ 5

<SUB>() 5678 N 2-o Al -12345.6789 017
[ WORK:
G54) lDISTO GO] lMACHINEl B2 12.3450 R18
x 0.000 x 0.000 x o. @o C3 S19
Y IfXl. 123 Y o. mo Y 100.123 T 20
z -20Q. (no z 0.030 z -200.000 :; U21
C -270. (XIO C 0. IX)O C -270.000 K6 v 22
D7 W23
E8 X 24
I FC O. ~ F9 Y 25
10 226
S1 2345678 Ml 234 Hll 27
12 28
T1 2345678 B1234 M13
14 ;:
NI G91 G40; 15 31
f; ;41 ;;;345; .-
16 32
.; 33
[A~. LV.](2)
N4 M98 P.12301 #105=12 #106=20CI #107=83
#llo=-15. o#lll=-30. o;
~NVALID]FEED HOLD OVERRIDEEXACT
SINGLEBLOCKMSTFINISH

POSITION
IPROORAM
I SEARCHIC-MODAL
I PLC-SW!CONTROLICOM-VAR
=Lf3C-VAR MENU

Display item Description

LOCAL VARIABLE (0)] These indicate the local variable numbers and their contents.
A 1 –12345.6789 The letter before the local variable number is the argument
B2 12.3450 code. G, L, N, O and P cannot be used for arguments and so
C3 they are not display al.
A total of 32 local variables (#1 —#32) are available for each
user macro subprogram call level (depth).
When the variable data is “empty,” the data display area will
go blank. Exponential display applies for large numbers of
\ digits (6 digits above decimal point or 4 digits below.)
The number inside the display title “LOCAL VARIABLE
(0)” parentheses indicatw the level (O–4) of the local
variable.
ACT. LV. (2) This indicates the level (deDth) of the user macro-based
subprogram control bei~g ‘m&ut cd.
(0} Not a user macro call status
(l): User macro call level 1
(2): User macro call level 2
(3Y User macro call level 3
~4j: User macro call level 4

-44-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.9 L OCA.L VARIABLES

Display item Description

< INVALID> This indicates the modal status of the NC operation
FEED HOLD, OVERRIDE, control status based on the #3M13 and #3004 commands.
EXACT, SINGLE BLOCK, MST FEED HOLD: Indicated when #3004 is assigned with bit
FINISH O as 1; it shows that the feed hold mode
is invalid.
OVERRIDE Indicated when #3004 is commanded with
bit 1 as 1; it shows that cutting override
is invalid.
EXACT: Indicated when #3004 is commanded with bit 2
as 1; it shows that the G09 (block deceleration
check) command is invalid.
SINGLE BLOCK: Indicated when #3003 is commanded
with bit O as 1; it shows that block
stop is invalid.
MST FINISH: Indicated when #3003 is commanded with
bit 1 as 1; it shows that operation
advances to the next block without
awaiting the MST command finish signal.

2.9.1 LOCAL VARIABLE DATA DISPLAY

( 1 ) When there is a local variable #1–#32 command based on a user macro or an argument command
with user macro subprogram call, this display shows the results when the block with that command
is executed.

.
< [LOCAL VARIABLE (1)]
ACT. LV. (0)
Al 0.0000
B2 0.0000
C3 0.0000
(Example) When the next machining 14
program ]s executed and the user —--— ——. - -— --
macro sub-program is called, the data
appears on the page of local variable
dmplay level (l), as shown in the
figure on the right.
E 0
I
“LOCAL VARIABLE (l)]
G65 PI Al. B2. C3. ;
ACT. LV. (1)
$ Al 1.0000
2.0000
:; 3.0000
14
.— -- --— -“-—- --

-45-
 .,.,,,,,,,,

2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR

2.9 LOCAL VARIABLES

(2) The relationship between the user macro subprogram call levels and the display levels is shown
below.

m(ncmcmfr
Main (level O) 01 (macro level 1) 010 (macro level 2) 0 lCO (macro leVel 3)01O(X3 \maaO
evel 4)

u -u -u- -u a
.-—
Level O
display
Level 1
display
Level 2
display
——— —— ———— ——— — ———————
Level 3
display
Level 4
display
.—— —— —— —— ———— —-
I Lo;AL
J
I
,m
I ;3
;AIllJLE(0)
2 O.m
3 0.3W

n
LoyAL;Aw (1)

2 2:m
3 3.cwll

LJ3J
)
33
I_ ——— ——— ——— ———— ——— ——-— ——— ——— —-—-
m m m:
LL--J
-——— .—— —-J

(3) The local variable display page is selected by the PREVIOUS PAGE] and NEXT PAGE] keys. The
display can be selected freely regardkss of the level being executui.

NOTE Local variables are not cleared even by resetting or power OFF. They are cleared during macro
call.

.1

.,,

-46-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

2.10 PRO GRAM RESTART

When machining is to be restarted after a machining program has been suspended due to a broken tool
or any other stoppage, the program restart function serves to search the program and block which are to
be restarted and to restart the processing from that block.
The program and block which are to be restarted are searched on the program restart page. When the
~ESEARCH] menu key is pressed, the program restart screen appears. It is composed of the following
two screens.
?
MONITOR9.1 /2
0 1000 N5–O
<SUB> 0 N-
[WOllKG54] [DISTOGO] ~ACHINE] [ [RESTART-P(G54)]
tRESI’ART-R]
K -130.000 x 0.000 X -130.000 ~ X -130.13fJORP X O.m
Y -10.000 Y 0,000 Y -10.000 ~ Y -10. OOORP Y 0.000
z -200.000 z 0.000 z -200.000 ~ z -200.000 R P Z 0.000
c 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000 ~ c 0.000RP c 0.000

O.oa :

s 75o M ;C
T OBO
N5 X-120. :
~6 Y- 70. ;
N7 X- 20.: : TYPE <0> UNMODAL<1> TYPE1 <2>
T :
N8 Y- 20.: TYPE2<3> PROCESSTIME
~ N: MODE <O> MEMORY<1> TAPE
; 0( )N( )[ )P( )T( )M( )

\ OFFSET \ 1111 I MENU

>
MONITOR9. 2/2
3 1000 N5–O ;
<SUB>() N-
[WORK: G54] ~IS TO GO] tMACHINE]: T-SELECTT
( -130.000 x O.ooa x -130.000 ; S-SPEEDS 30+!:
( -10,000 Y 0,000 Y -10.000 ! 2nd AUXB
-200.000 z 0.000 z -200.000 ; AUX M 6 3 8
: 0.000 c 0.000 c 0.000 , 9 6

0.00 j
s 750 M ;C ~
T OBO:
N5 X-120. :
M6 Y- 70.:
N7 X- 20.:
N8 Y- 20.;

10FFSETI I I I I I MENU

NOTE It is also possible to calculate the machining time on this scram. For further details, refer to
Section 2.12 on machining time calculation.

-47-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

2.10.1 OPERATION SEQUENCES FOR PROGRAM RESTART

There are two restart methods, type 1 and type 2.
( 1 ) Restart type 1
The pro@am is restarted by type 1 with feed hold and resetting due to a broken tool, etc.

Machining mom-am
Feed hold,
resetting

w I

Pressthefeedholdbuttonandretnx tothetool
chmgepositionbymmrurd meansorMDI.Pressthe
u
Machining
restart
resdkeyand suspend thepr=ut processing.

I
When the offset amount differs, change it
Replace with a new tool. on the offset screen.

With tape operation, find the start of

.....~ ...........................................................................

I Operations on program restart screen

Searchthe blockfromwhichmachiningis to
restartusingthe type 1 method.
(Referto Section2.10.2) Upon completion of the restart search,
the M, S, T or B function, restart
distance to go and restart position are
displayed.
Set the program restart switch to ON.

“RP>’ is displayed when the axes have

Movethe axesin the manualmodeto the finished moving to the restart position
restartreturnpositions. and the subsequent axes do not move in
eferto Seetion2.10.3)
Fssuethe M, S, T or B manualnumericalcom- either the “+” or “-” direction.
mand.(Referto Section2.10.4)

............................................................. ..................... ...................................................................

An operation error results even if there is

one axis which is not at the restart
Set the program restart switch to OFF. position for cle start.
However, if ?t e “automatic restart
position return valid” parameter is set
ON, machining will restart with cycle
Return to the automatic mode. start after all the axes have returned
simultaneously to the restart position.

I Press the cycle start button.

I

CzD

-48-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

(2) Restart type 2

Type 2 is used to restart the machining program when a machining program, which differs from the
machining program to be restarted, has been operated in the tape or memory mode prior to the
restart search of the machining momam to be restarted. It is also used when. for instance. the
coordinate systems applying d~r~ng”the previous automatic operation and the systems applying
during machining restart are to be changed.
The operating sequence for type 2 is the same as that for type 1 although before the restart search
all the settings of the coordinate systems must be made before the machining program is operated.
In addition, the head of the program to be restarted must be searched.
Operation of
[ Start ) Machining program different

Switch on the power and return all

the axes to thew reference points.
J me~~~g
=
h

I
Setby MDI the coordinatesystemsapplying

Move the axes to their program start

positions.
I

I
““ing’” It will not be possible to restart
machining properly when the axes are
not located at the positions ap lying to
program start in cases where t f e
Program head command is an
incremental command or a G92 com-
mand.
With tape operation, find the start of
the tape.
I
........-------------------.................. ........-. . .................................... ...............................................................
1
Operations on program restart screen ~
Search the head of the program.

Searchtheblockfromwhichrnxldningistoreslmt
usingthetype2 method.(Referto Section210.2)

Upon completion of the restart search, ~

the M, S? T and B functions, the ~
Set the program restart switch to ON. restart distance to go and the restart j
positions will be displayed.
I
“RP’> is displayed when the axes have !
Movethe axesin the manualmodeto the finished moving to the restart position ~
restartreturnpositions. and the subsequent axes do not move i
eferto Settion2.10.3) in either the “ i-” or “-” direction.
!?sue the M, S,T or B manualnumericalcom-
mand.(Referto Section2.10.4)
....................................................... ............................. ................................................................

Set the program restart switch to OFF.

Return to the automatic mode.

Press the cycle start button.

1
\ /

-49-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

2.10.2 RESTART SEARCH OPERATION

The program and block to be restarted are searched on page 1 of the program restart screen. Refer to the
following table for the designations in the data setting area.

Setting item Setting data Contents

0( ) 1–99999999 These set the program number, sequence number and block
number to be searched.
N( o–99999 The program number cannot be omitted with restart search.
)
( ) o–99
P( ) o–9999 This sets the number of times the search block appears. When,
for instance, a block in the subprogram is to be searched, the
search block will be executed a multiple number of times when
that subprogram is called for a similar number of times, and so
the number of times the block is to be executed is set here. There
is no need to set this when a one-time execution is to be searched
or when the search block is to be executed only once. If O is set,
a one-time execution is searched.
T( ) o This designates a unmodal search.
1 This designates a type 1 restart search.
2 This designates a type 2 restart search. With type 2, the head of
the main program must first be scarchcd by unmodal search and
then the type 2 restart search conducted.
M( ) o This designatca memory search.
1 This designates tape search.

( 1 ) Type 1 restart search

It is assumed that, using the example of the machining program on the next page, a tool has broken
while O1OOON7was being executed and machining is to restart from the O1OOON6block.

Assign the block at which machining is OR

to restart and proceed with the type 1

= (~] O(1OOO)N( 6)(0) P(1) T(1) M(O)

o 1000 N 5-o
Press the ~NPUT] key. <SUB> (1 N-
~ESTART-P(G54)] ~E.START-R]
x -130.000 x -150.000
1 ) The RESEARCH EXECUTION mess- Y -10.000 Y -150.000
age appears during the search and upon z 0.000 z 0.000
its completion the RESEARCH
COMPLETE message is displayed. N6 ‘f-70, :
N7 X-20. :
RESEARCHCOMPLETE

-50-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

(Example) &ample of type 1 restart search

01000;
P-
N2 G92 XO YO ZO;
N 3 G43 GOO G90 Z–1OO. HIO M03 S750 ;
N 4 G42 GO1 X–20. Y–20. DO1 F1OO ; -50

~5 X.-12O. ;

N6 Y–70. ; Brokentool,
N7 X–20. ; feedhold
-Iw

N8
N9”
Y–20.
G40
N1O M02 ;
%
;
G49 XO YO ZO;
/’ Toolchangeposition,
searchstart point
2

(2) Type 2 restart search

First, conduct a unmodal search for the head of the main program. Next, search the restart program
and block by type 2.
For instance, it is assumed that, using the example of the machining program on the next page,
machining was connected on the previous clay up to workpiece 1 and it is to be restarted from
workpiece 2.

~’”
Conduct a unmodal search to locate
the head of the machmmg program
T: TYPE

o(2000)t4(
( O)~%DLE (~)~PEl
~; ;E#?_;H ( O)MEM~Ry ( 1)T*pE

)of ’( )T(0)
(2) TYPE2

M(O)
1
I

Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow o 2000 N O-O

<SUB> O N-
~13TART-P (G54)] ~E~ART-R]
x
Y Y
z z

o 2000;
N1 G91 G28 XOYO ; ,- _.. -.-.--,

-51-
 ,.,

2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR

2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

n’”
Assign the block at which machining is
to restart and search It by type 2.

~O (3000) N ( O) (0) p ( 2) T (2) M (0)

Press the ~NPUT] key. o 2000 N3-O

:SUB>O 3ooo N O-O
~ESTART-P(G55)] ~EWART-R]
x -80.000 x -80.000
Y -40.000 Y -40.000
z 0.000 z 0.000

0 3000;
N1 G42 GO1 X–1a Y-10.D05 F1OOO;
RESEARCH COMPL
@ample) I&ample of type 2 restart search

02000 ; ....... .... .... .... ............. ..... ............... ........ .... ...... ..... Main program
N1 G91 G28 XO YO;
N2 G90 G54 GOO X O Y O Iv198 P3000 ; “.”........” Workpiece 1 machining
N 3 G55 GOO X O Y O M98 P3000 ; ..””..’”...”””....,.. Workpicce 2 machining
N4 M02;
y.

03000 ; ...... ...... .. .... .......... .... .......... ......... .... ..... ............... Subprogram
N 1 G42 GO1 X–10. Y–10. D05 F1OOO;
N2X–40. ; (Note) When based on M2/MO format
N3Y–40. ;
N4X–10. ;
N5Y–10. ;
N6G40 XO YO;
N 7 M99 ;
%
M
x -150. -1oo. -50. G53 X 0.000
?——-—— ———
Y 0.000

G54 X –20. 000

Y –40, 000
-50.

G55 X –80. 000

Y –40. 000
I --— -~ I

. .-100.

Y
.52-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

2.10.3 RESTART POSITION RETURN SYSTEM

With both types 1 and 2, selection can be made by parameter setting as to whether the restart position
return after the restart search is to be performed either manually or automatically.
( 1 ) Manual restart position return
Set the program restart switch to ON and move the axes manually to the restart position.

@ Set the restart switch to ON.

~ Set operation to the manual
(JOG/rapid traverse) mode.
@ Move the axes in the restart return
direction. - ‘“m

1) After the axes have finished returning to

the restart position, the ~ESTART-R]
values on the rogram restart screen are
set to zero an i “RP” appears by the side
of the ~ESTART-P] values.

Set the restart switch to OFF.

NOTE 1: When the restart switch is ON, the axes cannot be moved in the reverse direction to the restart
direction. An operation error will result if this is done. When a tool bumps into the workpiece
and must be retracted, set the restart switch to OFF and retract the tool manually.
hYoTE 2 After returning to the restart position, the axes cannot be moved with the restart switch ON.
An operation error will result if this is done.
NOTE 3 If, during cycle start, there is even one axis which has not returned to the restart position, an
operation error to the effect that there is such an axis will result. However, an operation error
will not result with an axis which has been returned to the restart position but which is no longer
at that position.
(2) Automatic restart position return
When the “RESTART AUTO” parameter is set ON on the control parameter screen for user
parameters and cycle start is performed, all the axes will return simultaneously to the restart position
by dry run and the machining will be restarted upon completion of the return.

NOTE 1: Proceed with cycle start after the axes have been moved by manual means or MIII to positions
where the tools do not make contact with the workplaces.
NOTE2 Even when the “RESTART AUTO” parameter is set ON, the restart switch can be set ON and
the axes returned manually to the restart position.
NOTE 3 When any axis, which has already been returned manually to the restart position, is subse-
quently moved from the restart position, it will not return to that position even with the
automatic restart position return.

-53-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.10 PROGRAM RESTART

2.10.4 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS WITH PRO GRAM

RESTART
With either type 1 or type 2, the M, S, T and B codes used for the machining are displayed on page 2 of
the program restart screen upon completion of the restart search. The M, S, T and B functions can be set
in the time between the completion of the restart search and the resetting or start.
The maximum numbers of the codes that can be displayed are 35 for the M functions, 3 for the S functions,
3 for the T functions and 3 for the B functions. If these numbers of codes used for the machining are
exceeded, the codes used first are not displayed. The codes that are not displayed cannot be commanded
on this screen, and so manual numerical commands are executed on the present value screen.

1 1 [ \

Select page 2 of the program restart

screen. II Up
T-SELECTT
S-SPEED S
2nd AUX B
lm-J
3000 I
1 ) The M, S, T and B commands used for
machining appear.
AUX M
9
6
6
3 8
I
2 ) The cursor blinks at the right end of the data
at the top left of the screen.

Use the cursor keys to move the cur-

sor to the position of the command
which is to be set. w

T-SELECTT
\ Press the ~NPUT] key. ID’ S-SPEED S 30::
ZndAUX B
6 D8
1) The command value with the cursor and the 6
command name display now change to a
highlighted display.
2) The highlighting remains and the cursor does
not appear during the time until the com-
mand has been executed. T-SELECTT 10
3) Upon completion of the command execution,
the normal display is resumed and the cursor
appears at the next command value position.
S-SPEED S
2ndAUX
AUX :
3000

6 3’
---
% I
The assigned codes are displayed on MONITOR 1.
the present value screen. Ilw x s
Y
z ;3

-54-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.11 OFFSET AMOUNTS

2.10.5 CHECKPOINTS
( 1 ) Set the tool offset amounts and parameters before proceeding with the program restart search. If the
conditions for such are not set beforehand, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper
machining start position.
(2) Do not conduct automatic operations or MDI operations during program restart.
It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if either operations
are conducted during program restart. (“During program restart” means the period from the
program restart search to the start of the searched program.)
(3) It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if a program using
user macro external signal input, machine coordinate readout or external mirror image commands
is the object of the restart search.
(4) When an attempt is made to shift the coordinate systems by manual or MDI interrupt while the
previous machining program is being executed, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the
proper machining start position even when restart is initiated by either type 1 or 2.
(5) If type 1 is used, there is no need to implement the unmodal search for the head of the program. The
operation start block of the previously operated program is stored inside and the type 1 restart
search commences the search (modal search) from the previous operation start block and it locates
the designated block. Consequently, unmodal searches are invalid even if they are conducted.
( 6 ) If type 2 is used, the “TOP SEARCH ERR” message appears when an attempt is made to initiate
the type 2 search directly without conducing a unmodal search. Conduct the unmodal search first.
(7) If either type 1 or type 2 is used, it is not possible to search blocks with macro statements during the
restart search operation. (,Thiswill result in the NB NOT FOUND error.) To initiate a restart search
for blocks with macro statements, first set the “macro single” control parameter ON and then
proceed. However, the tool path may change because of the relationship of the cutter compensation,
corner rounding/chamfering and geometric read ahead blocks.
(8) When conducting type I restart with a tape, it will not be possible to return to the proper machining
start position if operation is started midway through the tape.
( 9 ) WHILE/GOTO statements cannot be used during tape operation. This means that if such
statements exist even when restart search is performed by tape, a program error (P295
WHILWGOTO TPE) results.
(10 )The program number cannot be omitted when conducting a search with restart type 1 or 2.
If this number setting is omitted, lhe EOl SETTING ERROR results and restart search is not
executed.
Reset the program number and proceed again with operation.

2.11 OFFSET AMOUNTS

Reference should be made to Section 3 on tool offset.

-55-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Machining programs stored in the memory can be read out in sequence and analyzed at high speed
without moving the machine, and their approximate machining times can be calculated.
The calculated time is displayed in hours, minutes and seconds.
Machining programs for which the machining time is calculated differ in terms of operation depending on
whether execution comes after resetting or after operation search.
After resetting, execution proceeds from the machining program set on the run-out time calculation
screen; after operation search, it proceeds from the machining program which has been searched.
When the machining time calculation has been completed properly, a return is made to the original
automatic start standby mode. However, with automatic operation, proceed from operation search for
machining again.

<
Machin]ng time
Proccssin&
completed Inp;t Completion
calculation mode
I I

Automatic ~~ The machining

start standby r ‘“i$~~:t~; - ~ time of the
mode 1 semch Input : designated
~ mmpletion ; Calculation
completion machining
I mode_----.J I -
L---- @402/M30) program
I [
I A I I ]s calculated.
TIME COUNT
rI MODE I

‘- ~RCKESsTIME]0 s 27:13 Comple-

tion
1Input
again

I
I In automatic start
I Notes
@ Automaticstart
COUNTUP END

m
Screen selection is
not possible during
@ Feedhold machining time
@)Blockstop calculation.
I A return is made to
I
[ J
@)Operationtermination(M02/M30) the reset mode by
reset timr.
@ Resetoperation

Any of the following 4 ranges can be selected for calculating the machining time.,
1 ) Entire range from the start of the machining program to its end
2 ) From the start of the machining program to the assigned sequence block position midway through
the program
3 ) From midway through the machining program to its end
4 ) From midway through the machining program to a subsequently assigned sequence block position
The range can also be selected when different numbers are used for the start and end machining programs.
The time taken to execute each of the commands is totaled up in accordance with the sequence in which
the machining program is assigned.
1) Override of 100% applies to the rapid traverse command (GOO), and the acceleration/deceleration
time is taken into account.
2) Override of 100% applies to the cutting feed commands (GO1, G02, G03), and the ac-
celeration/deceleration time is not taken into account.
3) The command time for the dwell command (G04) is added up as is.
4) When calls occur for a specific number of times with subprogram control, user macro call and
canned cycles, the execution time for the number of call times only will be added up.
5) The execution time for M, S and T commands differs depending on the sequence and functions, and
is thus not added up.

-5G -
 2, POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12.1 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION SETTING

MONITOR9.1/2
3 1000 N5–O
<SUB> O
EVORKGE4 [DISTO00! (MACHINE] ~ESTART-P(GS4)]~EST~T&R] MONITOR 9.2/2
K -lXI.CCO x O.000 x -1300.WI x -130.000FI P ~ T-SELECTT
Y Y
-Io.ow O.rm Y -10.OOO Y -10.OOORP J O:CKKI
; S-SPEEDS
z -2C0.KOz O.ml z -2W.000 Z -2C0.0CM3R
P O.axl
; 2ndAUXB
c O.om c O.ow c 0.002 c 0.000R P C 0.003
; AUXM
,
FC
750 M 2 ‘“m \ ‘Rw=smME]
; 00 0[
N5 X-120.; ; T : TYPE (0) UNMODLE 1)TYPE 1(2)TYPE 2
~6 Y- 70.; ($) PROCESS
TIL E
N? X- 20.: ; M: MoDE(0)MEMORY (1)TAPE
!46 Y- 20.:

: 0( )N[ 1( 1P( )T[ )M(

Setting item Setting data Description Supplementary details

0( ) This sets the number of the machining The O number cannot be
;9;99999 program whose machining time is to be omitted.
calculated.
N( )-( ) o + 99999 This sets the sequence and block The end of the program
0+99 numbers when the machining time applies when the sequence
calculation is to be stopped during a and block numbers are
program. not available.
P( ) o + gggg This sets the number of times that the A setting of “O” or “l” or
program, sequence and block numbers no setting applics for the
appear in the machining time calculation. first appearance.
T( ) 0,1,2,3 0 Unmodal search assignment Unmodal search assigns
3: Machining time calculation assignment the head program position
for machining time
calculation.
M( ) o, 1 0: Memory mode assignment The memory mode is
1: Tape mode assignment establishwl when the sett-
ing is omitted.

-57-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12.2 EXAMPLES OF MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

OPERATIONS
Depending on the configuration of the machining programs and the way in which the machining time
calculation range is designated, there is a variety of operations for calculating the machining time.
Next, the generally used operations will be explained with 5 examples.

%i%d Calculation range Main program (01234) Subprogram (08000)

[11 Fromheadof mainprogram - 01234 (TEST-PROGRAM) 08000 (SUB-1) ;

to a midway
point 01234 NIOO G91 G28 lYZ ; N1 G91GOIX1O.;
M02 ● **O* ● S***

N11OM98P8000L3 ; [ . . . . .
~
. . . . . M99;
N130G81Z-30. R-20. F1O
.* *.*
M02;
[21 From headof mainprogram 01234(TEST-PROGRAM) 08000 (SUB-1):
to a midway
point 01234 N1OOG91G28XYZ: N1 C91COIX1O.:
N130 . . . . . . . . . .
N11OM98P8000L3 ; ( . . . . .
~
[ .. *.* M99;
N130G81Z-30. R-20. F1O
. ..**
M02;
[31 From headof mainprogram 01234(TEST-PROGRAM) 08000 (SUB-1):
to a midway 1
point in 01234 NIOOG91G28XYZ: NI G91GOIX1O.:
subprogram . . . . . ●*...
i
08000 N1 N11OM98P8000L3 ; /“’’” ‘1 ● .*.*
. . . . . M99;
N130G812-30. R-20. F1O
.* ***
M02;
141 R&n&rn:dwaypointin main 01234(TEST-PROGRAM) 08000 (SUB-1);
ita end 01234 N11O N1OO G91G28XYZ; N1G91GO1X1O.;
M02 . . . . . .* *,.
NI1OM98P8000L3 ; [ ~
O****

.* .*. M99;
N130G81Z-30. R-20. F1O
1 . ..*.
M02;
[51 01234(TEST-PROGRAM) 08000 (SUB-1):
~~~~~%dway point inmain
Itsend 01234 N11O N1OOG91G28XYZ; N1G91GO1X1O.;
N13o ““”0” . . . . .
NIIOM98P8000L3 ; ( ● **.*
~
90.09 M99;
1 N130G81Z-30. R-20. F1O
..*.●

M02;

-58-
 2. POSITION DISPLA Y MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Operation 1
This calculates the machining time from the head of the machining program to its end.

Assi the machining program whose T : ~pE (o) UNMODLE{1) TYPE 1 (2) TYPE2
mac r ining time is to be calculated.
Example Set 0(1234) T(3) and press (3) PROCESSTIME
Ow
the ~NPUT] key. ~ :MODE (0) MEMORY (1) TAPE
10:( 1234) N{ )( ) P{ ) T(3)M( )

During the calculation, the “TIME

COUNT MODE” message, the statuses in
-0
sequence in the form of the program data,
and the PROCESS TIME addition are 0 1234 N 100-0
displayed. <SUB> O N-
pWSTART-P(G54)] ~ESTART-R]
x 0.000 x 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z 0.000

X20, ‘i40. ;
X-40. ;
~ROCESSTIME] o: 0:53
PROC.TIME COUNTING

8
Y
01234 ; I

When the calculation terminates normally,

the “COUNT UP END” message, the
BUFFER DISPLAY from the head and
the calculation results in PROCESS
TIME are indicated.

NOTE ~ When a program error has been detected during the machining time calculation, the adding is
suspended, and E81 PROGRAM ERROR as well ZIS “P***” are dis~]av~, The machinin~ time
up _tothe block prior to the generation of the program error is ad&xl”up and display eil.wAfter
resetting, correct the machining program and proceed again with operation.

-59-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Operation 2
This calculates the machining time from the head of the machining program to a midway point.
Described below is an example where the time is calculated from the head of 01234 to 01234
N130-O.

Set the O and N numbers of the T: TYPE UNMODLE{1)TYPE1(2)TYPE2

(0)
machining program whose machining (3) PROCESS
TIME
time is to be calculated. w M : MODE
Example Set 0(1234) N(130)(0) T(3) ‘@)MEMORY {1)TAPE
and press the ~NPUT] key. 0:( 1234) N{ 130)(0) P( ) T(3) M{ )

i I

8
Durirw the calculation. the “TIME P
COURT MODE” message, the statuses in
sequence in the form of the program, o 1234 N 100- o
sequence, block numbers and machining <SUB >0 N
program data, and the PROCESS TIME ~ESTART-P(G54)] ~ESTART-R]
addition are displayed. x 0.000 x 0.000
‘t 0,000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z 0.000

X20. Y40, ;
X-40. ;
~ROCESSTIMEl O : () :53
PRGC.TIME COUNITNG

When the calculation terminates normally, N130 G81 Z-30. R-20. F1OO;
the “COUNT UP END” message, the Xloo. ;
assigned block in BUFFER DISPLAY [PROCESSTIME] 0:15: 7
and the calculation results in PROCESS
TIME are indicated. COUNTUP END

NOTE 1: The machining time calculation will stop midway with this operation even when “COUNT UP
END” appears, and so the adding up can be continued by assigning the program, sequence and
block numbers again and by pressing the [INPUT] key.
The number of times for the M, S, T and B function assignment is cleared to zero.
NOTE2 Since the machining time calculation mode is not released, such operations as operation search
or graphic check cannot be performed. Either proceed with tzxecution until the end of the
machining program or suspend execution by resetting and proceed with the other operation.

-60-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Operation 3
This calculates the machining time from the head of the machining program to midway through a
subprogram in a machining program with a different number.
An example is described where the time from the head of main .-
mozram 01234 to the second N1 in
subprogr~m 08000 is calculated.

Using the operation search function, T: TYPE (o) UNMODJ-E (1) WE I (2) TYPE2
conduct a unmodal search for the
head of the main program for which (3}PROCESS
TIME
the machining time calculation is to M : MODE (0) MEMORY(1) TAPE
w
be started. 0:( 1234) N( )( ) P( ) T(0) M(O)
Wampkx Set O (1234) T(0) and press \ )
the ~NPUT] key. 8

0 1234 N 0-0

When the unmodal search is completed,

the “SEARCH COMPLETE” message
1 <SUB> 0 N-
1

and program assigned in BUFFER

DISPLAY are displayed.
T 01234 (TEsT-pR0GRAh4);
N1OO G91 G29 XYZ;
\ ,ImYm.ssmvfq o: (j: ()
T
I
I SEARCHCOMPLIZIW I

Assign the program, sequence and block numbers of the last machining program whose machining time
is to be calculated.

Assi the O and N numbers of the T : TYPE {o) UNMODLE

(1) TYPE1 {2) TYPE 2
mac Fining program whose machining
(3) PROCESSTIME
time is to be calculated.
Example Set 0(8000) N ( 1)(0)P(2) w M : MODE {0)MEMORY(1) TAPE
T(3)M(0) and press the 0:( 8000) N( l)(O) P(2) T(3) M(O)
~NPUT] key.

0 1234 N 100-0
During the calculation, the “TIME
COUNT MODE” message, the statuses in <SUB>() N-
1
sequence in the form of the program,
sequence, block numbers and machining ~ROCESSTIME] (J: O :53
program data, and the PROCESS TIME PROC.TIME COUNTING
addition are displayed.
T
When the calculation terminates normally,
the “COUNT UP END” message, the
assigned block in the BUFFER o 1234 N 100- o
DISPLAY and the calculation results in <SUB>O 8000 N 1-0
PROCESS TIME are indicated. ~E.WART-P(G54)] ~ES7L%RT-R]
x 0.000 x 0.000
Y 0.000 Y O.000
z 0.000 z 0.000
N1 G91 X1O. ;
Y -240. ;
PROCESSTIME] 0:13:42
COUNTUP END

-61-
2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Operation 4
This calculates the machining time from a point midway through the machining program to the end
of that program.
An example is described where the time is calculated from machining program 01234 N11O-Oto the
end of that program.

1
Using the operation search function, T : TYPE {O)UNMODLE (1) TYPE I (2) TYPE 2
conduct a unmodal search for the
head of the main program for which (3) PROCESSTIME
the machining time calculation is to M : MODE (0)MEMORY {1) TAPE
be started. 0:( 1234) N(llO) (O) P( ) T(0) M(0)
Example Set 0(1234) N(11O) - (0) \ J
T(0)M(O and press the lj~ a
I ENPUT ). key.
. I f \
o 1234 N 110-0
When the unmodal search is completed, <SUB >() N-
the “SEARCH COMPLETE” message !
and program assigned in BUFFER N11O M98 P8000 L3 ;
DISPLAY are displayed. Nlll GOO G55 G90 X-1.5 Y-1.5;
~ROCFSS TIME] 0: 0: 0
SEARCHCOMPLEIE
)

Assign the machining program number again in order to calculate its machining time.

Assi n the same machining program T : TYPE (0) UNMODLE(1) TYPE1 (2) TYPE2
num %er as for the operation search.
Example Set 0(1234) N( )( )T(3) (3) PROCESS
TIME
M( ) and press the ~NPUT] M : MODE (0) MEMORY(1) TAPE
key. 0:( 1234) N ( )( ) P( ) T(3) M(0)
OF

During the calculation, the “TIME o 1234 N 100- 0

<SUB >0 N-
COUNT MODE” message, the statuses in
~ !
sequence in the form of the program,
sequencq block numbers and machining PROCESSTIME] O: 8:42
program data, and the PROCESS TIME PROC.TIME COUNTING
addition are displayed. \ J
When the calculation terminates normally, J!.
the “COUNT UP END” message, the
unmodal search block in the BUFFER o 1234N 100-0
DISPLAY and the calculation results in <SUB >0 N-
PROCESS TIME are indicated. ~ESTART-P (G54)] ~ESTART-R]
x O.000 x O.cloo
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z 0.000
N11O M98 P8000 L3 ;
Nlll GO(I G55 G90 X-1.5 Y-1.5 ;
[PROCESSTIME] 0:20:12
COUNT UP END

.(j2-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

Operation 5
This calculates the machining time from a point midway through the machining program to the end
of that program.
An exarnpl~ is described where the time is calculated from machining program 01234 N1 10-0 to the
end of that program.

Using the operation search function, T :TYPE (0) UNMODLE (1) TYPE 1 {2) TYPE 2
conduct a unmodal search for the
sequence and block numbers of the (3) PROCESSTIME
main program for which the machin- M : MODE (0) MEMORY (1) TAPE
ing time calculation is to be started. OG’ 0:( 1234) N(llO) (O) P( ) T(0) M(0)
Example Set 0(1234) N(11O) - (0)
T(0) M(0) and press the n
~NPUT] key.
o 1234 N 110-0
When the unmodal search is completed, <SUB >0 N-
~ ~
the “SEARCH COMPLETE” message
and program assigned in BUFFER N11O M98 P8000 L3 ;
DISPLAY are displayed. Nlll GOO G55 G90 X-1.5 Y-1.5 ;
[PROCESSTIME] 0:0:0
SEARCH COMPLEI’E
\ d

Assign the machining program number again in order to calculate its machining time.

Assi the same machining program (@tJNMODLE(1) TYPEI @)TYPE2

~ : TYPE
num %“
er as for the operation search.
Examplex Set 0(1234) N(130) (0) (3) PRCCESSTIME
P( ) T(3) M(0) and press the K? M :MODE (0) MEMORY (1 )TAPE
~NPUT] key. 1234) N( 130)(0) P( ) T(3) M(0)
0:(

1
During the calculation, the “TIME 0 1234 N 120-0
COUNT MODE” message, the statuses in <SUB >0 N-
sequence in the form of the program, +
sequence, block numbers and machining ~ROCESSTIME] O: 0:42
program data, and the PROCESS TIME
addition are displayed. PROC,TIME COUNTING
\
When the calculation terminates normally, a
the “COUNT UP END” message, the -1
unmodal search block in the BUFFER 0 1234 N 130-0
DISPLAY and the calculation results in <SUB >0 N-
PROCESS TIME are indicated. @3START-P(G54)] ~ESI’ART-R]
x 0.000 x 0.000
Y 0,000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z O.ooil
N130 G81 Z-30. R-20. F1OO ;
Xloo. ;
[PROCESSTIME] O: 8: 6
COUNT UP END
J

-63-
2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12.3 CRT DISPLAY DATA FOR MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

OPERATION
1 ) The following appears on the CRT setting and display unit while the machining time is being
calculated and after it has been calculated.

PI P2
9

~START-P (G54)] ~ESTART-R] T-SELECT T 12345

x 0.000#1 x 0.000 S-SPEED S 12245
Y O.ooa#1 ‘t 0.000 2nd AUX B 12345
z 0.000#1 z 0.000 AUX M 12345
u 0.000 #1 u 0.000 12345678:12 12345678:12 12345678:12
v 0.000 .* ...*. . ...*.. ...*.
0.000#1 v ●

0.000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..0..
z 0.000#1 z
. . . . . . . . ..*... . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . ...* . ...*.
~RGCESSTIME]1234: 12:12
. . . ...* . . . . . . . ● . ...*
. ..**.. ● *..... .* *..*

Itddddddd: tn -****e--o-o “**

1 ) The PROCESS TIME is displayed in hours: minutes: seconds. The maximum adding time is
1193:02:47.
2 ) During calculation the count is indicated each for T-SELECT T, S-SPEED S, 2nd AUX B and
AUX M. Addition is possible up to 65,535 times.
3 ) Up to 24 groups of “M code data: Count” is listed in table form in the sequence assigned for AUX
M.
NOTE 1. If any of the above data exceeds the maximum values, the display is first cleared to zero and
then adding continues.
2: The PROCESS TIME data will remain until the unmodal search or a new machining time
calculation.
3. The M, S, T and B code data is cleared when a unmodal search is performed and when the
machining time calculation is continued.
2 ) Machining time calculation and modal screen display
Machining time calculations are mostly done as combinations of unmodal search and machining
time calculation, and confirmation of the modal status at any time is valid in the operation.
1) The usual CNC operation status modal information appears on the modal screen of the CRT
setting and display unit but during a machining time calculation the status of the machining
program whose machining time is being calculated is displayed as modal information.
(Screa selection is not possible during “PROC. TIME COUNTING,” but it is possible to
check the modal status by screen selection at a point in the machining program when “COUNT
UP END” or a program error has resulted.)
2) When the machining time calculation is executed until the end of the machining program and
“COUNT UP END” appears, operation returns to the status prior to the calculation
operation.
(If a unmodal search was conducted prior to the calculation operation, operation will return
to the unmodal search status upon completion of the calculation operation.)

-G4-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12.4 CHECKPOINTS FOR MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

1 ) An alarm results if the operation status of CNC system is as follows when the machining time
calculation starts.

Operation status of CNC when machining time

Alarm display
calculation starts
In automatic operation E21 PROGRAM RUNNING
In graphic check E78 PROG. CHECK MODE
In restart search E132 ALREADY RESERCH

2 ) Operation of the setting and display unit’s keys is not acknowledged during machining time
calculation (while the “PROC. TIME COUNTING” message appears). As a result, it is not possible
to perform CRT screen operations. Suspension is possible by resetting.
3 ) In any of the modes below during machining time calculation, the continuwl setting operation is set
to the reset standbv mode.
1) When the time calculation is completed by assigning machining time calculation midway
through a program
2) When a program error results midway through machining time calculation and operation has
stopped
In these states, it is possible to check the modal information, etc. of the machining time
calculation stop status by switching the CRT screen.
The machining time calculation is canceled by resetting, and the modal information changes.
However, it should be borne in mind that the change status differs depending on whether the
reset 1 or reset 2 function is used.
Setting and display operations cannot be performed on the screen below. An alarm will result.

CRT screen Setting and display operation Alarm operation

Present position Program Buffer correction E79 TIME COUNT
display MODE
Operation Memory or tape search
search
Restart search Unmodal search, restart search
Graphic Check Program chezk
Editing, input/output Editing, input/output of machin- E21 PROGRAM
ing program with same number as RUNNING
time calculation

Automatic start operations cannot be performed either.

Machine operation Alarm display

AUTO START pushbutton Operation alarm 0116

-65-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

4 ) To suspend operation during execution, cancel the machining time calculation mode using the reset
key.

Reset —. Operation
search
!R i-----l=is=l
L !
,
~-”--- X Restart search
Automatic PROC. TIME
start standby i---Opeiat-i-on --i COUNTING
mode : search
:--corn.pl-e~:on--; :.
R X Graphic check
; g.. .... ... ........... ... ......
~ Calculation :.. ...
completion/alarm ~
............. ............. ..... :.
In automatic operation

2.12.5 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION OPERATIONS ON

GRAPHIC SCREEN
When a program check is conducted on a graphic screen, the machining time is calculated virtually in
synchronization with the graphic tracing done by the graphic check function.

GRAPHIC
~ACHINE]
x
Y
z
u
v
w
l~ROCESS TIME] I Displayed only with machining time
calculation specification
112345:12: 12/

1 ) This function can be used on the graphic check screen only when the machining time calculation
specification is provided.
2 ) The number of times for the M, S, T and B function assignment is not displayed on this screen.
When this data is required, perform the machining time calculation operation which has already
been described.

-66-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

2.12.6 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION FOR CNC FUNCTIONS

1) Override of 100% applies to the rapid

traverse commands such as GOO,and the
acceleration/deceleration
added up.
time is also

2) Override of 100% applies to the cutting

‘ccc’eratiO/
‘oo”’oo%ka
feed commands such as GO1, G02 and :&’’’’””---l
G03, and the acceleration/deceleration
time is not added up. This means that
there is an error equivalent to the ac-
celeration/deceleration time in G09, G04
and exact stop check.
With F1-digit commands, the time is *
calculated with the parameter data as-
signed by the F1-digit command.
3) The dwell time for the dwell command
time --l
Calculation

(G04) is added up as is. -J

4) When G1O and Gll program parameter commands are present, the actual parameter data is also
rewritten.
There is no effect on up to 160 types of tool offset data but once this figure is exceeded, bear in mind
that the actual data will be rewritten.
5) The G27, G28 and G29 reference point return commands differ depending on whether the
high-speed type or dog type applies, and since this is ascertained from the coordinate position, an
emor may arise.
6) The machining time is calculated for the position up to the end point with the G31 and G31.1 skip
commands.
7) With a G95 synchronous feed command, the S command serves as a direct rotation command, the
feed rate is determined and the machining time is calculated. As a result, the time will not be added
up accurately.
8) Bear in mind that the time is not calculated with the G33 thread-cutting and G37 automatic tool
length measurement commands.
9) For subprograms, user macros, canned cycles and other call number control commands, the time is
added up for the number of times that the functions are called.
10) Except for macro operation commands and other movement commands, the time is not added up
for commands whose time cannot be specified. The error will therefore increase when calculating the
time for programs containing many of these commands.
11) The actual data is not affected for common and local variables.
12) The time taken to execute M, S, T and other such functions differs according to the sequences and
function codes involved. The time is not calculated in these cases.
M commands can be displayed up to 8 digits, 24 groups and 255 times. M02 or M30 serves as the
code which terminates the time calculation.
For S, T and B (secondary miscellaneous) functions, the command count is displayed up to 65,535
times.

-67-
2. POSITION DISPLAY M ONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

13 ) Valid commands for machining time calculation

O: valid for calculation, A : special procmsing, X: invalid

G code Calcu-
Group Function
lation M300standardformat M2./MO
format
“00 o 01 Positioning %uneas left
●O1 o 01 Linearinterpolation Sameas left
02 0 01 CircularinterpolationCW Sameas left
03 0 01 CircularinterpolationCCW Sameas left
021 0 00 SpiralinterpolationCW Sameas left
03.1 0 m SpiralinterpolationCCW Sameas left
04 0 00 Dwell Sameas left
05 0 00 High-speedmode Sameas left
06
07 0 00 Imaginav axisinterpolation Sameas left
08
09 x 00 Ekactstop check Sameas left Note1)
10 A (xl Programparameterinput Sameas left Note3)
11 0 Ml Programparameterinputcancel Programtooloffsetinput
10.1

12 0 oil CircularcuttingCW Sameas left

13 0 CO CircularcuttingCCW Sameas left
14
-. lx
,-- 1 ,ml-l
-- I
rnm.liin
-.,.,.. .. .*- .P.l+ir,
..w.”
m
6
.-”.1.
I I
} *C
1>
I I I I
16 I
*17 o 02 PlaneselectionX-Y Sameas left
*18 o 02 PlaneselectionZX Sameas left I
?%19 0 02 PlaneselectionY-Z Sameas left
llk2010 I 06 ! Inchcommand I Sameas left I
I *21 I O I 06 \ Metriccommand I Samem left -“1
22 0 041- StrokecheckbeforemovementON Subprogramcalllpattemrotation
*23 o 04J- StrokecheckbeforemovementOFF Subprogramreturn
22.1 /0 /04 StrokecheckbeforemovementON
23.1 /0 /04 StrokecheckbeforemovementOFF
24

27 0 m Referencepointveri~ Sameas left

28 0 m Referencepoint return Sameas left
29 0 m Startingpoint return Sameas left
30 0 m 2nd-4threferencepoint return Sameas left
31 0 Ml Skip Sameas left
31.1 0 00 Multi-stepskip 1 Sameas left
31.2 0 Cml Multi-stepskip2 Sameas left
31.3 0 m Multi-stepskip3 Sameas left
9+
J&

33 x 01 Thread-cutting Sameas left Note2)

34 0 00 SDecialcannedevcle(boltholecircle) Sameas left
I 35 0 00 I Specialcannedcycle(lineat angle) Sameas left

NOTE t The deceleration time based on exact stop check is not added up and so an adding error results.
NOTE 2 The time is not added up for thread-cutting commands.
NOTE 3 Check the parameters after calculation with program parameter input.

-68-
 2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

O: valid for calculation, A: special processing, X invalid

G code Calcu- Group Function

lation M300standardformat M2/MOformat
36 0 w Specialcannedcycle(are) Sameas left
37 x/o m Automatictool lengthmcasmment Specialcannedcycle(grid) Note1)
37.1 Ofx m Specialcannedcycle@rid) Automatictool lengthmeasurement
38 0 00 Cuttercompensationvectorassignment Sameas left
39 0 00 Cuttercompensationcorneram Sameas left
*4O o 07 Cuttercompensationcancel/ Sameas left
3-dimensionalradiuscompensation
41 0 07 Cuttercompensationleft/ Sameas left
3-dimensionalradiuscompensation
42 0 07 Cuttercompensationright/ Sameas left
3-dimensionalradiuscompensation
43 0 08 Tool lengthoffset(+) Sameas left
44 0 08 Tool lengthoffset(-) * Toollengthoffsetcancel
45 0 (KI Toolpositionoffsetwpansion Sameas left
46 0 Ml Toolpositionoffsetreduction Sameas left
47 0 00 Toolpositionoffsetmpansionx2 Sameas left
48 0 (xl Toolpositionoffsetreductionx2 Sameas left
*49 0/ 06/ Tool lengthoffsetcancel
’50 0 11 Scalingcancel Sameas left
51 0 11 ScalingON Sameas left
*SO.1 0 19 G commandmirrorimagecancel Sameas left
51.1 0 19 G commandmirrorimageON Sameas left
52 0 @ Localcoordinatesystemsetting Sameas left
53 0 co Machinecoordinatesystemselection Sameas left
*54 o 12 Workcoordinatesystem1 .wtting Sameas left
55 0 12 Workcoofiinatesystem2 setting Sameas left
56 0 12 Workcootdirmtesystem3 setting Sameas left
.57 0 12 Workcocmtinatesystem4 setting Sameas left
58 0 12 Workcomrfinatesystem5 setting Sameas left
59 0 12 Workcoordinatesystem6 setting Sameas left
60 0 m Uni-directionpositioning Sameas left
61 x 13 I%actstop checkmode Sameas left Note2)
61.1 x 13 High-precisioncontrolmode Sameas left Note4)
62 x/o 13/19 Automaticcomeroverride G commandmirrorimage Note3)
63 x 13 Tappingmode Sameas left
%4 x 13 Cuttingmode Sameas left
65 0 (Kl Usermacrosimplecall Sameas left
66 0 14 UsermacromodalcallA Sameas left
66.1 0 14 UsermacromodalcallB Sameas left
*67 o 14 Usermacromodalcallcancel Sameas left
68 0 161- CoordinaterotationON Usermacrosubprogramend
*69 o 16/00 Coordinaterotationcancel End point errorcheckrelease

NOTE 1: The time is not added up for automatic tool length measurement.
NOTE 2 An error occurs in the added-up time due to the deceleration time in the exact stop mode.
NOTE % Since the time is added up with 1OO$ZO override even with automatic corner override, an error
results.
NOTE & The corner deceleration time in the high-precision control mode is not added up and so an
adding error will result.

-69-
2. POSITION DISPLAY MONITOR
2.12 MACHINING TIME CALCULATION

O: valid for calculation, A: special processing, X invalid

I code ICalcu-
G
lation 1Group M3@lstandardformat
Function
M21M0format
66.1 16 Coordinaterotation ON
66.2 Coordinaterotationcancel
70 0 : Usercannedcycle Sameas left
71 0 09 Usercannedcvcle Sameas left
I 72 I O I 09 I Usercannedevcle I Sameas left I
73 0 09 Cannedcycle(step) Sameas left
74 0 09 Cannedcycle(reversetap) Sameas left
75 0 09 Usercannedcycle Sameas left
76 0 09 Cannedcycle(fineboring) Sameas left
77 0 09 Usercannedcycle Sameas left
78 0 09 Usercannedcvcle Sameas left
I 79 I o I 09 I User canned cvcle I Same as left I
1 “80 I o I 09 I Cannedevclecancel I Sameas left I
81 0 09 Cannedcycle(drilling/spotdrilling) Sameas left I
82 0 09 Cannedcycle(drilling/counterboring) Sameas left
83 0 09 Cannedcycle(deepholedlilling) Sameas left
84 0 09 Cannedcycle(tapping) Sameas left
85 0 09 Cannedcycle(boring) Sameas left
86 0 09 Cannedcycle(boring) Sameas left
87 0 09 Cannedcycle(backboring) Sameas left
88 0 09 I Cannedcycle(boring) Sameas left
89 0 09 Cannedcvcle(’borinrz> Sameas left
I*9O I o J 03 I Absolutevaluecommand I Sameas left I
1 “9110 I 03 I Incrementalvaluecommand I Sameas left I
92 I o ml Machinecocmfinatesystemsetting Sameas left
m
.- 1 I 1
II
*94 o 05 I Asynchronousfeed(~er-minutefeedl Sameas left
1*9510 I 05 I Svnchrrmousfeed(ner-rotationfeed) I Sameas left I
96 0 I 17 \ ConstantperipheralspeedcontrolON Sameas left
“97 I o 17 ConstantperipheralspeedcontrolOFF Sameas left
*98 o 10 Cannedcvcle,initiallevelreturn I Sameas left
19910 I 10 I Cannedcvcle.referenceoointlevelreturn I Sameas left I

M code Calcu- Group M300standardformat M2JM0format

lation
CsI x – Programstop Sameas left
01 x – Optionalstop Sameas Ieft
02 0 – Programend Sameas left

30 0 – Programend Sameas left

96 x – MacrointerruptON ION
97 x – Macrointerruptcancel IOF
98 0 – Subprogramcall (G22)
99 0 – Subprogramreturn (G23)

-70-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM

3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL l?ARAM

The following menus appear when the POOL PARAM] function selector key is pressed.

Parameter menu
displays
(MI-4)
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ~
Tool offset menu 1 1 1 1
! PLC-SW ~CONTROL! AXIS ! PROCESS! ! MENU
-----,!
displays (1$11-5) \OFFSETI TLM I REGISTI LIFE I WORK[

(mIgIaI(a(md5mI’EQI
v
PREVIOUS
I Menu ~ ;:::
selector
PAGE key keys key

.6
I#
I
1
Tooloffset
amounts
l-#Hl
or # l-#20
I

I mu u
Tool Tool
length offs-d
~yre- I-#
1:#15

.
Tool
registration
MG I-MG80

H .
.
k
Tool. life.
PG%%XT
GROUPfile
I
Workcoordin-
ate offset
G54-G59
EXT

uKx3-
KK3

—.. — .- -—— ..—. ..— ——— -

Refer to seetion
parameters.

rl HHm
PLC
switches
# I-#32

-71- *
 L,

3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM

3.1 TOOL OFFSET

3.1 TOOL OFFSET

The tool offset page appears when the [OFFSET] key is pressed.
(1) Tool offset memory (type I)
With this typ~ there is no distinction between the shape compensation memory and the wear
compensation memory, and so the amount which combines both compensation amounts is set.
The offset data is used in common for tool length and tool position offset as well as for cutter and
3-dimensional cutter compensation.
(2) Tool offset memory (type II)
With this type, separate settings are made for the shape and wear compensation amounts. The wear
compensation amount is further divided into the lemzth and radial dimensions.
Thejength dimension data among the offset data is u&d for tool length and tool position offset; the
radial dimension data is used for cutter and 3-dimensional cutter compensation.

POOL OFFSET] TOOL 1,1 /4

~#1 :INC.
# 1 200.000 16 350.000 31 200. O(KI 46 0.000
2 -300.000 17 360.000 32 150.000 47 0.000
3 500.000 18 10.125 33 0.000 48 0.000
4 40.000 -0.003 34 0.000 49 0.000
5 250. COO ;: 35. 5ca 35 0.000 50 0.000
6
6 -34,000 21 0.000 36 0.100 51 0.000
7 125.000 22 0.000 37 0.000 52 0.000
8 33.500 23 0.000 38 0.000 53 0.000
9 444.444 24 0.000 39 0.000 54 0.,000
10 0,001 25 0.000 40 0.000 55 0.030

11 100.000 26 0.000 41 0.000 56 0. C!Qo

12 55.005 27 0.000 42 0.000 57 0. OOQ
13 0.900 28 0,000 43 0,000 58 0.090
14 111.111 29 0.000 44 0.000 59 0. OQo
15 80.000 30 0.000 45 0. Oao 60 0.000

# (~) DATA( )
.::.
.,.... ,.,...... .,
;q!%$$~~ TLM I REGISTI LIFE I WORK I I ! MENU

Tool offset memory type I

The tool offset data can be set using absolute or incremental values. (M330HM/335M system starting with
version E and M330HM-V/335M~V)

Display item Details

#A: ABS. #I: INC. The valid setting mode (absoluteJincremental value setting)
appears in yellow characters.
Check that the mode is correct before proceeding with the
data setting.

-72-
 3, TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.1 TOOL OFFSET

3
WOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/7
#A: ABs. #i : INC
‘# LENG ‘
1 -120. COo
2 -loo. OQo
WEAR
0.020
0.034
RADIUS
200.000
200.000
WEAR
0.099
0.000
16
17
LENG
200.030
220.000
WEAR
0.004
0.004
RADIUS
2000030
120.030
WM
0.120
3 -100.000 0.000 200.000 0.010 18 0.555 100.000 0.002
4 -20.000 0.005 150.MO 0.008 19 2}@ 0.090 150.000 0.048
5 -20.000 0.530 150.000 1,059 20 24.500 0,288 120.000 0.030
21
6 -300.000 0.032 250.000 0.111 22 34.000 0.035 195.000 0.089
; -;:;.&o 0.000 250.000 0.000 23 55.000 0.000 200.000 0.000
0. (W 180.000 0.009 24 85. OUO 0. m 220.000 0.000
9 -200:000 0.000 150.000 0.003 24 0. MM 0.000 0. Ooa 0.000
10 500.000 0,667 100.000 0.888 25 0.000 0.000 0. coo 0.000

11 -8.000 0.001 90.000 0.000 26 0.000 0.000 0,030 0.000

12 -6.000 0.030 90.030 $ ;;; 27 0.000 0. Oao 00Oao 0.000
13 -10.000 0. c07 90.000 28 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
14 -10.000 0.030 90.000 0: OMI 29 0.000 0.000 0. m o. Oao
15 -12.000 0.123 100.000 0.597 30 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

#1: : : :

~‘ i’~~g~ TLM ! REGISTI LIFE I WORK ! I ! MENU

Tool offset memory type II

3.1.1 TOOL OFFSET DATA SETTING

(1) Type I
Set the offset memory number in the # ( ) parentheses and the offset data in the data ( )
parentheses. The tool offset data can then be set by pressing the ~PUT] key.
(2) Tvue II
S~~ the offset memory number in the # ( ) parentheses and the offset data in the setting areas
corresponding to the length dimension, length wear, radial dimension or radial wear. The tool offset
data can then be set by pressing the ~NPUT] key.
(3) When the ~NPUT] key is pressed after the offset memory numbers and tool offset data have been
set, the tool offset data which has been set appears at the corresponding offset memory number
position, the offset memory number inside the # ( ) parentheses of the setting area is incremented
by 1, and the contents of the data ( ) parentheses are cleared. At this time, the cursor moves to the
right end of the setting area as when the [INPUT] key is prmsed.
(4) When any offset memory number and tool offset data corresponding to an offset memory number
not on the display have been set, the page corresponding to that number is selected when the
~NPUT] key is pressed once. When the key is pressed twice, the offset memory is indicated.
(5) By pressing the [ ~ ] or [J. ] key, the offset memory number can be continuously incremented or
decremented each time by 1 from the offset memory number indicated in the # ( ) parentheses.
(6) When [ I ] is set in # ( ) and the ~NPUT] key is pressed, the incremental mode is set as the setting
mode.
When settings are made in the incremental mode, the data in the setting area is added to the data in
the display area.
To release the incremental mode, set [A] in #( ) and press the ~NPUT] key, and this will establish
the absolute mode. (For further details, refer to Section 3.1.3.) (M330HM/335M system starting with
version E and M330HM-V/335M-V)

-73-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.1 TOOL OFFSET

3.1.2 TOOL OFFSET DATA DELETION

( 1 ) Deleting in display page units
When the tool offset data is displayed in GOsets per page (30 sets for type II), the data displayed is
all cleared to zero when ljINPUT] is pressed after pressing the [SHIFT] key and the [C.B CAN] key
in sequence.

3.1.3 TOOL OFFSET DATA SETTING MODE

(ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL VALUE SETTING)
(M330HM/335M system starting from version E and M330HM -
V/335M-V)
( 1 ) Absolute setting
Switching to absolute setting mode

Press the NPUT] key after setting. f \

A into # 1? ). llw POOL OFFSET]
_ #1: INC.
\ #
I# ( A) DATA ( )
I
“#A: ABS.” appears in yellow and the absolute setting
mode is established.

l%ample of absolute value setting for tool offset data

Old New

Ill
I , I
I 1 Cutter L I ~tter Absolute
compensation
40.0

c-=tio~
I
Length — Length
compensation
5.0 Absolutevaluesetting , 3.0
I

(# 3 %J&ation )

m #;et:;gDATA( 37) *:ispl;OOO

-74-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM
3.1 TOOL OFFSET

(2) Incremental setting

Switching to the incremental setting mode

Press the ~NPUT] key after setting I POOL OFFSET]

into # ( ). UP [
# A :ABS. -

#( l) DATA( )

“#I: INC.” appears in yellow and the incremental setting

mode is established.

Example of incremental value setting for tool offset data

Old
I I I
New
I
t I A
Cutter
I I
Cutter Absolute
compensation compen- vahre
I ,I mlion selling
I/
1g ! –3.0
,,40”0 Q’ I I
Ii
,
Length ~n.th
compensation --lb com&nsation‘i~ ‘
5.0 Absolutevaluesetting i –2.0
,

(#3 Lengthcompensationdata)

E #::;ngDATA( ‘3) #:isp;;ooo

Once set, the mode is retained even after the screen has been changed or the power turned OFF.

-75-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM
3.2 MANUAL TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

3.2 MANUAL TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

The tool length measurement page appears when the fI’’LM] menu key is pressed.
The movement distance from the reference point to the measurement point can be measured and set as the
tool offset amount by moving the tool manually to the measurement point.
( 1 ) Tool length measurement I
When the tool is at the reference point, the distance from the tool nose to the measurement point (top
. .
edge of workpiece) can be measured and set as the tool offset data.

Reference point

1, J
I When the TLM reference length
(machine arameter and
R L
reference eight #O ave both
been set to zero, the tool length
measurement I mode is
established.
4
I I 1
%===
I

?’
I
Manual movement amount
LTrd (’Tool length offset data)

+=5%+7-
(2) Tool length measurement II
When the tool is at the reference point, the distance from the reference r)oint
. to the tool nose can be
measured and set as the tool off~et da’ta.

Reference point

7~$$,at.v@ -

Manual movement amount

TLM reference
length (machine
parameter)

I
Gauge block
I
I
Reference
height #o=~

Table /r

-76-
 3. TOOL COlkfPENSA TION TOOL PARAM
3.2 MANUAL TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

(3) Setting the tool offset data by tool length measurement

~LM] POOL OFFSET] TOOL 2.1 /7

T1234567E! fv14321 ml #I:
INC.
~ACHINE] [WORK:
GM] [TLM] # 1 0.000 16 0.000
K x 0.0 2 0. OQo 17 0.000
r $~ ; 1$!23 ! o. OQo 18 0.000
z -12.345 z -lk85 : 0.000 0. OQo
B -270:0 B -270.0 B 0.0 5 0.000 ;; o. w

6 0.000 21 0.000
+ 7 0. w 22 0,000
I Machine 8 0.000 23 0.000
zeropoint 0. 4KI0 24 0.000
TLMvalue Z“Y
~
1; 0.000 25 0. No
i Measwement 11 o~ 26 0.000
value
12 i 000 27 0.000
~J 13 0.000 28 0.000
., orkpim-a 14 0.000 29 0.000
m Ttik 15 0.000 30 0.000

i [1] DAT~(-12345)
~ . ..... .... .. ,.
OFFSET ~’”m:~ REGIST \ LIFE I WORK I I I I.MENU

1 ) With tool length measurement I mode

Position tool at reference point by Settings and display on tool length

reference point return. measurement page
L
I
Select the TLM page.
Select measurement tool.
I Press the ~NPUT] key after setting [A] into

~“””
#( ).
Set the data setting mode to absolute

“#A ABS.” appears in yellow. (“1)

The MEASURING display appears on
.. TLM page.
v ..””
Set the TLM switch on the machine Indicate O in the data ( ) area.
operation board to ON.
The measurement values will now appear
in sequence in the data ( ) area.
...
J/ ...
I I
The measurement values are also displayed

I Move the tool to the measurement point

by jog feed or manual handle feed, etc. I in ~LM].
The present value appears in ~ACHINE].

Set the offset number in # ( ) and press th(

~NPUT] key.
& .....”
1
I
The measurement data will now appear at

I Upon completion of measurement,

assign the tool offset number. I the assigned offset number.

NOTE For further details on the operating

procedure, refer to the operating instructions.
*1: This is possible starting with system version E.
-77-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.2 MANUAL TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

2 ) With tool length measurement II mode

START
Settings and display on tool length
T measurement page
~hcck the data of the axis specification

~“””-””
The first step for measurement is to
)arameter (#15 tl ml) among the machine
)aramet ers.
Set the value from the reference point to
J .. ....
:he table surface and select the TLM screen.
W # (0) DATA ( 00.) and press the
Set the value of the reference height ?NPUT] key.
using a gauge block, etc.
17hedata appears in SURFACE
#o=o.

1
i-
Position the tool at the reference Measure
point by reference point return. mentvalue
I ~-
— orkpiem la all
Table I
Select the measurement tool.
I I

...... The MEASURING display appears on the

Set the TLM switch on machine TLM page.
operation board to ON.
The provisional tool length data parameter
tlml – #O now appears in data ( ) area.

.... .. The measurement values will now appear in

Move the tool to measurement point by sequence in the DATA ( ) area.
jog feed or manual handle feed, etc. ,
The measurement values are also displayed
in TLM.
The present values, appear in ~ACHINE].

Set the offset number in # ( ) and press th~

... .. ~NPUT] key.
Upon completion of the measurement,
assign the tool offset number. The measurement data will now appear in
the assigned offset number

-78-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM
3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION

3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION

The tool registration page appears when the ~EGIST] menu key is pressed. How this page is used will
differ in accordance with the user PLC and so reference should be made to the instruction manual issued
by the machine builder.

3.3.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

1) The tools used can be entered into the magazine pots.

2) When the magazine pots and tool numbers have been changed by the tool selwtion command
or tool change command, the new tools numbers will be indicated.
3) Any data can be set into AUX ( ) in the setting area, and sequence processing can be
conducted by the user PLC.
4) Tools can be entered into the HEAD, NEXT1-3 and INDEX display areas at the top of the
page. The display names and display numbers can be changed.
5) The number of tools which can be entered differs according to the specifications. However, a
maximum of 80 tools and up to 8 digits for tool numbers can be entered.
6) Tool selection and spindle change can be performed by the manual numerical commands.

FOOL REGISTRATION] >

TOOL 3
HEAD NEXT1 NEXT2 NEXT3 INDEX

!JG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D

17 33 49 65
‘1 18 34 50 66
3 35 51 67
4 ;: 36 52 68
5 21 37 53 69
6 22 38 54 70
7 23 55 71
8 24 ;’?l 56 72
25 41 57 73
1: 26 42 58 74
11 27 43 59 75
12 28 44 60 76
13 29 45 61 77
14 30 46 62 78
15 31 47 63 79
16 32 48 ; 80
T
MG ( ii)T~L( )DOAUX()

OFFSET
.
I TLM LIFE I WORK I I I ! MENU,

3.3.2 TOOL REGISTRATION INTO MAGAZINE POT

Set: 1 into MG ( ).
Set 1234 into TOOL ( ).
Set 2 into D ( ). ‘“ ~

-79-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION

Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow ‘POOL REGISTRATION]

HEAD NEXT1 NEX’12 ~

MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D ;

1234-2 17 33
; 18 34
3 35
.. 4..... .. ... ..... . ...;: ................ ..... ... . 36 . . .. . ... .........

The tool numbers and D data appear in the designated

magazine number, the magazine number inside MG ( )
in the setting area is incremented by 1 and the data inside
tbe other ( ) is cleared.
NOTE Reference should be made to the instruction
manual issued by the machine builder for the D
data functions and objectives.

3.3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION INTO HEAD, NEXT, INDEX

These functions are used for changing the display data when the tool numbers set in the magazine pots and
the tool numbers displayed differ.

Set into HEAD MG (SP) TOOL ( )

Set into NEXT1 MG (N1) TOOL ( )
< TOOL REGISTRATION]
Set into NEXT2 MG (N2) TOOL ( ) HEAD NEXT1 NEXT2 ;
8
Set into NEXT3 MG (N3) TOOL ( )
Set into INDEX MG (N4) TOOL ( ) MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D ~
1234-2 17 33
; 18 34
3 35
...4.. ...... ... ..... .;:. . ..... ... .. . ... 35. . .... . ..... .......

e,= Press the ~NPUT] key.

,lM-joAu:)-----

~ WORK I
(
MG [NI)TOOL

I I I MENU,

“8” appears underneath HEAD in the data display area

and data setting area changes to MG @l).

NOTE The actual title display (HEAD, NEXT1–3, INDEX in the case of these instructions) at the top
of the page differs according to the machine builder, but the data is still set by SP, N1—N4.

-80-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.3 TOOL REGISTRATION

3.3.4 TOOL REGISTRATION DATA DELETION

Set CL into MG ( ).
1

Press the ~NPUT] key. DE’ All the data indicated at HEAD,
NEXT1—3 and MG1—MGn is
cleared to zero.

3.3.5 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND OPERATIONS (M, T) ON

TOOL REGISTRATION SCREEN
When issuing manual numerical commands on the tool registration screen, the normal data setting mode
must first be switched to the manual numerical command mode. In the manual numerical command mode,
both M and T commands can be executed by CRT screen operations.
( 1 ) Switching from normal data setting mode to manual
numerical command mode
T M
The cursor appears in the data setting area in the
normal data setting mode but not in the manual MG ( l_l)TooL( ) D( ) AUX( )
numerical command mode. This difference makes it
advisable to check that the mode has been switched.
Operation is as follows.

Set ~] (manual) in the first set of I

T M I
I fvlG( l@TOOL( )DOAUXOI”
=0”

1 ) The operation is the same whether a M or T

command is issued.

T M
MG ( )Td ) D( ) AUX( )

=’”

1 ) The data in the setting area is cleared and ihe

cursor is also cleared from the screen.
(2) The manual numerical commands are executed after the above (1) operation.
1 ) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The display area with the cm-responding
command value is highlighted and the manual numerical command input mode is established.
Use ~] for the tool functions and [M] for the miscellaneous functions.
2 ) Key in the numerical value to be assigned.
3 ) Press the ~NPUT] key. The command is now executed. The mode then reverts to the normal
data setting mode.

NOTE Manual numerical command operations are the same as operations on the present value screen
and so reference should be made to the manual numerical command section for the monitor/prese-
nt value screens for further details.

-81-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

(3) Gp~~tion for returning at any time from manual numerical command mode to normal data setting

reverts to the normal data setting

=’” [~]

1 ) The cursor appears in the first set of parentheses and normal data setting is enabled.

3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

The tool life monitoring page appears when the &IFE] menu key is pressed.
This function has two pages: the HE4D, NEXT and GROUP file page, and the tool life monitoring data
page.

3.4-1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

( 1 ) Tool life monitoring I
This function adds up the amount of time or the number of times each tool designated by the
program is used and it monitors the usage of those tools.
(2)
., Tool life monitoring II
This adds the spare tool seleetion function to the tool life monitoring I function.
It is used to select the spare tools from among the group of tool commands issued in the program.
Also, it provides tool compensation (tool position offset, cutter compensation) for the selected tool.
When the tool life monitoring II function is used, the following is selected by user (control)
parameters.

# Item Setting Details

30 Life monitoring ON Tool life monitoring is controlled.
valid OFF Tool life monitoring data is ignored.
31 Tool command ON The program tool command is treated as a tool
system 2 number, the group number with the tool matching the
tool number among the tool registration data is
located and the spare tool is selected.
OFF The program tool command is treated as a group
number, and the spare tool is selected for the tool
which matches the group number among the tool
registration data.
32 Tool selection ON The tool with the maximum remaining life is selected
system 2 from among the used and unused tools in the same
group.
When there is a multiple number of tools with the
same remaining life, they are selected in order of their
registration numbers. When there are no tools being
used and unused tools, they are selected in order of
normal life tools and abnormality tools.
OFF The tools are selected in order of their registration
number from among the used tools in the same
group. If there are no tools being used, they are
selected in the order of unused tools, normal life tools
and abnormality tools.

-82-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

3.4.2 TOOL LIFE SCREEN DATA DISPLAY

( 1 ) I-IEAD, NEXT, GROUP number file screen (display only; cannot be set)

WOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/2

GROUPTOOLNO. STFORM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE usm

HEAD : 1(YIOOOOO
12345678 1 000 -45.678 100.000 12345 234 34(mh)

NEXT : 800GOOO0
87654321 0 000 45.678 30.000 12345 234 34 (rein)

< GROUP LIST>

200 250 300 350 400 450

;: E 750 %
2Z 27G 3000 3Kll 4% 4E 5000
;E !%?
% 27E 37W 38E 4!%ll
1% 1= 200000 250000 300000 3500#0 4GWW 450Wtl 500000
5m 600000 65UW 650000 7m 7m Em 850000 m
IoOooOOlm 2oootKKI25013cc433000000 30000vo 4m 450cQ03 KKKKKIO
55m 6m 7m 7500000 8m 85000ccI 9000000 9500000 IONXXXXJ

)FFSETI TLM LIFE I WORK I I I I MENU

Display item Details

HEAD The tool numbers of the tool on the snind]e head and the
tools in the waiting position as well a; the tool life
monitoring data is displayed.
NEXT Only the tool numbers are displayed when the tool life
monitoring function is invalid.
GROUP LIST The group numbers entered as the tool life monitoring
data is clisplayed.
Up to 90 group numbers are displayed on one page and they are scrolled up or down one line at a time
using the [ ~ ] or [ .J ] key when they exceed 90.

........... ............ ....... .. ... . . . ... .... ... . . ... .. . . .. . .. . .. ... ... .. . ......... .............
150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
;~ 600 650 850 900 950
1500 2000 2:: 3E 3!; 4030 4500 5000
!% 9500
100oil 1$’; 2:Z 2$? h% 38R 4E 45000 50000

L I I I I I I I J

........................ ......... .. .. . . .... .. .... ... .. .................. ....... ............... ..............................+............

550 600 750 900
2= 2E 3&? E z
HI h? 6500 70CQ %% 80i10 8500 z
5%%
> 1% 1%% 2W 2:M &% 3%% 4% 4%!l 5000Q0

L I I I I I I 1 I /
1- @ Scrolled down by key.

-83-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

(2)
., Tool life monitoring data page
.-
The tool life monitoring data is displayed on this page in group units. If the data exceds one page,
it can be scrolled up or down one page at a time using the ~REVIOUS PAGE] or NEXT PAGE]
key.
The tool life monitoring data of any group can be displayed and set.

WOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP ~~m~o
# TOOL NO. ST FORM L-CMP R-CMP LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 1%5 234 234 (rein)
2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45 (rein)
3 123456 2 111 122.220 100.123 44444 100 50 (setj
4 12345 1 002 11.234 20 .OQo 100 15 (Cvc)
5 1234 0 000 11.111 12.222 0 4$0 O(rein)

6 123 0 222 0 0 0 9999 o (Cyc)

7
8

1:

11
12
13
14
15

#()( )()()( )( )( )( )()

OFFSETI TLM \ REGIST 1, ] MENU

Display Details Setting range

GROUP Group numbers of tools whose life will be monitored. 1–99999999
#1–#15 These are the data setting numbers and not the magazine
pot numbers.
TOOL NO. These numbers correspond with each of the tools and, 1–99999999
depending on the specifications, up to 1000 tools can be
entered.
ST

E
Tool status
Tool status
Released to machine builder

O Unused tool
This is normally set to O when a tool has been replaced
with a new unit.
1: used tool
1 when cutting has actually started.
2 Normal life tool
2 when use data (time, frequency) exceeds life data.
3 Tool abnormality 1 tool
4 Tool abnormality 2 tool
NOTE 3 or 4 depending on specifications of machine
builder.

-84-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

-U7pxw, - “.W.. ” . . . . .. . . . .. w
?ORM

Tool life monitoring system

Cutter compensation data format
E Tool length compensation data format

a Tool life monitoring system

O: Time during which tool has been used
The tool life is monitored over the time during which
cutting feed is executed.
1: No. of times tools have been mounted
The tool life is monitored by the number of times
that the tool has served as the spindle tool when tool
changes are conducted, etc.
2: Number of times used
See (Note 1).
b: Cutter compensation data format
O: Compensation number system
The compensation data among the tool data is
treated as compensation numbers, these are replaced
with the compensation numbers commanded in the
machining program and compensation is performed.
1: Added compensation system
The compensation data among the tool data is
treated as added compensation data, it is added to
the compensation amount indicatd by the compensa-
tion number commanded in the machining program,
and compensation is executed.
2: Direct compensation system
The compensation data among the tool data is
treated as direct compensation data, it is replaced
with the compensation amount indicated by the
compensation number commanded in the machining
program, and compensation is executed.
c. Tool length compensation data format
O Compensation number
1: Added compensation number
2 Direct compensation number
This function is the same as b.
L-CMP This depends on the data format assigned by FORM. Compensation
R-CMP numbers:
1–400
Added compensa-
tion numbers:
* 1—99999,999
Direct compensa-
tion numbers:
k 1—99999.999

-85-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

Display Details Setting range

AUX This depends on the specifications of the machine builder. O–65535
LIFE Whether the time used (minutes), number of times Time used:
mounted (number of times attached to spindle) or number 0–4000 (rein)
of machining operations (hole drilling frequency) is to be No. of times
used as the life corresponding to each tool depends on the O–9999 (times)
data format which is assigned by FORM. Frequency of usc
Tool life is infinite when O has been set. O–9999 (times)
(Note 1) Usage count
The number of times a tool is used is counted
when there has been a change from the rapid
traverse command (GOO,etc.) to a cutting feed
command (GO1, G02, G03).
This does not apply for rapid traverse and cutt-
ing feed commands without movement.

G 00
- In cutting In cutting feed
“ feed - -
A Incremented by 1 A Incremented by 1

usED The data is displayed by the system that has assigned the Time used:
use data for each tool under the tool life monitoring 0–4000 (rein)
system. No. of times
(Note 2) The usage data is not counted in the machine O–9999 (times)
lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run, and Frequency of use
single block modes. O—9999 (times)

-86-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

3.4.3 TOOL LIFE MONITORING DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING

(Tool life monitoring data screen page 2)
( 1 ) Data display
The tool life monitoring data page appears when the NEXT PAGE] key is selected from the HEAD,
NEXT and GROUP number file ua~e in the previous section.
The data of the group which was ~et-the prev~ous time is displayed but with a first time setting the
data is all blank.

WOOLLIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

Set G123 into #( ). GROUP123
r TOOL NO. ST FORM L-CMP R-ChfP AUX LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 Z2il -345.678 !jO.LWO 12345 4: 234 [m!n)
2 1234567 3 120 12.340 39.999 11111 45 (mtn)
3 l;yu~ ; Ill 22.220 Io.m 44444 200 50 {s4)
Ilw 4
5 1234 0 ~
12.340
O.m 10.CCQ
100
o
I00
4m
15 (Cvcl
o(m)

I 6
:
123 0 222 O.wo o 0s o[m)
I
I Press the ~NPUT] key.
I 1:

11
12
13
14
15

I $()( 10(1[ 1[ 1 [)( 1[1

I
03WSEr ~TLM IREGIST ~“:LIFE””’
“1WORK I I I IMENu

The tool data entered in group 123 is displayed in order of

their entry. If the data exceeds one page, it can be referenced
using the NEXT PAGE] key.
(2) Data entry
The tool life monitoring data page is selected for the groups whose data is to be entered.
t-
1 ~OOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2
First set GOOO into # ( ) and GROUP123
press the ~NPUT] key. $TOOL NO. ST FORM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
I 12345S78 4 220 -345.678 50.2W 12345 400 234 (mm)
2 1234567 3 12u 12.340 39.s9 11111 3130 ~S[mm]
3 123456 2 Ill 22.220 10.WM 44444 203 w (MI
4 12345 1 IYJ2 12.340 100 151cw)
5 1234 0 C4!0 0.00Q 10.WO o 4% o [d

E’
6 123 0 222 O.m o 9s99 o(w)
;
1:
Set the neeessary data under the 11
12
tool number in ascending (+) 13
number order into the 14
15
corresponding ( ) and then pr-
ess the ~NPUT] key. $( 1( 10(1[ !( 1 [)( }()

.oFFsEr[ TLMIREGIST~:fiw;j} WORKI IMENU

NOTE 1. The settings are invalid The contents of # ( ) are incremented by 1 and the setting
when the tool numbers and number is set.
ST (statuses) among the
setting data have not been
set.
NOTE 2- It is not possible to set the
same tool into a multiple
number of groups.

-87-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.4 TOOL LIFE MONITORING

When the number of tools which has

been entered exceeds the number which
can be displayed on a page, new data
can be entered when only the #
numbers are set. ...............................-----------------------------------
.
1 Q
1;

11 12345678 4 220 w3.rno 49.939 m 234 bull)

12 12345s7 3 la 12.340 lCO.OXI 11111 40) 345 [mm)
13 123456 2 111 22.220 lo.mo 44444 1(03 1(4)[s01)
14 12345 1 W2 12.340 20.m Ial W3s l%olqd
15 1234 0 cm o 0 O’Km O[mid

)()()( 1( )[ )( 1{)

I 1
First set 16 into # ( ) and then press
the ~NPUT] key. UP

f-
~OOL LIFE] TOOL 4.22
GROUP123
$ T~L NO. STFORML-CMPR-CMPAUX LIFE USED
;!’
18
19
20
21
22
------------------------- ---------------------------------------- .

(3) Changing the data

1) First display the tool life monitoring data page on which the tools to be changed have been
entered.
2) Set the #numbers of the data to be changed and the change data into the prescribed ( ) in
the setting area and then press the ~NPUT] key.
3) The #number is incremented by 1 after each setting and it is set inside ( ) of the setting area.
4) To change # number data not displayed on the page, use the NEXT PAGE] or ~REVIOUS
PAGE] key to select the page or set the number into the # ( ) of the setting area and select
the screen.
5) The tools can be deleted by changing the tool numbers already entered to O.
(4) Deleting in group units
When the [C.B CAN] and ~NPUT] key is pressed after the tool life monitoring data page with the
groups to be deleted has been selected and the [SHIFT] key has been pressed, all the data in the
groups will be deleted.

NOTE To cancel data deletion after having entered the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys, press any key
except ~NPUT].

3.4.4 DELETION OF ALL TOOL LIFE M ONITO RING DATA (HEAD,

NEXT, GROUP file page 1)
When the [C.B CAN] and ~NPUT] key is pressed after the HEAD, NEXT and GROUP file page 1 has
been selected and the [SHIFT] key has been pressed, all the data will be deleted.

NOTE To cancel data deletion after having entered the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys, press any key
except ~NPUT].

-88-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PA RAM
3.5 WORK COORDINATES

3.5 WORK CO ORDINATES

The work inordinate offset page appears when the WORK] menu key is pressed.
On this page, six sets of work coordinate system offset data as well as the external work offset and machine
position data can be set and displayed for each of the number of axes involved.
%
WORK OFFSET] TOOL 5
#A: ABS. #l: WC;
#;~ G54 ~ j:} &O 71 G57 X 11 EXT X -200.000
72 Y -1 OH% 12 Y
43 z -300:000 73 z -300.000 13 3%
44 c 0,000 74 c 0.034 14 : O.oao

51 G55 X 200.000 81 fj58 X o,~ ~ACHINE] X lM. 000

52 Y 100.000 82 Y -100.000 Y 2m. 000
53 z -100,000 83 z -300.000 z -300.000
54 c 0.000 84 c 0.000 c 0.000

61 G56 X -150,002 91 G59 X 0.000

62 Y -100.000 92 Y -200.000
63 z -300.000 93 z -300.000
64 c 0.000 94 c o. coo

TM
# (~DATA( )

OFFSET TLM REGIST I LIFE I I i MENU ~

Item Setting range

# Details
(unit )
41 G54 x These set the work coordinate values from G54 & 99999.999
42 Y to G59 as well as the external work coordinate (mm)
43 z offset values.
44 c Offset data for work coordinate systems can be
set using absolute or incremental values.
(M330HM/335M system starting with version E
and M330HM-v1335M-v)
51 G55 x
52 Y Basicmachinecoordinatesvstem 1.
53
54
z
c -—. +1
.HH -- J
/-,
Extend ~
\
11
12
13
EXT x
Y
z
~5&
coordinate
& l-!
,,
*
Wo
/’
, ,@XT)offset
+
Kekrencepoint
.R
I /
system
14 c I /“
I
#6J G56 I
1/
71

81
G:57

G:58 coordinate
II
system
91 G59
.

-89-
 ,,

3. TOOL COIVIPENSA TION TOOL PARAM

3.5 WORK COORDINATES

Display item Details

#A: ABS. #I: INC. The currently valid setting mode (absolute/incremental
value setting) appears in yellow characters.
Check that the mode is correct before proceeding with the
[ data setting.

3.5.1 WORK CO ORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA SETTING

(1) when the numbers corresponding to the work coordinate systems and to the axis names are set in
# ( ), and the offset data is set-in DATA ( ), the work-coordinate systems and offset data can
then be set by pressing the ~NPUT] key.
(2) V/hen the offset data and numbers corresponding to the axis names and work coordinate systems
have been set and then the ~NPUT] key pressed, the set offset data appears at the positions of the
corresponding axis names and work coordinate systems, the number inside the setting area # ( )
changes to the next number and the contents of DATA ( ) are cleared.
(3) The number displayed in #( ) can be incremented or dccremented by 1 by pressing the [ ~ ] or [ J ]
key.
(4) When [I] is set in # ( ) and the ~NPUT] key is pressed, the incremental mode is set as the setting
mode. When settings are made in the incremental mode, the data in the setting area is added to the
data in the display area.
To release the incremental mode, set [A] in # ( ) and press the ~PUT] key and this will establish
the absolute mode. (For further details, refer to Section 3.5.5.) (Starting with system version E)

3.5.2 EXTERNAL WORK CO ORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA

SETTING
The external work coordinate system data is set when the deviation in the coordinate system is measured
by an external touch sensor and when all the work coordinate systems from G54 to G59 are to be offset
with the present offset values remaining unchanged.
There are two setting methods: using external data input for writing directly into the external offset (EXT)
and using manual operation for setting.
The setting methods are the same as those used for setting the work coordinate system offset data.

3.5.3 MACHINE POSITION DATA DISPLAY

The ~ACHINE] axis data displayed on the work coordinate offset page is the same that those on the
position display page. The present machine position is indicated from the zero point of the basic machine
coordinate system and it cannot be set.

3.5.4 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMANDS (M, T) ON WORK

COO RDINATE OFFSET PAGE
M and T commands can be executed by CRT screen operations. The actual operation is the same as that
for the manual numerical commands on the tool registration screen.

-90-
 3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.5 WORK COORDINATES

3.5.5 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA SETTING

M ODES (AIM OLIJTE/INCREMENTAL VALUE SETTING)
(Starting from system version E)
(1) Absolute setting
Switching to absolute setting mode
7

FiI=l
Press the ~NPUT] key after setting A o= r WORK OFFSET]
(- *1: ‘NC” /

I I
“#A: ABS” armears in vellow and the absolute sett-
ing mode is e%blished:

Example of absolute value setting for work coordinate offset data

when changing the G54 work coordinate system
Basic machine coordinate system

,M
\ J

I
1
—
offset
EXT

X=–150’

New

m I I
Setting
# (41) DATA ( –150)
Display
#41 G54 x – 150.000

-91-
3. TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL PARAM
3.5 WORK COORDINATES

(2) Incremental setting

Switching to incremental setting mode

\
Press the ~NPUT] key after setting I ~ WORK OFFSET]
into # ( ). w #A MBS.m
J
# ( l) DATA( )

“#I INC.” appears in yellow and the incremental

setting mode is established.

Example of incremental value setting for work coordinate offset data

When changing the G54 work coordinate system
Basic machine coordinate system
I

c- ‘::DATA(-lOO)
‘:]a:54
‘-150000
Once set, a mode will be retained even after the screen has been changed or the power switched
off.

-92-
 4. PARAMETERS ~USER)

4. PARAMIXERS (USER)
The following menu appears when the POOL PARA.M] function selector switch is pressed.
The tool offset menu appears when the power is switched on, and the parameter menu should be displayed
by pressing the ljWZIWJ] key.

Tool offsetmenudisplays
(Nal+5) I I
Pammetersmenudisplays , ---------- --- ..,----- . ------- ---------------- “---
(Nal-4) I
~OFFs~l Tf-M I REGIfl I LIFE 1W~~K I 1 ‘------------- I MENU
----;
----#
\PLC-SWI CONTROLI AXIS IPROCFSS1

a(Qq-xgl(--J++7J(+=J ~

m
Parameter menus
N(il-4
I PLC
switches
I #1-#s2
u Control
parameters
# 1 -#48
E
Axis
parameters
&~1toaxis6

..................................................................................... .......................................................
m
@
--
Refer to section on
tool offset.

❑ T1
Tool offsetmenudisplays
Tool offset Tool Tool Work

E
(Nal~5) amounts length offset coordimte
me,as- Io;m offset
# 1-#60 ure- GS4-G59
or ##1-#W ment $$1-w EXT
am
#61-#1213 31;:60
@&m)
LI
I or #31-#60 I 16-#3U Hm
●

8
A *O5
u $03 &

-93-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.1 PLC S WITCHES

4.1 PLC SWITCHES

The PLC switch page appears when the ~LC-SW] menu key is pressed.
The various control signals for NC operation are allotted by the user PLC and these signals (up to 32 sets)
can be switched ON and OFF from this page.
This page is produced by the user PLC and this will differ according to the individual NC system.
Refer&~e sho-tid thus be-made to the Instruction Manual issued by th~ machine builder. -

~LC SWITCH] PARAM 1

#
1 @AUTORESTART 9 Q 17 Q 25 Q
2 Q BLOCKDELETE10 Q #&!& OFF 18 Q 26 Q

s Q %To:wfh 11 Q 19 Q 27 Q

4 Q .%%ONa 12 Q 20 Q 28Q

5 Q ~&&r 13 Q 21 Q BQ

6 Q ;Rm%mi% 14 Q 22 Q 30 Q
7Q 15 Q 23 Q 31 Q

13Q 16 Q 24 Q 32 Q

#(m
;$%i%%i:~
CfJfWROL
i AXIS IPROCESS
I I I I I MENU

4.1.1 PLC SWITCH ON/OFF OPERATION

When the numbers of the switches to be turned ON are set into # ( ) and the ~NPUT] key is pressed,
the marks of the corresponding switches point upward.
The switch functions are now valid and are controlled.

To set OPTIONAL STOP to ON:

9Q 17$3

~ 1O$I AIJTOPOWEROFF 18@

IQ 19Q

Press the ~NPUT] key. 2Q 20 Q

3Q 21 Q

4Q 22Q
The OPTIONAL STOP switch mark .
15Q 23Q
points upward to denote that the switch is now ——— __— _—. I
ON.
To set an ON (upward pointing) switch to OFF (downward pointing), set the number of the upward
pointing switch into # ( ) as above and press the ~NPUT] key.
The functions which highlight the selected message display in yellow and PLC switch name (message
display) are provided by the user PLC and so will differ according to the machine builder.

-94-
 4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

The control parameter screen appears when the [CONTROL] menu key is pressed.

[CONTROL PARAMETER] PARAM 2

#
1 GOODRY-RUN 13 GOINTERP.OFF 25 DRILLAXISZ 37
2 MACROSINGLE 14 THREADLEADE 26 FIXED C. MODAL 38 % RWD(SEARCH)
3 M.POINT NGLECT 15 C-CMP.TYPEB 27 39 SHORTCUT (RT)
4 F1 DIGIT FEED 16 EXT.DEC.OFF 28 T-LENGAXISZ 40 EDIT LOCKB

5 MC LOCKRAPID 17 INITIALINCH 29 SYNC.TAP 41 R COMPENSATION

6 18 INITIALAJ3S 30 T-LIFE CHECK 42 PARAC.R. INVD
7 G04FIXEDTIME 19 INITIALSYNC. 31 T-COMMAND2 43 DECIMALPNT-P
8 COLL.ALM OFF 20 INITIALG96 32 T-SELECT2 44 COLL.CHK OFF
9 UNIT “10 21 INITIALz-x 33 45 LINEAR-TYPERT
~O DECIMALPNT 2 22 IIWTIALY-Z 34 46 COMPUTERLINK
11 MACROn ON 23 35 PLAYBACKG90 47 COM-VARRST CL
12 SUB-PROIT ON 24 RESTARTAUTO 36 MANUALl’r R~ 48 COM-VARPWDCL

#(m
AXIS I PROCESSI I I I I MENU

( 1 ) Control parameter setting

The control parameters are set from OFF to ON, or vice versa, by the following operations.
1 ) Set the uarameter number in the # ( ) ~arentheses.
2 j Press tie ~NPIJT] key, The color’ of ‘(he parameter display changes with the ON/OFF
switching.
(ON: yellow; OFF: blue)
(l%ample) When Xl has bwn programmed as the 1 mm X-axis movement amount in the machining
program:
——. — ———— ———— ——
I
Set 10 into # ( ). I
# (lo) I

ilw AXIS I PROCESSI I I

Press the ~NPUT] key.

I
[CONTROL PARAMETER] I
I
#
1 GQODRY-RUN 9 UNIT *1O I
I
2 MACRO SINGLE 10 W%izs&l
1
3 M.POINTNGLECT 11 MACROIT ON i
4 F1 DIGJTFEED 12 SUB-PROlT ON I
———. ———————. —..
The DECIMAL PNT 2 control parameter is
highlighted and the minimum digit in the program
without decimal point is set to 1 mm unit.
X1OO+ 100 mm

-95-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

Switch off the NC power after having set those parameters marked “(PR)” in the table. They will be valid
once the power is switched back on again.

# Item Setting Description I

1 300 DRY-RUN ON
the rapid traverse commands (GO, G27, G28,
G29, G30, G60).
‘“-1
Makes the external manual feed rate valid for

OFF Sets to the rapid traverse override value

multiplied by the rapid traverse rate set in the
machine ~arameter.
2 MACRO SINGLE ON Treats the macro block as a single block;
operation can be stopped at every macro block
during single block operation.
OFF Does not treat the macro block as a single
block; provides high-speed processing.
3 Jf.POINT NGLECT ON Ignores the interim point set in the program
when the G28 or G30 reference point return
command is ON, and returns the tool directly to
the reference point.
OFF Returns the tool via the interim point to the
reference point as specified in the program when
G28 or G30 is commanded.
4 PI DIGIT FEED ON Makes F1-digit feed control valid; provides the
speed set in the “F1 SPEED” parameter when
the F1-F8 command is issued and it provides
the feed rate directly with any command over
F9; it cannot be selected when the F1-digit feed
specification does not exist.
OFF Provides all direct f.axl rate commands without
reference to the F 1 SPEED parameter.
5 MC LOCK RAPID ON Sets the feed rate to the machine lock rate dur-
ing automatic operation in the machine lock
status.
OFF Sets the feed rate to the assigned speed during
machine lock; the processing time is same as for
normal automatic o~eration.
6

7 G04 FIXED TIME ON Gives G04 a time designation whether in the

synchronous feed mode (G95) or asynchronous
feed mode (G94).
OFF Gives G04 a time designation in the asynchron-
ous feed mode (G94) and a revolution designat-
ion in the synchronous feed mode (G95).

-9G -
 4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.2 CONTROL. PARAMETERS

# Item Setting Description

8 COLL. ALM OFF ON Changes the tool path so that the work is not
cut by the tool radius during the cutter
compensation interference check.
OFF Stops the operation as an alarm before the work
is actually cut when a block is judged to cause
the work to be cut by tool radius during the
cutter compensation interference check.
9 UNIT *1O ON Multiplies the movement command input
without a decimal point in the machining
program by 10; this applies only when the com-
mand unit parameter is subject to 0.001 mm or
0.0001 mm control.
OFF Moves the tool by the unchanged movement
command in the machining p rogram.
10 DECIMAL PNT 2 ON Controls “l” in the position command data
without a decimal point command as 1 mm (1
inch).
OFF Controls “l” in the position command data
without a decimal point command as the
minimum input command unit (0.01 mm, 0.001
mm or 0.0001 mm) as determined by the
specifications.
11 MACRO IT ON ON Makes the user macro interrupt valid.
OFF Makes the user macro interrupt invalid.
12 SUB-PRO IT ON ON Provides the subprogram type of user macro
interrupt.
OFF Provides the macro type of user macro inter-
rupt.
13 GO INTERP. OFF ON Moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate for
each axis independently with positioning in the
GOOmode. The tool does not move in a straight
line to the end point.
OFF Moves the tool over the shortest distance in a
straight line to the end point with positioning in
the GOOmode.
14 THREAD LEAD E ON Assigns the precision lead for address E with
inch thread cutting.
OFF Assigns the number of threads per inch for
address E with inch thread cutting.
15 C-CMP. TYPE B ON Provides arithmetic processing for the intersec-
tion point between the command block and next
command block when the start-up or cancel
command is issued during cutter compensation.
OFF Does not provide intersection point arithmetic
processing for the start-up or cancel command
block when the start-up or cancel command is
issued during cutter compensation, but it
provides the offset vector in the direction at
right angles to the command.

-97-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

# Item Setting Description

16 3XT. DEC. OFF )N Makes the internal deceleration signal of
machine interface signals invalid even if it is
input. (The rapid traverse rate of the machine is
not reduced.)
IFF When the external deceleration signal is input,
the machine feed rate is reduced to the speed set
by the machine parameter.

& :NITIAL INCH Establish= the inch command mode from

initialization after the power has been switched
on.
(Inch settings for parameters, offset amounts.)
Establishes the metric command mode from
initialization after the power has been switched
on.
@he metric system also applies for the input
setting units.)
18 :NITIAL ABS Establishes the absolute value command mode
from initialization after the power has been
switched on.
OFF Establishes the incremental value command
mode from initialization after the power has
been switched on.
19 [NITIAL SYNC. Established the synchronous feed mode from
initialization after the power has been switched

Establishes the asynchronous feed mode from

initialization after the power has been switched
on.
20 DWTIAL G96 ON Establishes the constant peripheral speed control
mode from initialization after the power has
been switched on.
OFF Cancels the constant peripheral speed control
mode from initialization after the power has
been switched on.
21 [NITIAL Z-X ON Establishes the G18 plane selection ZX mode
from initialization after the power has been
switched on.
OFF Establishes the G17 plane selection XY mode or
G19 plane sekxtion YZ mode from initialization
after the power has been switched on.
22 INITIAL Y-Z ON Establishes the G19 plane selection YZ mode
from initialization after the power has been
switched on.
OFF Establishes the G17 plane selection XY mode or
G18 plane selection ZX mode from initialization
after the power has been switched on.
23 INITIAL GOO ON Establishes the GOO@positioning) mode from
initialization after the power has been switched
on.
OFF Establishes the GO1 (linear interpolation) mode
from initialization after the power has been
switched on.
24 RESTART AUTO ON Moves the tool automatically to the restart
position at the first start during promam restart.
OFF Returns the tool to the restart position by
manual operation and restarts the program.

-98-
 4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

# Item Setting Description

25 DRILL AXIS Z ON Fixes the drilling axis for the canned cycle to the
Z axis.
OFF The drill axis for canned cycle is any axis except
those on the plane designated by the G17 —
G19 commands.
26 FIXED C. MODAL ON Moves the tool to the drilling position during
the canned cycle mode according to the modal
status (GO, Gl) of the NC unit.
OFF Positions the tool at the drilling position with
the GOOcommand in the canned cycle mode.
28 T-LENG AXIS Z ON Fixes the offset axis during tool length offset to
the Z axis.
OFF The offset axis in the tool length offset is the
axis assigned by the program.
29 SYNC. TAP ON Sets the G74 or G84 tap cycle to the floating
tap chuck-less tap cycle.
OFF Sets the G74 or G84 tap cycle to the tap cycle
with a floating tap chuck.
30 T-LIFE CHECK ON Controls the tool life monitoring.
OFF Ignores the tool life monitoring data.
31 T-COMMAND 2 ON Treats the tool commands in the program as
(when tool life tool numbers.
monitoring is valid) OFF Treats the tool commands in the program as
group numbers.
32 T-SELECT 2 ON Selects the tool with the maximum remaining
(when tool life life from among the used and unused tools in
monitoring is v slid) the same group.
OFF Selects the tools in order of entry from among
the used tools in the same group.
35 PLAYBACK G90 ON Prepares the machining program created by
playback with absolute values.
OFF Prepares the machining program created by
playback with incremental values.
36 MANUAL IT RST ON Clears to zero, by pressing the reset button, the
interrupt amount (with manual ABS OFF) by
manual or handle feed during the execution of
an absolute value command.
OFF Holds the interrupt amount (with manual ABS
OFF) by manual or handle fed during the
execution of an absolute value command even
when the reset button is pressed.

-99-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

# Item Setting Details

38 % RWD (SEARCH) ON Stops the tape after rewinding it when the block
which has been designated by reading is not
located up to the program end (%) during a
tape search.
OFF Stops the tape at its position without rewinding
it when the block which has been designated by
reading is not located up to the program end
(%) during a tape search.
39 SHORT CUT (RT) ON Moves the axis to the end point by a short cut
for absolute commands only.
OFF Regardless of whether the values are absolute or
incremental, this moves the axis to the end point
via the command direction.
40 EDIT LOCK B ON Disables editing for machining programs with
label numbers 8000 to 9999.
OFF Removes the editing lock B restriction.
41 R COMPENSATION ON Compensates for tool movement toward the
inside using servo delay, etc. with a command
during circular cutting.
OFF Moves the tool toward the inside using servo
delay, etc. with a command during circular cutt-
ing, and forms an arc which is smaller than the
command value.
42 PARA C.R. INVD ON Makes parameter-based coordinate rotation
invalid.
OFF Makes parameter-based coordinate rotation
valid.
43 DECIMAL PNT-P ON Makes the G04 address P decimal point com-
mand valid.
OFF Makes the G04 address P decimal point com-
mand invalid.
44 COLL. CHK OFF ON Does not perform an interference check during
Notti V series only cutter compensation. It is set ON when cutter
compensation is to be applied for microscopic
segment programs. Its performance conditions
apply when the high-speed mode IB applies.
OFF Performs an interference check during cutter
compensation.
At OFF, its performance is halved even in the
high-speed mode IB.
45 LINEAR-TYPE RT ON Operates the rotary axis in the same way as a
linear axis for movement by the absolute value
command.
40”
When
G09GOOC400. ;
Tool movesby
1 rotation
is executed: (360’)+ 4m.
OFF operates the linear
axis as a rotary axis.
40°
When 0
G09GOOC400. ; Tool movesby 40°.
is executed: @

-100-
 4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

# Item Setting Description

46 COMPUTER LINK ON Establishes the on-line mode with the host
@mputer.
OFF Establishes the off-line mode with the host
computer.
47 COM-VAR RST CL ON When resetting occurs, this clears variables
#100 -#149 with 100 sets of common variables
and clears variables #100 -#199 with 200 or 300

OFF After resetting occurs, this retains the common

variables.
48 COM-VAR PWD CL ON When the power is switched ON, this clears
variablea #100 —#149 with 100 sets of common
variables and clears variables #100-#199 with
200 or 300 sets.
OFF After the power is switched ON/OFF, this
retains the common variables.

-101-
 .,, ,,

4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

4.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

The axis parameter screen appears when the [AXIS] menu key is pressed.
The required parameters can be set for each axis.

[AXIS .PARAMETER] PARAM 3

ti (x) (Y
.. (z) (u; (v w
1 MIRR. IMAGE ‘0
i! DOG TYPE (A) o
3 DOG TYPE (M) o
4 AX. RELEASE
5 G76/87IGNR :

13 G76/87 ( - ) 1
7 ~-CHECK OFF
8 CW-CHECK-N 1234. 00~ 7’
9 ~-CHECK-P 10.000
~o G60 SHIFT 0.000

11
12
13
14
15

# (mAxIS
( ) DATA( )

1 I I I MENU

—
# Item Details Setting range (unit)
1 MIRR. IMAGE Reverses sign for movement data 0: Mirror image
(incremental amounts) in next block dur- invalid
ing tape, memory or MDI operation. 1: Mirror image
(Note) Set the mirror image parameter valid
OFF during the execution of the
machining program at the same
coordinate position as the
parameter was set ON. If the selec-
tion position has changed, be sure
to execute reference point return
and G92 G53X_ Y_ X_ a_ ;.
For further details, refer to Section
6.12 on mirror image in the 11
Operating Instructions.
2 DOG TYPE (A) First reference point return is always dog O: High-speed
type, but this sets the 2nd and following return
returns to dog type or high-speed 1: Dog type return
(memon) tvDe.
3 DOG TYPE (M) Gives same setting as above function for O: High-speed
manual reference point return. return
1: Dog type return
4 AX. RELEASE Releases control axis from NC control. O: Axis release
It is used to isolate additional axis (rotary invalid
table, etc.) from machine and control 1: Axis release valid
other axes.
5 G76/87 IGNR This is set when no shift is required in the O: Shift
axis direction. 1: No shift

-102-
 4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

6 G76/87 (-) Designates (–) for tool retract (shift) direc- 0 Shift direction
tion after spindle orientation with canned (+)
cycle G76 (fine boring) or G87 (back 1: Shift direction (-)
boring).
(b:+ )

(–,+)

(–,A)

A : No shift setting

7 OT-CHECK OFF Ignores values set in 443and #9. O Soft limit valid
1: Soft limit invalid
8 OT-CHECK -N Sets movable range in negative or positive &99999.999 (mm)
9 OT-CHECK -P direction from zero point of basic machine When same value is
coordinate system for each axis. set (but not O) for
443,#9, this
function is invalid.
/ /////////////////// (Example)
#8 = 10.
Basicmachinecoordinatesystem+ /
/ _ #9 = 10.
1 -x +x /
/ /
Movablerange
/ /
/ /
-Y
f///: f////// //////if- /

10 G60 SHIFT Sets distance and final positioning direc- A 99999.999 (mm)
tion when G60 command (uni-direction
positioning) is issued.

10.G60shiftamount
AssQlwd
end point

Assigned start point

-103-
 .,,

4. PARAMETERS ( USER)
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

The machining parameter screen appears when lhe PROCESS] menu key is pressed.
.
~ROCESS PARAMETER] PARAM 4
[COORD.R~.] H.DATA V.DATA ~1 SPEED] ~OICE OUTPUTl
#l PLANE 12 F1 50 23 VOLUME O
2 CENTER O.mx 0.0; 13 F2 PLANE SELECTJ
3 VECTOR 0.000 0.000 14 F3 :$ 24BASE-AXI X
4 ANGLE O.000 15 F4 800 25 JY
16 F5 o 26 z
[SCALING] 17 F6 o 27AUX-AXIf
5P 0.000000 18 F? o 28 J ;
19 F8 29 w
&ul::R~:: OVR.] 20 FM1 90: 31jAux-Ax2!
0.000 21 FM2 1200 31 J
7 MAXANGLE 0.000 22 K 25 32 K
8 DCC.ZONE 0.000
[mHERS]
[AUTOTLM] 33 G73n 0.000 38 C-rot.R 40.000
9 SPEED 34 G83n 0.000 39 C-ins.R 40.000
10 ZONEr 0.00: 35 ARCERR 0.100 40 R COMP.P (0.123)O
11 ZONEd 0.000 36 3-D CMP O.om 41 MINUTELENGTH O
37 F-UNIT.TYPE O 42 DCC.ANGLE o

# (I)DATA( ) ( )

PLC-SWI CONTROL I I I I MENU

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

[COORD. ROT.] These set the planes, center coordinates, 1. Axis control
1 PLANE vector components and angles for coordin- address names:
2 CENTER ate rotation control. x, Y, z, u, v,

3 VECTOR W, A, B, C, etc.
4 ANGLE t 2. * 99999.999
1. Plane, (mm)
vertical
oxis 3. * 99999.999
(mm)
. 4. & 180.0°
T-l- 3. Vectorcomponents,
horizontal
axis

Wn 1.Pkmq
z+Center
ccorctinwes, horimrwd
X&
horizontal
axis
[SCALING] This sets the magnification (scale) of the o–99.999999
5 P expansion or contraction for the machin-
ing program assigned by the G50 or G51
command. It is valid when the magnifica-
tion has not been assigned by the
program.
[AUTO CORNER This sets the valid judgment condition for
OVR.] automatic corner override assigned by
6 OVERRIDE G62. 6. 0–100 (%)
7 MAX ANGLE 7. 0–180’
8 DCC. ZONE 8. O–99999.999
(mm)

-104-
 4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

&
,, I Ttem
. ..- I ni=.tailc
- . .. ... Setting rarwe (unit)
[AUTO TLM] This sets the 1–60000 (mm/min)
feed rate for
automatic
9 SPEED
startpoint tool length
Decelemtion measurements.
startpoint
10 ZONE r This sets the O–99999.999 (mm)
x distance from
Measuring the measuring
r SP point to the
Measuring deceleration
d ~ point
start point.
d
11 ZONE c1 & This sets the O–99999.999 (mm)
zone of the
point at
which the tool
should stop.
~1 SPEED] F1–F8 F1–F8
12 F1 These set the data for converting the exeeu- 1—60000 (mm/min)
tion sp~ for F1-di@ commands.
13 F2 FM1, FM2
FM1, FM2 1–60000 (mmlmin)
These set the upper limits when the F1-digh K
rate is changed. 0–32767
\ \
FM1 (clamp value for F1–F4)
19 F8 FN12 (clamp value for F5–F8) AF= APx FMn/K
20 FM1 K
21 FM2 This sets the constant which determines the A P Handle pulse (*)
22 K amount of speed change per manual handle
pulse when the speed is to be changed.
23 ~OICE This sets the volume level for the voice output. O No voice output
OUTPUT] 1: Low volume
VOLUME 2 Medium volume
3: High volume
PLANE These set the addresses of the control axes X, Y, & U, V, W, A,
SELECT] corresponding to the G17, G18 and G19 com- B, C and other such
BASE-AX I mands” axis control address
24
names
25 J
26 K
27 AUX-AX1 I
28 J
29 K
30 AUX-AX2 I
31 J
32 K

-105-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

— #.. I Item I Details I Setting ramze (unit)

[OTHERS] These set the return amount per cycle for O–99999.999 (mm)
33 G73 n the G73/G83 (deep hole drill) command.
34 G83 n
35 ARC ERR This sets the allowable value for the radius 0–0.100 (mm)
error at the start and end points for the
arc error.
When assigning arc center coordinates 0–1.000 (mm)
(starting with
Arc error set version E)
by parameter

start End
point point

e w
Startpointradius
4
Endpointradius
When assigning arc radius (R)
Arc error setby

start
pint

-
R~diusR
4 .
Distance
between
startandendpoints
—
36 3-D CMP Denominator constant based on o–99999.999
3-dimensional cutter compensation
Value of P when Vx = i - r/p,
Vy=j”rlp, Vz=lz” r/p
Where Vx, Vy, Vic Veetors of X, Y and Z
axes or parallel axes
i, j, k: Program command va]u~,
~ ~~~~s~ti~~~~e~ Settin is O

37 F-UNIT_ TYPE This reduces the assigned F command o, 1, 2

value without decimal point to 1/10 or
1/100.
O 1 x (standard)
1: 1/10x
2: 1/100x

-106-
 4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

38 :-rot .R This sets the length from the C-axis 2.000-99999.999
~ only) (spindle) center to the tool nose. With (mm)
normal direction control type H, it is used
in the rotation speed calculation at the
block joins.
“.
39 ~-ms. R This sets the arc radius to be automati- 0.000-99999.999
~ only) cally inserted into the corner during C-axis (mm)
normal direction control.
It is valid only with normal direction
control txme L
40 R COMP. P This sets the compensation constant for o–99 (%)
(V only) the control error in the high-precision
mode.
The maximum control error (mm) is indic- (Standard valuti O)
ated in the parentheses.
41 MINUTE For linear blocks in the high-precision O– 10 (mm)
LENGTH mode, this can provide curve approxima- (Standard valuw O)
(V onIy) tion and contain the radial error within Note In a program
the control error. Set the single block seg- characterized by
ment length in the microscopic segment severe curve varia-
program. tions, the speed
may fluctuate
greatly and the
precision may be
impaired.
In this case, use the
O setting.
42 DCC. ANGLE In the high-precision mode, this automati- 0–10°
(V only) cally identifies a corner and produces a O: Autotnatic
smooth curve or sharp corner. identification
With automatic identification, the (Standard value O)
minimum value of the angle to be
regardwl as the corner is set when the
angIe which should be a corner is to be
made smooth or when the angle which
should be smooth is to be made sham.

-107-
4. PARAMETERS (USER)
4.4 MACHINING PARAMETERS

(Coordinate rotation setting example)

Assign the coordinate rotation plane.

I Set 1 into # ( ).
I i- ———
___ .—
Set X into DATA ( ).
w’ # ( l)DATA ( x) ( Y) 1
Set Y into DATA ( ).

I
b
I&&f& 1111 1MENU
I I

I
Press the ~NPUT] key. PROCESS PARAMETER]
I
[:yp~fir.] ~.;ATA] ~. DATA] I
2 CENTER 0.000 0. C& I
3 VECTOR o. CQo 0.000
4 ANGLE 0. coo
-—— —_ ——_ ___ ___ __ I
Set the center coordinates.

Set 2 into # ( ).
Set 20.000 into DATA ( ).
Set 20.000 into DATA ( ).

Ow
PROCESS PARAMETER] i
I Press the ~NPUT] key.
I [COORD.R~.] ~. DATA] ~.DATA]
II

# 1 PLANE
2 CENTER 20. CA 20. 00;
3 VECTOR 0.030 0.000
4 ANGLE 0.000
——_ __ ——— ——— ___ _
Set the vector components.
I
Set 3 into # ( ).
_—— —.— ——— ——— ——— —
Set 1.732 into DATA ( ), I
Set 1,000 into DATA ( ). I # (3) DATA(1.732) (1.000)

I I MENU .

I
[PROCESS PARAMETER]
I
[~OORD.R~.] ~.DATA] ~. DATA]
I Press the ~NPUT] key.
I # 1 PLANE
2 CENTER 20.d 20.A
I
I
3 VECTOR 1.732 1.(D3 I
4 ANGLE 30.txlo
[ ——— ——— .—— ——— ——— I

The angle is automatically computed and displayed

from vector components.
It can also be set directly.
In this case, veetor components are O for both the
vertical and horizontal axes.

-108-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

5. EIXI’ING AND NIANUiW DATA INPUT I@dDI)

5.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

(1) Outline of functions
The editing screen or MDI screen appears when the ~IT/MDI] function selector key is pressed.
The contents of the machining programs stored in the memory can be edited on the editing screa
by means of addition, deletion or change. Program numbers can be newly entered into the memory
and new programs prepared on the screen.
On the MDI screen, MDI data can be set as well as corrected and deleted. Programs prepared as
MDI data can also be entered into the memo~ as machining programs.
(2) Display with screen selection
The MDI screen appears when the first screen is selected with the ~DIT/MDI] key after the power
has been switched on.
This screen is selected by the menu key when machining programs are being edited on the editing
screen. When the editing screen appears, no programs for editing are called at first and so the
[SEARCH] or PROGRAM] keys must be operated. The [SEARCH] key is operated for editing
programs already enteral in the memory; the PROGRAM] key is operated for editing programs
which will be newly entered into the memory.
If the MDI semen has already been selected, the MDI data can be input without modification. There
is no search operation.
When operation on the EDIT/MDI screen has been suspended and another function has been
operated, the previously selected screen— either editing or MDI—is selected by pressing the
~DIT/MDI] key. Both the display data and previous data appear and so the data input or editing
operation can be continued.
(3) Canned cycle program editing
Parameters must be set when editing canned cycle programs.
The editing screen can be used to edit such programs when the “fix-P” parameter is set to 1 on the
machine parameter basic specification parameter screen.
(4) Editing for macro operators
If a machining program (including comment statements) contains a character string which matches
a macro operator, it will be automatically replaced by an intermediate code during editing. During
editing, therefore, this means that the display may differ from the character string which has been
input.
@m.mples) ATN + ATAN
SQR + SQRT
RND + ROUND

-109-
 ,,--

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

5.2.1 MDI SCREEN MENU FUNCTIONS

(1) Menu selected by @3DIT/MDIl key

MD 1

ijl G28 XO YO ZO;

N2 G92 XO YO ZO;
N 3 GOD X-1OO. Y-1OO. ;
N 4 GO1 X-300. F2DOO;
N 5 Y -300. ; I
N 6 X-1OO. : I
N 7 Y-1OO. : I
N 8 M02; I
% I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
1
1
I 1’1 I I IE=ANI

Menu Function
~DI] The highlighted MDI menu indicates that the MDI screen has been selected.
The MDI data can be set on the MDI screen.
EXPAND] Press the EXPAND] menu key to display the expansion menu for the MD1
screen. Alternatively, it can be displayed by p ressing the ~ D1] menu key.
~DI~ This is used to switch to the editing screen.

(2) MDI screen expansion menu

FILE IMDI-ENTI I I 1“ I I I

Menu Function 1
I MDI-ENT The MD1 data can be entered in the memory as a machining p rogram.

MDI-ENT is highlighted when an expansion menu is selected. Selecting one such menu enables
expansion operations but MDI data cannot be set. This data can be set if none of the expansion
menus is selected.
The expansion menu is selected when the EXPAND] key is pressed once and it is released when the
key is pressed again. It is automatically released when the settings have been completed properly.

-110-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MD?)
5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

(3) MDI data setting

Press the data keys in sequence

according to the machining
program list and enter the MDI
data.

N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;
N2 G92 XO YO 20 ;
N3 GOO X–1OO. Y–1OO. :
N4 GOl X –300. F 2000 ;
N5 Y –300. ;
N6 x – 100. ;
N1G28XOYOZ0 ; ;N2G92XOYOZQ ; ; N3GOO%–1 OO’t–

b
N7 Y – 100. ;
100. ;N4G01X-300. F2000; N5Y-300 ;N6X-1 00.
M02 ;

‘“
N8

c)
ml G28 XO YO ZO :
Press the lJNPUT] key. UP N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
N3 GOOX-} 00. Y-1 00. ;
N4 GO1 X-300. F2000 i
N5 Y-300. :
1) The data is written into the MD1 memory area.
N6 x–1 00. :
2) It appears on a new line for each block. N7 Y-1 00. ;
3) The MD1 SETTING COMPLET message ap- N8 M02 :
pears and MDI operation is now possible. The % MDI SETTING COMPLET
operation start position is the data head block.
The cursor appears at the head block.

NOTE k If the ~PUT] key is not pressed, the data merely remains on the screen and is not stored in
the memory. This key must be pressed if it is to be stored.
NOTT32: Refer to the section on program editing operations for further details on which keys to operate
when setting the MDI data.
NOTE 3 Check that the MDI SETTING COMPLET message has appeared when starting MD1
operation. If the EDITING or MDI NO SETTING message has appeared, MDI operation
cannot be started. When the ~NPUT] key is now pressed, the MDI SETTING COMPLET
message will appear.

-111-
 . .

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI] .

5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

(4) MDI operation start position setting

The start block can be designated when starting the execution from a midway block after the MDI
data has been set. First, the data is set as instructed in the “MDI data setting” section. The start
position of operation is set in the head block of the data. If this is to be changed, the cursor is moved
to the head of the block which is to serve as the start position and the ~NPUT] key is premed.
(Example) When executing the M02 block of the data indicated in the section above

~,
block which is to serve as the start
o= N5Y300
N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;
N2 G92 XOYO ZO ;
N3 GOOX-1OO. Y-1OO.;
N4 GO1X-300. F20000;

N6 x-loo:;
1 ) Return to the MDI NO SETI’ING status. N7 Y-1 00. ;
~8 M02 ;
MDI NO SETTING

Press the ~NPUT] key.

‘“ ~
1 ) MDI operation is enabled from the assigned
block. [
2 ) The assigned block is displayed at the top of the
screen and the MDI SETTING COMPLET
message appears.

,,.:
,.
,.

-112-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

5.2.2 EDITING SCREEN MENU FUNCTIONS

(1) Menu selected by ~IT/MDIl key
I Y
1000 TEST CUT PROGRAM I EDIT
11 (TEsT+tT-+ROGFMM) : IN19
12 G28 XO YO ZO: IN20
13 T01; ,N21
i 4 T02 M06 S1OOO;
I 5 G90 G54 GOO XO YO ; 1;;:
16 G04 X5.; IN24
I 7 G43 Z-1OO. Hll M03 ltJ25
I 8 G41 GO1 X1OO. Y2CQ DO1 F30Q; IN26
I 9 Yloo. : ,N27
110 X50. ,N28
ill G02 k. R50, :
112 Y250. ; l;%
413 X200. : IN31
i14 Ylw). ; IN32
115 X254). Y200, ; IN33
416 IN34
‘!17 IN35
418 ]N36
I
I
I

Menu Function
@3D1T] The highlighted editing menu indicates that the editing screen has been selected.
Machining programs can be edited on the editing screen,
EXPAND] Press the @SPAND] menu key to display the expansion menu for the editing
screen. Alternatively, it can be displayed by pressing the ~DIT] menu key.
~DI] This is used to switch to the MDI screen.

(2) MDI screen expansion menu

FILE I SEARCHIPROORAM
I I I 1 I !

Menu Function
FILE 1. The list of the machining programs entered in the memory can be checked.
2. Comments can be set.
SEARCH 1. Any character string can be searched.
2. Program numbers and sequence numbers for editing can be searched.
PROGRAM New machining p rograms can be entered and prepared on the screen,

-113-
 ,. ’,!’.’ “

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

EXPAND is highlighted when an expansion menu is selected. Selecting one such menu enables expansion
operations but programs cannot be edited. Programs can be edited if none of the expansion menus is
selected.
The expansion menu is selected when the EXPAND] key is pressed once and it is released when the key
is pressed again. It is automatically released when the settings have been completed properly.
(3) Editing program call
When a program is to be edited on the editing screen, the [SEARCH] or PROGRAM] expansion
menu key must first be operated. When editing a program already entered in the memory, operate
the [SEARCHl key.
When editing a program which is to be newly entered into the memory, operate the PROGRAM]
key. Refer to the section on editing screen expansion operations for further details.
When proceeding with program editing, the previously edited data appears if the editing screen is
selected again after the operation of another function screen. In the following cases, nothing is
recalled and so when editing, the data search should be conducted again.
. When the editing screen has been selected after the program, which was edited on the editing screen,
has been condensed using the condense function
e When the editing screen has been selected after another program has been merged by the merge
function with the program which has been editedon the editing screen

..

-114-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

Program editing is common to both the editing and MDI screens.

5.3.1 DAT’A lllSP_LAY l.JPIIATIFfC?r (l? AGE-13 Y-PACiE SCROLLING)

Using the PREVIOUS PAGE] and ~EXT

PAGE] keys, the data displayed on the [ml
screen can be updated page by page.
When the next screen has been selected, the
bottom-of-the-semen display appears at the
top of the screen; alternatively, when the
previous screen has been selected, the top-
of-the-screen display appears at the bottom
of the semen.
}
N22 X24).Y23. ; NEXT
f N23 X12. Y%. ; ; Jr) PAGE
~~~EIous N24 COO Xlo. ;
D(’ -
\ NEXT
% ‘~)o PAGE

DPREV1OU9
PAGE
[~

For instance, it is assumed that the figure

Ml G28 XO YO ZO ;
on the right represents the display data.
N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
N3 GOOX-300. ‘f-300. :
N4 GO1 X-200. F2000 :
N5 Y-200. :
N6 X200. ;
1

N12 Z300. :
Press the ~13XT PAGE] key. DW N13 Y200. :
N14
N15 I

-115-
 .,\...,

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.2 DATA DISPLAY UPDATING (LINE-BY-LINE SCROLLING)

I
Using the [ t ] or [J.] key, the data
displayed on the screen can be updated line
o– ~ IN IGZSXOYOZO
N2G92XOYOZ0
El
by line. ~t_ Cursor
When the [J. ] key is pressed at the bottom N3 GO) X-3C0. Y-W, movement
of the screen or when the [ t ] key is pressed on same
N 4 GO1X-ZKI, F2X0
screen
at the top of the screen, the display is N5 Y-%.X).:
scrolled by one line.

Nll
N12 z3cln. ,
r o
o 1 r
— Q

L Page is scrolled
without cursor
movement

I I

Every time the [ ~ ] key is pressed, the N1 G28 XO YO 20 ;

cursor moves down one line in llw N2 G92 XO YO 20 ;
succession. N3 GO()X-300. ‘f-300. ;
1 1
1 N4 GO1 X–200. F2000 ; 1
N5 Y-200, ;
1) Every time the key is pressed, the cursor
moves down one line at a time. I N6 X200. ;
!
~m2Z300. ; J

2 ) When the key is pressed again with the cursor /

at the bottom of the screen, the display data N2 G92 XO YO 20 ;
is scrolled up by one line. The cursor stays at N3 GOO X-300. Y–300. ;
the bottom of the screen. N4 GO1 X–200. F2000 ;
3 ) When the key is pressed again, the display N5 Y-200. ;
data moves up one line at a time in succession N6 X200. ;
and new data appears at the bottom of the /
N12 Z300. ;
screen.
fjl13 Y200. ;
4 ) Conversely, when the [ ? ] key is pressed, the
cursor moves up one line at a time and after
reaching the top of the screen, the display
data moves down one line at a time in
succession and the previous block data ap-
pears at the top of the screen.

-116-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.3 ALTERING DATA

.
ml G28 XO YO ZO ;
Unless the machining program is the one currently N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
in the memory operation mode, it can be edited at N3 GOO X–300. Y-300. ;
any time. N4 Gol X–200. F2000 ;
N5 Y-2(IO. ;
When, for instancq the data to be edited is
!46 X200. ;
displayed as in the figure on
. . ..the
. . . .right:
.. N7 Y200. ;
It is assumed that the N7:Y200. s block is to be M02;
%

Move the cursor to the position of DE

the data to be replaced. N7 WOO. ;
M02;
<% d

‘1====1’”
1 ) With each character setting, the cursor
automatically moves one space to the right.
2 ) With key-in, the EDITING message appears.

@
Press the ~NPUT] key upon llw
completion of the correction.

1 ) The corrected data is written into the memory.

2 ) The corrected data is displayed with a space
code inserted before and after each word.
3 ) The cursor moves to the top of the screen.
4 ) The EDITING message is cleared when the
data is written into the memo~.

-117-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.4 INSERTING DATA (~NSERT])

It is assumed as an example that data F500 is to be inserted into the “N7 G03 Y200. J1OO. ;“ block.

aEEiiEElShift the cursor to the character

‘“ ~
@ \
f
Press the ~NPUT] key. OR
N71G03Y200.J 100.D
M02:
(% J
1) The characters following the cursor position
are moved to the right.
2) The data can be inserted at the position
indicated by the cursor.

co

1) When the keys of the data to be inserted are

pressed, the data is set at the position indic-
ated by the cursor.
2) The cursor is automatically shifted to the
right by one space every time a character is
inserted, and all the following characters are
moved to the right.
3 ) By repeating steps 1 and 2, any number of
characters can be inserted continuously. No
more data can be inserted, however, when
there is no more space after the cursor
position on the screen.
4 ) The EDITING message appears with key
input.

@ f-
After the data has been corrected, up
press the ~NPUT] key. N7~G03Y200. J1OO. F500 ;
yo2;
(% .. ...... .
1) The corrected data is written into the memory.
2) Before and after each word of the correeted
data a space code is inserted and displayed
3) The cursor moves to the top of the screen.
4) The EDITING message goes off when the
data is written into the memory.

-118-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.5 DELETING SINGLE CHARACTERS (@lELETE])

It is assumed as an example that a zero is to be deleted in F5000 of the “N7 G03 Y200. J1OO.F5000. ~’
block in order to set the feed rate to F500.

Shift the cursor to the position Uw

where the character is to be
deleted. I N7 G03 Y200. J1OO.F500~
M02: I
I J

a)
Press the ~ELETE] key. w

I I
N7 G03 Y200. J 100. F500u0:
M02;
w- EDITING
1 ) The data is deleted.
2 ) The cursor automatically shifts one space to
the right.
3 ) The EDITING message appears with key
input.

cl
After the data has been eorreeted,
press the ~PUT] key.
‘“ ~
1 ) The corrected data is written into the memory.
2 ) Before and after each word of the corrected
data a space code is inserted and displayed.
3 ) The cursor moves to the top of the screen.
4 ) The EDITING message goes off when the
data is written into the memory.

-119-
 .,, .

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.6 DELETING SINGLE BLOCKS ([C.B CAN]]

It is assumed as an example that the entire “N7 G03 Y200. J1OO.F500. ;“ block is to be deleted.

‘~’” Shift the cursor to the position t’Jl G28 XO YO Z(I:

I
N6 X200. ;
@7 603 Y200. J1 00. F500 ,
M02;
%

Q
Press the [C.B CAN] key. N1 G28 XO YO ZO;
w 1
1 I N6 X200. ;
u
1 ) The data in one block is deleted. M02: EDITING
2 ) The EDITING message appears with key input.

@
After the data has been corrected, up N1 G28 XO YO ZO;

1
2
)
)
press the ~NPUT] key.

The
The
corrected data is written into the memory.
space left by the deleted data is filled.
1
N6 X200. ;
M02: I
3 ) The cursor appears at the top of the screen.
4 ) The EDITING message goes off when the
data is written into the memory.

-120-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.3 PROGRAM EDITING OPERATIONS

5.3.7 DELETING SINGLE PAGES OF DATA ([SHIFT] [C.B CAN]]

It is assumed as an example that the data in the

figure on the right is displayed, and that all the
blocks on one screen from sequence numbers 1
through 12 are to be deleted.

@
Press the [SHIFT] k first and
then the [C.B CAN] ‘1?ey.

1 ) The entire screen goes blank.

0“
2 ) The cursor moves to the top of the screen. K
3 ) The EDITING message appears with key input.

@ \
Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow ‘FJ13
x-loo. ;
N14 Y-1OO. ;
1

1) The data which was displayed on one screen J

of the screen is deleted from the memory.
2) The data starting from the block following
the deleted data is displayed.
3) The EDITING message goes off when the
data is written into the memoxy. .

-121-
 ,. ... ,,,

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.4 M.DI PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

5.4 MDI PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

5.4.1 MDI DATA ENTRY INTO MEMORY (~ DI-ENT])

The data set on the MDI screen can be entered into the memorv. In order to identifi, more easilv, the
contents of the program when the data is entered, comments can-be added.

Memory

P
MDI data 01
-------- ---

c1‘G)
0100
---- ---- control
-~*r*Machine
01000
-. -------” /
t-

t
-b

‘--
------.-9”
1

MDI
It is assumed as an example that the MDI data on the N1 G28 XO YO ZO;
right has been set. Outlined below is the procedure for N2 G92 XO YO ZO :
entering it into the memory. N3 GOO X–1 00. Y-1 00. ;
1
N8 M02 ;
%

MTII.FNT I I I I

@
Press the ~DI-ENT] menu key. B
I I

1 ) The MDI-ENT setting area appears.

@
Set the number of the program
which is to be entered. Comments O (123 B) COMMENT( )
can also be set at the same time.
Ill

Press the ~NPUT] key. Dw

1 ) When the data is entered properly in the

memory, the MDI ENTRY COMPLETE mess-
age appears. The setting area display is cleared
and the MDI entry menu display returns from
highlighting to normal.

NOTE When comments are prepared, they can be written into the memory inclusive of spaces but in
order for the memo~ to be used at maximum efficiency, the spaces are not recognized after the
comments have been entered.

-122-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

5.5.1 EDITING DATA CALL ([SEARCH])

Described below is the method used to call the block or program which is to be edited. In order to provide
background editing, the search function can be used even to call a different parts program from that
actually being run. Program head searches, character string searches and sequence number searches can
be conducted.
( 1 ) Program head search
Only the number of the program to be called is designated in the setting area.
The operational sequence is as follows.

a-)
Ow but l-l )
Press the [SEARCH] menu key.
FILE ZWXJ7AVI I I f II 1

1 ) The data search setting area now appears.

“~’” [ Ollaolal
FILE -PMXRAWI
l-{ )

‘i’]
@
UP’ f- SEARCH 12iECUT10N
Press the ~NPUT] key. 4t\cm}tl I-L I

1) During the search, the SEARCH EXECU-

TION message appears.
2) The designated program is displayed from its c Im
EDIT
head. b!
.2
G.1 :P.0!!3
c!% ZO ,0 IQ ,
:

81 Cn 1-33) ?-m. ,
3) The cursor appears at the head of the screen. *4 : ym: -..W. , km,
M5
4) When the search is completed properly, the *6 Im, , “
,? rm. ,
setting area display goes out and the search .0?
\
,

menu display returns from highlighting to

normal display.

1
FILE i SEARCHII,RWR*VI I I I 1

-123-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

(2) Character string search

The character string search is valid when locating word data to be corrected.
The number of the-program to be called and
o
the character string are designated in the q ‘G% XOVOZD : EDIT
G!l 10 Vo 10 ;
setting area. However, the program number M3 cm a-w. r-w. ,
U4 Go! l-m F2U0,
N5 v -X0, :
designation can be omitted when searching for #s am :
fm ;
a character string in the program which is :&
s
:

already displayed on the screen.

Proceed as follows.

@
Press the [SEARCH] menu key. 0[ lK, l-[ 1

FILE -mcaw,,l I ;1 II J

1 ) The data search setting area now appears.

Set the number of the program to w

be called and the character string.

&unpltxO( )N (~~~)-( )

@
Dw SEARCH
EXECUTION
Press the ~NPUT] key. 01 )1 ,6011-1 )
1

FILE -mcc.u.,1 it 1 I I J
1) During the search, the SEARCH EXECU-
TION message appears.
2) The characters in question are searched from
the head of the designated program and, with
that block at the head, the program is
displayed. However, if the program is already
displayed on the screen, the character string
search is commenced from the displayed
position.
3) The cursor appears at the head of the
searched character string.
4) When the search is completed properly, the
setting area display goes out and the search
menu display returns from highlighting to
normal display.

NOTE L If the assigned character string is not found, the NO CHARACTERS message appears.
NOTE 2 Up to 11 characters can be designated in the character string.

-124-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

(3) Sequence number and block number search

Designate the program number, sequence number and block number of the program to be called in
the setting area. When numbers only are entered in the N ( ) parentheses, a sequence number is
searched (a character string search results when letters and symbols are included).
The pro~am number need~ot be designated when searching ~ sequence number in a program which
is already displayed on the screen.

ma I?D~
1 Ga XOvozo
2 Gll 10 To lot:
3 Gm l-m r-m,
4 cm x-m fm:
5 I-zM. ;
6 1~:
7 Vm ,
02:

The operational procedure is as follows.

F!LF I SE*RCII lPwaA,!I ill II

I Press the [SEARCH] menu key,

Ow
I II 1 I J

1 ) The data search setting area now appears.

Set the program number, sequence E’

number and block number of the
program to be called.
Examplex O( )N( H)-( )

@
Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow

1) During the search, the SEARACH EXECU-

TION message appears. -8
2) The N number in question is searched from
the head of the designated program and, with
that block at the head, the program is
displayed. When, however, the program is
already on the screen, the search for the N
number in question is commenced from the
display position.
3) The cursor appears at the head of the
searched block.
4) When the search is completed properly, the
setting area display goes out and the search
menu display returns from highlighting to
normal display.

NOTE 1: When the designated N number is not found, the NB NOT FOUND message appears.
NOTE 2 When the designated program number is not found, the PROG NOT FOUND message
appears.
NOTE 3 A number with up to 5 digits is designated as the sequence number.

-125-
 ,,, .’ .,.’’~,” ,’

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

(4) Operation with NO CHARACTERS or NB NOT FOUND error

When conducting a search in a uromun which is already displayed on the screen, the search
commences from-the head block w-hick is displayed, and if ;he d~ignated data does not exist up to
the program end (%), the above error appears. When the ~NPUT] key is pressed again, the search
is conducted again from the head of the program. When searching for data in a block before the data
displayed, the search can be conducted with this second search operation.

(Example) @ (Example 1) When searching N4

~ ------------- <
Program head+ N 1 ...... ; I
I I (1) 1st search operation .... ~&3rNDB NOT
iIN 2.-.: i
1
I
0 (2) 2nd search operation .... N4rJ4dbe
;N 3 c“””.
-: II
:N
t 4-: :, (Example 2) When searching N7
I
!N 5-”””””: lo (1) 1st search operation .... N7r~dbe
Screen 1 .
I
display data \ ~ ~ l:;”:”: !,
~ (Example 3) When searching N8
i ;
{% ~ (1) 1st search operation .... ~&INNDB NOT
IL.----------.---- I
1=)[ (2) 2nd search operation .... ~~~NNDB NOT

... .

-126-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.5 EDITING PAGE EXPANSION OPERATIONS

5.5.2 NEW PROGRAM ENTRY AND PREPARATION (~ ROGRAM])

The ~ROGR.4M] key is used for preparing new parts programs.
After the l_PROGRAMl menu has been selected, first determine the number of the ..-
parts pro~am and enter
it. Then &e the keys t; input the parts program
directly on the scresn. ml-r

FILE I SSARCH I PRCGRAW 11, ,,

(D
Press the ~ROGRAM] menu key.
Ow

1 ) The program setting area now appears.

@
Set the number of the program to UP 0 f lK@JjoMhiENT( T@)
be newly entered. FILE I SEARCH 1~ I 1111 J
If necessary, a comment can be set
! at thesame time.

CD ‘o 10M TC
$1
G EDIT
Press the @NPUT] key. m

1) When the program number and comment are

entered in the memory, they will appear at
the top of the screen.
2) Only one character, %, is automatically
entered into the memory as the data, and so
the screen appears as shown on the right.
FILE lsEARcH IPROGRAX4[ I I I I I
(4) Successively
—. - key in the parts program.
. .
The key operations are exactly the same as
for ordinary program editing,

NOTE 1: Even when a program has been entered into the memory using this function, it can be recalled
with the [SEARCH] key as with any other program if it is to be edited at a later date.
NOTE 2 When comments are prepared, they can be written into the memory inclusive of spaces but in
order for the memory to be used at maximum efficiency, the spaces are not recognized after the
comments have been entered.

.127 -
 ,-.

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(. 1 ). Function
When a machining program is prepared or edited on the editing and MDI screen, the address menu
corresponding to the set G codes and the graphic pattern are displayed. These can therefore be
referred to in order to facilitate the actual programming.
When the G codes are input, the address menu and graphic pattern appear in the right-hand half of
the screen. When a G code is already set, the same display appears once the cursor is moved to the
position where the code is displayed.

;41CI : [G41 :XYD ]- _ Address menu display

\ [G41 : XYIJD]- The G code and address
-1 used are displayed here.
u to two types of
a cl’dresses used are
!3 displayed when the com-
mand has a multiple
number of formats.
/’ ‘- ----- (x)Y)
~r
/’8
j G41 Y.YD . Graphic pattern display

J
Program preparation and editing area

Reference should be made to the address menu list and graphic pattern list for further details on the G
codes, address menus and graphic patterns displayed.
In the initialized state when the screen has been selected, either nothing will appear in the area for the
graphic address menu display on the right-hand half of the screen or the machining program will be
continuously displayed from the left-hand half. (Standard screen)
When the ~NPUT] key, PREVIOUS PAGE] key or NEXT PAGEj key is pressed during operation, the
graphic menu is cleared and operation returns to the standard scr~n.

-128-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(Operation example 1) During programming When the G codes are entered, the corresponding graphic
patterns and address menus are displayed.

I Input the G code. E@l~ ~

GOltl GO1 : XYZF
G
]
1
1 ) The GO1 graphic pattern and address .
o
menu are displayed. (x#Y, z)

] GOI XYZF

The machining program is I GO1 X80. Z150. F50; ❑: [GOI : XYZF ]

prepared on the basis of the ;[G 1
graphic pattern and address menu. B

d
(X, Y.z)

GOI XYZF

GO1 X80. Z150. F50; G ~[G02 :

020 ~[G02 : !t!#Fj
1 ) The display now changes to show the
GO1 graphic pattern and address menu.

The machining program is

prepared on the basis of the
graphic pattern and address menu,
Dw I GOI X80. Z150.
\2 XI OO. Z185.
-1
F50; G ~ [G02
R20.; ~ [G02
: XYIJF]
: XYRF ]

>
Press the ~NPUT] key. B 1 X80. Z150. F50: \
2 X1OO.Z185. R20. ;:
1 ) The graphic pattern and address menu
display are cleared.

-129-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(Operation example 2) During program editing: Not only when the G code is input but also when the G
code has already been set as below, the corresponding
graphic pattern and address menu will appear once the
cursor is moved to the position where the code is
displayed.
\
~01 x80. Z150. F50; ~
G02 X1OO. Z185. R20. :1
%

I Move the cursor. [-] ow ml X80. Z1 50. F50; i [G(I1 : XYZF]

G02 X1OO.Z185. R20.; ~[G 1
‘%
1 ) The GO1 graphic pattern and address
menu are displayed.
(X.Y.Z)
GOl XYZF
~E

Move the cursor. [ ~ ] llw GO1 X80. Z150. F50; : [G02 : XYIJF]
@ X1OO.Z185. R20.; j [G02 : XYRF ]
%
1 ) The display now changes to show the
[R
G02 graphic pattern and address menu. IJ
J- n
!.X,Y)

Go? ~{~ F
i
Ir

The machining program is checked

and edited on the basis of the
graphic pattern and address menu.

-130-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(2) Supplementary notes

1 ) The graphic pattern and address menu are displayed for the G code which is closest in the block
before the cursor.
2 ) The significant number of digits for the G code is 3 below the integer part and 1 below the
decimal point.
3 ) When the G codes are input, the graphic address menu display appears once a number with
two digits is input. In order to display the graphic menu address when a l-digit G code such
as GO or G1 is input, enter 2 digits such as GOOor GO1. If the codes have already been set, the
graphic address menu will appear once the cursor is moved to the position in question even if
the code has only digit such as GO or G1.
4 ) When there is no address menu corresponding to the set G code or when an illegal G code has
been input, the G codes only will appear in the address menu display and nothing will be
displayed for the addresses used or graphic patterns. Only the address menu appears for G
codes which do not have a graphic pattern display.
(Example)

Operation example Graphic address menu display

GOO; ❑ The previously displayed codes are displayed as
unchanged.
G90G41GKIll; The GO1 graphic pattern and address menu are displayed.
G90 G41 GO ~ ;
G90 G41 GOIU ;
G90 G41 GO1 ~
G90 G41 GO1 X1O. ❑ 10. ;
G90 G41 ❑ 01 X1O. Y1O. ; The G41 graphic pattern and address menu are displayed.
G~9; There is no address menu corresponding to G09. Nothing
is displayed in the graphic address menu area.
G27 G24U ; There is no G24 specification. Nothing is displayed in the
graphic address menu area.
G27CiG24 ; G27 address menu display; there is no graphic pattern.
Gl~34; There are no specifications for the last 3 significant digits
(G234) and so nothing is displayed in the graphic address
menu area.

-131-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

5 ) The displayed graphic address menus are displayed in accordance with the format applying
with the 3-axis (XYZ) specifications.
6 ) Even when any of the plane selection functions (G17—G19) has been selected, the format
applying for the XY plane (G17) will apply to the graphic address menu which is displayed,
7 ) The graphic address menu does not appear for G codes not displayed on the screen even if they
are in the same block.
8 ) The graphic trace function is temporarily suspended while the graphic address menu is on the
screen.
9 ) Either G codes with the MELDAS 300 series standard format or G codes based on the
MELDAS M2/MO format are displayed for the graphic address menu. Which G codes are used
depends on the machine parameter setting.

NOTE When used with program number address O based on the MELDAS-M2/MO format
LHP and LHIJP are displayed for the G22 code address menu although these apply to address
L. For address O, designate A and not L as the subprogram call address.
10) The address menus must be displayed in 2 lines.
With a multiple number of command formats, a maximum of 2 types will be displayed.
With only one command format, only one type will be displayed and the G code and address
on the second line will remain blank.

-132-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(3) Address menu list (MELDAS 300 seri~ standard format)

O Graphic pattern display available

-133-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(4) Address menu list (based on MELDAS-M2/MO format)

O Graphic pattern display available

G code Address menu display G code Address menu display

GOO XYz o G43 ZH o
01 XYZF o 45 XYD o
02 XYIJF 46 XYD o
o
XYRF 47 XYD o
03 XYIJF 48 XYD o
o
XYRF 50.1 XYZ
04 x 51 XYZP o
P 51.1 XYZ
10 XYZ 52 XYZ o
PR 53 XYZ o
11 PQ 54 XYZ o
12 IDF o 55 XYZ o
13 IDF o 56 XYZ o
14 XYZP 57 XYZ o
15 P 58 XYZ o
22 LHP 59 XYZ o
LHIJP 60 XYZ
22.1 XYZIJK 62 XYZ
27 XYZP 65 PL
28 XYZ o 66 PL
29 XYZ o 66.1 PL
30 XYZP o 73 XYZRQFE o
31 XYZF o 74 XYZRFE o
31.1 XYZF o 76 XYZRQF
o
31.2 XYZF o XYZRIJF
31.3 XYZF o 81 XYZRF o
33 XYZQFE 82 XYZRFE o
34 XYIJK o 83 XYZRQF o
35 XYIJK o 84 XYZRFE o
36 XYIJKP o 85 XYZRF o
37 XYIJKP o 86 XYZRFE o
38 XYIJ 87 XYZRQF
o
39 XY XY~IJF
40 XYIJ 88 XYZRFE o
41 XYD o 89 XYZRFE o
XYIJD 92 XYz
42 XYD o 96 s
XYIJD

-134-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(5) Graphic pattern list

,.---. =
,~ \ ‘\,
‘.
/1 I

D= Jm (x.Y)
mJ \\ //
(x.Y) @‘. ------ #,’

. ---- .
‘\
\
#l #24(P)
G12 IDF

’02
,/ . \ Q. k,
f.. ‘, ‘. ‘\ . ~“-”~; ~]
‘. \ ,,
& ‘\ ,!
\ /’ ti---...~
‘.
%- ------- ‘b-..-..a sxfP
\ (X.Y.Z) (x.Y.z) (X. Y.Z) SIG\!L
‘.- -- . ., /’
G13 IDF II G28 XYZ II G29 XYZ II G30 XYZP IIG31 XYZF

.-
,e--T--#’ >.-
/ l!,”\ ,0”
=~——— ~--- fj,j, ~; IL.%., \
/
(x.Y) !4
----- .4!-;%”
.
‘, J (K=3)
SK’iP + ---_l ------
SIGWL \ ,/’ (K=5) (x?’)
‘.. *..
II G34 XYIJK XYI.JK
G31.I XYZF
11-G31.2 XYZF G31.3 XYZF G35

LI❑ E
.-L-J. I

‘x”’)+ LJ
A ‘lP,‘ ‘b’ -+
i
.T._
‘ x,y%’ “1 t of!sel (H)
~ ---7;til__Jti=3) .–..L._
z

G$6 XYIJKP G4Z XYD G43 ZH

1 1

I G44 bH
(ml%E+,,..b.++%,,”+ “l”\
c
-x_u_J
/’
v
(x.Y)~’--”-”-”A““

r=
G78 G99

1
@ ‘$[)--q-----r-
G78 *-W: _r.(xcY)
-. T.- J+Y) G98
-_. T._. _.T-. (X Y) G93
‘- T--” _r-”-” T”
bl
1, ‘l; R@ II
t
-- .— - ---- ‘ ./.– ------ -. .. .. ~~~-~, _’ ._.+_&_].
3-
L
‘EG-;\”-
----
Lb .- :.-?;.-.
-. 11 ---- .-.i. Q(’I, J) Q(l, j) _.1 .-.-! ._. _.l.- -.-—.4 .—. - L
d(@
G73 XYZRQFP G76 XYZRQF G8~
G74 XYZRFP i G81 XYZRF I XYZRFP
XYZRIJF
 ..

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.6 GRAPHIC ADDRESS MENU

(X.Y)M3G!% (x.Y)

A
J+v-+??!.-r.. (X.
Y) G98

---.—
*-~—-–.T-–---~- *--,- .—.T-—--.r ~-- -*’’~
“-”-l”-
-------

I “---Ri”
tt R: 1; 1 I
II RI

Ii
I
-. ---
“---j--
11
—- ----
M3
\,4
.
G99
‘W z:
‘–@GB --- J-.7.+--
M19 Q(l. /) z: ,
—- .–.- _.._..-L.- ZI ----- L ---~ -.—t–!-.
------ .- —.- ‘L.- J.-.—l-
Li.i. d(rO ‘ti5 dtp~- M3
G33 XYZRQF GM XYZRFP G85 XYZRF G36 XYZRFP G37 XYZRQF
XVzRIJF

(x.~) !J3 G!18

e-~---~--.-.~.
1 #

---”’ “+-tij

---- t. . -.-t----- 1.
M5 d(p)
G88 XYZRFP G89 XYZRFP

.,

,.,

-136-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

1) When the alphanumeric and Vmbol key switches are pressed during operations on the CRT
setting and display board, a sound is heard as soon as the characters corresponding to the key
switches are displayed on the screen. This enables machining programs to be prepared and
edited while the function key data is checked aurally and data input errors to be eliminated.
2) On the machining program editing and MDI screen, the contents of the machining programs
displayed on the screen are automatically output aurally by starting the machining program
audio output function. There are three mod= the character string output mode in which the
contents of the machining programs are output aurally one charact;r str~ng at a time, the single
output mode in which the voice output is on a block by block basis, and the continuous output
mode in which the voice output of each block in sequence is automatic.

Rough outline of voice output function

MD I
7
D
/
Main I
machining 7
program I
0,.
I
i
I
I CRT
1
I I
I I Audio output of machining Speaker
I ~ program data
I —-—— -.
I >..
L .—-. —-—— ---— —-—
Audio output of key switch data

u
Headphones

A speaker or headphones can be employed for the voice output. The volume of the output can be selected
by parameter. Refer to the section on parameters.

-137-
 ,,:, ,, .”,.

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

5.7.1 KEY SWITCH VOICE OUTPUT

( 1 ) Audio output when preparing machining programs on the MDI/editing screen.
.
The data keysare pa in sequenceaccord- Ow
ingto the machiningprogramlist and the N1 G28 XO YO 20 ; ❑
machiningpqgram is prepared.
N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;

1 ) Every time a key is pressed, a voice

sound corresponding to the key is
output .
-

1
u ~ N

1
<<enY7

C,One?,

G G “gee”
o

m 2 ,Itwo,?

u
l-d
88 x
“eight”
,,a>>

0 0 “zero”
-o

Y 3? “why”
o
~ O “zero”
G1 u z “red”

-u

Press the ~NPUT] key. w

ml G28 XO YO 20 ;

%
1 ) The data is now written into the memo~.

-138-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

5.7.2 MACHINING PROGRAM VOICE OUTPUT

(1) Machining program voice output (continuous
N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;
output) start-up N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
The contents of the MDI or memory machin- N3 Goo X-300. Y-300.;
ing programs can easily be checked by the N4 GO1 X-200. F2000;
machining program voice output function. N5 Y-500.;
As an example, it is assumed that the data is as N6 X200.;
shown in the figure on the right, To vocally N7 Y200. ;
output this machining program, proceed as %
follows.

Move the cursor to the position of the

data which is to be vocally output.
IJp
I ❑ l G28 XOYOZO ;
I

{ -!

L2L__.1
Press the [SHIFT] and ~NPUT] keys ~ f-t Oo-rw-vtnnn
(or [CALC] key only) and start the El G28 XO YO ZO ;
“EL!,one, gee.two, eight.a, zero,why.zero,zeal,zero.ee ohbee”
VOICEOUTPUT
L A
1) The VOICE OUTPUT message ap-
pears in the message area.
2) The machining program data is vocally
output in sequence one character at a
time.
3) The cursor is moved to the position of
the data, among the data being vocally
output, which is to be read next.
4) When the cursor is moved to the
bottom of the screen at the left-hand
side, the bottom-most block will move
to the top of the screen and voice
output will continue.
5) When all the data up to the final code
(%) of the machining program is read,
the voice output is terminated.
6) Upon termination, the VOICE
OUTPUT message is cleared.

-139-
 ‘,,

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(2) Machining program voice output (single output)

The machining program data can be vocally
output one block at a time (up to “:’). The N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;
single output mode cannot be started up N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
directly from the normal mode. To set the N3 GOO X-300. Y-300.;
N4 GO1 X-200. F2000;
mode to single output, first start the voice N5 Y-200.;
output (continuous mode) and then switch to N6 X200.;
the single output. N7 Y200. ;
%
Voice output of machining programs in
continuous mode
The mode is switched to single output as
follows. VOICEOUTPUT

Press the ~NPUT] key. Dw Gofnw-vl

N2 G92 ❑0 YO ZO ;
.!, & Zf30, why ... m oh bee”

1 ) The single output mode is established.

2 ) When the block now being output has
been read, the voice output is stopped.

F====T””
Press the ~NPUT] key and establish

1 ) When the first block from the head of

2320
....”.”””””””””
X-300.
f-l%
Y-300. ;
En, th~ gee,zero.... period,eeoh bee

the following block is read, the voice

output is stopped.
2 ) Every time voice output is stopped, his
started block by block by pressing the
~NPUT] key.
To establish the continuous output mode
again, select as follows.
...................................................................
Ilw ~ The machining programs continue to be !
Press the [SHIFT] and ~PUT] keys vocally output in the continuous mode. !
(or [CALC] key only). ................... ........................ .....................

-140-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MD?)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(3) Machining program vocal output (character -!

string output) N1 G28 XO YO ZO ;

The machining program data can be vocally N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
M3 GOO X-300. Y-300.;
output in character string units. N4 GO1 X-ZOO. F2000;
(A character string unit is a section separated N5 Y-200.;
by blanks.) N6 X200.;
Character string output cannot be started N7 Y200, ;
directly from the normal mode. To establish %
this mod% first start the vocal output
[continuous mode), then switch to the single
output mode and further switch to the VOICEOWUT
character string output mode.
Switch to the character string output mode as
foIlows. Notti The VOICE OUTPUT message
also appears with the operations
below.

Press the NPUT] key while a block is

being rea ! in the single output mode.
w
I N4~qO~e:-2~)0., F2000;
... , ,
1

1) The character string output mode is

now established.
2) When the first word in the present
output is read, the voice output is stop-
ped.
I N4 GO~ X-200. F2000;
I

I D’
I r -1
Press the @NPUT] key. N4 GO1 ~~~ F2000;
Ex, minus two,zero,zero,period
L J
1) Move the cursor to the next address
and read the data until the space. o
2) Every time the voice output is stopped,
it is started character string by
character
~NPUT] key.
string by pressing the
I N4 GOI X-200~ F2000;
I
To establish the continuous output
mode again, select as follows.
1 ...................................................................
~ The machining programs continue to be ~
! Press the [SHIFT] and ~NPUT] keys up vocally output in the continuous mode. :
(or [CALC] key only). ---------..........................................................
I 1

1+10= To switch the mode from character string to single output, first establish the continuous output
mode and then switch to the single output mode.

-141-
5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(4) Interrupt operation during machining

program voice output N1 G28 XO YO 20 ;
N2 G92 XO YO ZO ;
Editing operations for machining programs N3 GOO X-30. Y-300.;
are not acknowledged in the voice output N4 GO1 X-200. F2000;
modes. If, during voice output, there is an N5 Y-200.;
error in a machining program and it needs to N6 X200.;
be corrected, first terminate the voice output N7 Y200. ;
and then establish the normal mode. All edit- %
ing operations can be performed in the normal
mode.
For instance, it is assumed that the screen data VOICEOUTPUT
shown in the figure on the right is being output
vocally.

N1 G28 XO YO 20 ;
Press the [e] or other cursor key to Ilw N2 G92 XO YO 20 ;
N3 GOO X-30QY-300. ;
~ N4 GO1 X-200. F2000;
)
1 ) If data is being vocally output, termin-
ate the output after one word has been *
read and set to the normal mode. ~ Messa e is
2 ) The VOICE OUTPUT message is clear d .
cleared from the message area.

If there is a mistake in the machining E

program, correct it as follows.
N3 LOO X-300.O Y-300.;
/
1. Move the cursor to the position
requiring correction.
2. Correct X-30. to X-300.
Press the [0] and [.] keys. -0
3. Press the ~NPUT] key.
El G28 XO YO 20 ;
N2 G92 XO YO 20 ;
I N3 GOO X-300. Y-300.;
1

1 ) Provide the voice output corresponding

to the function keys even when the keys
are operated in an editing operation.
2 ) The memory contents are rewritten by
the irmut and the cursor is moved to the
top o~ the screen.

Move the cursor to the position f

requirin voice output and press the
f3in-x-3oo. Y-300,;
[SHIFT~and ~PUT] keys (or En, three, geq zero, zero ....”
[CALC] key only) to resume the voice I
output. VOICEOUTPUT

1 ) The VOICE OUTPUT message ap-

pears again, and the machining
program voice output is resumed.

-142-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(5) Flow chart of program voice output and correction operation

9
Start

Press the SHIFT] and

~NPUT] i eyS. Operation moves to reading the data continuously with the [SHIFT]
and ~NPUT] keys.
Continuous I
reading Reading of 1 block Reading of 1 word

r r=
Press the ~NPUT] key.

1
r- II

Vocally output the

1 word data.
‘ The cursor moves as
the data is read.

-la. 1
Opemtion moves to
read in 1 wordwhen
the ~8 PUTlkeyis

:z~~’”+
blockwhenthe plessed.

I
The voice output is
stopped.
11F
Y Y

(!3 (4)
End End

FJOTI% When suspending the voice output in order to correct errors in the machining program, press the
[+-] or other such cursor key.
The VOICE OUTPUT message will now be cleared and the normal mode is established, enabling
the machining program to be corrected on the MDI and editing screen. When a key has been
entered during block reading, voice output will continue up to where the word is separated and
then the normal mode will be established.

-143-
 ,,,,,, ,,. .

5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)

5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(6) Editing function mode transition

There are three editing function modes: the “editing mode,” the “voice output mode” and the
“execution mode.” (See figure below)
(a) The “editing mode” is the mode in which programs can be correctal.
(b) Voice output can be started from the “editing mode.”
(c) The “voice output mode” is the mode in which the program displayed on the screen is read by
the voice output function. When operation is in this mode, the VOICE OUTPUT message is
displayed.
(d) Operation returns to the “editing mode” when the data has been read up to the program end
or when operation is suspended at any time.
(e) Background editing is possible even while a program is being executed but the program being
run cannot be edited. Therefor& the “execution mode” is established during MDI operation on
the MDI screen. On the editing screen, the same mode is established when the program in the
memory operation mode is displayed.
(f) The “execution mode” is the mode in which the displayed program is executed and in which
that program cannot be edited. When this mode is established on the MDI screen, the MDI
RUNNING message appears. When it is established on the editing screen, the PROGRAM
RUNNING message appears.
(g) Operation returns to the “editing mode” when operation is completed or suspended.
(h) Voice output is not possible for a program in the execution mode. If the operation of a
program during voice output is started, the voice output will be suspended and operation will
move to the execution mode.

( a ) Editing mode
/ \
MDI/editingscreen 1

v$~%~%iontermination

( c ) Voice output mode ( f ) Ewcution mode

mm
I l— I I

m si”nsta”
-

-144-
 5. EDITING AND MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI)
5.7 VOICE OUTPUT FUNCTION

(7) List of voice data

Word Voice data Word Voice data Word Voice data Word Voice data
A ay T tee %** percent BIN * Binary
B bee u you ( parenthesis BCD * Bee cee dee
c Cee v Vee * times RND* Round
D dee w double you + plus FIX* Fix
E W x ex minus FUP* Ef Up
F ef Y why 7 comma IF* If
G gee z zee period GOTO* Go tO
H aitch o zero I slash WHILE” While
I ai 1 one > semi-colon DO* Doo
J jay 2 two . equals END * End
OR*
K kay 3 three Or ERR* Error
L el 4 four XOR* 13 or EQ* Ee queue
M em 5 five AND* And NE* Enee
N en 6 six SIN* Sine GT* Gee tee
o oh 7 seven COS* Cosine LT* El tee
P pi 8 eight TAN * Tangent GE* Gee ee
Q queue 9 nine ATN * Arctangent LE* El ee
R ar SP* space SQR* Square. root
s ea # sharp ABs” Absolute

NOTE L The asterisk (*) denotes only when the key switch is pressed and not when the program is read,
NOTE 2 The double asterisk (**) denotes only when the program is read.

-145-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

The following menu appears when the DATA IN/OUT] function selector key is pressed.

Data
inputf
output
menu
displays
NPUT I OUTPUT[ COPY I ERASE ICOMMENT[
PARAM,\ I I A

key

mm
.
: :Qu
LJu
●
Basic . program
data I&’se

:
●
‘ Erase
Program file
display,
Comment
setting
. c 1/0 basic
parameters

1/0 device parn-

I
melers, dwices
<0> —<4> I
E&-J

,,.

-146-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (PROGRAM FILE)

6.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (PROGRAM FILE)

The left half of the screen produced when the ~NPUT] or [OUTPUT] key is pressed is always reserved for
the program file while the display of the right half can be selected in accordance with the menu keys.
.
PROGRAMFILE] 1 /2: ~ATA INPUTl IN/OUT 1
‘R03RAMENTRY20 REMAIN 180 /
:HARAcrER 21234 REMAIN 41750 I #1 MAINPROGRAM #1~ PORT o
PROORAM> <CRR> <ST> <COMMENT> 1 #2 TOOL DATA #12 DEVKE O
1 123 TEST CUT PROGRAM ~ #3 PARAMETER
100 <DEVICE> PTR
I < BAUD
RATE>48~
200
300 ; #11) MODE
400 I I :m
500 I 2: COMP
@xl I
700 I
800 I
I
1:: I < INPUT>
I
1200
I < COMP. DATA >
1400
I
1600 I
1800 I
2000 I
~ #@) DATA( )
I

~l~~fl o~p~ I copy I ERASE lc0h4MENT I PARAM I I I

Item Details
PROGRAM The number of user machining programs already entered is indicated in the
ENTRY, PROGRAM ENTRY column. The remaining number of programs which can
REMAIN be entered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the programs already
entered and remaining programs is the maximum number of programs entered
and is determined by the specifications.
CHARACTER, The number of characters which have already been entered is indicated in the
REMAIN CHARACTER column. The remaining number of characters which can be
entered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the characters already
entered and remaining characters is the maximum number of characters entered
and is determined by the specifications.
REMAIN is indicated in 250-character units.
< PRCiGRAM > < PROGRAM>: This indicates the numbers of the machining programs
< CHR > already entered.
<ST> They are displayed in ascending order from 1 to 99999999.
< CC) MMENT> e CHR >: This indicates the number of characters stored which correspond to
the machining program numbers.
e ST >: This indicates the status of the machining programs.
<COMMENT >: A comment, such as the machining program function,
specification or application, can be displayed here. It can
consist of up to 18 alphanumerics and symbols.
It can even be designated with input from paper tape and
the setting can be made on this screen.

NOTE & When a large number of short programs have been entered into the memory or when editing
operations have been undertaken frtxpently, the efficiency with which the memory can be used
deteriorates and, due to the limitations imposed by the configuration of the memory, the
CHARACTER + REMAIN total becomes less than the maximum number of characters
stored under the specifications. When this difference is extremely great, the efficiency can be
enhanced by means of the condense function.

-147-
 ... . ,-.,,,,,,.:.,,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.2 DATA INPUT

6.2 DATA INPUT

The data input page appears when the ~PUT] menu key is pressed.
On the data input page, data can be compared with the input of not only machining programs (main
programs and subprograms) prepared by the user but alw tool offset data and NC parameters.

-t
PROORAMFILEl 1 /2 j ~ATA INPUTl IN/OUT 1
?ROORAM ENTRY 20 REMAIN 180 I < LOCK>
WAWuXER 2’234 RIWAIN 41750 1 #l MAIN PROORAMABC #11 PORT o
PROORAM> <CHR> <ST> <COMMENT> ] # 2TOOL DATA OFF #12 DEVICE o
1 123 TEST CUT PROGRAM ~ $3 P.4RAMETER ON
I
<DEVICE> PTR
;: I cBAUD
RATE
>48Ci)
, #lo MODE
% 1 1 :m
I 2 :CoMP
?0 I
700 I
800 1
I < INPUT>
l% I
1200 i
1400 I < COMP.DATA>
1
1600
I
1800
I
2000 i
: #@ DATA( )
I
h,

“~l~@@..i
..,,,.,,,i OUTPUT \
““”’’”” COPY I ERASE ICOMMENTI PARAM I I I ,

# Item Details
1 MAIN PROGRAM (NOTE 1) These classi~ the data which can be input.
2 TOOL DATA
3 PARAMETER
10 MODE These select the operations (input and compare) on
1: IN the data input screen. When the power is switched on,
2: COMP the INPUT mode is established. The valid mode ap-
pears in yellow. Check that the correct mode has been
select ed before proceeding with input or compare.
11 PORT These set the 1/0 port and device numbers for data
input.
12 DEVICE If these have already been set on the “input/output
basic parameter” screen, their settings will be
displayed. They may be changed similarly on either
screen.

NOTE L Parameters must be set when inputting canned cycle programs.

Refer to the section on “canned cycle program entry/editing” in the appendix.

-148-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.2 DATA INPUT

6.2.1 INPUT/COMPARE SELECTION

The INPUT mode is selected for data input and the COMPARE mode for comparing data. Before
proceeding in either modq observe the MODE display on the screen and check that it is the correct mode.
Proceed as follows to switch between INPUT and COMPARE.
For instance, when the INPUT mode has been
selected, the letters “IN” will appear in yellow as \
~ ~ATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1
shown on the right. < LOCK>
! $1 MAINPROGRAMABC 211PORT (1
: h 2 TOOL DATA OFF $l~D~CE d
; $3 PARAMETER ON
1 < DEVICE> PTR
I
I <BAUD RATE> 4800
I %10 MODE
1
i
I
1
I
1 :m
I
2 : COMP
I
1
I
1
I
I

: < INPUT>
I

; < COMP. DATA >

I
I

(l%ample) Switching to the COMPARE mode

~ ‘“

~~ATA INPUT] lN/OUT 1

I Press the lJNPUT] key.
I Ow ; #l MAINPROORAM
I # 2 TOOLDATA
<LOCK>
ABC *11 PORT
OFF ~ 12 DiWICE O
O
: %3 Parameter ON I
o
,
<DEVICE> PTR
1 ) The mode is switched over to I < BAUDRATE> 4.800
COMPARE and the letters “COMP” ; $10 MODE
appear in yellow. I
# l:IN
2 ) To switch back to the INPUT mode, set 1
I
1 in DATA and operate in the same * 2 :m
I
way, 1
1
1
t

; < INPUT>
I
u
~ < COMP. DATA >
#
; #(@ DATA( )

NOTE When switching from the COMPARE mode to another screen, the mode changes to INPUT
again when operation reverts to this screen,

-149-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.2 DATA INPUT

6.2.2 MACHINING PROGRAM INPUT

Proceed as follows to input machining programs prepared by the user.
( 1 ) When inputting program numbers, which have been output to the tape, without making any changes
A program can be input simply by assigning data classification #1 for the machining program.
The numbers on the tape take precedence even if the program numbers are assigned.

~ ~ 01234 (THT-PRO,#1)~ N1G28 XO Y O 20 ~ N2 M02 g g

RB BR
ID

Program no. and comment Program body

Set the data classification. w

# (~) DATA( )
#( 1 )DATA( )

Press the ~NPUT] key, IJw < INPUT>

01234 (TEST-pFiO,*1);
< COMP. DATA >
1 ) Data input starts.
The program number which is being
DATA IN EXECUTION
input appears in the setting area.
#( 1 )DATA( 1234)

2) When all the data has been input < INPUT>

properly and the EOR code is read, %
data input is completed. < COMP. DATA >

DATA IN COMPLETE
I
#( ) DATA [ )

-150-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.2 DATA INPUT

(2) When the program number is not on the tape

Assign data classification #1 for the machining program and designate the program number to be
entered.

E
~ N1 G28 XO YO ZO ~ N2 GOOX–100. M02 8 R
BR
/m

Program body

Set the data classification and

program number.
E I
Example When entering program ( 1 )DATA( 1000)
no. 01000
# (~) DATA (l~fi~n}

< INPUT>
N1 G28 XO YO 20:
Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow < COMP. DATA >

DATA IN EXECUTION
1 ) Data input starts.
2 ) The assigned program number is # ( 1 )DATA ( 1000)
entered in the memory.

3 ) When all the data has been input < INPUT>

properly and the EOR code is read,
data input is completed. %
< COMP. DATA >

DATA IN COMPLETE

&( ) DATA ( )

-151-
 .. ,., ,’,.

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.2 DATA INPUT

6.2.3 TOOL OFFSET DATA INPUT

The data on a paper tape output by the tool offset data output operation can be input.
It is also possible to input the data on a paper tape, which has been prepared with the same format as for
the output tape, as the offset data.

NOTE Tool offset data cannot be input during automatic operations.

( 1 ) Input operation for tool offset data

Set the data classification to the

E ‘“
# ( 2 )DATA( ) I
Press the ~NPUT] key. w <:~PLy; ~
....
< COMP. DATA >
DATA IN EXECUTION
1) Readout of the data on the paper tape * (2) DATA( ) 1
starts, and the input data contents and
DATA IN EXECUTION message ap-

I<
pear.
2) When the data input is executed norm-
ally until the end and the tape end code
%
INPUT>
<’COMP. DATA>
I
$ZO @OR) is read, the data input is
DATA IN COMPLETE
terminated and the DATA IN
COMPLETE message appears. * ( )DATA( )

(2) When an error has arisen durimz offset tane immt

When an error has arisen durin~ the inpu~ pro&dure, the error number and error message appear
on the screen, and the input operation is suspended. @E, E25, E71 and EM errors)
In cases like this, input can be continued with the input screen remaining unchanged by pressing the
~NPUT] key again. However, the block with the error is not input. Input proceeds from the
following block.

-152-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.2 DATA INPUT

6.2.4 PARAMETER TAPE INPUT

It is possible to input the parameter tape which has been output by the parameter output operation.
As with settings from the CRT screen, the input parameters come in two forms: those which are valid
immediately after input and those which are valid when the power is first switched off and then switched
back on again. Therefore, the power ON/OFF operations should be performed after the tape input.

NOTE A parameter tape cannot be input during automatic operation.

( 1 ) Input operation for parameter tape
\

# (3)13ATA[
~“ :) J
1 I

Press the ~NPUT] key. w < INPUT>

P5 N1 L.-,
I I c cotip. i3ATA >
I
DATA IN EXECUTION
1) Readout of the data on the paper tape # (3)DATA( )
starts, and the input data eontents and
DATA IN EXECUTION message ap-
0
pears. %
2) When the data input is executed norm- < INPUT>
ally until the end and the tape end code
% (EOR) is read, the data input is <%COMP. DATA>
terminated and the DATA IN DATA IN COMPLEI’E
COMPLETE message appears.
I#( )DATA( )

-153-
6, DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.3 DATA OUTPUT

6.3 DATA OUTPUT

The data output page appears when the [OUTPUT] menu key is pressed.
On the data output page, not only machining programs (main programs and subprograms) prepared by
the user but also tool offset data and NC parameters can be output.

~ROGRAMFILE] 1/2 DATAOUTPUTl IN/OUT 2

PROORAM ENTRY20 REMAIN 180 <LOCK>
c~crm 21234 REMAIN 41750 # 1 MMNPROGRAM
ABC #11 PORTNO- 1
zPROGRAM>
<CHR><STX COMMENT > # 2 T@lLDATA ON #12 DEVICENO. 1
1 123 TEST CUT PROGRAM #PARAMETER OFF
< DEVICE> PTP
L: < BAUD RATE >4800
300 < IsO/m > I so
400 < TITLE FEED> 1

504)
600
700
800
< OUTPUT DATA>
1::
1200
1400
1600
1&lo
2000

: #(@ DATA( )( )

# Item Details
These classi& the data which can be output.
1 MAIN PROGRAM (NOTE 1 (1) For machining program output
2 TOOL DATA (2) For tool offset data output
3 PARAMEI’ER (3) For parameter data output
11 PORT NO. These set the 1/0 port and device numbers for data output.
12 DEVICE NO. If these have already been set on the “input/output basic
parameter” screen, their settings will be displayed. They may
[ be changed similarly on either screen.

NOTE L Parameters must be set for canned cycle program output.

Refer to the section on “canned cycle program entryiediting” in the appendix.
NOTE2 When the data protection, edit lock B or edit lock C condition has been assigned, the data may
not be output. For details, reference should be made to the sections on “data protection” and
“edit lock.”

Output prohibit condition Data protect key Edit lock B valid Edit lock C valid
valid
Machining Machining Machining
programs, tool programs programs
(Output) method assignment data, parameters 8000-9999 9000-9999
One machining program No output No output for No output for
assigned machining machining
programs programs
08000-9999 09000-9999
Output of all data using ALL No output Output of other Output of other
Output of data by assigning a machining machining
specific range programs except programs except
08000-9999 09000-9999

-154-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.3 DATA OUTPUT

Operating sequence for data output

1. Outputof oneprogramonly
# (1) DATA(~)( )
(ksignd number)
2. Ootputof all data
# (1) DA’r.4
( ALL) (
3. Outputof data in specificran e
(Startingwithsystemversionk))
X‘1) ‘ATA~;o))ARi

.
Setting and input
1
I 1 I

E O 1 SETTING ERROR
No E O3 NO. NOTFOUND
E 06 NO SPEC
E 24 PLCRUN
Yes

Data output start ~

I I
I
1 Parameter setting fetxl + EOR
240 characters feed+ EOB
CIclI
T
Data output exeeution

1 Header data+ EOB

2 Data body
340 characters feed

Data output finish

I Ya--
I 1 EOR + parameter setting feed
Ip arameter I
~
DATAOUTCOMPLETE

-155-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.3 DATA OUTPUT

6.3.1 MACHINING PROGRAM OUTPUT

Machining programs prepared by the user are output as below.
( 1 ) When outputting only one machining program
The data classification #1 of the machining program and the number of the program to be output
are assigned.

Set the data classification and w

program number.
@ample) When outputting OltlM \# ( 1 ) DATA( 1000)( ) /

# (~) DATA(E@JDl@

I Press the ~PUT] key. I Ilw

1) Data output now starts.

< OUTPUT DATA>

%
DATA OUT COMPLETE
#( )DATA( )( )

~ ~ 01000 ~EST) ~ N1 G28 XO YO 20 8 M02 % E

RB B B R

_!m

Program number and comment Program body

(2) When outputting all the machining programs
All the machining programs entered in the memory can be output together.
The data classification #1 of the programs and “ALL” in data are assigned.

Set the data classification and

~y [~]

...............................................................................
Press the ~NPUT] key. UP ,: All the programs are now output in the order ~
in which they were entered.
1 . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. ,:

( ~~~,pLiJiq
~~
. , 1st program 2nd program 3rd and subsequent programs

NOTE k “%” appears after a single machining program but this is not output. “%” is output after all
the machining programs have been output.

-156-
 6, DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.3 DATA OUTPUT

-------- ------- ------ ------- ------ ----

< OUTPUT DATA>
When a single program is output,
0100:
“%” is displayed at the end and
the next program is indicated. DATAOUT EXECUTIt’}N
#( l)IJATA( ALL )

4
--------------------.------------------
< OUTPUT DATA>
’70
DATAOUTEXECWTION
# ( 1)DAT14( ALL )

“%” also appears for the second

and subs uent programs after
they have? een output. -------- ------- --------- -------- ------
< OUTPUT DATA>
01013:
DATAOUTEXECU1’10N
EOR is output after all the machining programs
, #( l) DATA( ALL )
have been output. It is not output with each and
every program.
--------- ----- ------- ------ ------ -----
< OUTPUT DATA>
Yo
DATAOUTEXE(WTION
# ( l)D.ATA( ALL )

-157-
 .,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.3 DATA OUTPUT

(3) When outputting machining programs within a specific number range

(starting with system version E)
A specific range of machining programs can be assigned and a multiple number of programs within
that range can be output as a single unit. When the lowest (minimum) and highest (maximum)
numbers of the machinimz mo~rams to be output are set in the data setting area, the program within
the assigned range will b;kuc&ssively outpu~ in numerical order. -

Set the data classification, and the --------- ------- -

minimum and maximum program
numbers. <OUTPUT DATA> ----------------”
@kample) Output of programs
from 09000 to 09999 UP
# (~) DATA( [m]) { m{} I # ( 1 )DATA( 9000 )( 9999 )

,------- ------ -----

<ourPuT DATA>9000 ---------- -------
09000 (Ml 50. SUBPRO)
n~s DATA OUT EXECUTION
Press the flNPUT] key.
8 ( 1 )DATA ( 9000 ) ( 9999 )
1) Data output now starts.
2) The numbers of the machining programs being
output and their contents are successwely
displayed in the < OUTPUT DATA> display ‘o
---.-.---------_-
The machining programs are
output in sequence.
aria.
3) When all the machining programs within the <OUTPUT DATA> ----------------_.
specified range have been output, the data ’70
setting area goes blank and the DATA OUT DATA OUT COMPLETE
COMPLETE message appears.
#( )DATA ( )( )
The output tape format is shown below.

——
Progmrn Machining Feed Feed Program Machining &d
@lmc- number programbody :::mG @c& numberand program
and comment body charac-
ters) comment tern) ters) ters)

First program Subsequent Last rogram in

in specified range programs spezi ried range

NOTE k If the minimum number has not been set, output will commence with the machining program
which has the number closest to the setting.
Similarly, if the maximum number has not been set, the machining program with the number
closest to the setting is first output and then output is completed.
Nom 2 Enter the minimum number first and then the maximum number. The “EO1 SETTING
ERROR” will result if this sequence is reversed.

-158-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.3 DATA OUTPUT

6.3-2 TOOL OFFSET DATA OUTI?UT

The tool offset data which has been set and displayed from the CRT screen can be output to a paper tape.
The output operation can be conducted even during automatic operation.
The tape length to be output varies depending on the tool offset type, number of sets and the numerical
values of the offset data. However, with the 40-set specifications, this length is 3 to 4 meters for type I and
12 to 16 meters for type H.
( 1 ) Output operation for tool offset data

WI” [~]
Set the data classification to tool

w ~ <OUTPUT DATA> 1
Press the ~NPUT] key. G1O L1O P...;
DATAOUTEXECUTTON
# (2) DATA( )
/
1 ) Output of the data to the paper tape
starts, and the output data contents and o
DATA OUT EXECUTION message
appear. < OUTPUT DATA>

I
2 ) The data output operation is termin- %
ated when the tape end code % (EOR) DATAOUTCOMPLETE
is output and the DATA OUT # ( )DATA( j
COMPLETE message appears.
(2) Output tape format

Feed Fed Data section Feed Fed

(numberof @& $omc (nuQl:)f
charactem
baaedon ters) ters) baaedon
parameter parameter
setting) setting)

The format of the data section is the same as that for the program based tool offset input (G1O).

-159-
 ,.

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.3 DATA OUTPUT

6.3.3 PARAMETER TAPE OUTPUT

The parameter data which has been set and displayed from the CRT screen can be output onto paper tape.
The output operation is even possible during automatic operation.
The tape length to be output varies depending on the number of axes and the numerical values of the
parameters. Under the 3-axis specifications, it ranges from 20 to 30 meters.
See below for the data which are output.
● User parameters (PLC switch ON/OFF modes, control parameters, axis parameters, machining
parameters)
● Data input/output parameters (I/O basic parameters, 1/0 device parameters)
. Names of common variables #%30 through #519
e Reference surface height (W) for manual tool length measurement
● All machine parameters

NOTE L The tool offset amount, tool registration, tool life monitoring and work coordinate offset data
is not output.
(1) Output operation for parameter tape

f \

# (3) DATA( )
=’”

E
Press the ~NPUT] key.

1 ) Output of the data to the paper tape

starts, and the output data contents and
DATA OUT EXECUTION message
appear.
2 ) The data output operation is termin-
ated when the tape end code YO (EOR)
is output and the DATA OUT
COMPLETE message appears.

(2 ) Output tape format

(IIcg~
—~—Feed
(numberof
characters
~~mc
Header Data section
—~ Feed
@l&
Feed
(nunu::rof
basedon ters) ters) basedon
parameter pammeter
setting) setting)

-160-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.4 PROGRAM COPYING

6.4 PROGRAM COPYING

The program copy screen appears when the [COPY] menu key is pressed.
On the program copy screen, the machining programs (main programs and subprograms) prepared by the
user can be copied, candensed and merged, and program numbers can also be changed.

~ROORAMFILE] 1 /2 “’, ~ROORAMCOPYl IN/oU-r 3

PROGRAMENTRY20 REMAIN 180/
cHARAcrER 21234 REMAIN 41750 $1 COPY
:PROORAM>
<CHR> <ST><~MM13NT> #2 cONDENSE
01 123 TEST CUT PROf3RAM ; *3 MERGE
#4 PROORAM
NO.CHANGE
Ill

%’
500
600
700
800

lE
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000

6.4.1 MACHINING PROGRAM COPYING (copying)

The numbers of the machining programs entered in the memory can be changed and programs can be
copied as separate programs.
#1 is set as the copy command. The program numbers are set in the order of number of the program to
be copied followed by the number of the program after copying.

Ow I I
#( 1 )0 ( 1000)-+0( 2000) )

Press the ~NPUT] key.

Uw
I I
[#( 1 ) 0( 1000)-+0( 2000) J
1 ) Copying starts and the COPY
EXECUTION message appears.
Copying small amounts of data is
done instantly.
2 ) After copying,
COMPLETED message appears

‘he c’ -

-161-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.4 PROGRAM COPYING

6.4.2 MACHINING PRO GRAM CONDENSING (condensing)

The efficiency with which the machining programs entered in the memory are accommodated may be
reduced through data erasure, addition and other corrections. When memory space is being wasted, the
empty spaces can be filled up and the number of characters remaining in the memory can be raised by this
function.
#2 is set as the condense command. If “ALL” is set in the first O (), condensing will apply to all ihe
machining programs entered in the memory.

When condensing all the programs UP’

in the memory: ~i+(2) o {ALL) --+0 ( )
/
* (2)
O (A LL)~O( )

Press the ~NPUT] key. OF

CONDENSEEXE~U’rlON
f I
13(2) O (ALL) --+O ( )
\ /J
1) Condensing starts and the
CONDENSE EXECUTION mess-
age appears.
2) The time required for condensing
differs according to the total volume
of machining programs entered in
the memo~. Under no circum-
stances should the NC power be *
switched off during condensing.

,’

-162-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.4 PROGRAM COPYING

6.4.3 MACHINING PROGRAM MERGING (merging)

When a new machining program is to be created and the contents of any program entered in the memory
are to be used without change or modification, the same contents of that other program can be eopial
onto the end of a particular program. This will produce a program by merging two other programs.
#3 is set as the merge command. The program numbers are set in the order of transfer source program
number followed by transfer destination program number.

@ample 1) Merging the 01001

program onto the end
of the 01000 program
# (m)

0 aml 1 )
‘o (‘ mm)
B
K?
# (3) o ( 1001 ) –-0 ( 1000)
J

!
1
Press the ~NPUT] key.
I
I
E’
I
I* (3) o ( 1001 ) --0
MERGEEXECUTION I
( 1000) I
\ /
1) The program is merged and the
MERGE EXECUTION me&sage o
appears. Merging small quantities of f \
data may be completed instantly.
MERGECOMPLEIE
2) When merging is completed, the
MERGE COMPLETE message ap- #oo( )–+0( )
pears. \ J

Example 2: When the 01002 program is subsequently merged onto the end of the 01000 program
following the above operation in Example 1, the program shown in the figure below is
prepared. 01000 is now the result of merging 3 programs, and programs 01001 and 01002
remain unchanged.
01000

250
characters

01001 1

1% ~,:racter,

01002 ~J

2S0characters
(Empty)

-163-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.4 PROGRAM COPYING

6.4.4 MACHINING PRO GRAM NUMBER CHANGES

The numbers of the machining programs entered in the memory can be changed.
#4 is set as the number change command. The program numbers are set in the sequence of present
program number first and then the program number after the change.

(Example) WhWchanging 01000 to

$ (a) D’
o (]-qflmml) +0 (Iqnblm) # ( 4 ) o (1000)-0 (3000)

-!

Press the ~NPUT] key. UP

No. CHANGE EXECUTION

# ( 4 ) o (moo)+ (3000)
1 ) The numbers start to change and the
/
No. CHANGE EXECUTIO-N message
appears. The numbers are changed in
an instant and the No. CHANGE o
COMPLETE message is displayed.

No. CHANGE COMPLETE

#( )0( )-+0( )

,:

..

-164-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.5 PROGRAM ERASE

6.5 PROGRAM ERASE

The program erase screen appears when the ERASE] menu key is pressed.
On the program erase screen, machining programs (main programs and subprograms) prepared by the
user can be erased by program numbers or in group units.

PROGRAMFILEJ 1 /2 ~ROGRAMERASE] IN/OUT 4

PROORAM
ENTRY20 REMAIN 180
cHARAcrER 212?4 REMAIN 41750 , #l M~PR~~ A
<PROGRAM> <CHR> <ST> <COMMENT> \WJ999JZ;
1 123 TEST CUT PRCGRAM ~ #2 B 8000- 8999
100 ‘ #3 c 9000” 9999
200 #4 FHF.O CYCLE
300
400

;:
700
800

1%8
1200
1400
1800
1800
2030

#(Q DATA( )

. ..... . ,,.,.:,:.,.,,.,:.:
,.,.,,,.,.,
INPUT I OUTPUT I COPY ~=] COMMENT\ PARAM I I I

Data setting range

# Item Details Program Program All
number group erase programs
assignment erase
1 MAIN This is designated when data 1—7999 and ALL
PROGRAM within range of machining loooo–
A program numbers 1–7999 99999999
and 10000-99999999 is to
be erased.
2 MAIN This is designated when data 8000-8999 ALL
PROGRAM within range of standard
B CLR
subprograms 8000-8999,
prepared mainly by user, is
to be erased.
3 MAIN This is designated when data 9000-9999 ALL
PROGRAM within range of custom
c programs 9000-9999
provided mainly by machine
builder is to be erased.
4 FIXED This is designated when a canned cycle program is to be erased although
CYCLE this step cannot normally be taken.
Parameters must be set when erasing canned cycle programs.
Refer to the section on “canned cycle program entry/editing” in the
appendix.

-165-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.5 PROGRAM ERASE

(1) Erasing 1 machining program

Proceed as follows when erasing the machining program with the designated program number from
among the machining programs entered in the memory.

Set the data classification and

number of the machining program
to be erased.
Example Erasing program 01001

D
~# ( 1 )DATA( 1 00~)

Press the ~NPUT] key. I OR ERASEEXECUTION

1) Program deletion starts and the

#( 1 )DATA(l 005 J
ERASE EXECUTION message ap-
pears. This is almost always done 4
instantly.
2) When the erasing is eompletd, the
ERASE COMPLETE message ap-
pears and the data setting are; go-& ERASECOMPLETE
blank.
# ( ❑ )DATA( )

List of programs prior to erasure

QErase
0 mt ion
List of programs after erasure

PROORAMENTRY ZO REMAIN 180 PROGRAMENTRY 19 REMAIN 181

CHARACTER 21234 REMAIN 41750 CHAILM3ER 20921 REMAIN 42000
I <PROG~ > < :;+> <ST> < COMMENT> < PROGRAM> < CHR > < ST> < COMMENT>
1 123
2 300 300
222 1: 222
1ii: 312 100 312
1000 125 1000 125
1001 313 1020 297
1020 297 ( 1
1 !

The erased program 01001 vanishw from the file

page, and the PROGRAM ENTRY,
CHARACTER and REMAIN amounts are
revised and displayed.

-166-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.5 PROGRAM ERASE

(2) Erasing groups of machining programs

Proceed as follows to erase all the programs in any of the following 3 data classifications for the
machining momuns entered in the memory: c 1> 1 — 7999 and 10000 – 99999999, c 2>8000 –
8999 and-~ 3; ‘iW13— 9999.

Set the data classification of the

~ao~ams to be erased and ALL in

Example Erasing all the programs

in MAIN PROGRAM A
R
#(~ ) DATA ( ~n~ ) #( l) DATA( AL~)
/

Press the ~NPUT] key.

[ ERASEEXEC~ON
OF
# ( 1 )DATA( ALU )
1 ) Program erasing starts and ends
instantly. The ERASE COMPLETE
message appears and the data setting
area goes blank.

ERASE COMPLETE

# ( ❑ )DATA( )

Check the e REMAIN> ! PROGRAM ENTRY REMAIN 196 “

characters on the program file Dw CHARACTER 153: REMAIN61250
screen. < PROGRAM> < CHR > < ST>< COMMENT>
8000 265
8001 321
9000 560
9050 393

-167-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.5 PROGRAM ERASE

(3) Erasing all the machining programs in the memory

Proceed as follows to erase all the 1 — 99999999 machining programs entered in the memory.

Set CLR into the data area. r3

*( )
DATA(~E~]) (#( )DATA ( CL~ )

1 ) The # ( ) parentheses may remain

blank.

Press the ~NPUT] key.

1 ) All the machining programs are

UB

erased in virtually an instant, the

E
ERASE COMPLETE message ap-
pears and the data setting area goes
blank.

ti
PROGRAM ENTRY O REMAIN 200
Check the program file. OR CHARACTER 0 REMAIN 630f)(I
< PROGRAM > < CHR> < ST> < COMMENT>

1) PROGRAM ENTRY is set to zero

and REMAIN displays the
maximum number of programs
permittd by the specifications.
2) CHARACTER is set to zero and
REMAIN displays the maximum
number of characters permitted by
the specifications.
Refer to the table below for the
numbers of programs and
characters, which depend on the
specifications.

Tape length Pro- Characters Tape length ‘m- Chamcters

grams grams
20 m 40 10,OOO 600m 400 236,250 Figuresin parenthesesare for
the V series
40 m 64 16,000 1,2(UI
m m 4735eo
(l,QW)
80m 128 32@oo 2#30 m 984,5fM
(1,%)
160m m 63,000 5,W0m 400 1,968,750 Note With the qwem 335M,
(seeNote) (l,m) the tape lengthis
300(320)m 400 118,250 limitedto 4,5(NImeters
(400programs) when
automaticprogram-
3 ) The file column goes completely mingis featured.
blank to indicate that no programs
are now entered in the memory.

-168 -
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.6 PROGRAM FILES

6.6 PRO GRAM FILES

The program file page appears when the [COMMENT] menu key is pressed.
The page now gives a list of the machining programs prepared by the user and entered in the memory.

‘ROGRAMFILEl IN/OUT 5. 1 /1
ROORAMENTRY 20 REMAIN 180
HARAcrER 21234 REMAIN 41750
PRCORAM> <CHR> <ST> < COMMENT> <PROGRAM>< CHR><fl><COMMENT>
1 123 TEST CUT PROGRAM 8000
8001
L?
300
400
500
600
700
L?flo

1%
12(JO
1400
1600
1&lo
2(XM

o( fl)COMMENT{ )

INPUT I OUTPUTj COPY I ERASE PARAM I I I 4

Item Details
FROGRAM ENTRY, The number of user machining programs already entered is indicated in
REMAIN the PROGRAM ENTRY column. The remaining number of programs
which can be entered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the
programs already entered and remaining programs is the maximum
number of programs entered and is determincxl by the specifications.
CHARACTER, The number of characters which have already been entered is indicated in
REMAIN the CHARACTER column. The remaining number of characters which
can be entered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the
characters already entered and remaining characters is the maximum
number of characters entered and is determined by the specifications.
REMAIN is indicated in 250-character units.
< PROGRAM> <PROGRAM >: This indicates the numbers of the machining programs
<CHR> <ST> already entered. They are displayed in ascending order
< COMMENT> from 1 to 99999999.
< CHR >: This indicates the number of characters stored corresponding
to the machining program numbers.
<ST >: This indicates the status of the machining programs. (Not used)
<COMMENT >: A comment, such as the machining program function,
specification or application, can be displayed here. It
can consist of up to 18 alphanumerics and symbols.
It can even be designated with input from paper tape
and the setting can be made on this screen.

NOTE When many short programs have been entered into the memory or when editing operations have
been undertaken f&q~ently, the efficiency with which the memory can be used-d~eriorates and,
due to the limitations imposwl by the configuration of the memory, (CHARACTER +
REMAIN) bemmes less than the maximum number of characters stored under the specifications.
When this difference is extremely great, the efficiency can be enhanced by the condense function.

NOTE When comments are prepared, they can be written into the memory inclusive of spaces but in
order for the memory to be used at maximum efficiency, the spaces ([SP]) are not recognized after
the comments have been entered.

-169-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

The 1/0 parameter screen appears when the ~ARAM] key is pressed.
1/0 parameters can be broadly divided into 2 types and they must be set for data input, output and
compare, and for tape operation. One type relates to the 1/0 devices used, and they are used to set the
transfer rate and other factors in line with the devices used. Five types of 1/0 devices can be entered. The
other type consists in the basic 1/0 parameters Lwd to determine which device is to be connected to which
channel.

6.7.1 BASIC I~PUT/OIJTPUT PARNETERS

IN/OUT 6. 1 /2
~/OBASE PARAM]

# < PORT> < DEVICE>

1 DATAIN o 0: PTR
2 DATAOUT 1 1 : PTP
3 NCRUNNING O 0: PTR
4 MACRO PRINT 1 : PTP
5 PLC IN/OUT ; 3: PPR

6 COMPUTER
LINK 2 4: LNK
7
8

1:

11
12
13
14
15

# ( H) DATA ( )( )

INPUT I OUTPUT I COPY I I

# Item Details Setting range

1 DATA IN This sets the 1/0 port and device number < PORT>
when machining programs, tool data, O: For input or output
parameters and other such data are input. from port O
(Fixed to PTR-240)
1: For input or output
This sets the 1/0 port and device number from port 1
when machining programs, tool data, 2: For input or oL1tpLlt
~arameters and such data are outmt. from port 2
3 NC This sets the device number and 1/0 port < DEVICE> (NOTE 1)
RUNNING number of the input device when operating
0: Device no. e 0>
in the tape mode.
\ \
4 MACRO This sets the device number and 1/0 port 4: Device no. <4>
PRINT number of the output device when issuing
an external output command in a user
macro.

c This sets the 1/0 port number and device

number when inputting or outputting data
based on the PLC.

-170-
 6, DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT..OUTP UT PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range

6 COMPUTER This sets the 1/0 port number and device
LINK number when inputting or outputting data
based on the computer link function.
The 1/0 port is fixed at port 2, For further
details on the computer link function, refer
to the separate documentation.

NOTE k The device number to be used is selected from devices <0> through <4> entered in the 1/0
device parameters on the following page.

-171-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

6.7.2 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE PARAMETERS

The parameters of five I/O devices from devices <O> to e 4> can be set.

~/O DEVICEPARAM] IN/OUT 6. 2/2

# (o) (1) (2) (3) (4) #

1 DEVICENAME PTR PTP PRI PPR CMT 16 TITLE FEED OUT
2 BAUDIL%TE 222 17 FEEDCHR. 0200 0
3 STOPBIT 133 1fj PARITY
V 000
4 PARITYEFFECITVE 100 19 TIMEOUTSET 100 1(YI100
5 EVENPARITY 100 20

6 CHR.LENGTH 333 21 EIA CODE Al Al Al

7 TERMINATOR TYPE 100 22 1[ A2 A2 A2
8 CODE1 00 00 00 23 # AOAOAO
CODE2 00 00 00 24 x BA 6A 6A
la REWIND
CODE 07 00 00 25 . C2C2C2

1~ HAND SlL4KE 331 26 03 D3D3

1z DCCODEPAR~ 110 27
13 DCYDCX OUTPUT 000 28
14 CROUTPUT 000 29
15 EIAtXJTP~ 000 30

DEVICE <O> #(h) DATA( )

INPUT 10UTPUT I COPY ! ERASE ICOMMENT

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 DEVfCE This sets the device name for the device Less than 3 characters
NAME number. (alphanumerics, symbols)
It can be used to differentiate easily
between the devices.
Exampks PTR, PTP
2 BAUD RATE This sets the speed at which the data will be 1:9600 @pS)
transferred. 24800
3:2400
41200
5:600
G 300
7110
3 STOP BIT This sets the stop bit length in the 1:1 (bit)
start/stop system. It sets the bit length 21.5
which accords with the 1/0 device 3:2
specifications.
Refer to #4 PARITY EFFECTIVE.
4 PARITY This parameter applies when the parity bit O No parity bit with 1/0
EFFECTIVE is used in addition to the data bits. It is set 1: Parity bit with 1/0
in accordance with the 1/0 device specifica-
tions.
1 character
ON ““
OFF bl b2 b b4 b5 b I \
7 ~/
Start bit Data bits
Pari@’bit $top bit

-172-
 6. DATA
lNP UT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

5 EVEN I’his sets the parity to odd or even when T Odd parity
PARITY ~arity is effective. Parity is ignored when it 1: Even parity
E not effective. It is set in accordance with
the 1/0 device specifications.
6 CHR. rhis sets the data bit length. It sets the D: 5 (W)
LENGTH :haracter length (data bit) in accordance 1:6
ivith the 1/0 device specifications. 27
Refer to W PARITY EFFECTIVE. 3:8
7 rERMlNA- The code for completing data reading can 0: No terminator
rOR TYPE be selected. 1: EOR or EOB
2 EOB
3: EOR
4 Any 1 character
5: Any 2 characters
8 CODE 1 This sets the code for completing the read- O – FF (HEX)
ing when the #7 TERMINATOR TYPE
setting is 4 or 5.
9 CODE 2 This sets the code for completing the read- O – FF (HEX)
ing when the W TERMINATOR TYPE
setting is 5,
10 REWIND This sets the tape rewind code. Match it o– FF (HEX)
CODE with the tape reader being used.
Note: The tape is not rewound when O is
set even if the rewinding command is
executed.
11 HAND RS-232-C communication control system, 1: RTS/CTS system
SHAm3 it is set in accordance with the control Z No handshake
system of the 1/0 device connected. 3 DC code system
12 DC CODE Valid only when DC code system under O DC code without
PARITY #11 HAND SFL4KE has been selected. parity
Parity is added to the DC code. 1: DC code with even
This is set in accordance with the 1/0 parity
device specifications.

I 187654321 I
No parity 000 (13H)
DC-3
Parity 0000 (93H)

-173-
 .,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.7 INPZJT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

# I Item ,I Details I Settinrz. ran~e

o–
(unit)
13 Dc2/Dc4 This is set when transmitting the data O: No DC2, no DC4
OUTPUT from the NC! system to a tape puncher 1: DC2, no DC4
or other output device or when starting 2: No DC2, DC4
up the output device by a DC code. It 3: DC2, DC4
is set in accordance with the output
device specifications.
14 CR OUTPUT This is set when inserting the <CR> O Invalid
code immediately before the EOB (L/F) 1: Valid
code with ISO code output.
15 This sets whether the ISO code or EIA O: 1S0 output
OUTPUT code is to be output with data output. 1: EIA output
The ISO/EIA codes are automatically
identified with data input.
16 TITLE FEED This outputs the titles to enable the O Invalid
OUT paper tape to be identified when the 1: Valid
machining programs are output onto
paper tape. The program numbers and
comments are output to the head feed
section for the titles.
17 FEED CHR. With tape output, this designates by a O – 999 (characters)
number of characters the length of the
paper tape feed section (perforations
only) which is output before and after
the data.
The feed length is the same before and
after the data.
18 PARITY V With tape memory, this is set when the O Invalid
parity V within a single block is 1: Valid
checked.
19 TIME-OUT During data inputioutput, this sets the o — 999 (1/10 See)
SET time-out time which detects a
suspension in the data transmission. An
error results when the single block read
or 250-character output time exceeds
the specified time (time-out time)
because of a malfunction in the 1/0
device or process of transmission.
The time-out time setting may have to
be changed, depending on the transfer
rate.
20 EM CODE [ This can specify substitute codes for the O — FF (HEX)
21 ] codes listed at the left which exist in the
22 # 1S0 format but not in the EfA format.
23 * Specify a code which does not duplicate
24 . an existing EIA code and one which
25 : does not result in parity H.

-174-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

6.7.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS

[COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER] IN/OUT6.3/3

f [SEITING PARAMETER] ~INK PARAMETER]
1 PORT NO. 211 flART CODE 021
2 DEVICE NO. 4 12 NAK SEND 022
3 LINKTYPE 313 SYNSEND 023
4 14ACKSEND 024
5 15 DC3 SEND 025
6 16 BUFFER SIZE 026
7 t7 ERROR RECOVERY 027
8 18 NC DELAY TIME 020
9 19 RESET INVALID 029
o 20 BUFFER EDIT 030

#( )DATA( )
INPUT[OUTPUT
I COPY {ERASEICOMMENTIPARAM

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 PORT NO. This sets the 1/0 port number and device 2 only
number for the input or output of data
using the computer link function. The 1/0
port is fixed at port 2.
2 DEVICE NO. This selects the number of the device to be O Device no. cO>
used from among devices e 0> to <4> \
entered in the 1/0 device parameters. When 4 Device no. c4>
this is changcxl, the number of the
c DEVICE> in the 1/0 device parameters
is also changcxi automatically.
3 LINK TYPE This assigns the type of computer link 1: Computer link A
function. 2 Computer link B
3 Intelligent terminal
link
4 High-speed server
operation
11 START CODE This selects the code which instructs that O DC1 (llH)
the initial transfer of the file data is to eom- 1: BEL (07H)
mence with computer link A. This is for
speeially designated user~ normally, O is set
for use.
12 NAK SEND This selects whether to send 1=1 to the O: No ml output
host computer when a communication error 1: m output
has occurred with the computer link B and
intelligent terminal link.
13 SYN SEND This selects whether to send them code O No ~ output
to the host computer when NC resetting or 1:m output
emergeney stop has occurrtxl with the
computer link B and intelligent terminal
link.

-175-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.7 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

14 ACK SEND This selects whether to send [~to the O: No l-l output
host computer when the header from the 1:l-7KTK.-loutput
host computer has been processed normally
with the intelligent terminal link.
15 DC3 SEND This selects whether to send ~to the O: No ~output
host computer when communication is 1: m outPut
terminated with the computer link B.
16 BUFFER SIZE This selects the receive buffer size with 249 – 4000 (bytes)
computer link B. 02000 (bytes)
17 ERROR When an error occurs during communica- 0 Error stop mode
RECOVERY tion with the intelligent terminal link, this 1: Automatic reset mode
(automatic selects either the mode in which the NC
resetting when system’s communication software deals with
error occurs) the error and stop or the mode in which
initialization follows error processing and
the next header is received.
18 NC DELAY When data from a machining program is to O – 255 (1/10 SCC)
TIME be output to the host computer with the
intelligent terminal link, this sets the time
from the output setting to the start of the
data output.
19 RESET This selects whether the header receive O Header receive
INVALID processing is to be reset with the intelligent processing is reset by
terminal link. Set this parameter to valid (1) NC resetting.
when continually monitoring the NC status 1: Header receive
using the status signals. Normally, it is set processing is not reset
to o. by NC resetting.
20 BUFFER This selects whether to make buffer correc- 0 Sets buffer correction
EDIT tion valid with the computer link. When it to invalid during
is valid and a program error occurs, NAK computer link
is not sent to the host computer to enable 1: Sets buffer correction
operation to continue. When it is invalid, to valid during
NAK is sent and the operation is termin- computer link
ated when a program error occurs.

-176-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.8 RS-232-C 1/0 DEVICE CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS

6.8 RS-232-C 1/0 DEVICE CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS

6.8.1 TAPE READER, TAPE PUNCHER, PRINTER AND FLD

CONNECTIONS

NC control unit Machine side panel

u
~
(

\ / II
L / [

NOTE Port O is always used to connect the PTR-240.

Refer to the following example and to the section on the cable connections and parameter settings for
RS-232C 1/0 devices in the appendix at the end of the manual for further details on the 1/0 device
parameter settings.
(Example 1) Tape reader (PTR-240) connections and parameters during tape operation

1/0 basic parameters 1/0 device parameters <O> *

< PORT> < DEVICE> DEVICE NAME PTR
NC operation O 0 BAUD RATE 2
* The device number which is STOP BIT 1
set by the 1/0 device PARITY EFFECTIVE 1
parameter is set as the device EVEN pARITY 1
number. CHR. LENGTH 3
Device <O> in this example. TERMmAToR TYPE
1
CODE 1 00
CODE 2 00
REWIND CODE O: No rewinding 7: Rewinding
HAND SHAKE 3
DC CODE PARITY 1
DC1/DC4 OUTPUT o
CR OUTPUT o
EIA OUTPUT o
TITLE FEED OUT o
FEED CHR. o
PARITY V o
TIME-OUT SET 100

-177-
 ,,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.8 RS-232C 170 DEVICE CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS

(Example 2) Parameters for tape reader (PTR-240) with tape input

I/O basic parameters 1/0 device parameters <O> *

< PORT> < DEVICE> Refer to &ample 1.
Tape input o o*
* The device number which is set by the 1/0 device parameter is set as the device number. This is device
<0> in this example.
(Example 3) Tape puncher (PTP-02A) connections and parameters during tape output

NC control unit Machine side panel

Port 1

dll

When connected to port 1

1/0 basic parameters 1/0 device parameters <1> *

< PORT> < DEVICE> DEVICE NAME I PTP
Tape output 1 1* BAUD RATE 12 I
* The device number which is
STOP BIT 13 I
set by the 1/0 device PARITY EFFECTIVE 10
parameter is set as the device EVEN PARITY o
number. CHR. LENGTH 3
Device <1> in this example.
TERMINATOR TYPE o
CODE 1 00
CODE 2 00
REWIND CODE o
HAND SHAKE 13 I
DC CODE PARITY 1
DC2/DC4 OUTPUT o
CR OUTPUT o
EIA OUTPUT o
TITLE FEED OUT o
FEED CHR. 200
PARITY V o
TIME-OUT SET I 100 I

-178-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.8 RS-232C 1/0 DEVICE CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS

6.8.2 PARALLEL PUNCHER CONNECTIONS WITH TAPE OUTPUT

Machine side panel

]1
NC cnntrol unit l!
II
11
(Port 1) Parallel puncher,
I
7 1- Mitsubishi TP-50

SIEEI I
I
L )
Setling OFF
lb
[i
Parallel selection

When connection is made to port 1

1/0 basic parameters 1/0 device parameters c 1> *

Setting is made in the same way as for PTP-02A (serial
< PORT> < DEVICE> puncher).
Tape output 1 1* (For furlher details on the PTP-02A setting, reference
should be made to example 3 and the appendix at the end
of this manual.)
* The device number which is set by the 1/0 device parameter is set as the device number. This is device
<1> in this example.

-179-
6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.9 DATA PROTECTION

6.9 DATA PROTECTION

6.9.1 DATA PROTECT KEYS

The data protect keys can be used to prohibit data setting and erasure. The following 3 keys are available.
~heir names differ according to the machine builder. For further details, reference should be made to the
instruction manual issued by the machine builder.)
1 ) KEY 1: For protecting all kinds of tool data, and for protecting coordinate system presetting
based on origin set
2 ) KEY 2: For protecting user parameters and common variables
3 ) KEY 3: For protecting machining programs
Each of the keys prohibits setting and erasing at the OFF position.

Data protect keys CNC data

Data settings KEY I

on CRT o- Tool data
screen

L KEY2
0% User
parameters

KEY3
Machining
programs

(1) Tool data protection (KEY 1)

The operations listed in Table 1 are prohibited when KEY 1 is OFF.
Table 1 Data protected by KEY 1

No. Operation Screen

1 Origin set MONITOR/POSI. COORDI
2 Tool offset setting/erasing MONITOR, offset
3 Tool offset setting/erasing TOOL OFFSET, tool offset
TOOL OFFSET, length
4 Tool offset setting/erasing
measurement
5 Tool registration data setting/erasing TOOL OFFSET tool registration
6 Tool life data setting/erasing TOOL OFFSET, tool life
7 Work coordinate offset amount setting,/erasing TOOL OFFSET, work coordinates
8 Tool offset data tape input IN/OUT, input
9 Tool offset data tape output IN/OUT, output

NOTE When KEY 1 is OFF, the “DATA PROTECTING” message appears on the screen showing
No.1 through 7 in Table 1 when any key except a menu key is pressed without input. For origin
set on the present value/coordinate screen, however, the message appears when the [C.B] key is
pressed without origin set being performed.
On tool screens No.3 to 7, it is no longer possible to execute manual numerical commands. If
operation No. 8 or 9 in Table 1 is performed, the “DATA PROTECTING” message appears
when the input key is entered, and input or output is prohibited.

-180-
 6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
6.9 DATA PROTECTION

(2) User parameter, common variable protection (KEY 2)

The operations listed in Table 2 are prohibited when KEY 2 is OFF.
Table 2 Data protected by KEY 2

No. Operation Screen

1 Control parameter ON/OFF MONITOR, control parameters
2 Control parameter ON/OFF PARAM, control parameters
3 Axis parameter setting PARAM, axis parameters
4 Machining p arameter setting PARAM, machining p arameters
5 Common variable setting MONITOR, common variables
6 1/0 basic parameter setting IN/OUT, parameters
7 Parameter tape input IN/OUT, input
8 Parameter tape output IN/OUT, output
When KEY 2 is OFF, the “DATA PROTECTING” message appears on the screen showing No.1
through 7 in Table 2 when any key except a menu key is pressed without input.
If operation No. 7 or 8 in Table 2 is performed, the “DATA PROTECITNG” message appears when the
input key is entered, and input or output is prohibited.
(3) Machining program protection (KEY 3)
The operations listed in Table 3 are prohibited when KEY 3 is OFF.
Table 3 Data protected by KEY 3

When KEY 3 is OFF, the “DATA PROTECTING” message appears on the screen showing
No.1 through 5 and 7 through 9 in Table 3 or in an expansion operation when any key except a
menu key is pressed without input.
If operation No. 6, 10 or 11 in Table 2 is performed, the “DATA PROTECTING” message
appears when the input key is entered (No. 6 or 10) or when a cursor key is input (No. 11), and
the operation is not performed.

-181-
 ,.”.,,,,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.9 DATA PROTECTION

6.9.2 EDIT LOCK B, C

These functions protect programs by prohibiting editing and erasure operations conducted for machining
programs B and C.
......... ... ...... ................. ..... ......... ..... ........ ....

Machining programs A

1 - 7999
.............. .... ........ ......... ...... ......... ... ........... ........ ........... ..—
Machining programs B _ Editing rohibited
(standard user subprograms) by edit ?ock B

8000 - 8999
........ ..................... .............. .........

J
Machinin programs C Editing rohibited
(machine %uilder customized by edit fock C
programs)
9000 - 9999
.... .... ........ .......... ............. ...... .... ... --------...................—
Machining programs A

Editing prohibited by data protect (KEY 3)

10000 -99999999
......... ........................ .... ..... .... ..... ... ..... .... ....

The edit lock function settings affect the operations listed below on the EDIT/MDI and IN/OUT screens.

Editlock B Edit lock C

Screen Operation Machining pr, rams Machining prc rams
A B c A B c
EDIT/ SEARCH Data search o o x o o x
MDI Edit 0 x x 0 0 x
PROGRAM Edit 0 x x 0 0 x
MDI-ENT MDI-ENT 0 x x 0 0 x
IN/ INPUT Input 0 x x 0 0 x
OUT Compare 0 x x 0 0 x
OUTPUT output 0 x x 0 0 x
COPY copy 0 x x 0 0 x
Condense 0 x x 0 0 x
Merge 0 x x 0 0 x
Number change 0 x x 0 0 x
ERASE Erase 0 x x 0 0 x
COMMENT Comment settimz 0 x x 0 0 x
MONI-
PROGRAM Buffer correct 0 x x 0 0 x
TOR

If an attempt is made to perform any of these operations, the “E15 EDIT LOCK B“ or “E16 EDIT LOCK
C“ error message appears.

-182-
 ,,

6. DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT

6.9 DATA PROTECTION

When the edit lock function is valid, programs except edit lock programs are processed by the machining
program input and output functions.
ln order to prevent operational omissions arising in cases like these, the protection statuses of the
machining programs and other data are indicated on the data input/output screen.
The display information and screen use are indicated below.
* Display information

Protection status
Data Description
< LOCK>
#1 MAIN PROGRAM ABC Program ABC protection
= data protect KEY 3 OFF
BC Program BC protection
= edit lock B
(Data protect KEY 3 ON)
c Program C protection = edit lock C
#2 TOOL DATA ON Tool data protection
= data protect KEY 1 OFF
OFF = data protect KEY 1 ON
#3 PARAMETER ON User parameter protection
= data protect KEY 2 OFF
OFF = data m-otect KEY 2 ON

Data input screen Data output screen

\ @3ATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1 ; DATA OUTPUT] IN/OUT 2

< LOCK> I < LOCK>
~ #l MNNPROORAMA6C :11 PORT O # 81 MAINPROOR4MABC ti11pORTNO. 1
; # 2 TOOLDATA OFF ti12 DEWCE O ~ ~ 2 TOOLDATA OFF i! 12 DEVICE NO. 1
, #3 PARAM~ER ON , $3 PARAMEITR ON
< DEVICE> PTR I <DEVICE> PTP
: < BAUD RATE> I
1 4800 I < BAUD RATE> 4800”
; #lo
# < lSO/EL4> 1s0
MODE 8
1 1 < lTllE FEED> 1
1
1:(IEI t
I 1
I
2 : COMP I
# I
t I
I 1
I 1
I I
1
~ < INPUT> ~ < OUTPUT DATA>
I b
I I
1 #
: < COMP. DATA > 1
1
I 1
I 1
t 1
I 1
t 1

-183-
 ,, . . .. . .,

7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION

7.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION

7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION

7.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION

The graphic screen appears when the [GR~HIC] function selector key k pressed.
The machine tool movements can be monhorcd and the paths in the machining programs can be
illustrated on the graphic screen. These functions are useful for program inspections.
( 1 ) Trace function
This illustrates the path of the actual machine movement and it draws the machine movements
faithfully. The operations of the machine during machining can be monitored.
(2) Program check function
This illustrates the movement path for a machining program without performing automatic
operation, and it draws the results calculated inside the NC system. It therefore enablti accurate
diagrams to be drawn at high speed and machining programs to be checked.

.. . . . .

-184-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

7.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

The figure below shows the menu configuration on the graphic screen. Thcs,e menus are used to select the
operations to be performed on the graphic screen, and the menu keys are used for selection. When the
required menu is not indicated, simply press the ~ENU] key and the next menu will appear.
*
012345678 SHIKAKUSUI FC 100.00 GRAPHIC
N013
N014
N015
N016
N017
N018
N019
N020
N021
N022
N023
N024
N025
N026
N027
N028
N029

----

MECK I STEP I SEARCH1 TRACE I ERASE I PRGGRAMI

f
SCALE I STANDARDIGRF MODEIROTATION I I I
I
I
IMENU

I MENUj
I
List of functions

Enables the machining program being traced to be displayed on the

PROGRAM
screen.
ERASE Erases the pattern shown on the graphic screen.
Changes the scale of the illustration and the display position.
SCALE
Part of the illustration can be expanded and traced.
Automatically changes the display center and illustration scale within the
STANDARD
range accommodatin~ the machine’s stroke len~th.

-185-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

Menu Function
I
l-plane display 2-plane display 3-dimensional display
Y z
GRF MODE ‘L Y x
z+ x *
t- x x
J

Any of the above can be set for any of the axes.

When the 3-dimensional display mode has been selected, this enables the
ROTATION 3-dimensional illustration to be traced from any direction, not simply

,-,

,.
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.3 USING THE TRACE MODE ([ TRACE])

7.3 USING THE TRACE M ODE (~RACE])

The ~RACE] menu key is pressed to select the trace mode.
When the trace mode has been selected, the machine position is indicated by a triangular mark. If this tool
mark is not displayed, it means that the machine position is outside the screen display range. In this case,
change the display range, as described later, and move the coordinates. Alternatively, vary the scale value
greatly and widen the display range.
The machine position is traced at all times during the trace mode. The actual movement based on
automatic or manual operation is traced. The machine zero point is indicated by the”~” mark.
( 1 ) Trace start

Press the ~RACE] menu key.

~ ‘“ ~
1) Display the TRACE EXECUTION
message to indicate that the tracing I
mode~as been established.
2) The tool mark appears at the
- !
+$
machine position.

TRACEEXECUTION

3) The machine movements are now

traced in the trace mode.

(2) Trace release I TRACEEXECUTION

Press the TRACE] menu key. w

1 ) The TRACE EXECUTION mess-

age is cleared to indicate that the
trace mode has been released.
2 ) The tool mark is cleared.
NOTE k Besides the above-mentioned release
method, the trace mode can also be
released by operating as follows.
L
E17
1 ) Press the [SFP] or PO] function selector key.
2 ) When [SCALE] has bem selected and any other menu key (except ~RACE] and [SCALE]) has
been set without the display range having been set (in other words, without pressing the
~NPUT] key). For instance, the trace mode will be released when a menu key is pressed
following [SCALE] and [STANDARD].

-187-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

(3) Tracing line differentiation

1 ) Blue solid lines for movements based on rapid traverse and manual fed
2 ) Green solid lines for movements based on cutting feed.

NOTE When a shape is drawn at high speed in the trace mode, it will disintegrate in direct proportion
to the assigned speed. It will not be drawn properly in the machine lock high-sped mode. Use a
cutting feed of 2000 mm/min.

7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

Press the [CHECK] or [STEP] menu key to select the check mode.
When this mode is selected, the check commences immediately.
(./1 ) Preparations for checking
W~en the [SEARCH] m&u key is pressed, the operating mode (memoxy, MDI, tape) for checking
is selected and the program is called.

I Press the [SEARCH] menu key.

I UP
The setting area is displayed.
TESTMODE
MEMORY0
MDI 1
TAPE
TliXIMODE (0)0( 2~1 W )-( )

---------- ------ --
I
-------- ------ --- -1

TESTMODE (O) O(1OOO)N( )-( )

O1OOON
Press the ~NPUT] key. IIF

The setting area is cleared.

The SEARCH COMPLETE message appears

SEARCHCOMPLETE
\

NOTE k The check search can be omitted only when repeatedly continuing to check the same program
in the memory mode.
NOTE 2 Conducting a check search establishes the check mode and disables automatic start.
The checking process is canceled by resetting, check completion or operation search.

-188-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

fiample When checking an MDI program

,--------- --------%
*.-,
k .--- . . . . -------.

TESTMODE(~)O( )
K? TESTMODE(1)0( )N( )-( )
N( )–( )

DMDI N -

I Press the ~NPUT] key. Ilw

The setting area is cleared.

The MDI SETTING COMPLET
message appears.

MDI SETTINGCOMPL~

Exampkz When cheeking 0500 on the tape

Load the tape into the reader.

------- --------- _.
“%-------- -------- -

Ow
(2) O(500)N( )-( )

D500N -
Press the ~NPUT] key. UP

The setting area is cleared.

The SEARCH COMPLET message
appears.

SFAIWHCOMPLEI’E

-189-
 .

7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION

7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

(2) Check start

1 ) When checking continuously as with automatic continuous operation
\
[CHECK]
Press the [CHECK] menu key on the 28 XYZ: x 0.000
graphic screen. Ilw Y 0.000
z O.OQO

: +

<

.............. ...........................................-------
~ The program check is conducted. GO1 X230.:
: UP
:...................... ...................... ...................

f
i

1+

........ ..................... ...... ....... .............. ......-.

; The check sto s when it has been M02 ~FIE&~
conducted as rar as the end of the : Ow 0/0
Y 0:000
~ program.
z 0.000
..... ......... ...... ....... ....... .............................:

s
PROG CHECKCOMPLETE

-190-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

2 ) Checking block by block as with single block operation

I .
S28 XYZ; [;HECK]
Press the [STEP] menu key on the 0.000
300 Y-zoo.;
graphic screen. w : y -200.000
: z
1 :
:
O.000

One block is checked and the check is

stopped.
?
. I
:
: I
I

I Press the [STEP] menu key again. GOO Y-200.;

GO1 X-150. F500:

The next block is checked and the check

is stopped.

Keep the [STEP] menu key pressed.

Eve time the [STEP] key is pressed,

one 2’lock is checked.

........................................ ...... ..................

j The PROG. CHECK COMPLETE :

1 message appears when the end of the : OR
~ program is reached.
................... ......... ................. ... ...............:

When the [STEP] menu key is pressed

upon completion of the check, the step
check will commence from the head of the
program. PRO(3.CHECKCOMPLETE

-191-
 ,, .,,.

7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION

7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

3) Switching between continuous and step checking

When the [STEP] menu key is pressed during a continuous check, operation will subsequently
switch to one block by block check.
Similarly, it is also p&sible to switch operation from step check to continuous check.

Conduct a continuous check.

f
Press the [STEP] menu key. ~p

The blocks are checked one at a time

and the check is stopped each time. ,,*

n-(

Press the [CHECK] menu key.

Continuous checking k resumed.

,+

cm-f’
I

-192-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

4) Tracing during cutter compensation

When cutter compensation is applied to a program which is being checked, the programmed
path and tool center path are drawn.

Conduct a continuous check,

(3) Differentiation of lines during checks

During cutter
At other times
compensation
Manual feed — —
Programmed path Blue solid lines —
Rapid traverse
Tool center path Blue solid lines Blue solid lines
Programmed path White solid lines
Cutting feed
Tool center path Green solid lines Green solid lines

-193-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

( 4 ) Relationship to other functions

Function I Graphic check I Remarks

Both programmed coordinate rotation and
Coordinate rotation o
parameter coordinate rotation are possible.
Pattern rotation o
Decimal point input command o Both types I and 11 are possible.
Mirror image o (See Note 4)
The path reflecting the assigned movement
Z-axis cancel x
without modification is drawn.
Interlock x
External deceleration x
Override x
Feed hold x
If the cycle start button is pressed during a
Cycle start x check, the “CHECK” alarm will be displayed
while the button is pressed.
Auto restart x The check is completed by M02 or M30.
Setting is made to the position determined by
Work coordinate system offset
I o the actuallv set offset amount.
Local coordinate system offset o See above.
Function operation does not stop even if the set
Compare stop x
stop block is aecuted.
Helical interpolation x The path is drawn with straight lines
Canned cycles,
o
special canned cycles
During checking the machine can be moved by
Manua] mode/handle x switching over to the manual mode or handle.
This has no effect on the check.
F1-digit feed x
Spiral interpolation x See Note 1.
Zero point return,
x See Note 2.
start position return command

-194-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

Function I Granhic check Remarks

User macro I, II o All the basic variable operations as well as the
decision and branching functions are valid. The
functions below are not valid.
e Macro interface input/output
@ NC alarms
@ Single block stop, miscellaneous function
finish signal wait suppression
e Feed hold, feed rate overrid~ G09 valid/
invalid
e Position information – but previous block
end point coordinates are valid.
When any of the above commands are ezecuted,
thev are ismored or undefined data is entered.

I Assimedillegalarc
] (acttialmoveiient)
NOTE k Drawing for the spiral inter-
polation command
lt is not possible to draw the
actual path of an arc com-
mand with an end point not
positioned on the circumfer-
ence, as with spiral interpola-
tion. In the case of such com- Linedrawnequivalentto
mands. an arc is drawn by the /
start point radius as far ak the I 0
intersection point of the arc /0” Center
drawn by the start radius and 0“
line which connects the center ~~~
and end point, and a line is Start point
drawn from that intersection Example of corrected drawing
point to the assigned end for illegal command
point.
NOTE 2 Zero point return commands (G28, G30) and start position return command (G29)
The zero point return and start position return commands are valid, but the drawing differs in
part between the actual machine movement (trace display) and program check.
When a return is made to the zero point via the interim point using the G28 or G30 command,
the positioning is linear as far as the interim point, as shown in the figure below, and then it is
done independently for each axis from the interim point to the zero point.
With the G29 command, positioning is done independently for each axis as far as the interim
point.
However, in the case of drawing by program check, straight lines are used entirely for the
drawing, with the result that the path differs in part from the trace display.
G53 basic machine coordinate system
4
#l
1stzero
‘G28 &,4’/ , point
t& so &/ )
Q... G29path with +Q..&/
Q@oJ. tracedisplaye~/,
r$~ O%/ /’
4[ 1
%*P /’ G28path with trace
\ / ~‘ +, display
‘*%F ~’ .+$ \
\/ ‘ o~:o.$:-,$$$+
@
G~9command
/[ positionmovement
Interimpoint

-195-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

(5) Handling variables, parameters and offset amounts

The various data is handled as described below during a program check.

Data storage
Description
before check start
Parameter No The parameter input commands executed in the
program check are set as the actual data.
Work offset Yes The data can also be set from within the check
program. A return is made to the data misting
prior to the check upon completion of the
check.
Common variables Yes See above
Local variables Yes See above
Tool offset amounts Yes The offset amounts of 40 sets can be changed
(up to 40 sets) within a single check. There is no limit to the
offset numbers.
However, the actual data will be rewritten when
the 40 sets (160 types) have been exceeded and
the offset amounts changcail.

,,; ,

.,

:.. ,... ,,
,..’
. .

- i96 -
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.4 USING THE CHECK MODE

(6) Checkpoints
1 ) If the [STANDARD] or [SCALE] menu key is pressed while drawing in the trace and check
modes, the drawing will be suspended. It is resumed when the use of the selected function is
terminated.
In the trace mode, the sections applying during the suspension will not be drawn,
2 ) Drawing continues during the trace and check modes even when another function screen has
been selected.
3 ) When the PO] or [SFP] (for system 335M) function selector key is pressed, the graphics are
totally erased, and the trace or check mode is also cleared.
4 ) In the check mode, the external mirror image and other such machine operation switches are
valid only if they are set before the check is commenced.
5 ) When the auto start button is pressed during checking, the “PROG. CHECK MODE”
operation alarm will result and automatic start will not be accomplished for as long as the
button is kept depressed.
6 ) When check search or check start is performed during automatic start or feed hold,
“PROGRAM RUNNING” will result and it will not be possible to perform the operation.
7 ) Only the results of the NC internal operations are drawn by the check function. No drawing
occurs for commands requiring machine movements.
8 ) If the [SCALE] menu key is selected during checking, the cutting program path drawn until the
selection is cleared.
9 ) The various data which has been set in the program is handled as follows during checking.
1. Work offset, common variables, local variables
The data prior to the check is stored.
2. Tool offset amounts
The data prior to the check is stored.
3. Parameters
The data prior to the check is not stored.
10) Termination of check
1. “PROGRAM STOP” reds when the MOOor MO1 command is assigned.
NOTE When MO1 is executed, drawing is stopped regardless of whether the optional stop
switch signal is ON or OFF.
2. “PIZOG. CHECK COMPLETE” results when the M02 or M30 command is assigned.
NOTE The tape is not rewound in the tape mode.
3. Checking is terminated by resetting, by the TRACE] menu key or by the ~0] or [SFP]
(for system 335M) function selector key.
NOTE When a program error arises, release it by operating as above.

-197-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.5 DISPLAY MODE ([GRF MODE])

7.5 DISPLAY MODE ([GRF MODE])

(1) Types of display modes
There are 3 types of graphic display modes: l-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional. Any axes can be set
for 3dimensional display.
(2) Display mode setting

Press the [GRF MODEl menu key.

‘“ ~
1 ) The GRF MODE setting area appears.
2 ) Following the example given below,
set the axis names directly.

GRF MODE (
IL )

Ekample 1: Setting the l-plane display mode

Set the horizontal azis name first and then the vertical axis name, and press the ~NPUT] key.

E
Press the ~NPUT] key. Ow

1 ) When the display mode is seleeted,

the pattern already traced is
completely cleared and the new
coordinate axes are displayed
instead.

&ample 2 Setting the 2-plane display mode

Set the horizontal azis name and then the vertical axis name of the top plane, followed by the
horizontal axis name and then the vertical axis name of the bottom plane, in that order, and
press the ~NPUT] key.
The horizontal axea of the top and bottom planes should have common names.

Set the display mode. I

I
1
(Example) GRF MODE ( ]XIYKI ~1 )
I

Press the ~NPUT] key. w

1 ) When the display mode is seleeted,

the pattern already drawn is
eompktely cleared and the new
coordinate axes are displayed
instead.

-198-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.5 DISPLAY MODE (MODE)

I&ample 3: Setting the 3-dimensional display mode

Set the 3-dimensional display mode.

&
Press the ~NP?JT] key. w
I Y x

1 ) When the display mode is selected,

the pattern already drawn is
completely cleared and the new
coordinate axes are displayed
instead.

,,,

,“,
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE ([SCALE]]

7.6 DISPLAY RANGE ([SCALE])

This function allows the size and position of the pattern being drawn to be varied on the graphic page.

7.6.1 HOW TO CHANGE THE SCALE

I Press the [SCALE] menu key.

E’

1) The wale appears at the bottom

right of the screen and the present Y
scale value is indicated.
2) The cursor indicates the center of the
page.
L
X SCALEOH W. (Kll

To expand the pattern size, press the

E’
~
Y
1 ) The scale value is reduced. -+
2 ) The frame denoting the range indic-
ated by the set scale value is indic-
ated by a solid line.
X SCALEO* Z$5.8Xl

,—. —. —.—. —-—. —.—

To reduce the pattern size, press the
I 1
~+] key and the scale value is
increased. ~
y i
,
I I
1) The scale value is expanded.
2) The frame denoting the size by [ i
which the present display range is L .—-— .—.— .—.— -—.j
reduced by the set scale value is
indicated by a dot-and-dash line. XSCALE 0+ 314.160

I Press the ~NPUT] key. D

1 ) If a pattern has already been traced,

it will be cleared totally.

-200-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE (DISPLAY)

NOTE k The scale value can be increased or reduced by about 5% each time the + or – key is pressed.
NOTE 2 The scale value can be varied across a range of 0.100 to 9999.999.

7.6-2 EIOW TO C.IMl$IGE THE DISPLAY POSITION

There are two ways to move the position to be traced: either designate the center of the display range using
the cursor keys or use the cancel key to put the present tool position at the display range center.
( 1 ) Designating the display range center

Press the [SCALE] menu key.

Ilw

1 ) The cursor indicating the display

range center now appears.

Move the cursor to the position

which is to sewe as the display
center. UP
Use the [ ~], [ $], [+] and, [-]
keys.
Y .“ -0
-@-

1!
x SCALEox 3W.M10

Press the ~PUT] key. Ilw

1) The new coordinate system (in which

the cursor position is at the screen
center) is selected.
2) If a pattern has already been traced,
it will be cleared totally and a return
will be made to the initial screen.
x
I
NOTE 1: The present sde value determines how far the center will be moved by shifting the cursor.

-201-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE (DISPLAY)

(2) Putting the tool position at the display range center

It is assumed as gn example that the

~
center and the tracing N as m the
‘“
-$
TRACE EXECUTION

Press the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] ~p

keys.

1 ) The tool mark now appears in the

screen center.
2 ) Tracing continues if the movement is TRACEEXECUTION
+$
already being traced.

NOTE [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] function

This function displays the present
machine position on the screen.
1. This operation cannot be performed
when the menu display range,
display mode, rotate or check search I
is valid.
2. In the program check mode, the
machine position does not move
even when it is drawn, and it is not +P-
possible to display the tool center in
the center of the screen even by
operating the above keys.
6-
TRACE EXECUTION

3. In the trace mode, the above keys

can be operated to display the tool
center in the center of the screen
since the machine position moves
along with the tracing.

I Press the [SCALE] menu key. I 03

SCALE O-WI

-202-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE (DISPLAY)

EEEz!El0“ ‘
center using the cursor shift keys. .—. —. —.—.

,+
—.—.

;
i
-- i i
d
I
SCALE 0+ 3(XJ.COO

Use the minus [ - ] key to fill the

frame with the pattern. ‘w

SCALE0+ 42,

I
Press the ~NPUT] key. ‘w

TRACEEXECUTION

‘Trace again with the same program. UP

TRACEEXECUTION

-203-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.6 DISPLAY RANGE (DISPLAY)

(3) Changing the scale and display position in the 2-plane display mode
The l-plane and 3-dimensional displays have already been described. The 2-plane display position
can be chamzed bv dividimz the screen horizontally into two halves.
With a 2-pla~e d~play, th~scale can be changed ~or either plane but the same scale is used for the
top and bottom halves of the screen. Similarly, changes— can be made on either plane for the
horizontal azis.

Y
I

I -e

Switching between the top and bottom planes

Press the [SCALE] menu key.

1 ) The cursor indicating the center ap-

pears in the middle of the bottom
plane, making it possible to change
the display range of the bottom
plane.
2 ) The scale and display position are
changed in the same way as for
l-plane and 3-dimensional display.

, Press the [SCALE] key again. w

1 ) The cursor moves to the top plane,

making it possible to change the
display range of the top plane.

x SCALE O* 30D.U10

-204-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.7 STANDARD RANGE (~STXNDARD~)

7.7 STANDARD RANGE ([STANDARD])

When the [STANDARD] menu key is pressed, the movable range of the machine, which is determined by
the OT + and OT – (stored stroke limit range) machine parameters, serves as the display range. The scale
and display position are changed automatically. This function is useful when the tracing pattern projects
abnormally beyond the screen edges.

E
It is assumed as an example that the

TRACEEXECUTION

I
Press the [STANDARD] menu key. I

1) The display range is changed. +

2) Any patterns already traced are all f-’”
cleared and tracing begins anew
within the changed display range.
TRACEEXECUTION

-205-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.8 ROTATION ([ROTATION])

7.8 ROTATION (~OTATION])

A 3-dimensional display can be rotated in any direction.

+-
z

Yx
&

.
Press the ~OTATION] menu key. 0(-3

-+

Rotate the 3-dimensionalobjectusingthe

[-1,[+1[1’1 and[11 m~r k~~ When,for
instancqthe +] keyis pressed,the ilw
3-dimensionsobjectrotatesas
[ shownin the
figureon the right.

EEEiEEl
1 ) Any patterns already traced are all
OR

+
z
cleared.
Y -f) x

-206-
 7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.9 DELETION ([ERASE])

7.9 DELETION (~RASE])

When the BASE] menu key is pressed, the graphics traced in the trace mode and program check mode
can be deleted.

Press the &12ASE] menu key,

1) The cutting feed areas are left and

deleted by pressing the ERASE] key
once.
2) All the graphics traced are deleted by
pressing the @3RASE] key again.

NOTE 1: When graphics are deleted in the trace mode, tracing starts upon completion of the deletion.

-207-
7. GRAPHIC KEY OPERATION
7.10 PROGRAM ([PROGRAM])

7.10 PRO GRAM (PROGRAM])

When the WROGRAM] menu key is pressed, the contents of the program now being traced can be
displayed.
When a program is not required, it can be deleted by pressing the WROGRAM] menu key again.

O1oooN20–O

01000 S20–0 TESTPRO– I

Press the PROGRAM] menu key. w G2EXOYOZ0

I I
1) The number of the program being \@
executed, the comment and the
contents of the machining program
are displayed.
G81G9SX -1oo.:

-208-
 8. DIAGNOSIS

8. DIAGNOSIS
The menus are configured as shown below when he ~lliGN] function selector key is pressed.

Diamzosis
men; displays
(Nal-6) COORD1
\C-MODALIsHWO I.SHNI)LEI F’Lc-1/FIIW-WW IpLC-WT I I

,
ammmmmm
PZUE*f’e~s

NEXT
PAGEkey
u SOftwaw
wmtml
no. file

Power
monitor
D
n u

G
u
Key input
monitor

Hmdwwre

m
monitor
(1)
u
Basic‘PLC
data Iaxis
,monitor u
HaMare
monitor
(2)

-209-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (ALARM MESSAGES)

8.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (ALARM MESSAGES)

The diagnosis screen is split into two with the alarm messages always occupying the left half and the
desired information selected with the menu keys displayed on the right half.
On these screens are displayed the codes, numbers or messages relating to the NC alarms (operation
alarms, program errors, MCP alarms, servo alarms and system errors).
The automatic operation disable status of the NC system and stop status during automatic operation are
displayed by codes and error numbers.
.
<NC ALARM > i J:C::X]K DIAGN 1
I 2345-12
i <SUB>O 5678 N 45-12
MO1 OPERATION ALARM 012054 ]
I
WORK: G54] ~IS TO GO] ~ACHINE]
x -345.678 x 0.000 X -345.678
I ‘i 345.678 Y 0.000 ~ 345.678
< STOP CODE> [ z 0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000
I c o. coo c 0.000 c 0.000
I
I
< ALARM MESSAGE> I
1 FC 0.00

2345 M 56
1234 B 1234
1
I
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> G00 X-345.678 ‘f345.678;
: ~1234;
1 N1OO S5000 M3;
I N200 GOO Z-100. ;
I
I
I
I
t
C-MODAL
! SERVO ! SPINDLEI PLC-VF {NC-SPEC\

Basic data
F
. screen
--l-::~display ‘>

Classifica- Details
Error no.
tion code
MO1 0000 Operation alarm
Alarm display resulting from incorrect operation by
operator during NC operation or resulting from
something wrong with machine.
M02 0000 Absolute position return
Warning display due to lost absolute position when
absolute position system is used or due to defective
detector.
Pooo Pooo Program error
Alarm display resulting from automatic operation
mainly due to incorrect programming of machining
program or no NC specification matching.
sol 00 Servo malfunction
Servo system malfunction (alarm is released by
switching power on/off).
S02 00 Servo parameter initial malfunction
Something wrong with parameter sent to servo
system when power was switched on
S03 00 Servo malfunction
Servo system malfunction (alarm is released by
resetting NC)

-210-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.1 BASIC DATA DISPLAY SCREENS (ALARM MESSAGES)

Classifica- Details
Display Error no.
tion code
NC ALARM S51 00 Parameter error
Illegal servo system parameter setting

K-----&
Servo alarm
MCP alarm
Malfunction in ROM, RAM memory
I Y02 I 00 MCP alarm
System malfunction
MCP alarm
Defective mounting of amplifier
Y04 MCP alarm
2-port memory p arity
Y05 00 MCP alarm
Servo system parameter error
Y06 mcp-no setting error
I Error in mcp-no setting
I
I Y08 No spindle signal
Y51 00 MCP alarm
parameter error during control axis movement
I Message display Error in NC system
STOP CODE TO1 0000 Factor disabling automatic start
T02 0000 Cause of automatic stop (feed hold)
T03 0000 Cause of block stop
ALARM Message display Machine malfunction message is displayed by
MESSAGE means of user PLC
OPERATOR Message display Operator information message is displayed by
MESSAGE means of user PLC

Refer to the list of alarms in the appendix for further details on the alarms.
When an alarm occurs, the classification code appears on the entire screen,

‘,

-211 -
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.2 COORDINATE VALUES

8.2 CO ORDINATE VALUES

The coordinate page appears when the [COORDI] menu key is pressed.
This page displays the same data as the position display ~ONITOR] basic data page.
This page only displays the data; origin, manual numerical commands and other such operations cannot
be attempted from the page.

<Nc ALARM> j;&Oll~I]N ,2345,2 DL4GN 1

<SUB>o 5678- N 45-12
~ORK: G54] ~IS TOGO] ~ACHINE]
X -345.678 X 0. COO X -345.678
Y 345.678 Y 0.000 Y 345.678
< STOP CODE> z 0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000
c o. coo c 0.000 c 0.000

< ALARM MESSAGE> 0.00

s 2345 M 5;
T 1234 B 1234
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> G 00 X -345.678 Y 345. 678;
~1234;
N1OO S5000 M3;
N200 GOO Z-1OO. ;

C-MODAL I SERVO I SPINDLE I PLC-VF INC-SPEC I I I d

Refer to the section on position displays for further details of the display contents.

-212.
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.3 OPERATION MODES

8.3 OPERATION’ MODES

The operation mode page appears when the [C-MODAL] menu key is pressed.
This page displays the same data as the position display ~ONITOR] operation mode page.
The display page for the run-out time does not appear.

<NC ALARM >

1 5678 45- 2

< STOP CODE>

< ALARM MESSAGE>

G01 G17 G90 G22 G 94

G20 G73 G98 G54 G61
G66.1 G68 G96 G15.1 G50. 1
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> G50: P =0. 000001
.
G41 : 0.040
G43: z ! 2;~ 2Z;E:; 0.240
0.000
FA 200.00 S 2345 M 56 35
FM 1200.00 T1234 10
B 12!!

SERVO I SPINDLE I PLC-I/’F [ NC-SPEC I I I

Refer to the seetion on position displays for further details of the display eontents.

-213-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.4 SERVO MONITOR

8.4 SERVO MONITOR

The servo monitor page appears when the [SERVO] menu key k pressed.
Based on the machine parameters and servo parameters already set as the NC system, the servo statuses
during NC operation ire displayed on this p~ge.

<NC ALARM > [SERVO

. MONITOR1 DIAGN 3
(x) IY}
GAIN 33.0 33.0
DROOP 16000 10000
RPM 2&o 1500
CURR.RATE Zo
< STOP CODE> LOADRATE 70
REGN.RATE 30
GRID 3000 2000
ABSN 767 345
< ALARM MESSAGE> ABs 1x 123 678
ALARMNO. 1023 EO
GAIN () ()
DROOP
RPM
CURR.RATE
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> LOADRATE
! REGN.RATE
~GRID
; ABSN
; ABS1X
; ALARMNO.

Display Details
GAIN This k the position loop gain status display. The “position
[rad]
loop gain” k calculated by dividing the feed rate (mm/see)
by the follow-up delay error (mm); the standard value is
33. (The display shows O at low-speed operation.)
DROOP ~rogrammable dimension] The error in the actual machine position from the com-
manded position is known as “DROOP.”
This error is proportionate to the value of the assigned
feed rate.
RPM [T 1 This is the actual smed of the motor.
CURR. RATE [;] The motor current is displayed as the equivalent continu-
ous current in stalled state.
The display ranges from 0% to 50090.
LOAD RATE [%] This data is for monitoring motor overload.
Overload warning at 50%, overload alarm at 63%.
REGN. RATE [%] This data is for monitoring the regenerative resistance
load.
GRID ljx-ogrammable dimension] This is the distance from dog OFF (including grid mask
amount) to the grid point when dog-type reference point
return is Performed.
ABS N This indicates the speed of the detector at the position
forming the zero point in an absolute position detection
system.

-214-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.4 SERVO MONITOR

Display Details
ABS 1X This indicates the value of resolver 1X (1 cycle) at the
position forming the zero point in an absolute position
detection system.
ALARM NO. The alarm occurring in the servo system is indicated by
the number or symbol corresponding to the axis in
question. The first alarm is also indicated on the alarm
message screen. Up to 2 alarms for each axis are displayed
when a multiple number of alarms have arisen. (Refer to
the appendix at the end of this manual for further details
on the alarm contents.)

,’:

-215-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.5 SPINDLE MONITOR

8.5 SPINDLE MONITOR

<NC ALARM> [SPINDLEMONITOR] DL4GN 4

GAIN 10.0
DROOP 123456
RPM 6000
LOADRATE 80
< STOP CODE> ALARMNO. 1201
76543210
D/l L 01010101
< ALARM MESSAGE> D/I H 11OO11OO
D/O L Iolololo
D/O H 00110011

< OPERATOR MESSAGE>

COORDI C-MODAL SERVO PLC-I/F INC-SPEC I I

Disulav Details
IAIN rhis is the position loop gain status display. “O” appears when
here is no position loop. The “position loop gain” is calculated
]y dividing the feed rate (rad/s) by the follow-up delay error
‘rad); the standard value is 10.
IROOP rhe error in the actual angle of spindle rotation from the
~ssigned angle is known as “DROOP.”
[t is denoted as a number of pulses. “O” appears when there is nc
position loop.
RPM This is the actual speed of the motor. It is denoted in “rpm”

LOAD RATE This is the proportion of the load to the rated output.
[t is indicated in $%units, and with the 30-minute rated output it
is 100%. The display ranges from 090 to 120Y0.
ALARM NO. When there is a malfunction in the spindle amplifier, the details
of the alarm are indicated by a code number.
The first alarm is indicated on the alarm message screen, and
when a multiple number of alarms have arisen, up to 2 more are
displayed on this screen.
(Refer to the atmendix at the end of this manual for further
details on the &m contents.)
DATA BIT MONITOR (D/I) The input command supplied to the spindle amplifier is displayec
in bit correspondence.
D/[ H DiI L
o In-tapping Fonvard rotation SRN
1 ReverserotationSRI
2 Toque limitL
3 ToWuelimitH
Forwardrotationindexing
: }Gearseketi.n ~ ~~;~ Reverserotationindexing
10:Gear 10
11 Gear 11
6 Orientationcommand
7

-216-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.5 SPINDLE MONITOR

Display Details
DATA BIT MONITOR (D/O) The control output supplied from the spindle amplifier k
displayed in bit correspondence.

r-
D/OH D/O L
0 Forward CCW rotation
1 RwerseCW rotation Load deteetion
2 Approach (see Note) Speed deteetion
3 Phase sequence (see Note) In-alarm
4 Magnetic sensor sensitivity (see Note) Zero speed
5 Speed arrival
6 Orient finish
7

(Note): This is not output for the model FR-SFY. —

,,

-217-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

The PLC interface diagnosis page appears when the ~LC-I/F] menu key is pressed.
The various 1/0 signals for controlling the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) can be displayed and
set on this page.
The page can be used to check the machine sequence operations during PLC development or to check the
1/0 data between the NC system and PLC when something goes wrongwith NC op&-ation, and it can also
be used when forcibly defining PLC data.

I
<NC ALARM > I ~LC-I/F] DIAGN 5
I <S= DATA> XOO08
=0001 YOO15=0000
I XOOOA=OOO100005=0064
I
I
I 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
I Xooao 0000000000 Doo05 0000000000
< STOP CODE> I XOOQ8 0000010~ 05 0110010064
I
1 Xoolo 0000000000 D 0LW6 10000001 81
I X 0018 0101000050 0000010004
I
I x 002010100011 A3 DOC070~000010 42
< ALARM MIlWA(3E > XO028 1000001082
I 1000010084
I x 0030 0000000000 D 0038 0000001002
I X 0038 00001100 OC 11000000 co
I
I XO040 0000000000 D 0009 00000000-00
I XO048 0000000000 00000000 00
I XO050 0000000000 00010 0000000000
I X 0058 0000000000 00000000 00
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> I
I x 0060 0000000000 00011 0000000000
1 X 0068 0000000000 00000000 00
I x 0070 0000000000 DO012 0000000000
I X 0078 0000000000
I DEtiCE DATA MODE DEWCE DATA MODE
I
i ( B){ )( ) ( )( )( )
I

8.6.1 INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS SETTING AND DISPLAY

(1) Data setting area

DEVICE ( )
The device’nurnbers (input XOOO,
DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATAMODE
output YOOO and timer TOO)
used by the PLC can beset in these ( E}( )() ( )( )( )
parentheses.
DATA ( )
The dat~ co~responding to the set device numbers is set here when defining the PLC data forcibly.
Setting is made by “l” or “O” with bit data and by hexadecimal data with byte units.
MODE ( )
This designates the type of forcible definition:
1: On&shot type
2: Modal type

(2) Device data display area

The device data is displayed in
sequence from the device numbers 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
designated in the setting area. Xoooo 0000000000 DOO05 0000000000
Both bit display and hexadecimal XOO08 0000010105 0110010064
display are used for the data. Xoolo 0000000000 D0006 10000001 81
Separate device numbers can be XO018 0101000050 0000010004
displayed on the left and right,
respectively. ----- ------- ------ ------ ------

-218-
 8, DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

(3) Forcibly defined data display

(modal type)
When the forcible definition data
and mode have been set, the device
numbers and data appear, and the
~
set data is defined forcibly.

NOTT2 Sufficient attention should be

given to the sequence opera-
tions when using this function
during machine operation.
(4) PLC display device names

Sym-
Name Address Data type Details
bol
x Input O–47F Bit Status of signal input to PLC from
outside.
Y output O–3FF Bit Status of signal output from PLC to
out side.
L Latch relay 0–127 Bit Relay signal held even with power
ON/OFF among various PLC sequ-
ence processes.
M Internal 0–1279 Bit Temporary storage relay signal for
relay various forms of processing.
F Internal O– 127 Bit Ikpansion of above relay,
relay
(expansion)
E Special relay 0–127 Bit Relay used with PLC BASIC.
(Reference only)
T Timer o– 103 TI Bit Status of timer relay signal
controlled by time comt with PLC
1000–1103 TO Bit TI: Timer set; TA: Timer present
2000–2103 TA 2 bytes value
3000–3103 TS 2 bytes TO: Timer out; TS: Timer setting
value
c Counter O–23 CI Bit Status of counter relay signal
controkd by rp m count with PLC
1000–1023 co Bit CI: Counter set; CA: Counter
2000–2023 CA 2 bytes present value
3000–3023 Cs 2 bytes CO: Counter out; CS: Counter
setting value
D Data register 0—1023 2 bytes Memory register accommodating
numerical data that is processed by
PLC.
R File register O– 6535 2 bytes Arithmetic register inside PLC.
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

(5) How to read device addresses and display data

Device addresses (bit type) ( \

76543210 1 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
i Xoooo 0000000000 DOO05 0000000000
Xoooo o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XOO08 00000101 05 0110010064
Xoolo 0000000000 00006 1000000181
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 Xl XO
XOO18 0101000050 0000010004

xOO08 o 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 x0020 101ooo11 A3 00007 0~000010 42

XO028 1000OOt O 82 10000~00 84
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 XO030 0000000000 00008 0000001002
Xoolo o 0 0 0 0

X17 X16X15 X14 X13 X12 X11X1O

0 0 0
XO038 oooolloooc

L
11 OOOOOOCO
I
T T
Device addresses are allotted to Status display (1/0) for Data (2 bytes)
correspond with bits. signals corresponding to corresponding to
device addresses device addresses

Device addresses (2-byte type)

I
Doo05
76543210

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () High-order data
These indicate value
of decimal 100.
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Low-order data

,,.

.,

-220-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

8.6.2 PLC DEVICE DATA DISPLAY

The various status signals used by the PLC and the register data can be monitored and displayed.
When this page has been first selected, 16 bytes of 1/0 data appear respectively from XOOOO on the left and
from YOOOOon the right.
This page always monitors and displays the PLC signal statuses and so when the signal has changed in the
PLC, the display also changes accordingly.
There is a delay between the PLC signal change and the signal display. As a result, the display may appear
after the change or it may not be possible for the display to respond to extremely rapid signal changes.
( 1 ) Display device number setting
The device numbers are set in DEVICE ( ). If different device numbers or device addresses are set
on the right, the designated display numbers on both the left and right halves of the screen are
indicated-in sequence-horn the ~oprnost level of the display area. -
........................................................................................
(l%ample 1)

~1
DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATAMODE
Set MO into DEVICE ( ) on left. ~~ ~ [M]( )( )(05)( )( )
Set D5 into DEVICE ( ) on right.
~‘:,,:
3@:~;~ NC.SPECI I

~LC-1/F] D~GN 5
w <SliTDATA>X0o08=0001 YOO1
5=0300
Press the ~NPUT] key.
X0~ A=ml WCIJ5=O064
76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
MOO(K) 0000000000 D 00050000000000
MO(WI 00000101 05 01100100 64
MCK116 0000000000 D0006 1000000~81
MO024 al 01000050 00000100 04
/ /

......................,----------
........................................................

(.,2 ) Switching the disriav device numbers in 16-bvte units

The ~R~VIOU~ PAGE] key and NEXT PAGE] keys can be used to switch the page display in
16-byte units for the device numbers on the topmost level which are now being displayed.
\
<S-mDATA>xD~=&l YOOl
5=0000

~“ I z;;i:=iii;
1 J
M0144 0000000000 DO014 10000001 81
M 0152 010~ 000050 00000100 04
/ 1
.... ... ... .. .... ... .... .. .. .... ... .. . ... ... .. .... ... ..... ... ... . .. ... .... .. ... .... ...... I

(3) When, for any of the data concerned, the data pagea are turned in sequence and the finai clcvice
number is excmded, the page displaying the final device number data will remain on the screen.
(4) A setting error results when an attempt has been made to set either an illegal address or a device
number which exceeds the specifications.

-221-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

8.6.3 PLC INTERFACE SIGNAL FORCIBLE DEFINITION

(ONE-SHOT TYPE)
Settings are made on this PLC diagnosis page for forcibly defining the various signals used for checking
the PLC functions.
The device signals based on these settings are XYMFLCTDR.
( 1 ) Mode setting
First set the device number to be forcibly set into DEVICE ( ), the definition data into DATA
( ) and “l” into MODE ( ), and then press the ~NPUT] key. The set data is processed at the
head of cycle 1 of the user PLC and forcibly defined.

~LC-I/F] DIAGN 5
< SET DATA>

76543210 HEX 76543210 HE 1

M OCJ30 0000000000 D 000500000000 Ijo
Mooo8 00000101 05 0110010064
MO016 0000000000 D0006 1000000181
MO024 0101000050 00000100 04
\ \

(Ekample 2)

Set M23 into DEVICE ( ).

Set 1 into DATA ( ). G’
DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE
Set 1 into MODE ( ).
(M23) ( 1)( 1) ( 1 [)()

]Wt&&a NC-SPECI II

-8

Press the ~NPUT] key. ~LC-I/F] DIAGN 5

<S= DATA >

76543210 HEX 76543210 Ii EI

- M0016 1000000080 DOC05 00000000 6(I
MDD24 01010000 50 01100100 64
MO032 10100011 A3 00006 ~ 0000001 81
MOD40 1000001082 0000010004
) I

.................................... ...............................................

MO016 appears at the head and bit 7 changes

to “l.”
f the device M23 OUT instruction arrives
! uring cycle 1 of the user PLC, sequence
processing results.)
Data is not displayed at the numerical setting area at the top of the screen.

-222-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

8.6.4 PLC INTERFACE SIGNAL FORCIBLE DEFINITION

(MODAL TYPE)
This is the modal type of PLC interface signal forcible definition. Once set, it remains until it is cancelwl.
The device signals which can be set are XYMFLCTDR.
( 1 ) Mode setting
First set the device number to be forcibly set into DEVICE ( ), the definition data into DATA
( ) and “2” into MODE ( ), and then press the ~NPUT] key. The data is processed and forcibly
defined.

~LC-I/F] DIAGN .5
< SIX DATA>

76543210 H E X 76543210 H EX
x 0000 0000000000 D 0005 0000000000
X 0008 00000~ 0004 01100100 64
Xoolo 0000000000 f) 0006 1000000~ 81
(l&ample 3) X(X318 01010000 50 00000100 04
1 /

Set X8 into DEVICE ( ).

Set 1 into DATA ( ).
Set 2 into MODE ( ).

DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA M ODE

(X8)(1)(21( )()()

NC-SPEC I I I

-~LC-I/F] DIAGN 5
<SIiTDATA>X~B=~~

76543210 HEX 76543210 H f X

-XOM8 0000010105 D00050000000000
: x0010 0000000000 01100~0064
I : %00180101000050
: A3
X00201010001~
1
D0006 1000000181
0000010004
1
The forcibly defined device number and
numerical data are displayed here. J
@lax, 4 sets) ........... .. .. . ... ...... ............ .. . .. . .. .. .. . .

XOO08appears at the head and bit O changes to

“~.,,

Two sets of signals can be forcibly defined simultaneously.

Up to 4 sets of forcible definitions can be set in mode 2. If further setting is made with 4 sets established
already, these are scrolled in sequence and the subsequent 4 sets are made v slid.

-223-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

(2) Canceling forcibly defined data

DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATAM ODE

(//) ([)( )( )(10

I I
The < SET DATA> area is ‘made blank and

I Press the ~NPUT] key.

I G
the forcibly defined data is canceled.
(A data “O” settin is not a cancellation. “O”
data is forcibly de fined.)

Forcibly defined data is also invalid when the power is switched on and off.

8-6.5 DIAGNOSIS DURING EMERGENCY STOP STATUS

The exact cause of the emergency stop status can be checked when the “EMG” (emergency stop) message
appears on the operating status display of the CRT setting and display unit.
( 1 ) Check using diagnosis screen
3

J
m ‘“ ~’: “0”’

{ 3
~LC-I/F]
76543210;~
RO069 11111111
11111111 FF
\ )
765 4 3 2 1 0
................... ... .. .........................
Roo69!l:l:l:l!~\l;l:li
...............
(O:Emergency status 1: normal)
1 1 1 1 1; 1:1
............... 1
~ ~ Built-in PLC software” error output; PLC k stopped.
‘ Contact I/O interface card output; X27 is “O”.
, Board interface card otifput; MC721 emergency stop
MC712 emergency stop

● Built-in PLC software error output; Y29F k “1”,

● Board contact 1/0 card output; X127 is “l”.

NOTE Some systems do not employ R69 for this diagnosis.

-224-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.6 PLC INTERFACE DIAGNOSIS

(2) System diagram of CNC control unit emergency stop causes

Q
Emergency ( Inprrtfrommachine
system@ower
board)tocontactI/Ointerface
card... Machine
nmffirrction.
etc.
stop cause
I/F diagnosis Bit 4 of R69
@
Input from drive section to servo interface card ... Servo malfunction, etc.
I/F diagnosis —
@
CNC error output ............ Watchdog alarm, memory alarm
I/F diagnosis —
@
Built-k PLC error output ... Emergency stop output based on PLf2 software
I/F diagnosis Bits 0,6 of R69
I@x
“”-”
--”-””-- Input frommachineoperationboard to board interfacecard ... Emergencystop button
* The emergency stop button signals are generally input I/F diagnosis Bits 5,7 of R69
collectively from the contact 1/0 interface card in (l).

M300 CNC control section

xx
—.. — -
1- 1 7

E=El-- -mr- M c 303

Machine
power board

(3 @ ‘C323 e
~
Drive’section
CNC software I 1
(drive section,
error output .—— * OFF)
*
M31O : MC632
Emergen~ stop
Others: MC 611 button
Y
Emergenc~
stop Cl?T operation board \

--F==l-
r . -—
MC201 r
7. , ;
I km board ‘
L ——— J I
1 J _ _-m Board contact I
I M320,M330:MC721 r
I —--- -.
N1330H, M335 : MC71!
M31O: No sp&ificatior
L

-lJ No specificationfor M31O

—

“~ “is the setting switch inside the card which indicates the valid/invalid setting of the emergency
stop signal.
** The emergency stop button signal is supplied directly to the drive section together with the emergency
stop signal from the machine power board.

-225-
 ,,,,

8. DIAGNOSIS
8.7 NC SPECIFICATIONS LISTING

8.’7 NC SPECIFICATIONS LISTING

The optional specifications of the NC system and software management numbers appear on this page.
When a failure has occurred, consult your nearest MELDAS Service Center.

8.7.1 OPTIONAL SPECIFICATION LISTING

The specification listing page appears when the ~C-SPEC] menu key is pressed.

I \

<NC ALARM > ~ NC SPECIFICATION] DIAGN 6.1/2

/ 76543210
; OPO1 01110100
I 02 11001011
1 03 00110010
K STOP CODE> 1 04 00000001
I
I 05 00010010
I 06 1010101o
I 07 Olololol
< ALARM MESSAGE> I 08 00000101
I
09 11100110
I
I 10 00010011
I 11 10000100
I 12 10000001
I 13 00000010
I 14 01110000
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> 1.
i 15 00101010
1 16 00000100
I
I
I
I
I
I

COORDIIC-MODAL
I SERVO \SPINDLEI PLC-I/F I I

8.7.2 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT NUMBER LISTING

Press the ~C-SPEC] menu key to produce the specification listing page, and the second page of the Iisl ing
will appear when the ~EXT PAGE] key is pressed.

NOTE MCP does not appear with the M330HM-V and 335M-V systems.

NC SPECIFICATION] DIAGN 6.1 /’2

-226-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.8 POWER MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with ver-
sion E and M330HM-V/335M-V}

8.8 POWER MONITORING (M 330HM/335M system starting with

versim E and &f330FIIvl -V/3351M -V)
This function counts up the number of power failures and the corresponding elapsed time. Power failures
arise when the AC power supply is unstable, that is, when the voltage exceeds 120V or drops below 85V.

<NC ALARM> ~POWER ILLG. MONITOR] DIAoN 6.3/4

;+
: i ILLEGAL OX.INT o
; 2 ILI=%4L TIME o
<STOP CODE>

< ALARM MESSAGE>

,

,
< OPERATOR MESSAGE>
t

COORDI ICMOD~ SERVO I SPINDLE I PLC.IJF I NC.SPEC ] PLC-M/T

Item Description Display range (unit)

ILLEGAL The number of power failures is counted. O–9999999999 (times)
1
Couwr
ILLEGAL The time during which the power failurfi o–9999999999
2
TIME occurred is counted. (1/56.8 ms)
(The contents are retained even when the power is switched off.)
Check the AC power supply if ILLEGAL COUNT or ILLEGAL TIME is not zero, If the cause of the
failure cannot be pinpointed, contact your nearest MELDAS Service Center.
Checkpoint
When a number is entered in the setting area and the ~NPUT] key is pressed, the data is cleared to
zero. It was cleared to zero when the system was shipped from the manufacturing plant. After
shipment, the data is used for diagnosis and should not therefore be cleared to zero unless for a good
reason.

-227-
8. DIAGNOSIS
8.9 KEY INPUT MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with
version E and M3317HM-V/335M-VJ

8.9 KEY INPUT MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with

version E and M330HM -V/335M -V)
Data (120 units), which has been entered for diagnosis and maintenance purposes when trouble has
occurred, is stored and displayed on this screen. The latest 120 key data is retained even when the power
is switched ON and OFF.

:NCALARM> ~KEY HISTOR’~ DL4GN 6.4[4

\ NXT NXT N)(T NXT NXT NXT NXT M6
I tiXT NXT M7 M6 MS M4 M3 M2
: Ml MS M4 M3
M2 Ml Ml DIG
: STOPCODE> : M3 CRR CRL M4 M3 M4 M3 M2
r Ml M9 M3 M9 M9 M3 M6 GRA
: PON M6 GRA CAN MON GRA MON M5
; M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M4 M5
< ALARM MESSAGE> , M5 M5 M4 M3 M2 Ml M4 M3
; M4 M3 M4 k44 M3 M4 M2 M2
: M3 M2 M4 Ml M2 M3 M5 M4
, M6 GRA NXT NxT NXT NXT NXT NXT
: NXT NXT NXT M6 10 PON NXT NXT
, NXT NXT NXT NXT M6 NXT NXT NXT
< OPERATORMESSAGE> : NXT M6 NXT NXT NXT NXT NXT NXT

XORDI ICMODALI SERVO ] SPINDLE IPLC-I/F I NC-SPEC I PLCM/T I

-228-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.10 HARD WARE MONITORING 1 (M330HM-?7335M-V Ody}

8.10 HARDWARE MONITORING 1 (M330HM-V/335M-V Ody)

This screen indicates the names of the cards mounted in the NC system.

<NC ALARM > ~ &I/W MONITOR 1] DL4GN 6. 5/8

; MC161-I
: MC852
\MC446
; MC471#l
< STOP CODE> ; MC724-1
~MC303
/ MC301
< ALARM MESSAGE> ~MC431 #l
: MC841 #1
: MC712

< OPERATOR Nl~SAGE>

EMG m INC G40 G54 MEMORY ~

COORDI C-MODAL SERVO I SPINDLE I PLC-I/F I NC-SPEC ~ PLC-M/T I

-229-
 .:, ,,.,,

8. DIAGNOSIS
8.11 HARD WARE MONITORING 2 (M330HM-V/335M-V Od!)

8.11 HARDWARE MONITORING 2 (M330HM-V/335M-V only)

This screen indicates the types of spindle amplifiers and spindle amplifier cards mounted in the NC system.

<NC ALARM > ; ~/W MONITOR 2] DIAGN 6.6/6

! SVO1 RFO1 RF33

! SV02 RFO1 RF33
: SV03 RFO1 RF33
~SV04
c STOP CODE>
~ SP SF

< ALARM M~sAGE>

K OPERATOR MESSAGE>

EMG mm INC G40 G54 MEMORY [

CC?ORDI I C-MODAL I SERVO I SPINDLE I PLC-I/F \NC-SPEC I PLC-M/T I I

-230-
 8. DIAGNOSIS
8.12 PLC AXIS MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with
version E and M330HM- V/335M-V)

8.12 PLC AXIS MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with

version E and M 330HM -V/335M -V)
The PLC axis monitoring page appears when the ~LC-M/T] menu key is pressed.
The PLC axis servo status is indicated on the basis of the PLC parameters which have already been set for
PLC axis control.

-%
< ALARM IvfESsA(lE > { ~LC AX. MONITOR] DLAGN 6
I (PLCJ~ (PLC2)(PLC3)(PLC4)
‘ GAIN
~ DROOP “o
, RPM o
I CURR. RATE o
I LOAD RATE o
i REGN- RATJj o
~ GRID o
c OPERATOR MESSAGE> I
~~M No. 0000 00
I
I
I ~ACHINE] [DISTOGO]
I
, PLC1 o 0
PLC2
; PLC3
I PLC4
I
I
I
RDY I

~C ALARM[ SERVO I,SPIIW)LE I PIJWF I NC-.SPW II

Display item Description

GAIN [rad] This is the position loop gain status display,
The “position loop gain” is calculated by dividing the feed
rate (mm/see) by the follow-up delay error (mm); the
standard value is 33. (“O” appears at low-speed operation,)
DROOP @programmable dimension] The error in the actual machine position from the com-
manded position k known as “DROOP.”
This error is Drouortionate to the value of the commanded
feed rate. - ‘
RPM [rPm] This is the actual speed of the motor.
CURR.RATE [%1 This is the motor current as converted into a continuous
current under stall conditions.
Its display ranges from O to 500?+0.
LOAD RATE [%] This data is for monitoring motor overloads,
An overload warning results at 5070; an overload alarm
results at 6390.
REGN . RATE [%] This data is for monitoring the regenerative resistance
load.
Overload warning at 80%, excessive regeneration at 100%
GRID (programmable dimension] This represents the distance from dog OFF (inc]uding the
grid mask amount) to the grid point when dog-type refer-
ence point return has been performed.

-231-
 ,.,. . . . .

8. DIAGNOSIS
8.12 PLC AXIS MONITORING (M330HM/335M system starting with
version E and M330HM-V/335M-VJ

Display item Description

ALARM NO. When an alarm occurs in the servo system, the number or
symbol corresponding to the axis concerned appears. The
first alarm appears simultaneously on the alarm message
screen. With a multiple number of alarms, the alarms are
displayed for up to 2 axes. (For further details on the
alarm contents, reference should be made to the appendix
at the end of the manual.)
PLC1–PLC4 These signify PLC axes 1 through 4.

,.’

-232-
 9. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)
9.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

9. A~OMA~C PROGWMING (335M/335M-v’)

9.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS
(1) Features
This automatic programming system, which is contained inside this numerical controller, is
characterized by the following features.
1) This is an interactive system whose principles can be likened to the game of “pachisi.” All the
information required for inputting is displayed and prompted in the form of questions
generated by the system. The operator need only respond to the prompts while viewing the
machining diagram~ this interaction is so smooth and speedy that it takes ntxt to no time to
prepare the NC machining programs.
2) The shapes of the workpiece materials can be defined, and the graphic function allows shapes
which are virtually identical to those in the machining diagrams to be traced. This means that
the input resuIts are displayed in the form of pictures and that they can be visually verified.
This facilitates understanding of the on-going procedure and safeguards against errors.
3) The system itself automatically determines the cutting conditions so that the operator need not
bother with difficult calculations. Moreover, a more uniform level of workpiece material
quality is assured.
4) The algorithms for automatically determining the cutting conditions can be made to agree with
the characteristics of the user by means of the various parameters in the user files.
5) The system automatically selects the most appropriate tools for machining from among the
tools in the tool files. When the same tool has been selected for a multiple number of processing
stages, the machining sequence is determined so that the number of tool changes is kept to the
minimum. This feature helps to cut down the machining time.
6) The data which has been input into the automatic programming system can be saved in the
memory as intermediate files (interactive data) for reinput and re-use at a future date.

NOTE L The automatic programming system contained in this numerical controller will differ according
to the individual tiachine. ~h-eck the instruction manual issued by the machine builder. -
NIOTEZ In this section, the automatic programming sekxtor key is written as [AUTO PRO] although it
may have another name (such as [SFP]) on the actual keyboard.
(2) Processing flow
For details on the processing, reference should be made to the instruction manual of the automatic
programming system.
The general flow of the system contained in this numerical controller is outlined below.

P Start .. .............. ...... . ..$.Press the [AUTO PRO] screen selector key to select the
screen.

““””.””’...Press the menu key Llsed to create a new program.

-

T -.”..,. s....... ... Set the program name and work information, etc.

r
F wkwo%g‘“”em
.“*P”””.”..””...,.......Set the drilling, contouring or surface cutting.

P....os”””””””...Set the machining pattern to square or round, etc.

L-l

...s... .............. Display the machining process list (ATC, etc.).

-
Assign the pro~ram number and output (enter) the EIA
““””-””’””””.”””””
format machinmg program to the memory.
*

-233-
 ~.,,.,.;~ ..
...!

9. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)

9.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

● Operation moves to the NC screen if a screen selector key on the NC side is pressed in the auto
programming mode. (The time taken to select the NC and auto programming screens (modes)
increases.)
● If the MELDAS automatic programming system is being used, refer to the instruction manual
for the “MELDAS 335M Automatic Programming System.”
(3) System loading
The automatic programming system and user file data are stored on 3.5-inch floppy disks. When the
NC system’s power is turned ON, the system and data start to be loaded (read) and they are ready
for use in about 1.5 minutes.
When the automatic programming selector key is pressed before the loading is completed, the
“AUTO-PRO LOADING” message appears and so all operations should be delayal until the
loading is completed.
(4) Output data from automatic programming system
The data prepared by the automatic programming system comes in the form of EIA format
machining programs which are divided into main programs and subprograms.
Programs starting with “M/” in the < COMMENT> column on the program file page are main
programs and those starting with “S/” are subprograms.
Memory operation can be performed immediately for EIA format machining programs but, for the
sake of safety, operation should be checked by means of a trial run.
EIA format machining programs can be input/output, deleted, copied, edited and searched in exactly
the same way as with normal machining programs @epared by tape input or key input).
In addition, intermediate files (interactive data) are available for output data from the automatic
programming system. These are the programs which start with “H/”, “B/” or “C/” in the
< COMMENT> column on the program file page. They can be deleted but other operations are
subject to restrictions.

,:, .

:.

-234-
 9, AUTOMATIC PR OGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)
9.2 INTERMEDIATE FILE (INTERACTIVE DATA) HANDLING

9.2 INTERMEDIATE FILE (INTERACTIVE DATA) HANDLING

(1) Intermediate file 1/0 function of automatic programming system
With the automatic programming system, the input data or, in other words, the intermediate files
(interactive data), will be lost when the power k cut off. However, it k possible to save them in the
machining program memory if only some have been input and others are to be input on the following
day or some are to be changed and used at a later date for the automatic programming of different
workplaces.
Intermediate files which have been saved can be recalled and re-used.
The memory in which they are saved is the same area as the EIA format machining program
memory. Consequently, the entry area for machining programs may be reduced, depending on the
amount of space occupied by the intermediate files,
(2) Data formats for intermediate files
There are two data formats: hexadecimal and binary. These can be displayed on the program file
page.
The hexadecimal format is the same data format as that for the EIA format machining programs,
and programs can be inputloutput, copied and erased. (Avoid editing and search operations.)
Programs in binary format can be deleted only. Their data takes up less memory space than
hexadecimal format data,

NOTE k It is easy to identify EIA format machining programs and intermediate files since intermediate
files are those starting the ‘(H/”, “B/” or “C/” in the < COMMENT> column on the program
file page.
(3) Program file display (IN/OUT page, EDIT page)
The sequence of the program display calls for the EIA format machining programs and hexadecimal
format intermediate files to be displayed first followed by the binary format intermediate files, and
the display follows the sequence of the program numbers.

~ROGRAMFILE]
PROGRAMENTRY 2(3 REMAIN
CHARACTER 21234 REMAIN
<PROGRAM>
<CHR>
<5”b
<COMMENT> I
#
t

100 M /ABC
,
#
,
200 S /ABC ,
1
300 M/XYZ ,
*
,
‘ EIA format (“M/”, “S/”, etc.) machining
t
+
programs or hexadecimal format (“H/”, “C/”)
,
t intermediate files
8
I
,
1
4

1000 S/i JK ,
1

200 B / AAA 1
,

300 B /UVW I
1

* Binary format (“B/”, “C/”) intermediate files

1
I
,
1
800 B/ixx 1
,
1
I
1

OUTPUrI COPY I ERASE COMMENTI

NOTE The entries corresponding to the binary format intermediate files are not included in the
PROGRAM ENTRY display. The same applies for the CHARACTER display.

-235-
9. AUTOMATIC PR OGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)
9.2 INTERMEDIATE FILE {INTERACTIVE DATA) HANDLING

(4) Intermediate file input/output

Hexadecimal format intermediate files can be input, compared and output.
1) Input (compare)
The input method for these files consists ; ~ATA OUTPUTl IN/OUT 1
in setting “5” into the parentheses on the I
data input screen and pressing the : #l MAINPR~RAM #11 PORTNO. O
TOOLDATA *12 DEVICENO. O
~NPUT] key to input (compare) the : ;: PARAMETER
data. The program number on the tape <DEVICE>PTR
takes precedence even if it has been ~ #5 AUTO-PRO <B~UDRATE> dw
assigmxl. ii 1 (1 MODE
;“-
2) output 1 1~m
The output method for these files
1
2: COMP
t
consists in setting “5” into the
parentheses on the data output screen,
setting the program number in the ; ~ATA OUTPUTl IN/OUT 2
1
DATA ( ) and pressing the [INPUT] t
I $1 MAINPROORAM #11 PORT NO. 1
key to output data. i $2 TOOLDATA #12 DEVICENO. 1
(5) Intermediate file erasure ~ #3 PARAMETER
< DEVICE> PTP
1) With hexadecimal format ; ~5 AUTO-PRO <BAUD~TE~ ~~
I c lSO/EIA
> !s0
Hexadecimal format intermediate files I <TITLE FEED>1
are erased in the same way as for EL4 ,
format machining programs.
2) With binary format
A binary data deletion function has been added to the program erase page in systems featuring
automatic programming.
To delete a binary format intermediate ; ~ROGRAMERASE] IN/OUT 4
file, first set delete number “5” into the #
( ), set the program number into the $$1 MAIN PROGRAMA 1- 7999
data parentheses and then erase by pres- 10000-99999999
sing the ~NPUT] key. #2 B 8000- 8999
The “ALL” erasure function can be used $3 c 9oQo- 9999
for groups of machining programs and $4 FIXED CYCLE
# S BINARY DATA
“CLR” for all programs.
..............................................................................

(6) Checkpoints
1) A list of the binary format intermediate files appears only on the 1/0 basic data display page
and editing file page. It does not appear on the operating search page.
2) Binary format intermediate files can be erased only. No other operations are possible. (If an
operation is initiated in error, an EIA format machining program will be subject to the
operation.)
Prohibited operation functions
● Position display, program recall ... Operation search, restart search
0 Edit ... Data search, comment rewrite
● Data input/output ... Input, compare, output, copy, comment
3) Under no circumstances should a hexadecimal format intermediate file be searched or edited.
It is difficult to restore data which has been rewritten.
4) Even when the same programs numbers are used for the binary format intermediate files and
EIA format machining programs, they can still be entered in the memory.
5) Depending on the configuration of the automatic programming system’s specifications, the
system may not allow the intermediate files to be saved in the machining program memory or
the system may have restrictions applicable to the hexadecimal format or binary format.
In addition, some systems allow automatic programming system user files (stanclard data) to
be entered into the machining program memory in the same format as that applying to
intermediate files..
The machine builder should be consulted as to which system is adopted.

-236-
 9. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)
9.3 NC OPERATION FOR SYSTEM LOADING

9.3 NC OPERATION FOR SYSTEM LOADING

The functions listed below cannot be executed if the automatic program is being loaded when the power
is switched on.
They can be executed as usual after the program has been loaded.
(1) Automatic start (cycle start)
The “114 OPERATION ERROR” message appears. When the auto start button is released, the
message is cleared.
(2) Program input (compare) and output
When a number is set on an input (compare)/output screen and the ~NPUT] key is pressed, the
“AUTO-PRO LOADING “ message appears and input or output is not executed. The message is
cleared when another key is released.
(3) Program search (operation search, restart search, graphic check search)
When the lJNPUT] key is pressed after a number has been set on the operation search, restart search
or graphic check search screen, the “AUTO-PRO LOADING” message appears and the program
is not searched. The message is cleared when another key is released.

hIOTT5 The above operations as well as all NC operations except the auto programming [SFP] key
operations are valid immediately after the power has been switched on.

-237-
 ,,,

9. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (335M/335M-V)

9.4 AUTO PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE CONTROL NUMBER
DISPLAY

9.4 AUTO PROGRAMMING S OJ?TWARE CONTROL NUMBER

DISPLAY
First press the ~IAGN] function selector key. Then press the ~C-SPEC] menu key so that the NC
specification screen appears and press the NEXT PAGE] key so that the seeond page is displayed.

M/335M
The control number of the .
automatic programming system NC SPECIFICATION] DIAGN 6.2/2
appears in the “SFPU” column.
The control number of the -------- ----
automatic program file appears in MAIN BND ~~~-~-~~~-~’~-;
$!., SV1
,.L1-,-,.LJ., BND :::;:::::
,s,,. . .,,,...’..!
;\
. ..
the “SFPU” column. . . ------ ---- SV2 ,,,, ,,, ,!_,,, ,,,,
IOP {-:;j-~~j::-jj SV3 ,,, !,,,-,, ‘~.4
‘-r’-’-’-”-’
!-~:-!-!-:J-, 7-’
NOT.E k The “SFPS WAIT” ,,,
,,, ,,, ,,, ,,,,-, ,-,,
,-; ,,, ,-,0rT -,.
!,, 7-,-!-,-0-0 ,,, ,!, s-s!
,, :~-,
,-,~-!-l.~:.!
!!,
message appears during PLCU ,,, ,,, ,,,---- ,:
-------- ,,!!!s
~-:+.:-:-++-: ,7+.:
auto programming ,,, ,!, ,... ~:.r
,-~~-o-.-,-o.o !,
system loading. ------ . . . . . -
CHAR ;:;::{ :; ; \ SP ,,, ,,, -:-:::-:
:::-:-:: !ti, ,
NOTE 2: The control number --------
!!,,,!,,,! ----
,,,,,,,,-!, . ----- . . . . . .
remains blank if the BOAD ,,,,
. . . . . . ..- ,,,
,,,, ...
system has no user files.
-------- ----
,,,
SFPS ,,, ,,s#!
,,, l,!
,U!!
,1,,,.i-,
3,!,,,!!!!!
,,, ,,, ,-, ,,, ,
SFPU ;:::,jj;;:,

; PLC-I/F

M/335M–v

PC SPECIFICATION] DIAGN 6.2/2

--------- . .
,,, ,,!1!1!
MAIN BND ;-:~-~-;-:.- ~H I ‘: SV1 BND:;~-~-:[:-~:-~
,,, ,,,,,, .--J ,,,
.. ----,,, . .,,,
,,,
..-
, ,4,....,,;+.:.!.
MCP ,,,
,-,<-,-,-,=- ;;-;; -+, SV2 ~-}+-:-:.++.:
,,, ,,,0,,...,
!,!,, ,,,
IOP ,,,
,-,-: -,.,-:-(., ,-~-.: SV3 ,,,, ,,, ,,, ,.-,,,, ,, ,
rrl, .. 1,1,
---- . r,-j
,,, ,,,
,-:1-,-,-~
~Lti :::-:-,:: -:-:::-: ,,, ,,,
,,, ,,, ,-, , ,,, ,,,

-------- ---- . . . ..,,,,,,,

,,, ..... ...
CHAR :::::::::: SP ,,,,8,,,-,,1+,
,’,,,,-,.
,,, !!,,,,!! .- . ..- . .
BOAD :-:: ,,,1,,~~-,
-:-:-::-:-:-:
,-,--------

SFPS .. . . . . .. . ---
,,,,,,,,4!s
,,, .0, ,-, s
SFPU :-:++-:-+
,,, +-:~+-:
,,, !!.!
!-4!
,.,!.,.O. s.:-!

-238-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (BUILT-IN PLC
SPECIFICA-
TION OIVL Y)
10.1 PARAMETER SETTING

When the PO] function sekctor key is pressed, the LADDER] menu key appears and it is possible to
cheek the operating status of the sequence circuits.
The following monitoring functions are available.
(1) Circuit monitoring
(2) Screen monitoring by monitor stop trigger point
(3) Entry monitoring
(4) Decimal/hexaclecimal switching present value monitoring

10.1 PARAMETER SETTING

The parameters for ladder circuit monitoring are set on the bit selection page of the machine builder
parameters.

Machine parameters ~LC bit sekction]

7654321 0 _ Bit
#(~] DATA (OOOO 000~}

L No.51 is used. L O :PLC page release valid

I : Ladder circuit
monitoring

Operation is as follows, depending on the status of bit O of bit selection #51.

When bit O = O
The special PLC page prepared by the user is displayed.
Nothing appears if this page has not been prepared.
When bit O = 1
The page for monitoring the ladder circuits of the user PLC is displayed.
Ladder monitoring is an optional function and so the option parameter must be set in addition
to this parameter.

-239-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PLC SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

10.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

1 xl
Ladder display
area = 9 stages

)
P’
18 limes T1
2506 K1O

‘1
il. ------- ------ ------ ------ ---—-—- —--- -
----- —--- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -- Display area for
monitoring
-— --- ------ ------ ----- ------ ----- --—-
Number of memories
-——- -- ----- ----- ---- ----- ----- - used
~ ~= tiI&fORY (6040/8192 STEPS)
-— -- --—- - ----- --——- --- ----- ------ —--- - Message display area
NODE][CIRCUITl
~UNCTITON] -] [SEq ~ATA] ( ) Mode, function display
--——- -- —-— ---- -- —--- -- —--- ---- ---- area
----- ---—— -- —-- -- _---— —--- ----- ----
(1.RM 2.mrrE 3. INsERT4.ERAsE 5.c0Nn6. MoNIT MENU Menu display area

o FO
CNC function selector key

I (Function menu)
4. LADDER
I

Press the LADDER] menu key.

v (Sub menu)
r I
2. CIRCUIT
I I
T
Press the [2. CIRCUIT] menu key.
(Operation menu)
*

C
I. READ 2. WRJ.TE3.INsERT4.mAsE 5.coNvT 6.kfoIwT MENU

1.-11- 2.--d3--3. bw 5.+5.+ ~6.+ } 7.] 8. — MENU

MENU I
D
MENU

19. s~

NOTE Functions 2. WRITE, 3. INSERT, 4. ERASE and 5. CONVT cannot be usal with ladder circuit
monitoring.

-240-
10, LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (BUIL T-IN PL C SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.2 MENU FUNCTIONS

( 1 ) List of functions

Menu Function

LADDER This is used when displaying the ladder circuitry.

CIRCUIT Reading or monitoring is enabled when the circuit mode is designated.

READ Used when reading the sequence circuitry.

MONITOR Used when checking the execution status of the sequence circuitry.

--11--- Used when designating an NO contact circuit.

IY
.lI Used when designating an NC contact circuit,

4-J Used when designating an OR circuit with NO contact.

Used when designating an OR circuit with NC contact.

Used when designating a coil (M, F, L, E, T, C).

Used when designating a function command.

I Used when designating a connection between circuit symbols.

Used when designating a connection between circuit symbols.

SET Used when setting step numbers. I

(2) List of error me,ssag~

Error message Condition for occurrence of message Remedy

OPERATING Illegal operation Perform proper operation.
ERROR
SETTING Illegal data has been written in setting Enter correct data in setting area.
ERROR area.
PROG NOT Corresponding device command or Conduct search using appropriate
FOUND coil has not been found when device, device command or coil command,
command or coil search has been
conducted in read mode.
PLC RUN An attempt has been made to write, Writing, inserting, deleting and
insert, delete or convert while a user converting cannot be performed with
PLC program is being run. the ladder circuit monitoring fnnction.

-241-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PL C SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.3 CIRCUIT READ FUNCTION

10.3 CIRCUIT READ FUNCTION

Example of displayed
Reading method Example of operation Remarks
circuit
;tep number
F)Q@@ ,, ~-.-- ~~;?ck

LT designated step
number.
levice number Circuit is read
regardless of
B8B -y L circuit symbol.

@o@B &

@~@8
$ ~y 34
#
[:1
+ti5vK173T -b-i
----+--- - 4--l-
-t
when reading by
device “T” or
ao@Q <’L “C,” circuits with
circuit symbol
[@@B] ~:1 :~e~;’ will

—CRS:TIT13H Circuits with

-cT15 K5>,
etc. cannot be
read.
Circuit symbols The circuit
m@@G +YL symbols are
identified and

[1
+1- , ++
read.
Circuits cannot
~’- BOB8 * be read by circuit
symbol
and device
numbers Y3 ;e~ce n; “ and
Bin@@ ~ *

Boo@Q ~T15K10+ ;:;:::::::r’

Circuit symbol MOV command

l@)@@@@j +mv:E:~:[o:2 is read regardless
:O:ma:d :Ogd
of device number.
+jljQy:K:~~-~3

+tid~~-~i~f
. ---- 4----- 4-.‘-2
...
!
Final circuit
~)~~~o ~~~, block in sequence
is read.
p~ q

-242-
10, LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (BUIL T-IN PLC SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.4 MONITOR SCREEN DISPLAY METHOD

10.4 M OFH.TO R SCREEN DISPLAY METHOD

1 ) The circuit ON and OFF states are shown below.

OFF state: JIlr -~ 1- +* +1--

ON state : ----t~ ----41 F+ l--

2 ) Besides the ON/OFF states of the circuits, the monitor screen also shows in its monitor display area
up to 6 present values and settings in sequence from the left for T (timer), C (counter), D (data
r~gister) ‘and R (file register) for tile circu;ts displayed.
These values are displayed in sequence from the top of the display circuit.

(l%ample)

I T2=1O DO= 5 1)20=5 R1900=0 C5=2 D3=2 Monitor display

area

‘----‘o~ ~
Settings
:y~’
<~”
~
‘---

L J
Y
Max. 6

Nom 1: The settinm and uresent values of the timer and counter are monitored bv. the disulav . . circuit
symbols w~lich m~y be contacts ( --it--, ~ ) or coils (+ ~). When a data register
is to be monitored and its setting k not a constant, the contents of the data register are
monitored as the setting.
Instead of the programmed values, those values set on the machine builder parameter timer or
counter setting screen can be used for the timer and counter settings. In this case, the values set
on the screen appear as the settings.
When bit O of bit select parameter No.49 k OFF: Timer setting screen k valid.
When bit O of bit select parameter No.49 k ON: Timer setting program k valid.
When bit 1 of bit select parameter No.49 is OFF: Counter setting screen is valid.
1When bit 1 of bit select parameter No.49 is ON: Counter setting program is valid. 1
INOTE 2 With both the data register and file register monitor displays, the stored contents appear as a
binary data value from O to 65535. If the contents have been stored in BCD format, therefore,
the displayed values will be difficult to read.
(I&ample) If DO k monitored in the -MOV K99 DO- circuit, DO will appear as 99, and if DO
is monitored hi the -BCD K99 DO- circuit, DO will appear as 153.

+M6v-;K51)Y”D6-j-
------- ----------
+Bcg]:K~-.:D:g:~

3 ) Regardless of the operating status, “ ~ } “ always appears as the monitor display for MCR
commands and function commands. “ ~ ~ “ never appears.

-243-
 .,,.,,,,~
“,

10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PL C SPECIFICA-

TION ONLY)
10.5 CIRCUIT MONITORING

10.5 CIRCUIT MONITORING

This function allows the operating status of the sequence circuits to be monitored dynamically.
@3asicoperation]

~ )=$ ~ F) ~ D—)
9 SET + 1—1
Stepnumber+ O
INPUT + ~—j
6 MONIT
B

~[~]+@+@---”~+B++@-+@

[Operation sequence]
(1) Read the circuit block to be monitored using the read operation.
(2) When [6. MONIT] is pressed, the operating status of the sequence circuit and the present values and
settings of the timer, counter, data register and file register can be monitored.
o If the [+ ] and [INPUT] keys are then pressed in succession, the circuits following the next circuit can
be displayed and monitored.
● To monitor the circuit previously displayed on the screen, press the [ – ] and ~NPUT] keys. The
circuits of the previous screen can be monitored in succession by further pressing the ~NPUT] key.
Press the [+] and ~NPUT] keys in order to monitor the following screen after the [ – ] and ~NPUT]
keys have been pressed.
The circuits of the following scrmn can be monitored in succession by pressing the ~NPUT] key.
● If part of the circuit block is on one page and part is on another, press the [ J,] key to move the cursor
to the bottom of the screen. When the [ ~ ] key is pressed again, the display will be scrolled up by
one line and one line of the next circuit will be additionally displayed. Every time the [ .j ] key is
pressed thereafter, the display will be scrolled up by one line.
If the [ ~ ] key is pressed with the cursor at the top of the screen, the display is scrolled clown by one
line and one line of the previous circuit will be additionally displayed.
* Even when the circuit block does not span the breaks in the pages, it can be scrolled up or down
using the [ ~ ] or [ $ ] key. However, even if the block is scrolled down using the [ ~ ] key, the following
circuit will not be additionally displayed.

@kample) When reading and monitoring step number 10

Reading step number 10 Monitoringoperation

f’ -1
xl Y18
10 ~b m
MO
12 ~~ ■ -M6f-:-D6--~-D!z0-
. . . -..4..-.. .. . . . . .. .
Ml X2
16 ) lH~T3 K1O
“i
I DO=1O 1)20=10 T3=1o I
o

M13MORY (6040/8192 STEPS )

I MODE CIRCUIT FUNCTION MONITOR S~ DATA ( )

I

-244-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (BUIL T-IN PLC SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.6 TYPES OF MONITORING OPERATION

10.6 TYPES OF MONITORING OPERATION

(1) Screen seleetion using the [ + ] or [ – ] and [INPUT] keys after reading the circuit with the step number
and establishing the monitor mode

ID4LADDER _
B“EEEHEZ)” =+@”Bq

J+ J--- @ *a+@* ----

[1 [1
L @ -+

(3 0+
(2) Monitoring operation after reading the circuit block using the contact or coil number and command
(see NOTE lj

B--+ B”IEI” lE)-m”13”m31

xl x3 Y45
80 ‘ 8 F
x2 x4
(I II 1;1
Ml M2 M3 Y20
50+~ m i++————+ )

------ --- ---- ---- ------ ---- ____ -. .-.

(3) Monitoring operation by reading the circuit using the step number after having
monitoring mode

i LADDER ~
DIDDr)
213RCU1T+ 6 MONIT + 9 s~ +
= “El

-245-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PL C SPECIFICA -
TION ONLY)
10.6 TYPES OF MONITORING OPERATION

(4) Monitoring operation by reading the circuit block using the contact or wil number and command
after having established the monitoring mode (see NOTE 1)

r) r) r) m
4LADDETi~ 2cIRcL11T+ 6MON[T + 5 -( > +
o om”E17
y + 1

‘013dEJ--’45! M2 Ikf3

t--’ :
Ml Y20
50

‘i
.. . _______ ------- ------------------------

NOTE k After monitoring by this method, the previous or next screen cannot be seleeted by the [ + ] or
[ - ] and ~NPUT] keys.

-246-
10. LADDER C_lRC UIT MONITORING (BUIL T-IN PLC SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.7 SCREEN STOP BY MONITORING STOP TRIGGER POINT

10.7 SCREEN STOP BY MONITORING STOP TRIGGER POINT

This function allows the monitor screen on which a circuit k being monitored to be stopped at the monitor
stop trigger point, regardlws of the operation of the PLC.

OJ
2

o 0 : For stopping the screen at the setting dwice signal fall

n1 : For stopping the semen at the setting device signaI rise

o 2 : For stopping the screen at the setting device signal change

[Operation sequence]
( 1 ) Proceed by means of the circuit monitoring operation to monitor the screen which is to be stopped
at the trigger point and monitored.
(2) Press [7] , [0 – 2], ~NPUT], [CIRCUT] ([1] or [5] ), @3evicenumber] and ~NPUT]. If there is any
change in the device specified in this state, the screen will stop with the monitoring screen displayed.
(3) Press [6. MONIT] in order to release this mode.
< Operating conditions>
(1) Only one stop point can be designated. If a multiple number has been designated, the last point
entered will be given priority.
(2) Only the device used by the OUT command or contact command applies to the circuit symbol which
can be designated as the stop point, and any devices not appearing on the monitoring screen can also
be set.
When a device such as D (data register) or R (file register) is assigned, “OPERATING ERROR”
appears in the message display.
(3) It may not be possible to stop the monitoring at the stop point in the case of high-speed processing
such as for pulse commands.

(Example) When stopping the screen with timer T1 time-up after the screen to be monitored has been
dispIayed by the circuit monitoring operation

Reading step number 200 I

W=)-F—U-KH’+1–)---F+J++J+J
Monitoring mode Screen stop setting with timer T1 time-up

-247-
 ... .,,,,, .

10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PL C SPECIFICA-

TION ONLY)
10.7 SCREEN STOP BY MONITORING STOP TRIGGER POINT

203Py3’!
Do=o

MEMORY(6040/8192 ~s )
MODECIRCUITFUN~ON MONITORSET DATA( \
)

-248-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (BUIL T-IN PLC
SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.8 .ENTR Y MONITORING

10.8 ENTRY MONITORING

This function enables up to 6 devices to be displayed and monitored on the circuit monitoring screen by
entering the devices and the device numbers.
~asic operation]
,.
[ ::%i%’mt”mg
1
In
“’” —-=-q
t

[Operation sequence]
( 1 ) Proceed with monitoring by the circuit monitoring operation.
(2) To monitor a device or devices not on the display screm, enter [8–], Entry device] and ~NPUT].
This enables the devices which have been set to be displayed and monitored in sequence starting from
the right-hand side of the monitoring display area.
@ [8–] , Entry device] and ~NPUT] must be entered when setting a multiple number of entries
to be monitored.
. The entries to be monitored are displayeil in sequence toward the left-hand side of the
monitoring display area.
Up to 6 devices can be set for entry monitoring. Any further settings will be ignored. Entry
monitoring takes precedence when the settings duplicate ordinary T, C, D and R monitor
entries, which are not entries to be monitored.
e Present values are indicated among the displayed devices for timer ~), counter (C), data
register (D), file register (R) and index register (V or Z). The ON/OFF statuses of bit devicw
X, Y, L, F and M are displayed.
(3) To release the entry monitoring mode, either press [6. MONIT] or bring up the previous or following
screen and change the ladder display.
@ample) T5 and Y30 entry monitoring after displaying the screen to be monitored by the circuit
monitoring operation

Reading step number 200

1
w=M-jl@l++f=-)-qy’
-@@+jl
T5 entry monitoring Y30 entry monitoring

Xo xl Y35
!00~~ <1 a
X2 MO Y36
!03{b .’iI m
x3
{I
m
T1 -- V.:.K-O.:. -b-j..
!07 fk m .. --.-+-- . . .. . . ...- ..
,’1

)0=0 T 5 =50 Y30=ON

~ — Max, 6
MODECIRCUITFUNCI’ION
MONITORSETDATA(

-249-
10. LADDER CIRCUIT MONITORING (B UIL T-IN PLC SPECIFICA-
TION ONLY)
10.9 DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL PRESENT VALUE MONITORING

10.9 DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL PRESENT VALUE M ONITORI’NG

This function allows the present values or settings of T, C, D, R, Z and V, which are displayed with circuit
monitoring and entry monitoring in decimal format, to be switched to a hexadecimal display format.
@3asicoperation]

[Operation sequence]
(1) Display the circuit to be monitored by the circuit monitoring operation.
(2) When the ~] and ~NPUT] keys are pressed, the decimal format of the T, C, D, R, Z and V present
values and settings, which are displayed with circuit monitoring and entry monitoring, is now
changed to a hmadecimal format. If the values are displayed in hexadecimal format, “H” will appear
at the head of the display data.
(3) Press ~] and ~NPUT] or [6. MONIT] to return the hexadecimal display to the decimal display.
(Example) When reading data register D1O and displaying its contents in hmadecimal format

lEHEia+EE)-m”El”El-+3”EF
Reading and monitoring data register D1O
J

[email protected]~
@+@
Hexadecimal display of Decimal display
D1O contents of D1O contents

‘250,~.,G,.Dol,D,20j’ 250

D O =H64 D20=H64”
J
/

-250-
 11. CHECKPOINTS FOR CONTROL AND OPERATION
11.1 VALID CONDITIONS FOR STORED STROKE .LIMIT

11. CHECKPOINTS FOR CONTROL AND

OPERATION

11.1 VALID CONDITIONS FOR STORED STROKE LIMIT

Although, in a relative position detection system, the stored stroke limit is normally invalid until reference
point return is completed after the power is switched on, a parameter (machine parameter/basic
specification parameter “abson” ) can be set to enable the stored stroke limit function even when reference
point return has not been completed.
The table below shows the valid conditions of the stored stroke limit.

Status
Reference point return not Reference point return
Machine parameter/
completed completed
basic specification parameter
abson = O Invalid Valid
I abson = 1 I Valid Valid

NOTE When an absolute position detection system has been added as an option, the stored stroke limit
is vaIid immediately after the power is switched on provided that a“bsolute position detection is
v slid.
(1) Stored stroke limit coordinates
The stored stoke limit check is conducted by the basic machine coordinate system which is
established by reference point return. When the stored stroke limit is made valid even if reference
point return has not been completed, the stored stroke limit check will be conducted with the basic
machine coordinate system, applying previously when the power was switched off, as the provisional
basic machine coordinate system.
The proper coordinate system is established once the first dog-type reference point return is
completed after the power is switched on,
(2) Stored stroke limit cancellation
Since, as described above, the stored stroke limit check is conducted with the basic machine
coordinate system applying previously when the power was switched off as the provisional basic
machine coordinate system and with the reference point return not completed, under the following
circumstances the actual stored stroke limit point may deviate greatly and it may not be possible to
perform reference point return.

1) When the power is switched off while an axis is moving

2) When an axis has moved while the power was off
3) When the stored basic machine coordinates have been lost because the service life of the battery
is over
In this case, the stored stroke limit with the reference point return not completd is made
invalid by the following operations. (lVhen the “abson” machine parameter is set to “l”)
1) Switch off the NC system power.
2) Switch on the NC system power while pressing the [C.B CAN] key.
(INote): After the initial NC screen display, keep the [C.B CAN] key depressed for at least 3
seconds.

NOTE With the reference point return not completed, the axes can be moved only in the manual and
handle feed modes, and automatic operation is made valid upon completion of the reference point
ret urn.

-251-
 ....,...

11. CHECKPOINTS FOR CONTROL AND OPERA TION

11.2 DECELERATION CHECK

11.2 DECELEIUKTION CHECK

11.2.1 FUNCTION
A deceleration check is performed at the block joins with a view to reducing machine shock and preventing
corner rounding when the feed rate of the control axes changes suddenly.
(1) Deceleration check during rapid traverse
In the rapid traverse mode, the following block must be executed after the deceleration check at the
join in the block.
(2) Deceleration check during cutting feed
In the cutting feed mode, the following block is executed after the deceleration check at the join in
the blocks when any of the following conditions applies.
1 ) When the error detect switch is ON
2 ) When the G09 command (exact stop check) has been assigned in the same block
3 ) When the G61 command (exact stop check mode) has been selected
(3) Deceleration check systems and parameters
There are two types of deceleration check and these are selected by the parameters.

Machine parameter Contents

inpos O: Command deceleration check type
(basic specification parameter) 1: In-position check type
ZRz
In-position width setting (when inpos is “l”)
(servo parameter)

11.2.2 DECELERATION CHECK TYPES

( 1 ) Command deceleration chwk
Upon completion of single block interpolation, the completion of the command system deceleration
is checked and then the execution of the following block is started. The time required for the
deceleration check is determined by the acceleration/deceleration mode and acceleration/decelera-
tion time constant.
1 ) With linear acceleration/deceleration

Previous block Next block

I [

Id
Ts
Ts: Accelerat ion/decelerat ion
time constant
Td
Td: Deceleration check time

Td=Ts+(O-14ms)

-252-
 11. CHECKPOINTS FOR CONTROL AND OPERA TION
11.2 DECELERATION CHECK

2 ) Exponential acceleration/deceleration

Previous block

Ts
e T s s Acceleration/decekxat ion lime
constant
Td - T d : DWeleration check time

Td=2XTs+(O+14ms)
3 ) Exponential acceleratiorddeceleration and linear acceleratiorddeceleration

Previous block Next block

2XTS
?
Td Ts
-1

Acceleration/decelerat ion
Ts: time constant
T d :Deceleration check time
Td=2XTs+(O+14ms)
The time required for the deceleration check during rapid traverse is the longest among the rapid traverse
deceleration check times for each axis which is determined by the rapid traverse acceleratiorddeceleration
time constant and rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration mode of the axes comrnandd simultaneously.
Similarly, the time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting
feed deceleration check times for each axis which is determined by the cutting feed acceleration/decelera-
tion time constant and cutting feed acceleration/deceleration mode of the axes commanded
simultaneously.
(2) In-position check
When parameter in-position check valid has been selected, the command deceleration check is first
executed, it is then checked that the position error in the servo system is below the parameter setting
and, finally, the execution of the block is started.

Servo

Previous block Next block

Command

In-position width

-253-
11. CHECKP OIiVTS FOR CONTROL AND OPERATION
11.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM

11.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM

( 1 ) Absolute position detection system set-up
The machine parameters for the axes performing the absolute position detection should be set as
below.
,
Basic specification parameter Set “l” into abson
Zero point return parameter Set the same value as RNG (servo parameter) into grspc.
Set “l” in to the STY absolute position detection valid bit
Servo parameter
(bit 7). (HEX input for STY)
When the above parameters are set and dog-type reference point return is conducted, the absolute position
detection system is made valid.

NOTE In order to conduct absolute position detection, both the detector for detecting the absolute
position and the add-on card ~33 of the axis amplifier are required.
(2) Dog-type reference point return with absolute position detection
As shown in the figure below, the grid point and encoder Z phase are made to coincide in the
absolute position d&ction system. (&spi = RNG)
With dog-type reference point return, the machine stops at the first grid point after moving away
from the dog. This grid point serves as the reference point.

Dog
v
Grid point A L
(Reference~oint)
Encoder Z phase A A AI

The reference values at this reference point are backed up.

The backed up values are displayed on the servo monitor page.
Absolute value N: LA phase, LB phase counter value (rotational speed of detector)
Absolute value 1X: Resolver 1X value
Unless dog-type reference point return is performed, the reference values applying with the previous
dog-type reference point return will be retained as the above absolute position reference values N and 1X.

NOTE The reference values are not backed up when the system is not an absolute position detection
system.

-254-
 II. OPERA TING INSTRUCTIONS

This chapter outlines the functions and operation of the machine operation switches related to NC control
(automatic and manual operation). The figure below shows the machine operation board.
Actual machine operations will differ according to the individual machine and so the Operating
Instructions issued by the machine builder should be consulted. The details in this chapter are only for
reference purposes.
MISCEL.
CONTROL IN-AUTO NC MOO M02 M30 DRY
UNIT OPERA- ALARM

-6”5QQQ0
8’qT’f’~~
TOOL MIRROR
IMAGE
OF FOFOFFOF OF OF
LENGTH
MEASURE.
?JANUAL
MA~~UAL
~$AN:LB
F1-
PLAYBACK %?’%$TM MENT

& @ ?$ @ &T&’~’’!fl!$ @ !5 WQ’F

OF FO’FFOF FOFFOFFOFFOFFO FO F OFF OFF OF FOFFO FOFF

kNDLEl RAPID
ICRL3MENTAL HANDLE FEED TRAVERSE FEEDRATE MANUAL REFERENCE
POINT
AGNIFICATION AXISSELECT OVERRIDE OVERRIDE FEEDRATE RIW~

@::x& ,@ ;aB@[[ :- ❑
g 1~
‘8 .M.. wmmld
HANDLE ~~.~~
-/ ~+ SPINDLE
OVERRIDE

o E!MERGBNcY

ME LDA$
‘0 ;&”::;’&i;& fi ~
o
@ M

-255-
1. OPERATING STATUSES
1.1 DIAGRAM OF OPERATING S TATUS CORRELATION

L OPERATING STA~SES
1.1 DIAGRAM OF OPERATING STATUS CORRELATION
The NC operating statuses are changing all the time in accordance with the signals from the operation
board or machine or with the program contents. This particular NC control unit broadly classifies these
statuses into “POWER OFF,” “NOT READY” and “READY.”
NC operation is possible only in the “READY” status and, as shown in the figure below, there are a
number of “RELQ)Y” modes.
Manual mode operation is possible in the “READY” status.

POWER OFF status n

NC p~wer OI?F

I
Opeiation NOT Waiting to prepare for
READY status machine operation
, ~
J

nrenaratinn OK

I
-1 ~. Emer ency
lperation READY status r- I stop ! actor
I 7 1
I
processing ~
----- -— --- -— --- - ----- ---
, In automatic operation

In feed hold (automatic ~

I Input L--------------J
I - ~------------m
, ~mP1etiOnI CRTopemtion

I
---- ---- . . . . . J
Automaticstart is not possible 1
[ dufing t]le above operations.

Correlation between operating statuses

1.2 POWER OFF STATUS

In this status, no power is supplied to the control circuitry of the NC unit.
( 1 ) From another status to “POWER OFF” (transition 1)
When the POWER OFF switch on the setting and display unit has been pressed
When the POWER OFF signal from the machine has been input
When the power, which is supplied from the machine to the NC unit, has been turned off

-256-
 1. OPERATING STATUSES
1.3 OPERATION NOT READY STATUS

1.3 OPERATION NOT READY STATUS

In this status, power is still supplied to the control circuitry of the NC unit. However, this status indicates
that the operating conditions have not been met because of factors originating in the NC system itself or
at the machine side, and the READY lamp on the setting and display unit is off.
( 1 ) From “POWER OFF” to “NOT READY” (transition 2)
When the POWER ON switch on the setting and display unit has been pressed
When the POWER ON signal from the machine has been input
(2) From “READY” to “NOT READY” (transition 3)
When EMG (emergency stop) appears on the CRT screen of the setting and display unit
When any of the alarms below appear on the CRT screen of the setting and display unit:
Servo alarm, feedback alarm, excessive error alarm, watchdog, MCP alarm

1.4 OPERATION READY STATUS

In this status, power is supplied to the control circuitry of the NC unit, all the operating conditions have
been met and the READY lamp on the setting and display unit lights.
This status can be subdivided into the following 4 modes.

1.4.1 RESET STATUS

This indicates that the NC unit is in the reset mode.
( 1 ) From “NOT READY” to “RESET” (transition 4)
This is also known as the initialization mode.
It occurs about 4 seconds after the power has been switched on.
(2) From any other ready mode to “RESET” (transition 5)
When the RESET key on the setting and display unit has been pressed
When the external reset signal has been input from the machine side
When the M02 or M30 command has been executed (this depends on the machine specifications)

1.4.2 AUTO MATIC OPERATION START STATUS

This indicates that the operation is starting in the automatic mode. The in-automatic operation lamp cm
the machine operation board lights.
( 1 ) From any other ready mode to automatic operation start mode (transition 6)
When the CYCLE START switch on the machine operation board is set ON in the automatic mode

1.4.3 AUTOMATIC 0P13RATI0 N PAUSE (FEED HOLD) STATUS

This indicates that operation has been temporarily suspended while a single block is being executed during
automatic operation start. The in-automatic operation pause (FEED HOLD) lamp lights and the
in-automatic operation start lamp on the machine operation board goes off.
( 1 ) From automatic operation start to automatic operation pause (transition 7)
When the FEED HOLD switch on the machine operation board has been set to ON
When the automatic mode input is no longer supplied

-257-
1. OPERATING STATUSES
1.4 OPERATION RE~Y STATUS

1.4.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATUS

This indicates that a single block has been executed and operation has stopped during automatic operation
start. Both the in-automatic operation pause (FEED HOLD) lamp and the in-automatic operation start
lamp on the machine operation board go off.
( 1 ) From automatic operation start to automatic operation stop (transition 8)
When the SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine operation board is set ON and the block in
question is executed
When the automatic mode input is switched to another automatic mode input

.,

,,,’

,!

-258-
 2. DISPLAY LAMPS
2.1 CONTROL UNIT RE~Y

2. DISPLAY LAMPS

2.1 CONTROL UNIT READY

This lamp indicates that the control unit is in the ready status, It lights up about 1 second after the NC
power has been switched on. It goes off when emergency stop is executed and when there is an alarm in
the drive and arithmetic operation sections.

2.2 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION

This lights in any automatic operation mode (memog tape or MDI) from when the CYCLE START
switch is set ON until the M02 or M30 command is executed and the end of the program is reached or until
resetting or emergency stop.

2.3 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION START

This signal indicates that the NC unit is exercising control in the automatic operation mode. lt is output
in the tape, memory or MDI mode from when the CYCLE START switch is set ON to initiate automatic
start untiI automatic pause results from the FEED HOLD switch or until automatic start is terminated by
block stop or block finish stop.

2-4 IN-AUTOMATIC OPERATION PAUSE (FEED HOLD)

The fed hold status is initiated among the conditions for automatic operation from the time when the
FEED HOLD switch is set ON until the automatic start switch is set ON or when, during automatic
operation, the mode sekctor switch is set from the automatic mode to the manual mode.

2.5 REFERENCE POINT ARRIVAL

This signal is output once the control axis has reached the reference point when manual reference point
return, reference point return during automatic operation or reference point compare is performed.

2.6 NC ALARM
This lights when an alarm is generated during NC operation.

-259-
2. DISPLAY LAMPS
2.7 MOO

2.7 MOO
When the MOO command is executed in the program during automatic operation, automatic operation
stops upon completion of the block including MOO, and the MOO lamp lights. (This depends on PLC
processing.)

2.8 M02/M30
When the M02 or M30 command is executed during automatic operation, the program is terminated for
the NC unit and the M02 or M30 lamp lights. (This depends on PLC processing.)

.,,

-2~o-
 3. RESET S WITCH AND EMERGENCY S TOP BUTTON S WITCH
3.1 RESET S WITCH

3. RESET’w7vrrcHAJNDlzlvm.iRGENcY
STOP
BUTTON SWTCH

3.1 RESET S WITCH

The NC unit is reset by setting the RESET switch on the machine operation board or RESET key on the
setting and display unit to ON. If RESET is set ON while the NC unit is operating, the foI1owing modes
are established.
1 ) If it happens while a movement command is being executed, the moving axis decelerates and
stops and the remaining distance of the block being commanded is cleared.
2 ) If it happens while an M, S, T or other miscellaneous function command is being exmuted, the
execution of that function is suspended.
3 ) The active and buffer memory contents and displays are chmred.
4 ) If it happens during a program error, the program error mode is cleared and the alarm lamp
goes off.
5 ) If RESET 2 is input, the modal mode is initialized.

3.2 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON SWITCH

This red mushroom-shaped button is the EMERGENCY STOP button. It should be reset after the cause
of the emergency stop has been removed.
During emergency stop, the READY lamp goes off and neither automatic nor manual operation is
possible. The control unit is also reset during this time.
When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed during a movement command, the moving axis is
stopped immediately and all other machine operations are stopped.
When the emergency stop status is released, the READY lamp will light after about 1 second and the
ready status will be established.
The emergency stop mode is established when the EMERGENCY STOP button has been pressed or
when, according to the machine specifications, the EMERGENCY STOP LIMIT SWITCH of each axis
has been activated.
If the parameter is such that the emergency stop is of the holding type, the emergency stop mode will be
held even if the EMERGENCY STOP button is released. Set the RESET switch to ON in order to release
the emergency stop mode.

-261-
4. OPERATING MODES
4.1 MODE SELECTOR S WITCH

4. OPERATING MODES
4.1 MODE SELECTOR SWITCH

This switch determines the operating mode of the NC

unit. ( ]

JOG feed mod~ Selected when moving the

control axis continuously at
the manual feed rate.
RAPID TRAVERSE modti Selected when mov-
ing the control axis
continuously at the
rapid traverse rate.
REFERENCE POINT RETURN mode
Selected when positioning the control axis
manually at the machine’s reference point.
INCREMENTAL modu Selected when moving the control axis by the selected constant amount.
HANDLE feed mode Selected when moving the control axis with the manual handle.
MEMORY modti Selected for memory operation.
TAPE mode Selected for tape operation
MDI mode Selected for operating with manual data input.

4.2 JOG FEED MODE

This mode allows the machine to be continuously moved manually at the feed rate set by the MANUAL
FEED RATE switch. The jog mode is started by the FEED AXIS SELECT switch.
Refer to Section 5.3 for details on the MANUAL FEED RATE switch.
Operating procedure

l-w
Select the JOG mode using the MODE
MODE SELECr
MEMORY
E MD I RAPID
TRAVERSE
TAPE JOG
REFERENCE
HANDLE POINT
RETURN
INCRE- B
MENTAL

JR
Select the feed rate using the MANUAL MANUAL FEED RATE
FEED RATE switch.
The unit used for the speed will be the 31.0—
~%1’E ::
movement amount (mm) per minute.

mm/min

-262-
 4. OPERATING MODES
4.3 RAPID TRAVERSE MODE

I Uw
“The control axes start moving when FEED AXIS SELECT
the FEED AXIS SELECT s;itches I I I
are set ON and continue to move
while these switches are at ON. They
decelerate and stop when the switches
are set OFF.

Nom k When the MANUAL OVERRIDE function switch is ON, the override value of the FEED
RATE OVERRIDE switch will be valid for the rate which has been set by the manual feed rate.

4.3 RAPID TRAVERSE M ODE

In this mode, the machine can be continuously moved manually at the rapid traverse rate.
The rapid traverse rate can be changed to any of 4 levels using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
switch. Manual rapid traverse is initiated by the FEED AXIS SELECT switch.

FJOTIZ 1: Refer to the Operating Instructions issued by the machine builder for the rapid traverse rates.
IWITE 2 Refer to Section 5.1 for details on the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch.
Operating procedure

-l ‘“
f ~D,M::,E~x%R,E’

TAPE JOG

HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
INCRE. * RETURN
MENTAL

L )

Lb-’
Select the desired override value using
the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
switch.

-263-
4. OPERATING MODES
4.4 REFERENCE POINT RETURN MODE

The control axis starts moving when Ow FEED AXIS SELECT

the FEED AXIS SELECT switch is set
ON and continues to move while this
switch is at ON. It decelerates and
stops when the switch is set OFF.
1

NOTE k The override value set by the CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE switch is invalid for the rapid
traverse rate, but the control axis will not move when this value is OYo.

4.4 REFERENCE POINT RETURN M ODE

In this mode, the control axis can be returned manually to the reference point position determined
inherently for the machine.
A dog-type return is performed for the first reference point return after the NC power has been switched
on but either the do~-hme
-.. or hi~h-sueed return can be selected for the second and subsequent
. returns.
The following types of referenc~po~nt return are available.

f Y
Return direction plus Zero point return direction minus
~ —
——— --
71--- –––-– f

A
Minus

m ~ “L’S ‘inus~
=
——————
/

‘l”s
Reference point Reference point

Dog-type reference point return

Th~ f~r~t reference point return operation applying when the power has bem switched on or when the
“NOT READY” status (emergency stop and servo alarm) has been changed to the “READY” status, or
the reference point return operation applying when the dog-type is selected by parameter is as follows.
( 1 ) In the reference point return mode, move the control axis in the direction approaching the near-point
detection limit switch and dog.
(2) The control axis decelerates and stops when the limit switch kicks the dog.
( 3 ) The control axis then moves to the reference point at the approach speed set in the parameter.
(4) When it arrives at the reference point, the reference point arrival signal is output.
High-speed reference point return
If the parameter is set for high-speed return after the dog-type reference point return has been exmuted,
then high-speed reference point return will be performed.

-264-
 4. OPERATING MODES
4.4 REFERENCE POINT RETURN MODE

An alarm will result if the return direction is incorrect when high-speed reference point return is
performed.
The control axis is positioned at the reference point by the rapid traverse rate.

r
-.
- -
.— -- ---- —-. .

Minus Plus
~ ,eferjcepoint

Operating procedure

MODE SELECT

~’”
TAPE JOG
HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
INCRE- Tel RETURN
MENTAL

I RAPIDTRAVERSEOVERRIDE

~’”
Select the desired override value using
m
xi

fqijj)
25

Check the present

z plus
position of the
machine. Spindle head
L
x plus
QJ
Coordinate system
Ow Minus position _ I _Plus position
Plus - \ -Minus
Machine table I ,
movement movement
& D% ~ - Referencepoint
Limit switch

With the near-point dog above the machine table as shown in the figure, the “machine position” depends
on whether the near-point detection limit switch is at the “+” or “-” side.
If the limit switch is on top of the dog, move it to the “ +“ or “-” side.

-265-
4. OPERA lYNG MODES
4.5 INCREMENTAL FEED MODE

I UM
Move the machine using the FEED FEED AXIS SELECT
AXIS SELECT switches.
When, as shown in the figure, the limit
switch is in the “-” direction, set the ~Mnl
“+” FEED AXIS SELECT switch
ON.

,~1 ~1 ~1 ,Ul

For dog-type reference point return, set the “+” and “-” FEED AXIS SELECT axis direction irmut1
switch= ON in the dire&ion approaching the dog and limit switch.
For high-speed reference point return, set the” +” and “-” FEED AXIS SELECT input switches ON in
the direction in which the spindle head approaches the reference point position.
Set the FEED AXIS SELECT switch ON until the dog is kicked for dog-type reference point return or
until the reference point arrival lamp lights for high-speed return.

4.5 IFICREIMEIWI”AL FEED M ODE

In this mode, the control axis can be moved at the rapid traverse rate for the fixed amount selected by the
HANDLIYINCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch when the FEED AXIS SELECT switch is ON.
Operating procedure

======!’” MD1

TAPE
MODE SELECT
MEMORY
RAPID
TRAVERSE
JOG
HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
INCRE- B REllJRN
MENTAL

F===_ ’I’”l=====
Select the movement amount using the

-266-
 4. OPERATING M ODES
4.6 HA_NDLE FEED MODE

=’”
FEED AXIS SELECT
i I
the f~ed amount by setting the.FEED

4.6 HANDLE FEED M ODE!

In this mode. the control axis can be moved bv rotating the manual handle.
The amount of movement per handle sc~e unit ~epends on the HANDLE/INCREMENTAL
MAGNIFICATION switch.
The axis which can be moved by the handle depends on the HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT switch.

NOTE 1: With the handle feed 3-axis specification, 3 handles corresponding to the X, Y and Z axes are
controlled. With the 4-axis specification, the Z-axis handle can be switched by axis selection,
Operating procedure

Ilw
MODE SELECT
MEMORY
RAPID
MDl TRAVERSE
TAPE .IOG
HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
REXTJRN
INCRE- B
MENTAL

=’”
Select the control axis to be moved by
HANDLEFEED AXISSELECT
Yz
x 4

Select the amount of movement per Ow lIANDLE/INCREMENTAL

handle scale unit using the HANDLE/ MAGNIFICATION
INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION
switch.

-267-
4. OPERATING MODES
4.7 MEMORY MODE

UP

4.7 MEMORY MODE

In this mode, the machining programs entered in the memory are called and automatic operation is
executed.
Operating procedure

I 1
Call the machining rogram for
memory operation from the setting
and display unit.

Check that the correct machining

program has been called.

MODE SELECT
MEMORY
RAPID
MD I —T’ll a. ..AVFR<
..-. .- E
TAPE JOG
REFERENCE
HANDLE POINT
a
RETURN
INCRE- 2 Jl
MENTAL

Select the desired override value using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE, FEED
RATE OVERRIDE or SPINDLE OVERRIDE switch. Normally, it is set to 1007o.

RAPID FEED RATE SPINDLE

TRAVERSE OVERRIDE OVERRIDE
OVERRIDE ,@

F ~ & [:@:

F1

m m
n10 m
o w)
% % “%

-268-
 4. OPERATING MODES
4.8 TAPE MODE

I 1
Automatic operation is commenced OR
by setting the CYCLE START switch
to ON. CYCLE START FEED HOLD

The CYCLE START switch is valid when

it is set ON first and set to OFF.

When the machine movement is to be

temporarily stopped, set the FEED
HOLD switch to ON. The control axes
now moving will decelerate and stop.
1 I

When the movement has been stopped using the FEED HOLD switch, restart automatic operation by
settirw the CYCLE START switch ON.
Mem~ry operation is completed when the M02 or M30 command in the program is executed. The M02
or M30 lamp on the machine operation board will light.
When repeating the same program, input the rewind signal at the user PLC for resetting and rewinding.

NOTE 1: Set the RESET switch to ON in order to forcibly terminate operation at any point during
automatic operation.

4.8 TJ%PE MODE

In this mode, automatic operation is executed while the machining programs punched onto paper tape are
read,
Operating procedure
The tape operation procedure is based on memo~ operation.

Select the TAPE mode using the w MODE SELECT

MODE SELECT switch. MEMORY
MD I RAPID
TRAVERSE
TAPE JOG

HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
B RETURN
IN CRE-
I I MENTAL
Load the paper tape into the tape
reader.

Call the tape using the setting the

display umt

-269-
4. OPERATING MODES
4.9 MDI MODE

Check that the em-red paper tape has

been called.

The subsequent steps are the same as for

memory operation. Refer to the section
on memory operation.
1

4.9 MDI MODE

In this mode, automatic operation is executed by the program which has been set on the MDI page of the
setting and display unit.
Operating procedure
MDI operation is based on memory operation.

Set the data on the MDI page of the

CRT setting and display unit,

Select the MDI mode using the w MODE SELECT

I
MODE SELECT switch. MEMORY
RAPID
MDI TRAVERSE
TAPE JOG

HANDLE REFERENCE
POINT
INCRE- s RETURN
MENTAL

I The subsequent steps are the same as

for memory operation. I
 5. FUNCTION S WITCHES IN OPERATING M ODES
5.1 RAPID TM VERSE OVERRIDE

5. FUNCTION SWITCHES IN OPERXt’lNG

Moms

5.1 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

This switch applies override to the rapid traverse rate ml
in automatic and manual operation.
Rapid traverse override is made valid by the following:
GOO, G27, G28, G29 and G30 during automatic
operation 1
Rapid traverse, reference point return and incremental
feed during manual operation.

%’

5.2 CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE

FEED RATE OVERRIDE
la
!40
This switch applies override in 109o steps from O% to 13)
m
300% to the manual feed rate for jog feed during 110
Km
manual operation and to the feed rate (F command m
m
based on GO1, G02 or G03) during automatic 70
m
operation. It is also valid for the dry run rate during
40
automatic operation. 33
a)
10
0
%

NOTE k The “dry run rate” is the movement speed at the MANUAL FEED RATE switch setting. The
feed rate assigned in the program during automatic operation is ignored.
Nom 22 Refer to Section 6.7 for details on the feed override as applied to the manual feed rate.

5.3 lvfANUAL I?EED I-?ATE

This allows the feed rate in the jog feed mode during manual operation to be set. The fcd rate can be set
from O to 14000.0 mm/min in 31 steps.
When the MANUAL OVERRIDE interrupt switch is set ON, the override value of the CUTTING FEED
OVERRIDE switch is valid for the MAN-UAL FEED RATE switch setting.

I Manual feed rate (mmlmin) I MANUAL FEED RATE

o. 7.2 72 720 7200
1.0 10.0 100 1000 10000
1.4 14,0 140 1400 14000
2.0 20.0 200 2000

mm/min

-271-
5. FUNCTION S WITCHES IN OPERATING MODES
5.4 HANDLE/INCREMENT& FEED MAGNIFICATION

5.4 HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION

This is used to set the movement amount mmmanded during manual handle feed or incremental feed.
The movement amounts for the axes are listed in the table below.
A movement of up to 1000 is valid for handle feed.

Handle Incremental HANDLE/INCREMENTAL

11 1 MAGNIFICATION
10 10
100 100 *m ;M 5J3010
locm
1000 I 1000 I 100
10
I 11 5000 I 10 &
1@ lrxlo
1 lm

5.5 HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT

This selwts the axis to be moved by handle operation

when the HANDLE mode has been selected.

HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT

5.6 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

The machine can be jogged in small increments by HANDLE

rotating the manual pulse generator in the manual
handle mode.
The manual pulse generator has a scale divided into
100 units per revolution and 1 pulse per revolution is
output. The movement amount per pulse is determined
by the HANDLE/IIQCREMENTAL MAGNIFICA-
TION switch.

-272-
 5, FUNCTION S WITCHES IN OPERATING MODES
5.7 CYCLE START AND F..ED HOLD

5.7 CYCLE START AND FEED HOLD

The CYCLE START switch is used to start automatic f ?

operation (memory, tape or MDI). Automatic
operation is executed by setting this switch ON. It is
used to resume operation when it has been stopped by CYCLE START FEED HOLD
the FEED HOLD switch or to restart from the
automatic operation stop state.
m ~]

\ /

The CYCLE START switch is valid when it is first turned ON and then OFF.
The FEED HOLD switch is used to decelerate and stop the control axis during automatic operation or
otherwise temporarily suspend automatic operation. Operation is restarted with the CYCLE START
switch.

5.8 FEED AXIS SELECT

This is used to start the control axis during manual

operation. While the FEED AXIS SELECT switch is
ON, the selected control axis is moved. When it is set
OFF, the control axis stops moving.
I r
FEED AXIS SELECT
I I

llmmllrl

-273-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.1 ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK

6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS

6.1 ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK

( 1 ) By setting the ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK switch ON, the NC commands can be executed with
respect to movements in the manual or automatic operation mode without moving the machine.
The present position display on the setting and display unit is counted.
(2) The command speed or machine lock speed can be selected by parameter for the automatic operation
speed in the machine lock mode.
e Command speed: The feed rate commanded by the program is executed. The time is, therefore,
the same as for actual machining.
o Machine lock speed: The movement commands are processed at the rapid traverse rate and
the dwell time is ignored. This means that program checks and other
such functions can be executed speedily.
(3) When the ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK switch is selected during automatic operation, automatic
operation stops upon completion of the block being executed and only then is the switch position
valid.
(4) Reference point return (G28, G30) is controlkzl as far as the interim point as the machine lock status
but it is ignored from the interim point to the reference point.
(5) When the MACHINE LOCK switch is selected during manual operation, the feed is first stopped
and then the switch position is made valid.
( 6 ) The M, S, T and B commands are executed as specified in the program.

6.2 DISPLAY LOCK

( 1 ) By setting the DISPLAY LOCK switch ON, the machine moves in response to the automatic or
manual operation movement commands but the present position display of the CRT setting and
display unit is not counted. The programmed coordinate system is updated.
(2) When the DISPLAY LOCK switch is selected during automatic operation, automatic operation
stops upon completion of the block being executed and only then is the switch position valid.
( 3 ) This switch is used when the value on the display unit is not to be changed in cases where the
program zero point is shifted by manual interrupt.

6.3 Z-AXIS CANCEL

( 1 ) By setting the ZAXIS CANCEL switch ON, NC commands are mecuted in response to movement
commands during automatic operation without the machine being moved for the Z axis only.
The Z axis does not move but the present position display on the CRT setting and display unit is
count ed.
(2) Zaxis movements based on manual operation are executed even during Z-axis cancel.
( 3 ) When the Z-AXIS CANCEL switch is selected during automatic operation, the switch position is
valid only upon completion of the block being executed.
(4) Reference point return (G28, G30) is controlled as far as the interim point as Zaxis cancel, but it
is ignored from the interim point.

-274-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.4 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK

6.4 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK

(1) By setting the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK switch ON, the execution of the M, S, T
and B functions can be ignored.
(2) The M, S, T and B function 13CD outputs and the start signals are not output,
(3) When the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK is sekcted while a command is being executed,
automatic operation stops upon completion of the block being executed, and only then is the switch
position valid.

6.5 SINGLE BLOCK

( 1 ) By setting the SINGLE BLOCK switch to ON, automatic operation stops upon completion of the
block being executed, In other words, it stops after a single block in the program has been executed.
(2) The single block stop point in the canned cycle mode is fixed by the canned cycle.

6.6 DRY RUN

( 1 ) By setting the DRY RUN switch to ON, the feed rate (F) of the programmed command is ignored
and operation is executed at the feed rate setting of the MANUAL FEED RATE switch.

6.7 IMAN’UA.L OVERRIDE

(1) By setting the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch to ON, the override value of the FEED OVERRIDE
switch is made valid for the MANUAL FEED RATE switch setting.
(2) The override is valid even for dry run during automatic operation.
(3) Manual override is made valid as soon as the switch is set ON.

6.8 OVERRIDE CANCEL

( 1 ) By setting the OVERRIDE CANCEL switch to ON, the override value set by the FEED RATE
OVERRIDE switch is ignored and the programmed F command value is valid.
(2) This function is not valid for manual override.

6.9 OPTIONfKL STOP

( 1 ) By setting the OPTIONAL STOP switch ON, the automatic operation of the machine will stop if
there is an MO1 command among the program commands. When the switch is OFF, MOI is ignored
and the machine does not stop.
(2) The stop position of the machine is the position where the machine stops after the block including
the MO1 command has been executed.

-275-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.10 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

6.10 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

The reading of any block with the “f” (slash) code at the beginning of the block is skipped if the
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is set ON. If it is set OFF, the block will be valid and it will be
exeeuted. In other words, whether or not blocks including the “/” code at the beginning are to be executed
or not can be selected by the operator.
@ample) If the program below is prepared when two parts are to be machined as in the figure below, and
if the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is set ON and the parts are subsequently machined,
then part (1) will be produced. If they are machind with the switch OFF, part (2) will be
obtained.

Program. N 1 G 54 ;
N 2 G90G81X50. Z-20. R 3. F1OO ;
/N 3 X30. ;
N 4 Xlo. ;
N5G80;
M02 ;

Part 1) Part 2)
Switc k ON Switci OFF

N4 N2 N4 N3 N2
J —— 4

II II

-276-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.11 MANUAL ABSOLUTE

6.11 MANUAL ABSOLUTE

By setting the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ON, the programmed coordinate system is updated by an
amount equivalent to the value by which the tool has been moved manually. If the switch is set OFF, the
system will not be updated even if the tool has been moved manually.

-. 5

T
x
w
Programmed path
‘(absolute value command)
I Feed hold stop
1
Manual interrupt
-~= (programmed coordinate system is
updated by an amount equivalent to
movement value)
.-—. —.-.; ‘,--7
Start after manual interrupt
*
Tool passes along same path as that programmal.

–Y

When MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON

7
. x
w

Programmed path
Feed hold stop (absolute value command)
+., ;
1
Manual interrupt
.r-(programmed coordinate system is not
,r- updated)

‘,! \
4 Path after manual interrupt
I

–Y
I TOO1path shifts by amount equivalent to manual interrupt value
(zero point shifts),

When MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is OFF

-277-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

( 1 ) Outline
When cutting a left/right symmetrical shape, programming time can be saved by using a program for the
left or right side only and by using a function which can machine the other side without further
programming. This function is known as mirror image.
An example is shown in Fig. 1.1 where a program has been run to machine the left side of a shape. By
applying the mirror image function, it is possible to machine the right side symmetrically to the left side
by running the same program.
Mirror image functions include external mirror image, parameter mirror image and G command mirror
image. This section describes mirror image implemental by the the external switch and parameter
assignment. (For details on the G command mirror image, reference should be made to the M300 series
programming instructions.)
The internal switch mirror image function is controlled by the mirror image switch which is mounted on
the machine operation board.
For details of this switch, reference should be made to the operating instructions issued by the machine
builder.
The parameter mirror image function is controlled on the NC system screen (axis parameter screen).
Both the external switch and parameter mirror image functions can be set to apply or not to apply to each
individual axis.

Original shape (programmed shape)

Shape produced when X-axis mirror image switch is set

ON and left-side machining program is run

Y I
I
I
lb Y-
\ I
/

i “1 ~
~fl
I I
I I I
1
I L7 I
I I
L —-— — -
\
\
\l

I
Position wher~ mirror xl Basic machine X
Image switch ]S set ON Mirror image coordinate system
axis

Fig. 1.1

-278-
 1,

~,
,,
,,
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

(2) Mirror image assignment

1) When using the external switch mirror image function
Before proceeding with the mirror image, move the tool to the mirror image center by MDI or JOG.
Once the tool has bem positioned at the mirror image center, set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to
ON.
With each subsequent movement command assigned in the memory, MDI or tape mode, the tool will
move a position which is symmetrical to the mirror center.
Set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to OFF in order to cancel the function.
2) When using the parameter mirror image function
Instead of the mirror image switch, this function uses a “l” or “O” setting for the mirror image
parameter on the NC axis parameter screen for movements which are identical to those based on the
~xternal switch,
“l” setting: Mirror image ON
“O” setting Mirror image OFI?
The parameters are used when the machine operation board is not provided with the t@ernal mirror
image switch.
* The internal switch and parameter mirror functions are independent and can therefore be used
simultaneously.
The axis parameter screen appears when the [AXIS] menu key is pressed.
The necessary parameters are then set for each axis.

[AXIS PARAMETER] PARAM 3

# (x) (Y) (z) {u) (v)

1 MIRR. IMAGE o

D1
2 DOG TYPE (A) 0
: D&Gmmf’rw~y) 0
0
5 G7i/87 IGNR 0

6 GT6/S7 (-) 1
7 ~-CHECK OFF
8 ~-CHECK-N 1234.d
9 ~-CHECK-P 10,OOO
10 G60SHIFT 0.000 D [

# ( ~)~@ ) DATA ( )

PLC.SW CONTROL .&m PROCESS I I I MENU

b

14-inch axis parameter screen

-279-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

[Operation example using external switch]

1) Move the tool to the mirror image center by JOG.
2) Execute “G91G92XOYOZ0’ by MDI.
3) Set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to ON.
4) Search for the program to apply mirror image in the memory.
5) Press the CYCLE START switch to start the program.
6) Upon completion of the machining, set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to OFF.

Programmed path 1
Y ( I
I
-./ I
/ ‘\ I \,
I
I t
I i-
IMAGEswitch i
1 I
I Lm
I
L __ —_J\~,
I
1. Move the tool ‘~1 1
to the mirror t
image center.
)
I x
Mirror 2. I&cute G91G92XOYOZ0 ; by MDI.
image axis 3. Set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to
ON.
4. Search for the program.
5. Press the CYCLE START switch.

Fig. 2.1

-280-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

(3) Combinations with other functions

3.1 Zero point return commands (G28, G30) during mirror image
When a zero point return command (G28 or G30) has been executed during mirror image, the
mirror image is valid for operations up to the interim point but not for operations from the
interim point to the zero point.

I
I
I
interim point. .when
. mirror
image is applied
i Interim point
I
I
I
I
I
I
d I :’
~t~
I Programmed path
Path with mirror
image applied I
Mirror axis
Fig. 3,1

3.2 Zero point return command (G29) from zero point

When a zero point return command (G29) has been executed, the interim point is that point
passed by the zero point command (G28 or G30) immediately before, regardless of the
currently mirror image status, For operations beyond the interim point, the tool moves in
accordance with the current mirror image status (ON or OFF).

-281-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

3.3 Cutter compensation command (G41, G42) during mirror image

Mirror imaging is processed after a cutter compensation command (G41 or G42) has been
applied, and cutting proceeds as follows.

I -—-—.
1

\/
,/
,/-——-
[ ~’\
‘)\
I \

( I I

I [
I I

I 1
1

I1 ‘4 b ‘\ \

2/’ J_” —.J’

/’ \ s t
‘
-—- -1
/\ / s
When mirror image only
Programmed path is applied

When cutter compensation

only is applied Mirror axis
L-
When mirror image and
cutter compensation are
applied

Fig. 3.2

-282-
 6s s WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

(4) Checkpoints
When mirror image is canceled anywhere except at the mirror image center, the machine position will shift
from the present value, as shown in the figure below. To return this status to what it was originally, return
the external mirror image switch or parameters to the OFF position. As a result, the present value (2)
counter may change greatly when cycle start is initiated.
Be sure to cancel mirror image either above the mirror image center and, after cancellation, assign a
positioning command and zero point return command (G28 or G30) using absolute values.
The “MR” display enables the mirror image status inside the NC system to be confirmwl. Any axis with
“MR” is treated as a mirror image axis by the NC system internally. This is because it recognizes the
mirror image switch ON and OFF states.
If the MIRROR IMAGE switch is set OFF and the CYCLE START switch pressed, the “MR” display
is cIeared.

Present value (2) counter change

\ )’
N4’fi
Mirror image OFF z
/ N4
b’
---programmed ‘at]’
N3
i

J
}
N2’x N2
Path with ~/’
mirror image applied ~-
‘-
Nl’-%-
\ ‘]
Mirror image OFF

Movement up to mirror image center

X axis mirror image 0?4 Present value Present value (2)

N1 Gal GOO X250. Y50. : x -250. hi R x 250.

50. Y 50.
Y
x 150.
N 2 Gol X-1OO. Y1OO. : x -15o. lvlR
Y 150.
Y 150.

x -150. hfR x 150.

N3 Y200. :
Y 350.
X axis mirror image OFF Y 350.
x - 50!
~ it Xloo< Yloo. : x - 50.
klo2
7 Y 450.
Y 450

-283-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.12 MIRROR IMAGE

Checkpoints when repeating mirror image ON and OFF

The mirror image ON and OFF statuses are acquired during cycle start.
The center coordinates are acquired when the MIRROR IMAGE switch is set from OFF to ON during
cycle start.
Care should thus be taken with the following operations.

Action taken Mirror image Operation

status inside NC

MIRRORIMAGEswitchOFF ~ ?
Cycle start + OFF
(Machining) + OFF Machining without mirror image
Machining completion + OFF
MIRRORIMAGEswhchON ~ OFF
Cycle start ~ ON Mirror image center coordinates stored
(Machining) * ON Machining with mirror image
Machining completion * ON

A MIRROR IMAGE ~ ON
switch OFF
* Movement by JOG,+ ON
etc. (not memory,
MDI or tape
operation)
A MIRROR IMAGE - ON The mirror image center
switch ON coordinates are not stored simply
L
II by setting the switch ON/OFF.

Cycle start + ON The mirror image center coordinates

‘remain as previously stored.
I
When changing the mirror image center by conducting an operation indicated by a white star
(+), first set the MIRROR IMAGE switch OFF, =ecute cycle start using MDI, etc., then set
the mirror image status inside the NC system OFF, and finally set the MIRROR IMAGE
switch to ON.

A MIRROR IMAGE L ON
switch OFF t
I 11
* Reset or set to
v
MDI mode, execute
cycle start with
“MDI NO
SETTING” and
perform a dry run The mirror image status is set
e OFF
from ON to OFF.

.& Movement by JOG,

etc. not memoq, Movement to position where new
MD [ or tape + OFF mirror image center is set.
operation)
I
k ME;. IMAGE ~ OFF
Cyclestart + ON New mirror image center
I
coordinates are stored.

-284-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.13 ERROR DETECT

6.13 ERROR DETECT

When the positioning command (GOO)is assigned, the movement in the following block is commenced
after the deceleration check on the machine has been performed. However, with the cutting commands
(GO1, G02, G03), the following block movement is commenced before the machine reaches the end point
of the movement command and so slight rounding will occur at the corner areas.
In order to avoid corner rounding, the ERROR DETECT signal is set ON. The tool then decelerates until
the actual remaining distance falls below the parameter value, and the command of the following block
is stopped during this time. As a result, the rounding of the corners can be rmwented.
.
This junction is ‘quivalent to G09 in the program. -
The remaining distance parameter for moving to the following command from deceleration with the
ERROR DETECT switch and G09 command is set from the setting and display unit.

JI
I/i
Error detect OFF
~

Error detect ON I
l“’===
I

6.14 FOLLO W-UP FUNCTION

This function monitors the machine movements in the emergency stop status and reflects those movements
in the present position, machine position and work coordinates. Consequently, a machining program can
be continued after emergency stop without having to repeat reference point return,

6.15 AXIS RELEASE

When the axis release signal is input, the corresponding axis is released from the control. This means that
servo alarms (excessive error, no-signal, drive alarm, etc.), stroke end or other alarms relating to that axis
are ignored and that, at the same time, the axis in question is set to the interlock status.

-285-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.16 F1-DIGIT FEED

6.16 FI-DIGIT FEED

( 1 ) By setting the F1-DIGIT FEED switch to ON, the feed rate can be increased or reduced by rotating
the handle while the programmed feed rate is assigned by a F1-digit command.
(2) The amount of increase or reduction per handle scale is mpresscd by the following formula:
F = Fmax/K
where K is the arithmetic constant @arameter setting)
Fmax is the F1–F4 maximum limit (FMl parameter setting) or F5–F8 maximum limit (FM2
parameter setting)
(Example) To incrcasekduce by 10 mm/min per handle scale unit
If Fmm is 3600 mm/min,
then F = 10 = 3600/K
K= 360
(3) The conditions for making this function valid are
1) Automatic operation (memory, tape, MDI)
2) In automatic operation
3) In cutting feed, F1-digit feed rate must be assigned
4) F1-digit valid parameter must be ON
5) F1-DIGIT FEED switch must be ON
6) Not in machine lock
7) Not in dry run

6.17 SIMULTANEOUS MANUAIJAUTO MATIC FEED

This enables manual (jog, reference point return, incremental feed, handle) operations to be executed
simult ancoudy with automatic operations (tape, memory, MDI) during automatic operation.
Refer to the operating instructions manual issued by the machine builder for details on how to select the
manual and automatic modes.

6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

6.18.1 OUTLINE
This section relates to the automatic handle interrupt function which enables movement to be interrupted
by the manual handle in any automatic mode (tape, memory, MDI).
(The automatic handle interrupt function is optional.)

-286-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

6.18.2
(1) While any of the automatic modes (tape, memo~, MDI) is selected, the automatic handle interrupt
function enables movement to be interrupted by the manual handle when the manual handle mode
has been selected. However, movement cannot be interrupted using the manual handle with the
automatic reference point return commands (G28, 629, G30), thread-cutting command (G33) and
skip command (G31).
(2) Even during automatic pause (feed hold) and block stop, the automatic handle interrupt function is
valid provided that one of the automatic modes (tape, memory, MDI) is selected.
(3) When an axis is moved by the automatic handle interrupt function during a dwell (G04) command,
the dwell count operation is suspended. It is first checked that the axis has compIeted its movement,
and then the dwell count operation is continued.
(4) The automatic handle interrupt function is valid even during automatic machine lock. However,
during manual machine lock, the machine does not move and only the present position display is
updated. Unless the manual machine lock mode is established, the machine will move by the
interrupt amount based on the manual handle and the present position display will be updated,
(5) Interrupt does not apply to axes to which interlock signals have been input or to axes with a soft limit
interrupt direction.

6.18.3 INTERRUPT VALID AXES

( 1 ) The automatic handle interrupt function is valid only for those axes for which the manual handle
axis selection signal has been input.
(2) Up to 3 axes can be made subject to automatic handle interrupt (this is limited by the number of
handles).
(3) Only one axis can be interrupted with one manual handle for the automatic handle interrupt
function.

6.18.4 AXIS MOVEMENT SPEED BASED ON INTERRUPT

(1) When the rapid traverse command (GOO)is assigned during automatic start, the movement sped
(automatic movement speed + interrupt speed based on manual handle) of the axes which are
subject to the handle interrupt is clamped so that the rapid traverse rate of the axes is not exceeded.
(2) When any of the cutting feed commands (GO1, G02, G03) is assigned during automatic start, the
movement sped (automatic movement speed + interrupt speed based on manual handle) of the axes
which are subject to the handle interrupt is clamped so that the cutting feed clamp rate of the axes
is not exceeded.
(3) When handle interrupt is conducted in the same direction for an axis moving at the external
deceleration speed during automatic start, the movement speed (automatic movement speed +
interrupt speed based on manual handle) of the axis is clamped so that the external deceleration
speed of the axis is not exceeded.
(4) When an attempt is made to conduct interrupt which will cause the clamp speed to be exceeded, the
handle scale and interrupt amount will not tally.
(5) The handle magnification depends on the manual handle/step magnification selection input.

-287-
 .,, .,

6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

6.18.5 PATH AFTER INTERRUPT

( 1 ) In the incremental value (G91) mode
.7

In the incremental value ‘mode, the path which applies after the interrupted block shifts by the
interrupt amount, as shown in the figure.

Programmed path ,,+f ~.-. / --.,

( ‘. , /’ ‘\
(G91X.—Y :) .Z-” /Y ‘., ,/ $$ N
,.” ‘x . ‘ .,
‘. ‘<\
‘.
/ / /’”’ ‘...
‘. . ..
. /“

Path after interrupt

~ ‘
Interrupt amount based on manual handle

Path after interrupt

(incremental value mode)

(2) In the absolute value (G90) mode

In the absolute value mode, the path applying after interrupt when the updating of the programmed
absolute values by the handle interrupt amount is invalid shifts by the interrupt amount.
In the absolute value mode, the path applying after interrupt when the updating of the programmed
absolute values by the handle interrupt amount is valid returns to the programmed path for single
block operation by the command of the block following the block in which the interrupt was
completed and for continuous operation by the command two blocks after the block in which the
interrupt was completed.

NOTE The present position display and machine position display include the handle interrupt amounts.
With automatic handle interrupt, the selection as to whether the absolute value data is to be
updated or not is made by:
1) Machine parameter which sets whether it is to be done by parameter or the manual absolute
selector switch.
2) When done by parameter, another machine parameter sets whether the absolute daia is to he
updated or not for each axis.
3) When done by manual absolute switching, selection is made by the switch on the machine
operation board.

-288-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

Conditions for absolute value updating with automatic handle interrupt

Position display
Absolute value data page 2
updating Manual interrupt
amount disrdav
Machine ON Machine Absolute values Not updated
c< ??
parameter 1 parameter updated
($asic specification (basic specification
parameter) parameter) Absolute value not Updated
I _ abs intabs updated
(for each axis)
OFF PLC interface ON Absolute values Not updated
“~, manual absolute updated
switching
OFF Absolute value not Updated
tmdated

Interrupt amount based Path after interrupt

on manual handle
(Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating invalid)

\
Interrupt amount based
on manual handle Path after interrupt
(Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating valid, single block operation)

-289-
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

Interrupt amount based on manual handle

programmed path,,
(G$JOX
.—Y ;)
@

~ Interrupt amount during

block execution @ Interrupt amount during block execution
Path after interrupt
(Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating valid, continuous operation)

6.18.6 DURING CUTTER COMPENSATION

The special movements during cutter compensation mentioned below apply only to the cutter compensa-
tion plane axes and not to any of the other axes.
With cutter compensation (G41, G42) commands
In the incremental value mode (G91), the path is shifted by an amount equivalent to the interrupt only.
In the absolute value mode (G90), when handle interrupt is executed in a block in which a cutter
compensation (G41, G42) command is being mecuted, the path returns to the original tool path at the
following block provided that the programmed absolute value updating is valid with single block
operation. If the programmed absolute value updating is valid with continuous operation, the path returns
to the original tool path with the command in the fourth block after the block in which the interrupt is
completed. If there are not four blocks stretching from the block after the interrupt is completed to the
block with the cutter compensation cancel command (G40), the path returns to the original tool path at
the block following the block with the cutter compensation cancel command (G40).

-290-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTER.K UPT

Path after interrupt

(Incremental value mode, continuous operation)

A
‘., Programmed path,,’”..,, ,..
‘ .’ 1
G42 ,,#””a Q ~.,, /“
,/
,/
.-

radius

Path after interrupt

Path after interrupt
Interrupt amount based
on manual handle (Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating valid,
siru.deblock ooerationl

,,-.,
----
“l~..<Programmed
..’ path ,~~..
. . , ~. C*I-l ..7A
\

Path after interrupt

\ Path after interruntL
Int&upt amount based (Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating
on manual handle valid, continuous operation)
6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 H~DLE INTERRUPT

Programmed path

Interrupt amount based

on manual handle Path after interrupt
Absolute value mode, programmed absolute value updating valid, continuous operation)

6.18.7 INTERRUPT AMOUNT RESETTING

The interrupt amount is reset in the following cases.
(1) When dog-type reference point return is performed
(2) When emergency stop is released
(3) When the reset-and-rewind command is executed
(4) When NC reset 1 or NC reset 2 is executed with the interrupt amount reset parameter ON

6.18.8 OPERATING PROCEDURE

In the example of operation below, it is assumed that automatic operation for the the X, Y and Z axes is
executed in the memo~ operation mode and that the Z axis is the handle interrupt axis.

Proceed with the automatic operation

and set to in-automatic start.

r
\
~y
HANDLE *N
INTERRUPT
on the machme operation board to ON.

@
OFF

\ J

-292-
 6. S WITCH FUNCTIONS
6.18 HANDLE INTERRUPT

Select the interrupt axis using the Dw HANDLE/

I
14ANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT INCREMENTAL HANDLE FEED
switch on the machine operation board. MAGNIFICATION AXIS SELECT
Select the movement amount per scale
increment using the HANDLE/ mm 1
~m lm m 10 Yz
INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION x 4
switch. ml
10
10 &lo

1 @m
1 ;%

Rotate the manual handle in the “+” Ow

or “-” direction to change the cut
amount for the Z axis,

[
I
~
~ Program&d path
Tool ~ath (Pr~ent PositIon disPlaY)
(hancfle interrupt display) I

I Handle interrupt
I
Automatic operation is terminated
when the M02 or M30 command is
executed.

-293-
 1. CONFIGURATION
1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1. CONFIGWTION

1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

-— ———— ———. .—— ——— ——— .—— ———— -——— —.—
r 7
I CRT setting and I
I display unit Control unit I
I
I lml I
Tape reader
(diserete~
i
I
I
I r ----- _ .1 11111111, ?1 I
-47 I I
I
I
I System with i
automatic I
~ I 1001
I I I
1programm- ~ ~~ in: D ~
I ing only
Tape handler I
lLflo~pydisks~
i
--—. - ILw & I
I 2V
J
I 1 r--+ --t------–------’
f I Portable
tape reader
; Tape puncher
I
\ Printer
I {
I
/
gv
I L
I I
i
I
I
I [ I
!- -.
!-
i
-—
-——

H . —--—
———
J ——.
—-—

-.—.
—
—-----
A

Spindle rotary eneoder

-1

P
i
1
I /
i I
I i
I Operation Power Limit I
I board board switches, etc. 1
r---l
Iol
L- J
Manual ?
I pulse
I
I
I
I
L ----
~11
--—— ————
Encoder

—— ——.
x-axis
motor

— .—— - --—-
generator

———- ---- ——- J

-295-
1. CONFIGURATION
1.2 TABLE OF UNITS CONFIGURING S YSTEM

1.2 TABLE OF UNITS CONFIGURING SYSTEM

Part Name Quantity Application

I
Main control unit $4U311 1 Logic unit for NC main unit
I
MC031 (1) Motherboard for 10 slots
I PD21 AVR (1) Power supply

;RT unit vfB411 (14”) 1 CRT setting and display

unit
1

A1QA8DSP40 (1) 14-inch color CRT

LT3B AVR I (1) Power supply
KSMB 411 (1) Key switch board
KSMB 401 (1) Key switch board
MC201 OPBC (1) NC operation board
interface card
MC231 MCIF–A (1) Machine operation board
interface card
hansistor amplifier MR–S For each For supplying current to
axis motor
Motor Him-c For each For driving control axes
axis
Detector OSE5K (standard) For each Encoder for detecting
OAER25K (ultra-precision) axis machine position
0AER5K (absolute value)

Manual pulse HD52B 1/3 Manual handle

generator
Rotary encoder 1 For detecting position of
spindle motor

Tape reader PTR-240 1 For reading paper tape

Tape handler 1 For rewinding paper tape

Puncher TP50D (parallel) 1 For punching data onto
paper tape
1

Portable tape reader PTR-02A 1 Portable tape reader

Puncher PTP-02A 1 For punching data onto

paper tape

Connecting cables I As required Cable for connecting units

Accessories ]lset

-296-
 2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON PO WER
2.1 CONNECTION SYSTEM DIAGRAM’

2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE STKKKXIINGON

Pow

2.1 CONNECTION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

[M330HM/335Ml
CABLE CNB21

CABLE CNS32

Released to uwr
r
I
Well 1SE O1). BOAR~ :
CABLE CNS31L-— ——— — ‘a ~
r HRS222C 1
[-
1
%fc M c ilc Mc MC
Ml CRO 712 Ill 121 “41 ?~’”...,-. ... ---...
m lwwl==ll : ‘“MM ‘0”=’

~): Automatic
programming
FLD
(*)
;
g
[; I
I
II I Ilal
d Ad‘“~
llls~ll:{
:1-‘“” ~
‘G
system only L12
g!! I.RM + Id!
E
r,
l’\l T

-. t
‘J WI L: II
1’ II
m 1 bA’13LE C’x)iif
CABLE CXSII rJ =
11{s 232C ;
—
CABLE CSS21.22 CABLE [’:,1111 G
-1’

C.4BLk: CSS12

.X=tLsE2-

-297-
2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON P O WER
2.1 CONNECTION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

~330HM-v/335M-vl

CABLE C?4S32
CABLE CNE )21 NC OP BOARD
.

I fl:l Mcsol
,

I
n
z
:
M-
CRT

R S S3ZC 1

DAT.4 SARVER -
FA STATION
I I MACHINE OF BOARD ! ‘t

lC MC

k1
FLD 411 724
)P) -1
~): Automatic [*) 472
474
programming
system only

BAT

(0P

ZJ
m
z

‘1
1,
1,
I
CABLE CNP12 “_:y MAcH,NE
,- ——— —--- ——---—- --- —--

‘-” i==
1’

[PTi7-240R aol ;CABLE p .1

I
I
CXA12 HANDLE

CMD12
I D! I
,CFD13
+
DO I
. CNAS7 ANALOG IN

, CMD21
4 Dr 1

<C F D22
4 DO 1

—
XA@
. . IUUV
AL
....
‘Fp-i
““
TRANS XB G AMP Nz
800V A I =K1-!Y) p 1 =
T &ERM
T] :SKO-NCB139 %- ———-INATING ———.—
CONNECTOR
m/Pa\~

-298-
 2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON POWER
2.2 TABLE OF CABLES

2.2 TABLE OF CABLES

Classification MU311 Cable Destination

URT board IOP CNS32 CRT operation board
:ables CNS32 D Cl CNB81
CRTC–C CNB1 1 CRT operation board
CNB-11 D o CRT–1

CNP1 1 CRT
PD21 power supply
o a ACV–1
I’ape reader CPUA CNS12 PTR240
CNS12 D a CN1
PD20 power supply CNP12 AVIU3W-24
ACOUT D 9 ACIN
Servo MCP (CPUA) CAM1 1 Servo amplifier axis 1
amplifier CAM1l n n CNIA
Sensor MCP (CPUA) CNA1 8 Sensor
CNA18 CZ
Spindle unit MCP (none) CND15 Spindle unit
CND15 @
MCP (CPUA) CNA1 1 Spindle encoder
CNA1l P
Manual DIO–A CNA1 2 Manual pulse
handle CNA12 R generator
1/0 cables DIO–A CMD 1 1 Machine side
CMD1l E’ Operation board &
power board
DIO–A CMD 12
CMD12
DIO–A CFD13
CFD13
D1O–B CNA27
CNA27 R
DIO–B CFD22
CFD22
DIO–B CMD2 1
CMD21
DIO–B CNA21 Encoder
CNA21 C2

V series specifications indicated in parentheses.

-299-
2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON POWER
2.3 DRIVER AMPLIFIER WIRING CHECK

2.3 DRIVER AMPLIFIER WIRING CHECK

.

II

( 1 ) Measure the AC 200/220V voltage at the entrance of the driver amplifier NFB.
It should be AC 200/220V + 10/–15%.
(2) Also measure between U, V, W and ground (frame) using a tester and check that infinity registers.
(3) Check the terminal board and connector connections.

.,..

-3b0-
 2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON POWER
2.4 CHECKING THE INPUT POWER SUPPLY

2.4 CHECKING THE INPUT POWER SUPPLY

2.4.1 INPUT’ POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM DIAGRAM

In the set-up instructions, the procedure adopted for switching on the power involved turning on the
no-fuse breakers (NFB) in sequence. Here, however, the procedure is described based on the input power
system shown in the figure below. The connections will differ depending on the individual machine and
so the system diagrams issued by the machine builder should be consulted.

Control unit
ACIY
ACI?4

Rill
PD20 AMP AMP AMP
E - w

RSTE RSTE RSTE

. iE I
1 w -
AB NFB I A { I J w = ~ Machine
J . w
AR

Q ACICOV
v
7 Transformer NFB NFB

EUVW Uvw Uvw

1 T I 1
11’
1

[cl
RST

Main no-fuse breaker (NFB)

Uvw

~ro~nd Commercial power supply AC 200/220V

.,
input power supply system diagram

2.4.2 CHECKING THE INPUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE

( 1 ) Measure the factory AC 200/220V voltage at the entrance of the main NFJ3,
It should be AC 200/220V + 10/-l5Yo.
(2) Set the main NF13 to ON and measure theAC 100Vvoltage at the entrance of the control unit NFB.
It should be AC 100V + 10/-15%.
(3) Measure the AC 200/220V voltage at the entrance of the servo unit NFB.
It should be AC 200/220V + 10/–1570.

-301-
 ?,,.;j .,,,,,..:
,!; ,.. , ..

2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON P O WER

2.5 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

2.5 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

2.5.1 CHECKING FOR POWER SUPPLY SHORTCIRCUITING

Use a tester to check that there is no shortcircuiting between + 5V, A 12V, + 24V and ground in the
“PD21” power supply located inside the control unit. (Check the connections of the connectors.)

MU311

Shortcircuiting check procedure PD21

( 1 ) With the power OFF, use a tester to check
+ 5V, + 5GND, a 12V, * 12GND, + 24V
and + 24GND of the power supply.
The check procedure for shortcircuiting in the
power supply is completed if no shortcircuit- LED “m
ing is found. LED m
Described below are the measures taken when
shortcircuiting is detected.
+5V .
+5 VGND .
+12VGND ●

*12V .
-12V .
+24V .
NOTE L Refer to Section 3.1 for details on the +24 VG”ND -
LED lamp displays. [
NOTE 2 Do not undertake the voltage measure-
ment with the power ON since the power
supply may be shortcircuited when the
voltage is measured with 100V supplied
to AC IN.

-302-
 2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON PO WER
2.5 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

(2) Checking the cable connectors

1 ) Disconnect all the connectors inserted into the cards and check for shortcircuting.
a If shortcircuiting results, it means that there is nothing wrong with the cable connectors.
Proceed to (3).
2 ) If shortcircuiting does not result, connect the connectors one by one and check for
shortcircuiting.
e If shortcircuiting is confirmed, it means that the cause lies in one of the connected
connectors. Check the connector cables and the wiring destinations.
(3) Check the wiring which is connected to the terminal board of the power supply section.
1 ) Disconnect all the connected wires and check for shortcircuiting.
e If shortcirctiting is confirmed, the cause lies elsewhere. Proceed to (4).
2 ) If shortcircuiting is not confirmed, connect each of the wires in turn and check for
shortcircuiting.
o If shortcircuiting is confirmed, the cause lies in the wire which has just been connected.
Check the wiring destination.
(4) Check the cards.
1 ) Remove all the cards which have been plugged into the control unit and check for
shortcircuiting.
@ If shortcircuiting is confirmed, the cause lies elsewhere. Proceed to (5).
2 ) If shortcircuiting is not confirmed, plug in each of the cards in turn and check for
shortcircuiting.
a If shortcircuiting is confirmed, the cause lies on the card which has just bwm plugged in,
Check out this card.
(5) Check the back panel and power supply.
1 ) Remove the power supply from the back panel (by drawing it out by about 20 mm).
2 ) Check for shortcircuiting.
e If shortcircuit is confirmed, one or more parts inside the power supply are defective.
o If shortcircuiting is not confirmed, the back panel itself is defective.

2.5.2 CHECKING THE POWER ON/OFF SIGNALS

Check that the terminal board AC, ON, OFF, COM and 3-pin connector ON/OFF signals are not
shortcircuited. Improperly connected wiring will make it impossible to switch on and/or off the power.
Whether the cmmector board or the connector signals are used as the power ON/OFF signals depends on
the specifications of the machine builder.
( 1 ) Check procedure
1 ) Check for shortcircuiting at the terminal board ON/OFF/COM.
If shortcircuiting is not confirmed, the power ON/OFF signal check is completed.
2 ) If shortcircuiting is confirmed, disconnect the wires and check.
If shortcircuiting is not confirmed, check the wiring destinations.
If shortcircuiting is confirmed, it means that the power supply is defective.

-303-
 ,. ,,,;
. ,,, ....,, ,:

2. CHECKPOINTS BEFORE S WITCHING ON POWER

2.6 CHECKING THE GROUNDING

2.6 CHECKING THE GROUNDING

2.6.1 SIGNAL CABLE GROUNDING

All the cables leading into the control unit and NC control rack are clamped as shown in the figure below.
A check must be undertaken to confirm that the clamp has been provided since it not only supports the
cables but shields them as well. It thus plays an extremely important role in preventing malfunctioning
caused by noise and in otherwise stabilizing the operation of the system.

I
System 1 \
\
\

ntrol unit \ c
\
\

\
\
\

;able

Shield covering

2.6.2 NC GROUNDING CHECK

The signal lines and grounding wires are ultimately eonneeted to the grounding terminal (E) on the NC
main unit and so the various units must be kept at the same potential.
Cheek whether the NC main unit has been grounded as in the figure below and whether the grounding has
been made at a single point.

NC main Power board Machine

unit

Conned to ground.

-304-
 3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON
3.1 PO WE.R-ON PROCEDURE FOR CONTROL SECTION 0NL%

3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING POWER ON

3.1 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR CONTROL SECTION ONLY

Supply power only to the control section inside the input power supply circuit, and chwk both the
operations of the limit switches and the emergency stop circuit, and the parameters.
(1) Check that all NFBs are OFF.
(2) Set the main NFB to ON.
(3) Set the NFB of the control unit input power supply AC 100V to ON.
(4) Measure the voltage across IN of the control unit input power supply (PD21) AC 100V.
It should be AC 100V + 10/-157%.
(5) Press the ON button of the power ON/OFF switch on the NC operation board to supply the power.
~ Several seconds after the power has been switched on, the initial screen appears on the screen.
* If the NC power is not supplied:
1 ) 5V, A 12V shortcircuiting: check under Section 2.5.1.
2 ) Defective power ON/OFF switch wiring: check under Section 2.5.2.
3 ) Defective power supply.
o Check LED lamps of power supply section.
1 ) Alarm lamp lighted: + 24V shortcircuiting
or AC 100V input voltage is not the proper
voltage.
2 ) Ready lamp lighted: + 5V voltage is output.
(6) The alarm diagnosis page of the setting and display unit appears.
43“AMP. UNEQUIPPED” appears (because the amplifier’s input power is not being supplied).
@ The ready lamp does not light.
(7) Check the operation of the emergency stop switch,
Set the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operation board to ON.
e Check on the I/F diagnosis page.
( 8 ) Check the parameter contents.
e Check the parameter data against the parameter sheet in the NC Test Performance Results,
o The drive amplifiers in this NC unit feature an all-digital configuration and there are no
adjustment locations. All adjustments are done through parameter settings.
Consequently, an incorrect parameter setting may result in an incorrwt operation when the
power is switched on. In particular, check that all the servo parameters are correct and proceed
to correct them if they are not.
e When the battery alarm or memory alarm appears
When the battery alarm appears, the parameter contents may be erased or destroyed.
Proceed to reset them in accordance with the parameter sheet.

-305-
3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON
3.1 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR CONTROL SECTION ONLY

(9) Limit switch operation check

Check the operations of the emergency stop and limit switches on the <I/F> check page.
. Emergency stop limit switch
If emergency stop is set for the machine with a limit switch and dog in its movable area, first
set this emergency stop limit switch to ON and check that the EMG alarm appears on the
setting and display unit.
. Stroke end limit switch operation check
When the stroke end limit switch mounted on the moving area of the machine is pressed, check
that the bit for the limit switch on the corresponding alarm diagnosis page changes from 1 to
O. (This applies to all axes.)
“MO1 OPERATION ERROR 0006” should now appear on the alarm diagnosis page of the
setting and display unit.
e Near-point detection limit switch operation check
When the near-point detection limit switches for each axis have been pressed on the I/F
diagnosis page, the bit for the near-point detection dog corresponding to the control axis
should change from 1 to O.

:-.

,.

306-
 ,,,,,

3, PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON

3.2 CHECKS BASED ON INTERFACE CHECK SCREEN

3.2 CHECKS BASED ON INTERFACE CHECK SCREEN

3.2.1 FLOW OF INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS

The ON/OFF statuses of the switches and lamps of the external machine operation board, of the inputs
and outputs of the power board on the machine side and of the 1/0 signals of the setting and display
board’s key switches and Iamps can be checked on the interface check page.
The figure below shows the signal flow.

achine power boardl NC

Ieration board PLC

~~ External input
K03-XFF

++
Switch
I
PLC output
.elay contact
YISS-Y2FF . NC input
R1~- R163
Relay coil
*
“t-
Board input
XICO-X13F

~RT board, External output

lachine YOO-YFF
,peration board

PLC input
/.
Switch XIM-XHF NC output
t RO-RK

Board output
Lamp 1- Ylm-Y12F

In the above figure, the signals between the PLC and NC are freed but the allocation of the addresses for
the external signals between the PLC and CRT board, power board and machine operation board is not
fixed. This is because the sequence programs are prepared by the machine builder based on the functions
built into the PLC and so reference should be made to the allocation chart issued by the machine builder
for the allocation of these addresses.
The following check methods using the interface check page are available.
1 ) Operate the external switches and limit switches and check the ON/OFF statuses,
2 ) Output the output signals from the NC side and check the ON/OFF statuses.

-307-
3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON
3.2 CHECKS BASED ON INTERFACE CHECK SCREEN

3.2.2 CHECKING THE INPUT SIGNALS

( 1 ) Check whether a PLC unit is self-contained or not, and prepare the address allocation table.
(2) The interface check page of the setting and display unit appears.

<NC ALARM > : < PLC I/F >

: : < SET DATA>
:
:
:
:
:
: 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
; Xoooo 0000000000 Yoooo 0000000000
< STOP CODE> : XOO08 0000000000 YOO08 0000000000
; Xoolo 0000000000 Yoolo 0000000000
: XO018 00001111 OF YO018 0000000000
: XO020 10001111 8F YO020 0000000000
< ALARM MESSAGE>
: XO028 00001111 OF yO028 0000000000
; XO030 0000000000 YO030 0000000000
; X 00380000000000 YO038 0000000000
; XO040 0000000000 YO040 0000000000
i xO048 0000000000 Yoo&3 0000000000
: XO050 0000000000 YO050 0000000000
< OPERATOR MESSAGE> ; xO058 0011000030 YO058 0000000000
; XOOGO 0011000030 yO060 0000000000
: XO068 0000000000 YO068 0000000000
: XO070 0000000000 YO070 0000000000
~ X 00780000000000 YO078 0000000000
~DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE

‘( )()() () ()()

I I I CHECK I I I I I

I/Fcheckscreen of setting and display unit

(3) Set theaddresses of the signals to rechecked.

The left-hand and right-hand data can beset separately for theinterface check.

Set the PLC input device number into up XO078 0000000000 YO078 0000000000
theleft-hand DEVICE( ).
DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE
i (.xoooj) ( ) ( ) ( )()()
Status with XO set as input
device number

Move the cursor to the DEVICE

( ) on the right. Bw i
XO078 0000000000 YO078 0000000000
I
DEVICE DATA MODE DEWCE DATA MODE
I
\ (Xoooo) ( ) ( ) ( 3)()()

Set the key [~~] to ON

three times.

-308-
 3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON
3.2 CHECKS BASED ON INTERFACE CHECK SCREEN

=’” Set the PLC output device number into

e Status with YO set as output

device number.
c
(
DEVICE DATAMODEDEVICE DATAMODE
I

Press the [INPUT] key,

The previous interface check page now appears,

Nothing is set in the DATA ( ‘) or MODE (

The data display numbers can be

selected m sequence using the menu

II
111

~ ‘“ 101

The lower device numbers now displayed

appear in sequence when the PREVIOUS
PAGE] key is pressed.
The higher device numbers now displayed
appear in sequence when the NEXT PAGE] ~
PREVIOUS PAGE key NEXT PAGE ky
key is pressed.

I 1
Set the switches on the external
operation board ON/OFF
and check that the bits of the
corresponding devices are
1 or O.

1 ) When the corresponding bit is not “l” on the PLC input data area (with NO contact)
* Incorrect wiring connections for external input signal line
s Break or disconnection in external input signal line or switch failure
2 ) When the corresponding bit is not “1” on the PLC output data area (with NO contact)
* When the PLC input data is correct and the PLC output data is incorrect, it may mean
that there is an error in the sequence program.

-309-
3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON
3.3 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR ENTIRE SYSTEM

3.3 POWER-ON PROCEDURE FOR ENTIRE SYSTEM

( 1 ) Set all the no-fuse breakers to OFF.
(2) Set the spindle and machine no-fuse breakers to ON.
● Check first that there is nothing wrong at the spindle and machine side and then set the no-fuse
breakers to ON.
(3) Set the driver amplifier no-fuse breakers to ON.
(4) Check the contents of the drive amplifier status displays.
o “AA” should appear as the status display.
(5) Set the control unit no-fuse breakers to ON.
(6) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operation board and set to the emergency
stop mode.
(7) Press the ON button of the control unit’s power ON/OFF switch to supply the NC power.
(8) The emergency stop is released as soon as the EMERGENCY STOP button and NC power OFF
button can be pressed.
Set the RESET switch to ON if the emergency stop mode is of the holding type.
Check that the axes do not overrun. If an axis overruns, immediately set the EMERGENCY STOP
button to ON or switch off the NC power and stop the axis.
When an axis overrun%
(1) Incorrect amplifier U, V, W connections
(2) Incorrect encoder cable connections
(3) Incorrect encoder internal signal connections
(4) Lncorrect setting for servo parameter detector polarity
( 9 ) Check that the emergency stop alarm has cleared from the setting and display unit’s alarm diagnosis
page.
The ready lamp on the setting and display board should have lighted.
Check that both the control unit and servo READY lamps on the machine operation board have
lighted.
(10 ) If the system is not in the status described in step (9), the ready state will not be attained because of
an alarm. Check as instructed in the following section.
(11 ) Check the alarm contents.
o Display the alarm diagnosis page of the setting and display unit, and check the alarm contents
which have now appeared.
. If the READY lamps do not light:
1 ) Check the alarm contents on the alarm diagnosis page of the setting and display unit.
2 ) Check the transistor amplifier status display.
Check the alarm contents in the alarm tables at the end of this manual and take the appropriate
measures.

- 3io -
 3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING POWER ON
3.4 OPERATIONAL CHECKS

3.4 OPERATIONAL CHECKS

3.4.1 CHECKING THE MOVEMENT DIRECTIONS

(1) Checking the axis movement direction in the handle mode
Move each axis in the handle mode and check that the rotational direction (“ -t” or “-”) of the
handle and the movement direction of the moving axis match.
If the axis moves in the reverse direction, 1 or 2 below is to blame. (Investigate in the order of 1 and
2, and then take the appropriate measures.)
1 ) Phases A and B of the handle (manual pulse generator) connections are reversed.
2 ) Change the basic specifications parameter #7 (motor CCW) to “l” if it is “O” and to “O” if it
is “l.”
(2) Checking the axis movement in the jog mode
Move the axis in the jog mode and check that the command direction and movement direction
match.

NOTE t If axis stability is poor when the axes are moved in the handle and jog modes, proceed to adjust
the stability of the drive system in the next section first before checking.

3.4.2 CHECKING THE LIMIT SWITCH OPERATIONS

( 1 ) Stroke end operational check
1 ) Move the axis in the” +” direction in the handle feed or jog mode so that the stroke end limit
switch on the”+” side is turned ON.
@ The axis should stop as soon as the limit switch has kicked the dog.
* The stroke end alarm should appear on the alarm diagnosis page of the setting and display
unit.
e The axis should not move even when a “+” direction movement command is assigned
again.
@ The axis should move in the “-” direction when a “-” command is assigned.
e If the axis does not stop when the dog is kicked:
The axis moves in the”+” direction when the”+” movement command is assigned
.... The stroke end signal has mistaken the axis for another axis.
The axis does not move when a “-” command is assigned
.... The “+” and “-” stroke end signals are reversed.
2 ) Move the axis in the “-” direction so that the “-” side stroke end limit switch is turned ON.
The axis should stop when the limit switch has kicked the dog.
@ The stroke end alarm should appear.
o ‘I’he axis should not move even when the “-” direction movement command is assigned
again.
o The axis should move in the” +“ direction when a “+” command is assigned.
@ If the axis does not stop when the dog is kicked:
The axis moves in the “-” direction when a “-” movement command is assigned and it does
not move when a “+” command is assigned
.... The” +” and “-” stroke end signals are reversed.
The axis moves in the “-” direction when a “-” movement command is assigned and it
moves in the”+” direction when a “+” command is assigned
.... The stroke end signal has mistaken the axis for another axis.

-311-
 ,.

3. PROCEDURE FOR TURNING PO WER ON

3.4 OPERA TION~ CHECKS

(2) Reference point return operational check

1) Reduce the reference point return speed by means of the rapid traverse override switch.
2) Return the control axis to the reference point.
3) Check that the control axis decelerates and stops above the near-point dog.
4) After step 3, check that the control axis moves toward the reference point direction.
The parameter setting is incorrect if the reference point return direction differs.
5) After the control axis moves toward the reference point return direction and the dog has been
cleared, it should arrive at the reference point within several dozen millimeters. The reference
point arrival output signal of the operation board should be supplied and the operation board’s
reference point arrival lamp should light.
6) Check that the control axis is positioned at the machine’s reference point when it arrives at the
reference point.
7) Check that the servo monitor page of the setting and display unit appears and that the grid
amount is displayed.
. Check that this amount is about one-half of the grid interval.
8) When the reference point position needs to be changed or adjusted, refer to Section 5 for the
reference point adjustments.

,.

-312-
 4. DRIVE SECTION ADJUS TMENTS

4’* Dm smoN m~usm~ms

There are 3 servo parameters which are used to adjust the drive section system during set-up. Set all the
other servo parameters as per the listed setting.
When changing the servo parameter data, do not make great changes a~l at once but change one or two
data at a time. ‘I’he data will not be made valid after the changes unless the power is switched off first.

[SERVO PARAM] M. PARAM l/2

<x> <y> <z> <u> <v> <w>

1 Pcl

5 VGI i50 150 150 0

6 VG2 o 0 0 0
7 VIL 9920 gg~o 9920 0
8 VIA 682 682 682 0

16
#( )AXISC >DATA( )

Servo parameter screen

3 PGN (equivalent to conventional amplifier VR2)

5 VG1 (equivalent to conventional amplifier VR9)
8VIA (equivalent to conventional amplifier VR3)

Unlike conventional systems, there is no need with the MR-S servo system to align the position loop gain
for the interpolation axes using the controls or to reset the offset to zero.
(1) 3 PGN: Position loop gain (standard = 33)
This is normally “33” but it can be reduced to about “25” with overshooting in a
closed-loop system,
Make the setting common for all axes.
(2) 5 VG1: Speed loop gain (standard = 150)
If this is increased, the responsiveness rises. (“250” is the limit)
(3) 8 VIA Speed Ioop advance compensation (standard = 682)
If this is increased, the responsiveness rises. (“1500” is the limit)

-313-
5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUS TMENTS
5.1 REFERENCE POINT RETURN OPERATION

5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUSTMENTS

5.1 REFERENCE POINT RETURN OPERATION

The machine is provided with constant-pitch grid points.
When the control axis is returned to the reference point, the first grid point is detectcxl after the near-point
dog (which sets the near-point detection switch ON/OFF) among the grid points has been cleared and the
control axis is returned to the reference point at this position. This point is known as the electrical zero
point.
The machine has its own inherent machine zero point and so the machine and electrical zero points must
be made to coincide. This is known as reference point shift.

r \

Limit switch a Return direction

I I
@ Grid mask Machine zero
t Electrical zero point point
Near-point dog
I ~,,..a
t A
Grid ~ A A A A
‘~’ 1- -1
0 Grid interval @ Reference point shift
L .J

There are a number ways of adjusting the reference point return.

1) Grid interval setting
These intervals are provided for each revolution of the detector in the case of absolute position
detection.
The formula below provides the reference for the grid intervals for each revolution of the
detector in the case of relative position detection.
Grid interval = Amount of movement per motor revolution/n
Where “n” is an integer
2) Grid mask setting
A shift in position occurs upon reference point return unless the position at which the limit
switch clears the dog is near the grid interval center. This shift can be prevented by setting the
grid mask.
3) Reference point shift setting
The electrical zero point is shifted and made to coincide with the machine zero point.
* The reference point return must be adjusted in the following sequence

Grid interval setting Reference point shift setting

(Parameter grspc) (Parameter grmask) (Parameter G28sft)

-314-
 5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUS TMENTS
5.2 SETTING THE GRID INTER VALS

5.2 SETTING THE GRID INTE.RV&LS

5.2.1 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION

The grid intervals for absolute position detection are determined by the type of encoder.
Parameter (grspc) setting = No. of pulses per encoder revolution/1000
Actual grid intervals:
Grid interval = Ball screw pitch x No. of motor gear teeth/No. of ball screw gear teeth

5.2.2 IkE~ATIVE PO$31TION IllZTECTIOFJ

Shorter grid intervals than the actual grid intervals can be set for relative position detection.
This reduces the distance extending from the clearing of the dog to the arrival at the electrical zero point,
and it can also reduce the time r~uired for reference point return.
Grid interval (grspc) = No. of detwtor pulses/1000 x I/n
Number of detector pulses:
Standard encoder: 20000
Encoder with ultra high-. performance 100000
Number of divisions

Path of reference point return after parameter setting

~1
. ---- ---- -t
\
\ Path of original reference
\ point return
\ ---- -- —-. j
l., ‘- I

AA AAA AA AAA
A 1- {

* t jg:;;e.alsetb?
Grid interval set
by parameter

-315-
5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUS TMENTS
5.3 SETTING THE GRID MASK

5.3 SETTING THE GRID MASK

5.3.1 SETTINGS
The first grid point after the dog has been cleared serves as the reference point. When there is a grid point
at the position where the dog is cleared, then the grid point at the position where the dog has been cleared
or the following grid point can serve as the reference point, depending on the speed of the limit switch
operation and, as a result, the reference point return position may shift.
Conseauentlv. the position at which the dog is cleared must be placed in the center of the grid point.
Adjustment ~an be-made by changing the m~unting of the encoder or dog. However, even if ihere-is a grid
point at the grid mask position which has been set by setting the dog mask through a parameter, this will
be ignored. The result is the same as having lengthened the dog by an amount equivalent to the grid mask.
As a result, the position at which the dog is cleared is set at the center of the grid point.

7
Grid point serving as electrical zero point due to
speed of limit switch
I Original electrical zero point
!

I I
‘C2E5 AA
Reference point return before grid mask setting

\ Original electrical zero point

I
A A A A A
Dog
I “~.,w
Reference point return after grid mask setting

-316-
 5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUSTMENTS
5.3 SETTING THE GRID MASK

5.3.2 HOW TO MEASURE THE GRID MASK AMOUNT

1 ) Check that the parameter reference point shift and grid shift amounts are zero. If they are not,
set them to zero.
2) Switch the NC power off and then switch it back on again.
3) Perform manual reference point return.
4) Check that the reference point return is completed. (The reference point arrival lamp will have
lighted.)
5) Display the servo monitor page on the setting and display unit.
Read off the mid amount. This value remesents the distance from the ~osition
. where the limit
switch clears the dog to the first grid phint position.

[ c NC ALARM > < SERVO MONITOR>

<x> <y> <z> <B>
GAIN 33. 0 33. 0 0. 0 o. 0
DROOP 16000 10000 0 0
RPM 1200 1200 0 0
CURR.RATE 40 40 0 0
LOAD RATE 70 70 0 0
< STOP CODE> REGN.RATE 30 30
GRID 1700 510 465 120
ABS N 767 345 10 10
< ALARM MESSAGE> ABS 1X 123 678 123 123
ALARM NO. 1023 078 0 0

l—
11111 I SERVO 1 I I

Servo monitor screen (right side)

1Original electrical zero point

A A A ? A
Dog I
I I
I
Grid mask setting ~ 1
I I
amount 1
~—~ Grid amount display
I I

Example of grid mask amount setting

Grid amount display = 1.7 mm
Grid mask amount = Grid mask amount display – grid interval/2
= 1.7 – (2/2) = 1.7-1 = 0.7 Grid interval = 2 mm
Thus, the grid mask amount setting is 0.7 mm (700).
Set the grid mask amount in the parameter.

If the grid mask amount has been set, the grid amount displayed is the amount from the grid
mask to the grid point.

-317-
5. REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUS TMENTS
5.4 SETTING THE REFERENCE POINT SHIFT AMOUNT

5.4 SETTING THE REFERENCE POINT SHIFT AMOUNT

The reference point is not fixed if it is based on the grid point, as in the previous section. The reference
point inherent to the machine is determined for each machine, and the reference ~oint is shifted so that
~he machine’s reference point position coincides with the position of the reference ~oint based on the grid.
The direction of the shift is the reference point return direction.

\ Reference point position based on grid point

Reference oint return
position a i?ter shift
amount setting
/
:

Reference shift amount

5.5 REFERENCE POINT RETURN CREEP SPEED SETTING

When, during dog-type reference point return, the zero point dog signal is input while the control axis is
moving to the reference point by the reference point return command (rapid traverse), the axis decelerates
and movement proceeds to the grid point (electrical zero point) at the specified creep speed.
If, in this case, the creep speed is too high, there will be a failure to read the grid point due to fluctuations
in the timing of the zero point dog OFF point, and this will result in a zero point shift. The dog OFF point
must be adjusted to midway between grids.
Outlined below is the method of determining the limit of the creep sped and the recommended value at
standard grid intervals.

I I Near-point dog
i I
A A A

l--=-l Grid amount

Electrical zero point

L < (Grid amount) c (Grid interval)

L = (1/G + 0.02)X F~ X 20
Where G: gain (standard value 33) this will depend on the setting made by the machine builder
F~: creep spmd (mm/min),
L coasting amount
Depending on the degree of the creep feed, it may not be possible to satis$ the above formula. In such
cases, determine the appropriate speed F~ from the following formula
F~ S (Grid interval)/(1/G + 0.02)x 20x 2 (mm/min)
Grid interval: Setting in zero point return parameter
(Normally, a value between 2 and 20)

-318-
 ,,
‘:,
,
,,,
5, REFERENCE POINT RETURN ADJUSTMENTS
5.6 REFERENCE POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

Recommended values of creep speed (when position loop gain G = 33)

Recommended creep speed

Grid interval (mm) Creep speed limit (mm/min)
, (mm/min)
1 500 100 – 300
2 1000 100-300
4 2000 100 – 300
8 4000 100 – 500
I 10
12
5000
6000
100 – 500
100 – 500
I

14 7000 100 – 500

16 8000 100 – 500
18 9000 100 – 500
20 10000 100 – 500

NOTE The calculation will yield a high limit value but remember to keep within the range of the
recommended values since mechanical shock and other such trouble may occur if a high speed is
used. This is becomes the speed accelerates in step form (acceleration zero).

5.6 REFERENCE POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

[ZERO-RTN PARAM]

# <x> <y> <z> <TJ> <v> <w>

1 G28rap 10000 10000 10000 0 0 0

2 G28crp 150 150 150 0 0 0
3 G28sft o 0 0 0 0 0
4 grspc 2 2 2 0 0 0
5 grmask 700 0 0 0 0 0

7 dir(-) 1 1 1 0 0 0

8 noref ~
o 0 o 0 0

13# 1 -rfp o 0 0 0 0 0

16
# ( )Hs< >DATA( )
Reference point return parameters

1) G28rap: Sets rapid traverse rate with zero point return,

2) G28crp: Sets creep speed.
3) G28sft: Sets reference point shift amount.
4) grspc Sets grid intervals.
5) grmask: Sets grid mask.
6) dir ( - ) Sets reference point return direction.
7) norefi Sets reference point return to valid or invalid.
8) #1-rfp: Sets 1st reference point

-319-
6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.1 BASIC MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) SETTINGS

6. PARAMETER SETI’’INGS

6.1 BASIC MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) SETTINGS

The basic machine coordinate system is fixed for each individual machine and it denotw the position
determined inherently for that machine.
Settings for the basic machine coordinate system include the following.
(1) Stored stroke limit (f), (II)
(2) Pitch error compensation
(3) 2nd through 4th reference points
(4) Work coordinate systems (G54 – G59)
The basic machine coordinate system is set with the first reference point return position used as the
reference.
The first reference point on the basic machine coordinate system is set as the value for the parameter.
* NormalIv. the Darameter settimz is made “O” and the zero Point of the basic machine coordinate system
and the ~i’rstr;ference point p&ition are made identical. “

m
+
15--
lo-- Reference (zero)
~ point return
5 position
{ ,1 # I 1, 1 1 I 1 1, * 1 1 1
I
-50-45 -40-35 -30-25 -m-15 –lo–
ma~hinecoorclinak.
system zero point

-4
–1

-2s
t
-30+-
–40
-45
-50 {

In the above figure, the parameter settings of the first reference point are as below:
X15000 Yloooo
Setting is also made in the same way for the Z axis.

-320-
 6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.2 STORED STROKE LIMIT (1) SETTING

6.2 STORED STROKE LIMIT (I) SETTING

When the moving range of the machine is preset in the NC system on the basic machine coordinate system
and a command is then assigned which exceeds this setting point, this function serves to decelerate and
stop the control axis at that setting point and to generate a stroke end alarm.
This function is valid only for the axis which has been returned to the reference point after the power was
switched on.
The stored stroke limit is set by machine parameter and the moving range is set in accordance with each
machine.
The range of the stored stroke limit is set on the parameter page of the setting and display unit.

I
I

—.—. —.— .—-— -—-— --—

Machine coordinate system f?- .M

I

Machine movement valid range ,

~
,
( - ) setting +
Fed rate ‘ Setting
i

?.
I
1
&-’- 1

pas SPEC. PARAM]

# <x> (Y) <z> <u> (v) <w>

1 rapid 12000 12000 12000 0 0 0

2 clamp 5000 5000 5000 0 0 0

13 OT- -999999 -999999 -999999 0 0 0

14 OT+ 999999 999999 999999 0 0 0

15 tlml

) AXIS DATA ( )
I #(
< >

Axis specification parameter page

NOTE The speed causes the stop position of the stroke limit to fluctuate.

-321-
6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

6.3.1 BACKLASH COMPENSATION

When the control axis of the machine is moved in the opposite direction to that of the machine, the table
movement is reduced by an amount equivalent to the backlash. The backlash compensation function
serves to add automatically the amount ewivalent to the backlash compensation. to the movement
command when the machine moves in the opposite direction.
There are two types of backlash compensation.
GO back: Applies with movement at rapid traverse rate (GO).
Compensation amount is also measured at rapid traverse rate.
G1 back: Applies with movement at cutting feed rate (Gl, G2, G3).
Compensation amount is measured at feed rate most often employed.

+ —-

1 Machine table I

Ball wrevf
~ (motor)
-
Backlash

[AxisSPEC. PARAM]

# <x> <Y) <z> <u> <\,> {w)

I rapid 12000 12000 12000 0 0 0
2 clamp 5000 5000 5000 0 0 0

11 GOback o 0 0 0 0 0
12 G lback o 0 0 0 0 0
13 OT- 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 OT+ o 0 0 0 0 0

15 t.lml

#( ) AXIS< > DATA ( )

Axis specification parameter page

-322-
 ,,, ,,,,

6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

6.3.2 MEMORY-TYPE PITCH ERROR/RELATIVE POSITION

COMPENSATION
(1) Memory-type pitch error compensation
This function compensates for the axial feed error caused by the ball screw pitch error. In accordance
with the axis movement, it adds an amount equivalent to the error and assigns an NC movement
command.
The amount added does not appear on the position displays,

-t20
+10
-500 – 400 -300 -200 -100
I 1 I I 1

Going --– 20 error

- -– 30
--–40
Returning - --50
- -(.K)

How to read the above figure

. Movement distance for horizontal axis (movement caused by NC command>
* Difference (error) from actual measurement based on movement distance for vertical axis
The error amount in the above figure is set in the parameter as the error compensation.
(2) Memory-type relative position compensation
A preset parameter k. used to compensate for the relative position error (squareness) of 2 axes which
intersect ‘at right angles. This err~r is caused by deflection in the moving-axis.

z ~z

+10 I
+5 I L y Spindle
-400 -w -m – 100 yl
Q 1 1 I
-5
-5 Rela-I
- lotive I
-9 error
2 ;~ –15
-14

‘;) z Ie
I
\
When the squareness of the Y axis in relation to the Z axis is measured and is found to drop as the Y axis
moves in th~ “-” direction (no squareness of Y axis in relation to Z axis), as in the figure ab~ve, the Z axis
is automatically moved (compensated) in the “-” direction as the Y moves in the “-” direction.

-323-
 .,, ,,

6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

6.3.3 SETTING PRO CEDURE

Using a vertical machining center as an example, the setting procedure for X-, Y- and Zaxis pitch error
compensation and Y-Z axis relative position compensation is described here.
( 1 ) Measure the pitch error compensation and relative position compensation amounts.
(2) Determine the dividing intervals.
The intervals applying during the measurement may serve.
(3) Assign numbers to the compensation points (division intervals) on each axis.

Pitch error for X axis Pitch error for Y axis

mm)-500 –400
-+50

–lo

–24
-29

@
–42 --–40
,
–500 –400 -300 –200 –loo @ o
(/J)

Pitch error for Z axis Relative position for Y axis

+20

(mm) – 500-400 -300 --’p –y

b
I
.@ –500 –400 –300 –200 -100
, ,
1+10

1 I
–5
-13
-19
---20 -20

–30
---30 –30
/ (U)
(/1}

. The offset numbers are consecutive numbers for each axis, and a start may be made from any
number where the axis name has changed.
● The offset numbers are always assigned from the “-” direction of each axis toward the “+”
direction.
. An offset number must be assigned on the machine’s reference point.
Compensation is provided with the reference point serving as the zero point of the compensation.

-324-
 6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION S15TT1NGS

(4) Set the data into the NC-ERR. CMP.] screen parameters,

~C-ERR. CMP.]

# <1> (2> <3> <4> <5> <6)

1 cmpax x Y z Y

2 drcax x Y z z

3 rdvno 11 25 7 89 0
4 mdvno 1 17 33 81 0
5 pdvno 13 25 37 89 0
6 SC 1 1 1 1 0
7 spcdv 50000 50000 50000 0 50000 0

13

16

#( ) NO. < )DATA{ )

. .
Machine error compensation screen
There are 6 setting columns c 1> through <6> on the machine error compensation screen. The pitch
error compensation axes and relative Position compensation axes are set into these 6 columns. Once the
pitch err~r compensation has been ~et into 4 o~ the columns, proceed to set the relative position
compensation into the 2 other columns.
The-pitch error compensation and relative position compensation may be set fredy in any sequence.
1 ) cmpax: Compensation basic axis
@ With pitch error compensation: this sets the name of the coordinate axis for which
compensation is to be undertaken,
e With relative position compensation: this sets the name of the measurement axis among
the two axes interswting at right angles that
applies when the relative error is measured.
2 ) drcax: Compensation direction axis
o With pitch error compensation: this is the axis which actually provides compensa-
tion and it is the same as the basic axis for the
pitch error.
e With relative position compensation: this is the axis which actually provides compensa-
tion and it sets the name of the axis serving as the
reference when measurement was made for the
relative error.

-325.
6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

3 ) rdvno: Reference point position division number

This sets the offset number at the reference point position among the offset numbers on the
compensation axes.
In actual fact, only the reference point exists-the division point does not exist. Therefore, one
division point number on the minus side is set.
4 ) mdvno: Lowest minus position division number
This sets the lowest number among the offset numbers specified for the compensation axes.
5 ) pdvno: Highest plus position division number
This sets the highest number among the offset numbers specified for the compensation axes.
6 ) sc Compensation scale factor
The compensation data set as the compensation amount is multiplied by the compensation
scale factor and output as the compensation amount.
Normally, this is set as “l.”
7 ) spcdv: Division interval
This sets the intervals for compensation for each axis.

.,

““

-326-
 II,,

6. PARAMETER SETTINGS
6.3 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTINGS

(5) Setting the machine error compensation data

MC-ERR. CMP.]

# # # # # # # #
1-100 17 90 33 -60 49 0 65 0 81 24 97 0 113 0
2 -92 18 76 34 -38 50 0 66 0 82 22 98 0 114 0
3 –84 19 62 35 –26 51 0 67 0 83 20 99 0 115 0
4 -76 20 56 36 -10 52 0 68 0 84 20 100 0 116 0
5 -68 21 48 37 0 53 0 69 0 85 18 101 0 117 0
6 -54 22 34 38 0 54 0 ?0 o 86 14 102 0 118 0
7 –48 23 20 39 0 55 0 71 0 87 10 103 0 119 0
8 –34 24 10 40 0 56 0 72 0 88 4 104 0 120 0

9 -20 25 0 41 0 57 0 73 0 89 0 105 0 121 0

10 – 10 26 0 42 0 58 0 74 0 90 0 106 0 122 0
11 10 27 0 43 0 59 0 75 0 91 0 107 0 123 0
12 20 28 0 44 0 60 0 76 0 92 0 108 0 124 0
13 0 29 0 45 0 61 0 77 0 93 0 109 0 125 0
14 0 30 0 46 0 62 0 78 0 94 0 110 0 126 0
15 0 31 0 47 0 63 0 79 0 95 0 111 0 127 0
16 0 32 0 48 0 64 0 80 0 96 0 112 0 128 0

#( ) DATA ( )

Machine error compensation data screen

1 ) The machine error compensation data screen is used for setting the pitch error compensation
and relative position compensation amounts,
2 ) The compensation amount numbers run consecutively from 1 and so, starting from 1, they are
used for the pitch error and relative position compensation amounts.
* In the case of this example, the settings are as below.
X-axis pitch error compensation settings for #1 to #12
Y-axis pitch error compensation settings for #17 to #24
Z-axis pitch error compensation settings for #33 to #36
Y-Z axis relative position compensation settings for +431to #88
3 ) The measurement values at each axis position (offset numbers) are entered as the compensation
data.
e Compensation data of O is treated as a compensation amount of zero.
* The compensation data is twice the actual measurement (p mm). This is set by pulses and
so a 1 p compensation is provided for 2 pulses in a 0,5 p/pulse control system.

-327-
 .. .

7. REGULAR MAINTENANCE
7.1 REGULAR TME READER INSPECTIONS AND
MAINTENANCE

7. REGULAR MAINTENANCE
7.1 REGULAR TAPE READER INSPECTIONS AND
MAINTENANCE
Every day, perform the following maintenance and inspection procedures for the tape reader prior to
operation.
( 1 ) Inspection method
1 ) Cleaning
Malfunctioning may be caused when dust from the surroundings or tape particles adhere to the
readout surface. Use a brush with soft bristles to clean periodically the glass surface of the
light-emitting case and the tape travel surface.
If the dust and dirt are hard to remove, remove the head mounting screw holding the
light-emitting case and detach the case. This will expose the glass surface of the light-emitting
case and the tape travel surface, and it will make it easier to clean these areas.

I Mounting screw Front panel 1

I -

—::
\

l\
I
~-.
r~---

<II
‘
Glass surface Connector

To reassemble the parts, fit the connector mounted on the light-emitting case into the connector on the
front panel and connect, and secure the mounting screw. Any dust and dirt which cannot be removed by
the brush with soft bristles should be cleaned away with a soft cloth dipped in alcohol.
2 ), Lubrication
When the action of the tape clamps is stiff, lubricate the three slide areas shown below with a
small amount of machine oil. No other lubrication is required.

Lubrication
locations

I i

-328-
 7. REGULAR MAINTENANCE
7.2 CHECKING THE EXTERIOR

(2) Troublwhooting
Check out the points listed in Table 3.1 if reading errors occur or something else appears to have
gone wrong with the tape reader.

Trouble Cause Detection

No tape run Power is not ON. Check power supply.
Improper connector contact. Disconnect and re-connect connec-
tors, observe what happens and
clean connectors.
Something wrong with Improper connector contact. Disconnect and re-conneet connec-
tape run tors, observe what happens and
clean connectors.
Reading error Dust, dirt on tape and light- Remove dust, dirt and check again.
emitting/sensing surfaces.
Improper connector contact. Disconnect and re-connect connec-
tors, observe what happens and
clean connectors,
Tape punching error Check tape perforations.
Tape perforations do not conform Check tape puncher,
to standards.
No LED lighting Improper connector contact. Disconnect and re-connect LED
case, observe what happens and
clean light-emitting case connector.

7.2 CHEKXKNG TEE EXTERIOR

( 1 ) Has any machine oil (coolant or lubricating oil) been spattered, or has any of it leaked onto the servo
motor, detector or NC main unit?
(2) Has any damage been done to the cables of the moving parts or are the cables twisted?
(3) Are any of the filters clogged?
(4) Has the tape reader been cleaned?
( 5 ) Is operation being conducted with the NC main unit door open?
( 6 ) Is there a source of vibration in the vicinity?
( 7 ) Is the location exposed to high concentrations of dust?
( 8 ) Is there any source of high frequencies near the NC unit?

7.3 CHECKING INSIDE THE CABINET

(1 Any loose cable connectors?
(2 Any loose mounting screws?
(3 Any loose screws in the connected amplifiers?
(4 Is the cooling fan operating properly?
(5 Any damage done to the cables?
(6 Are the printed circuit boards plugged in properly?

-329-
8. TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 CHECKING OUT TROUBLE

8. TROUBLESHOOTING
When something appears to have gone wrong with operation, it is first necessa~ to pinpoint the exact
cause(s) so as to devise the appropriate remedy. Proceed with the checks listed below.

8.1 CHECKING OUT TROUBLE

Check when the trouble occurred, what was being done at the time and what kind of trouble resulted.
( 1 ) When did it occur?
Time when the trouble occurred
(2) What was being done at the time?
What was the NC operation mode?
o During automatic operation: Program contents, sequence number and program contents
when trouble occurred.
. During manual operation: Which manual operation mode?
What sequence of operation?
What operations before and after?
. Which page on setting and display unit?
. Did trouble occur during input/output operation?
. Status at machine side?
. Did trouble occur during tool change?
. Control axis hunting to blame?
(3) What kind of trouble has occurred?
● Which alarm appears on alarm diagnosis page of setting and display unit?
Display alarm diagnosis page and check alarm contents.
. Which drive amplifier status display has appeared?
Observe status display for drive amplifier and check alarm contents.
● Which machine sequence alarm has appeared?
. Is CRT screen OK?
(4) Frequency with which trouble occurs
● When did the trouble occur? How often has it occurred? (Did it omur while another machine
was operating?) If the trouble occurs very infrequently or if another machine is involved, a
supply voltage malfunction or noise may be to blame. Check whether the supply voltage is OK
(does it drop temporarily when another machine is operating?) and take measures to counter
noise.
. Specific mode?
. Did the trouble occur while an overhead crane was moving?
● With what frequency did it occur with the same workpiece?
. Did the same trouble occur with the same operation? Check for recurrence,
. Did the same trouble occur when the conditions were changed?
(Try changing the override, program contents and operating sequence.)

-330-
 ,,,
”,,

8. TROUBLESHOOTING
8.2 EXAMPLES OF TROUBLE

8.2 EXAMPLES OF TROUBLE

( 1 ) No NC power
. Is power being supplied to the NC main unit?
. Has the fuse blown in the power supply swtion?
(2) No movement even with start-up.
. Has the proper mode been selected?
Q With tape operation, has the tape been inserted properly?
e Have the start-up and operation conditions been complied with?
(Depending on the machine, the start-up operation may remain locked until the prescribed
conditions are complied with. Check by referring to the instruction manual issued by the
machine tool builder.)
@ Are the override and manual speed settings at O?
. Is the reset signal not available?
e Is the feed hold signal not available?
* Is the machine lock function ON?

‘,,,

-331-
9. BATTERY REPLACEMENT

9. 13ABRY REPLACEMEF4T
The data in this system is backed up by batteries.
The on-board batteries for the memory cards are mounted on MC442, MC471 and MC472, and the
system battery is installed in the battery box.
Highly reliable button batteries (storage batteries) are used, and since they are screwed down to the
boards, problems with defective contact do not arise.
Battery back-up period: At least 2 months
Battery service life 5 years (differs according to operating temperature)
In order to ensure the proper operation of the svstem, it is recommended that the batteries be reulaced
.
before their service life-of ~ yea~s has elapsed. -
(When the battery alarm appears, the machining program data may be lost.)
Storage batteries used: GB250H-3FB2; used for MC471, MC472 and battery box
GB150H-3FB2; used for MC442 (refer to note)

NO~ Starting with manual suffix code C, the battery power is supplied to the MC442 card via the
battery box.

-332-
 9. BATTERY REPLACEMENT

In order to yield a high reliability, these batteries have been made in accordance with special specifications
and, as such, they must be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric.
It takes about 150 hours to fully recharge a depleted battery. The batteries have been fully charged before
they are shippwl from Mitsubishi Electric.
How to replace the batteries
The memory and CPU cards are providwl with capacitors for memory back-up. Therefore, in order to
protect the memo~ contents, the batteries should be replaced in as short a period of time (within 30 min.)
as possible.

(Supplementary note) Battery power signal system

MC 111/161 MC 121/127 MC 442 MC 471/472

CPUYA CPt–J_B ME.M__B ME M. AX*

//j [G B25DH-3FB21

Battery box
tGB250H-3F13?l
Battery
[Gf3150~-3FB21

/ Under standard
. specifications, batteries
. R
aie not mounted on the
A ---- .
/ u’U-A artid CPU-B
–~ . . . . . ..~ ,ac, pane, cards and the battery
power is supplied from
the batte~ box.

( 1 ) Battery replacement for memory cards (MC442, MC471, MC472)

1 ) Switch off the NC system power.
2 ) Remove the memo~ card _from the unit.
3 ) Using a screwdriver, unscrew the two screws that mount the battery, replace the battery with
the fresh unit while taking care to align its polarities correctly, and tighten up the mounting
screws. (The battery will be damaged if the battery is replaced with its polarities reversed.)
4 ) Replace the memory card in the unit.
(2) Battery replacement for M320, M330, M330H and M335 systems (BATTERY BOX)
1 ) Switch off the NC system power.
2 ) Unscrew the two screws of the battery box that mount the battery and detach the front
cosmetic panel of the battery box.
3 ) Using a screwdriver, unscrew the two screws that mount the battery, replace the battery with
the fresh unit while taking care to align its polarities correctly and ensuring that the”+” pole
is positioned face-up, and then tighten up the mounting screws.
4 ) Mount the front cosmetic panel of the battery box using the two mounting screws.

NOTE GB250H-3FB2 is used as the system battery.

-333-
10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA I’PUT/OUTP UT FUNCTION

10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

CNC and APLC data can be collectively input, output and compared on the data 1/0 screens.
The data 1/0 function is used to protect customer data, investigate trouble and repair the MCI 11 card.
There are 3 types of data covered by this function, and the data is output in ISO/EIA format after
conversion from the hexadecimal format.
The function is valid only when the user PLC has stopped operating.
1) Table data: Data whose data range has been provided in advance
CNC parameters (system, common, axis, machine error)
APLC data (PLC timer, PLC counter, PLC constants, bit selection, ATC data, axis control)
Work offset data
Back-up data (TLC latch relays, PLC switches, program numbers)
2) File data: Data requiring file formatting prior to data input or output
Tool offset data
Common variabl=
Tool life management data
3) APLC program data: APLC program area, user functions, variable data accompanying screen
release
Ladder (ROM: ladder, message)
C language (ROM: screen release, user functions)
Variable data (user functions, variable data for screen release)

Machining Canned cycle

programs programs
CNC CRT screen Settings

-
.
(

U Displays
Parameter
tables
system,
common,axis,
machineerror,
R register
PLCconstants
Bit selection,
ATCdata,
Back-updata
PLCswitches,
Latchrelays,
Program
Workoffset Userback-up numbers
RRE

~%:

----- ————.—— ——---——— ---

RS-232-C device
Input

@@E
n .--— ———————————--—— ——.
I I
output

EQES:

-334-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

10.1.1 DATA FORMAT

The tape format is shown below (independent data).

E E E E
o
R
0
B
0
❑ o
B
NO L320050L64LOL32 o NIL
B
IO 00 l---

[
---

——
Feed Feed Header Data
/

Au’ Data
0,320050
------ ----
(Ix64
-------
----- 0,0
0,32
----- 0: Type of data to be output fig
0,10001
------ -- N: Sequence number (O, 1,2, etc.; L data is separated into groups of 4)
I L Data in question is output 4 bytes at a time (HEX)
I M: Data in question is output 1 byte at a time (HEX)
I

[ 2&J;: $:ti:h&xd%Yid:tloo) )

NOTE Title characters are not output even when “title character output” is made valid and output.
The format for continuous (ALL output) data is shown below.

E
............... 0 ..........
B

—— —— a..

Feed Header 1 Data 1 Feed Header Data 2

40 40
charac- charac-
~ln ters c1tem

E E E E
.......... 0 0 0 -“”-””---- 0
B B B R

—.
Feed Header n Data n Feed Feed

n 40
chiirac-
Iers
c1
40
cimrac-
ters
Parameter
settings

-335-
10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

Table data 1 (No.1OO-149)

No. Data contents Header ALL output

100 System common parameters 0100
101 Axis common parameters 0101
102 Axis independent parameters 0102
103 Machine error compensation information 0103
104 Machine error compensation amounts 0104
105 PLC constants 0105
106 PLC timer 0106
107 PLC counter 0107 ALL1
108 Bit selection parameters 0108
109 PLC axis parameters 0109
110 Work offset 0110
111 ATC data 0111
112 R register user back-up 0112
113 PLC latch relays 0113
114 PLC switches 0114
115 Program numbers 0115
116 Timer integration 0116
117 Counter integration 0117

Table data 2 (No.150-199)

No. Data contents Header ALL output

150 Key operation history 0150 —

File data (No.200-249)

No. Data contents Header ALL output

200 Tool offset (length shape) 0200
201 Tool offset (length wear) 0201
202 Tool offset (diameter shape) 0202
ALL2
203 Tool offset (diameter wear) 0203
204 Common variables 0204
205 Tool life 0205

APLC programs (No.250-299)

I No. Data contents Header ALL output

250 APLC ladder 0250
251 APLC C language 0251 ALL3
252 APLC variables 0252

-336-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

10.1.2 CNC DATA APLC OUTPUT

(.,1 ) Description of function . . .
When the user PLC is in the stop mode, the format of CNC and APLC data can be converted trom
hexadecimal to ISO/EIA on the data 1/0 and outt)ut
. screens. and the data can then be output to an
external I? S-232-Cdevice.
The table below shows the data covered by this function and the operating method.

Remarks
1ata no. Description
(approximate tape length, 3.5-inch floppy disk block number)
Same as parameter tape
.00 System common parameters 0.5 m
output function
101 Axis common parameters 7m
102Axis independent parameters 6-axis specifications: 11 m
103 Machine error compensation 13 m
information
104 Machine error compensation 9m
amounts
105 PLC constants
106 PLC timer
107 PLC counter
108 Bit selection parameters
109 PLC axis parameters 4-axis specifications: 3 m
Output for each axis
110 Work offset G-axis specifications 1m
included in specifications
111 ATC data All data output 9m
112 R register user back-up All data output 10 m
113 PLC latch relays 0.1 m
114 PLC switches 0.1 m
115 Program numbers 0.1 m
116 Timer integration 0.1 m
117 Counter integration 0.1 m
150 Key operation history All data output 1.5 m
Same as tool offset tape
200-203 Tool offset 100 sets: 2 m(A)
output function
Outuut for number of
sets’inch~ded in 100 sets: 5m
204 Common variables
specifications
(incl. comments)
205 Tool life All data output
250 APLC ladder All data output
All data output
251 APLC C language (accommodated by
mounted card)
750–1500 m
I I
All data output
252 APLC variables (accommodated by 370–740 m
mounted card)

-337-
10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

User PLC stop operation

This function _ca- be used only when the user PLC has stopped operating.
To stop the user PLC, use the emergency stop switch to establish the emergency stop status and then set
the CPU DIP switch 2 to the ON position.

Pressthe EMERGENCYSTOP
switchto eatabtishthe emergency
stop status.

Set the switch/

to ON.

Data ALL output operation

Setting area Operation Output data (No.)

# (99) DATA ( ALL1) M3 Format 100 System common parameters
data 101 Axis common parameters
102 Axis independent parameters
103 Machine error compensation information
104 Machine error compensation amounts
105 PLC constants
106 PLC timer
107 PLC counter
108 Bit selection parameters
109 PLC axis parameters
110 Work offset
111 ATC data
112 R register user back-up
113 PLC latch relays
114 PLC switches
115 Program numbers
116 Timer integration
117 Counter integration
(99) DATA ( ALL2) File data 200—3 Tool offset
204 Common variables
205 Tool life
(99) DATA ( ALL3) APLC 251 APLC ladder
programs 252 APLC C language
253 APLC variables

-338-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

Discrete data output operation

Setting area Op eration Output data (No.)

# (99) DATA ( ) Discrete data 100–117, 150
200–205 Assigned data
250–252

NOTE 1: When a data number not covered by the specifications has been assigned, the “EM NO SPEC”
error message appears and no data is output.
When all the data is output, the data not covered by the specifications is not output.
NOTE 2 Data protection key 3
When data protection key 3 is valid, the screen in some versions (M320M, M330M, M330HM,
version C) is set to the protection status, thereby disabling input and output operations.
The ON/OFF status of the data protection keys is checked on the I/F diagnosis screen by monitoring
Y238.

~LC-I/F]
Call the I/F diagnosis screen ant < SET DATA s
monitor device Y238.
76543210 IIEX
* Y023B 00000001 01
DEVICE DATA MODE
( Y238) ( )() ]11KEY 1
KEY2
lNPU KEY3
o
0: Data protectionvalid
1: Data rotectioninvalid
(Y238-!’23A are backcontacts.) I

The protection status is released by setting the data protection keys to invalid. However, if for some reason
it is not possible to change the key setting, the status is released by forcibly defining the PLC control signal
on the I/F diagnosis screen.
How to release the data protect key 3 setting

~LC-I/F]
Call the I/F diagnosis screen and < SET DATA> Y023A=OO01
forcibly define device Y23A.
76543210 HEX
Y0233 00000101 05

E“

-339-
 ,,,

10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(2) Data output operation

Output device
connection check
ALL1
ALL2
Output screen selection /’ “ ALL3
,/” Data No.
// /“
/ / D

# (99) DATA ( ~ )“
Setting and INPUT

E O 1 smNI= ERROR
No E O 3 No. Nm FOUND
E O 6 NO SPEC
E O 6 PLC RUN
Yes

~~
Data output start
* / IE[ -----l%
1 Parameter setting feed + EOR

#--l
2 40-character feed + EOB
UL
~ ~

Data output execution mm

1 Header data + EOB

2 Data body
3 40-character feed
mm
z Data body Feed
r~l

*
m
I 1 EOR + parameter setting feed

DATA OUT COMPL17rE

-340-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(3) Example of data output operation

~ ~ATA OUTPUT]
# 1 MAIN PROGRAM ABC # ~~ PORT NO. 1
# 2 TOOL DATA CFF #12 DEVICE NO. 1
Call the data output screen. # 3 PARAMEI=R OFF
< DEVICE> PTP

o
< BAUD RATE> 4800
OATA
w’ < ISO/EIA > 1s0
OUT < TITLE FEED> o
< OIJTPUT DATA >

c)MENU

!EE3 # ( t!E) DATA ( )

1 ) The data output screen is displayed.

Data ALL output
Example ALL1 — M3 Format data
(Parameter, R register, work offset, back-up data)

< OIJT1’UT DATA >

Setuu into the # setting N3L320050L64LOL 32:
area and [~u~l~l into th~
data setting area.
DATA OUT EXECUTION
# (99) DATA ( ALL1)
#(99 )DAI’A( 1 Om)

Press the ~NPUT] key,

I
+
< OUTPUT DATA>
1 ) Outuut now commences, and %
the’ data output number,
output data contents and
“DATA OUT EXECUTION” DATA OUT COMPLETE
message appear.
# ( !i?4) DATA ( )
2) The data output operation is
terminated when the tape end I
code 5% (EOR) is output and
the DATA OUT COMPLETE
message appears.

-341-
 ,,J.
~ ,, “

10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

Individual data output

Set 99 into the # setting

area and the data number
(see page 338) to be output
into the data setting area.
@ample
common variable)
< OIJTPuT DATA >
204)
N5L32OOOOL1OOOO1
LFOOOOBL78
:
# (99) DATA (

Press the ~NPUT] key. DATA OUT EXECUTION

#(99 )D’4’rA( 20@)

1) Output now commences, and

the” data
output
output number,
data contents and < OUTPUT DATA>
1
“DATA OUT EXECUTION” %
message appear.
2) The data output operation is
terminated when the tape end DATA OUT COMPLETE
code YO (EOR) is output and # ( 9) DATA ( )
the DATA OUT COMPLETE
message appears.

NOTE L All the data protect key settings are ignored.

NOTE Z Data not included by the specifications is not output.

.342 -
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

10.1.3 CNC DATA APLC DATA INPUT, COMPARE

( 1 ) Description of function
When the APLC is in the stop mode, it is possible to input and compare the data which has been
output by (1) on the input/output input screen.
The data covered by this function is the same as the output data (see table on page 336).
This function is valid only when the user PLC has stopped operating.

NOTE L When an attempt has been made to input and compare data exceeding the actual memory size,
the data equivalent to the memory size is first read, then “E1O MEMORY OVER” error
message appears, and operation is terminated.
NOTE 2 All the data protect key settings are ignored.
However, in some versions (M320M, M330M, M330HM: version C), the screen may be set to
the data protect status due to the protect key 3 setting. (See page 339)
JW3TE3 When stopping the APLC, first set it to the emergeney stop mode, and then set the CPU DIP
switch 2 to the ON position. (See page 338)

‘1,

,,,,

-343-
 ,:, .

10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

10.1 DATA INFUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(2) Example of data input operation

I
Stop user PLC. I

E O 2 PLC RUN
No m E O 6 NO SPEC
E 86 INp~ DATAERR

I I

Data input start DATAIN EXECUTION

[ I I

E 1 0 MEMORY OVER

No E 1 7 p~m ERROR
E 1 8 PARITY ERROR
E 86 INPUT DATA ERR

Data entry

[0

I DATA IN COMPLETE I

-344-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT./OVTPUT FUNCTION

(3) fiample of data input operation

1
Check that the user PLC has stopped. !
(See page 334)

~ATA INPUT]
~
# 1 MAIN PROOR%.h4 ABC # ~I PORT 1
# 2 TOOL DATA OFF #12 DEVICE 1
Call the data output screen. # 3 PARAMETER OFF
< DEVICE> PTP

orip.
OUT
#lo~o&

2 ! COMP
cBAUD RATE> 4800

< INPUT>
!n MENU
< COMP. DATA >

ID INPUT \

1 ) The data input screen is # ( SS) DATA ( )

displayed.
2 ) When the screen is selected, the
input mode is made valid.

< INPUT>
I I I
Set fl~into
area.
the # setting
I I < COMP. DATA >

$ (99) DATA ( ALL1) #(9~1 DAT-4 ( )

I \ d

< INPUT>
F42LOLOL1
0001 L1 0000 ;
Press the ~NPUT] key.
I < COMP. DATA >

1) Input now commences, and the DATA IN IXWXJTION

input data eontents and
“DATA IN EXECUTION”
#(9@) DATA ( 101)
message appear.
The data number being input
appears in the data setting
area.
2) The data input operation is < INPUT>
terminated when the tape end %
code YO(EOR) is read and then < COMP, DATA >
writing proceeds into the
parameter EE ROM. During
this time (when the EE ROM DATA IN COMPLETE
WRITING message appears), # ( ❑) DATA ( )
do not switch off the power.
When the EE ROM writing is
completed, the DATA IN
COMPLETE message ap-
pears.

-345-
10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(4) Ihmple of data compare operation

Connect the input device. I

Select the data input screen.

,

E O 2 F’LCRUN
No
* E O 6 NO SPEC
E 8 6 INPUTDATAERR
I

COMPARE EXECUTION
~

Data read
[

E 1 0 MEMORY OVER
No E 1 7 PARITY ERROR
*
E ] 8 PARITY ERROR

E 35 COMPARE ERROR
E 86 INPUT DATA ERR
No

Yes
I COMPARE COMPLETE

-346-
 10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(5) Example of data ampare operation

I Check that the user PLC

hasstopped.(Seepage334) I
Conneet the input device. I ~ATA mwT]
# 1 Mm PRWRAM ABC #~1 PORT 1
Call the data input semen # 2 TOOLDATA OFF #12 DEWCE 1
and set to the compare # 3 PARAMEIER OFF
mode. < DEVICE> PTP
< BAUD RATE> 4800
# (IO) DATA ( 2)

o
INPUT

< COMP. DATA >

1 ) When the screen is selected, the # ( ■ ) DATA ( )

compare mode is released and
the input mode is made valid,
and so the mode must be reset.

< INPUT>

Set ~~ into the # setting < COMP. DATA >

;(:) DATA ( )

#(9 El) DATA ( )

I

<
I INPUT>
N2L1OOO1
LFOOOOLOLO:

1) Compare now commencm,

and both the data being
I< CCIMP. DATA >
N2L10001LFOOOOLOLO
;
COMPARE EXECUTION
compared and “COMPARE
#(9 Eo)DATA ( 101)
EXECUTION” message ap-
pear.
The data number appears in
the data setting area.
2) Data compare proceeds norm-
ally until its conclusion and < INPUT>
when the tape end code ?ZO %
(EOR) is read, the COMPARE < COMP. DATA >
COMPLETE message ap- %
pears. COMPARE COMPLETE
3) When a compare error arises,
the “E35 COMPARE ER- # ( H) DATA ( )
ROR” message appears and
the compare operation stops.

-347-
10. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
10.1 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

10.1.4 LIST OF ERROR MESSAGES

Error message Description

E03 NO. NOT FOUND An illegal number has been set in the # setting area or
data settirw area.
E06 NO SPEC h attempt was made to input or output data not
included in the specifications.
E1O MEMORY OVER An attempt was made to input data exceeding the memory
size as provided by the specifications.
E24 PLC RUN An attempt was made to input data or compare data with
the PLC which is not in the stop mode.
E35 COMPARE ERROR A discrepancy has been detected between the memory
contents and data in the input device.
E86 INPUT DATA ERR Illegal data is included among the data being input,
A attempt was made to input or compare data in the
wrong area.
(ROM area assignment input)
Other error messages relating to the 1/0 functions are displayed, and reference should be made to the CRT
operation messag; alarms i; the appendix for further dita;ls.

.. .

-348-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
v/335.M- v)

APPENDIX 1. MACHHNE+ PARAMETERS

w330m/335M/330=-V/335M-~
The user parameter page normally appears when the parameter scram is selected, and the following menus
are displayed when the machine parameter display mode is set.

/t !.... ..-................................I---
Machine parameter
menu displays
(Na9 A13)
SPINDLE:PLC-DATAIPLGTMR ~PLC-CNTR”~
BITSELC: PLC-AX. ~ ~MEN~-j

(Na 1-6 ) ~BASE I .&m \ZP-RTNI SERVO \MC-ERR !MACRO! I I MENU

anmananmama

key

13asic
specification
parameters
IIAxis l-axis 6 I
Axis
specification
pammetem
Axis 1- axis 6

Axis spetilmtion
parameters
Axis 1- axis 6
II
Zem point
return
parameters
Axis 1- asis 6
un
I
servo
parameters
Axis 1- axis 6

Sewo parameters
Axis 1- aXiS6 I
Machine error
compensation

m
-J
Macro file

&

4--------- ------- ----- ------ ------ ---_-- ------------ ,------ ------- .

Spindle
parameters
I PLC

I
constants
I I PI-C timer

II EYElr ●

I_-&il

* denotes V series only

-350-
 !~,,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M - k’)
1.1 MACHINE PARAMETER SELECTION

1.1 MACHINE PARAMETER SELECTION

1 I ------ ------- ------------ ------ -1

I
f 3 I
~LC-I/F] I

II
I
(ICQI) User parameter screen I
OP I
MODE ( U)
Parameter _
PLC-SW I CONTROL I AXIS I SETUP
screen

-----.-----
r -----------
------
---- I
1
I

II
I
~LC-I/F] I

DEVICE (lCQ1)
Machine parameter screen I
. Ow I
MODE ( M)
BASE I AXIS I ZP-RTN I SERVO I

Normally the user parameter screen appears in the form of the parameter screen, and so the following step
must be taken to display the machine parameter screen.

~’”1
~LC-I/F] DMGN 5
<SETDATA> X~08=Oool yoo15=0000
WIOA=OOOIO 005=0064
I I
I 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX
I XOOQO 0000000000 DOO05 0000000000
i X0008 0000010 i 05 01100100 64
I XOO1O0000000000 DO(M6 1000000181
I XO018 0101000050 00000100 04
I
I x0020 10100011 /8 00007 OtOOOO 10 42
I X0028 100000 ]0 82 1000010084
I X0030 0000000000 00008 000000 ]0 02
I
I X0038 00001100 OC 11000000co
Set 1001 into DEVICE ( ). X0040 0000000000 DOO09 00000000 00
Leave DATA ( ) blank. XO048 0000000000 00000000 m
Set M into MODE ( ). xoo~” 0000000000 DOO1O 0000000000
X()()58 0000000000 0000000000
XO060 0000000000 DOO11 00000000 00
XO066 0000000000 00000000 00
X0070 0000000000 DO012 0000000000
X0078 0000000000
DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE
[ 1001) ( )( W i 1( 1( 1

I
I I ,’

The machine parameter page is seleeted

Press the ~NPUT] key. OR when the parameter screen is selected.

-351-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.1 MACHINE PARAMETER SELECTTON

To switch to the user parameter display, switch the power off and then back on again or proceed as
follows.

Set 1001 into DEVICE ( ).

Set U into MODE ( ).

D The user parameter page appears when the

I Press the ~NPUT] key. parameter screen is seleeted.

‘,
,,

4!

-352-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.2 BASIC’ SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

The basic specification parameter page appears when the ~ASE] menu key is pressed.

~ASE SPEC. PARAM] M_ PARAM 1. 1/2

# (1} (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1 axnam XY Zuvw
2
3 cunit 1: 10 10 10 10 10
4 sp-ax o 0000
5 iout 00 0000
6 rot 00 0000
7 Ccw 0000
8 svof :; 0001

9
10 axoff 00 0000
11 abson 000
12 intabs : ; iooo
13
14
15
16

After setting any parameter marked (PR) in the tables, switch off the NC system power. The paramett
in question will be valid when the power is switched back on again.

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 zfname Defines correspondence between axis X, Y, Z U, V, W, A, B,
mmber and name. C axis addresses
Note): M, S and T can also be set
but since they are treated as
M, S and T commands, assign
onlv the characters in the
Col;mn on the right.
2
3 cunit Command Defines for each axis the least com-
unit mand increment for programming. 1 O.lw
10 l/.L
100 low
1000 loop
10000 I lmm I

4 Sp-ax Spindle Sets “l” when the spindle is the NC O: Servo axis serving as
interpola- control axis. NC control axis
tion 1: Spindle serving as NC
control axis
iout Inch Defines output units in millimeter or O: mm
:R) output inch units. “1” is set when the unit is 1: inch
the inch for the detector system at the
machine side (ball screw and detec-
tor).
rot Rotary Defines whether axis is linear or O: Linear axis
I&) axis rotarv. 1: Rotary axis

-353-
 ,,, *,7,;.”, ,,,..; ;, /,,3.,.,,.. ,, . , ,,,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

Motor CCW Defines direction of motor o: Cw
JR) “ rotation with forward direction 1: Ccw
command.
Svof Error correction Defines whether error is to be O: Error is not corrected
@:) corrected or not during servo 1: Error is corrected
OFF.
9

10 axoff Axis release Defines axis for which axis O: Axis release invalid
release control is to be made 1: Axis release valid
valid.
11 abson Absolute position With Defines whether O: Soft limit is invalid
detection relative the soft limit is to until completion of
position be made valid or reference point return
detection not after the 1: Soft limit is valid
system power is switched even with completion
on until the of reference point
completion of the return
reference point
return.
With Defines whether O: Absolute position
absolute absolute position detector invalid
position detection is to be 1: Absolute position
detection executed or not detector valid
system with absolute
position detection
system.
12 intabs Manual ABS Defines whether absolute value O: No absolute values
updating data is to be updated or not updated
during manual, handle feed or 1: Absolute values upd-
automatic handle interrupt. ated

,,

.’. ..- :..

. ,. .
., ,

-354-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM..
V/335M- V’
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

+
@3ASESPEC. PARAM] M_ PARAM 1. 2/2
# # # # 1
1 Mfig 3 17 M2 name B 33 Mmac 1 49 rstirrl o
2 Mbin 0 18 extdcc 300 34 Smac O 50 Iiabs o
3 Sfig 19 tapovr 100 35 Tmac 1 51 H-acdc o
4 Shin -~ 20 I ang O 36 M2 nsac o 52 G30SL o
5 Tfig 21 LK-TMR 37 M-id O 53 M2fom O o
6 Thin j 22 tap-tl 600 38 t i x-P O 54 M2fom L o
7 M2 fig 1 23 skip 1.50 39 edlk-c O 55 e2rom OoooQoOO
8 M2 bin fJ 24 dwl skp O 40 Pirm O 56 tast o

25 skipl 1 41 57 S-TRG o
1? 26 lf 100 42 58 INT-2 o
11 27 2 2 43 G96-ax O 59 subs-M o
12 28 ;f 10~ LIl G96-GO O 60 M96-M o
13 29 61 M97-M o
14 30 3f 1(KJ 46 62 inpos o
!5 31 47 63 Gmac-P
16 32 48 64 RCK 0,:

# (ti DATA( )

~ I MENU

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 Mfig M number I 1–4 I
2 Mbin M binary
Numbe~ Sets number which can be
assigned in same block.
Binasy:

r
6 I Thin I T binary
7 M2fig 2nd
miscellane-
ous
command
number (Note) O (BCD) cannot be used for
8 M2bin 2nd Shin (S binary).
miscellane-
ous code
binary m
17 M2name 2nd Sets address which is used as second A, B, C
miscellane- miscellaneous function. A, B or C
ous code code, which is not used for the
movement control axis, is selected.
18 extdcc External Upper limit of feed rate when external 1—60000 (mm/min)
decelera- deceleration speed signal is valid.
tion speed

-355-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

_#. I Item I Details

— I SettinQ
—-. .... ran~e
u- (unit)
\----- /
19 tapovr Tap Sets override value for feed rate of tap 1–999 (%)
return return cycle during synchronous tap cycle.
override (Fixed at 100% for under 100)
20 Iang Display Defines whether data of CRT setting and O: Japanese
language display unit is to be displayed in Japanese 1: English
or English.
21 LK-TMR Link Sets delay time for the control code which 21–255 (1/10 SW)
control is sent from the NC system with computer
code link coupling.
timer
22 tap-tl Tap time Sets acceleration/deceleration time constant 1–1500 (ins)
constant applying for synchronous tap cycle.
(Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern)
(Standard value 500)

23 skip G31 skip Sets feed rate when F command is not 1–60000 (mm/min)
rate contained in program once G31 command
has been issued.
24 dwlskp G04 skip When the G04 command is executed with Skip conditions
condi- the skip signal set by this parameter already (o–7)
tions supplied, the G04 command is skipped and
operation moves to the next block. Set- PLCinterface
25 skip 1 If the skip signal set by this parameter is ting inputsignals
G31.1
skip input while a G31.1—G31.3 command is 3 2 1
condition being executed, the command will be skip- 0 x x x
26 If Skip rate ped and operation moves to the next block. ,1 x x o
The skip speed sets the feed rate applying if 2 x o x
27 2 G31.2 there is no F command in the program 3 x o 0
skip when a G31.1—G31.3 command is issued. 4 0 x x
condition
5 0 x o
28 2f Skip rate
6 0 0 x
29 3 G31.3 7 0 0 0
skip
condition Skip speed: 1–60000
30 3f Skip rate (mm/min)

-356-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

31
32
33 Mmac M call Sets whether macro call based on M O: Invalid
PR) macro command is to be executed or not 1: Valid
when user macro specifications are
valid.
34 Smac S call Sets whether macro call based on S O: Invalid
~R) macro command is to be executed or not 1: Valid
when user macro specifications are
valid.
35 Tmac T call Sets whether macro call based on T O: Invalid
~R) macro command is to be executed or not 1: Valid
when user macro specifications are
valid.
36 M2mac 2nd Sets whether macro call based on 2nd O: Invalid
~R) miscellane- miscellaneous command is to be 1: Valid
ous code executed or not when user macro
call macro specifications are valid.
M_ inch Constant Defines unit of machine parameter O: mm
~R) inch input data and data which is input from 1: inch
PLC.
38 fix_ P Canned Sets “l” when a canned cycle O: Invalid
cycle program is input/output or edited. 1: Valid
editing Data 1/0 page, editing page and
program file displays are usable with
canned cycle programs only. Return
setting to “O” for input/output or
editing of user machining programs.
39 edlk. C Edit lock This is set when edit lock C is to be O Invalid
c made valid. This will prohibit editing 1: Valid
of machining programs with label
numbers 9000 to 9999.
Pine Machine Designates incremental or absolute O: Absolute amount
~R) error amount system for machine error system
compensa- compensation data setting. 1: Incremental amount
tion system
incremental
amount
system
43 G96_ ax Constant Selects which axis is to serve as the O: P command invalid
peripheral constant peripheral speed control axis. (Axis 1 assigned)
speed When an axis has been assigned to 1: Axis 1
control constant peripheral speed control in
axis the program, that axis will serve as
the constant peripheral speed control 6: &is 6
axis.
44 G96. GO Constant Selects whether to calculate peripheral O: Calculate at all timw
peripheral speed at all times for constant 1: Calculate at end point
speed peripheral speed control of rapid
control for traverse command or peripheral speed
rapid at block end point.
traverse
command

-357-
 ( :,,,?,
,t .p, ,,
..........
.....-,
.,..,,,,,,:.,,,.,,,,.
,,.

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

rstint Reset Defines whether the medals are O: No reset initialization
~R) initializa- to be initialized or not with the 1: Reset initialization
tion RESET button.
I-abs Manual Defines whether the updating O: By manual ABS switch
#R) ABs and non-updating of the 1: By parameter
parameter absolute value data during
manual, handle and automatic
handle interrupt should be
conducted by the manual ABS
switch or by p arameter.
H-acdc Handle Defines whether the time const- 0: Handle feed time constant
(1) time ant during handle feed should be GO1
constant O made the GO1 time constant or 1: Handle feed time constant
time constant O. 0
G30SL G30 soft Defines whether the soft limit O: Soft limit valid with G30
~R) limit applying with G30 reference 1: Soft limit invalid with
invalid point return should be made G30
valid or not.
M2fom0 M2 format When address O is used for the
~R) program program number in the program M2fom0 1 0 0
number O command based on the M2/MO
M2fomL o 1 0
format
Formatof M2 M2 M300
program for- for- stand-
M2fomL M2 format When address L is used for the used mat mat ard
~R) program program number in the program Program
number L command based on the M2/MO number o L o
format address

55 e2rom E2 ROM For MELDAS system mainten- 0: RAM ~ E2 ROM data

data ante transfer able
transfer 1: RAM ~ E2 ROM data
disable transfer disable
56 test Simulation For NC system discrete test O: Normal operation
test 1: Test operation
Status trig- Sets whether the user macro O: Edge triggering type
;R) ger system interrupt signal (UIT) should be 1: Status triggering type
valid valid with the OFF/ON rise
signal (edge triggering) or with
the ON status (status triggering).

-358-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (’M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M -V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

kterrupt When an interrupt signal (UIT) O: Interrupt system type 1
;:) system type signal has been input, this design- 1: Interrupt system type 2
2 valid ates whether the interrupt
program should be executed im-
mediately (type 1) without
waiting for the completion of the
block exe.mtion or executed (type
2) after waiting for the compb
tion of the block mecution.
subs_ M Substitute Sets whether the user macro O: Substitute M code
;;) M code interrupt based on the substitute invalid
valid M code should be valid or 1: Substitute M code valid
invalid.
(No setting is required with the
M2/MO format standard.)
64) M96. M M96 User interrupt can be applied by 3–97
substitute another M code when the M96 (but not 30)
M code code is already being used for a
different application.
(No setting is required with the
M2/MO format standard.)
61 M97. M M97 User interrupt can be applied by 3–97
substitute another M code when the M97 (but not 30)
M code code is already being used for a
different application.
(No setting is required with the
M2/MO format standard.)
inpos In-position Defines whether command O: Command deceleration
~R) check valid deceleration check or in-position check method
check will apply for deceleration 1: In-position check
check. If in-position check is method
selected, it checks by in-position
width of servo parameter.
63 Gmac_ P G code Selects whether with macro call O Priority to system G
parameter based on G command the G code code
priority used by system or G code based 1: Priority to G code
on G code parameter is to be parameter
given priority.
64 RCK kc radius Enables arc radius error -60.0 to + 20.0 (%)
compensa- compensation amount to be
tion increased or reduced across
coefficient -60.090 to + 20.05?0range.

-359-
 ,,,7,.,
.,
. . ,.., ,.:..
>.

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

~ASE SPEC. PARAM] M_ PARAM 1. 3/3

#
1 stat io 1 17 C-rein 0.00533 GlbF 600049
2 sizt.i 1618 C-axis 334 GlbtL 20050
3 size-o 1619 C-feed 500035 Gobdcc 051
4 length 020 c-t ype 1 36 52
5 b-rate 1 21 37 53
6 s-bit 1 22 38 54
7 parity 1 23 39 55
8 even 1 24 40 56

9 Tout-i 5025 chcomp 841 real-f 057

10 Tout-o 5026 chwid 1542 mlk-m 058
11 27 chclsp 1500043
12 chaxno 344 %
13 dispax 4 ;: 45 61
14 synerr 1.00030 46 62
15 31 47 63
16 32 48 64

#( )DATA( )

NOTE This screen is available with the V series only.

..
,,,, ,.

-360-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 statio Sets station address number (NC must be 1–7
sub-station “n”).
2 size_ i Sets data size when transferring data from O–32
PC (main station) to NC (sub-station). Sett- (1 byte or 8 points)
ing is made in l-byte (8-point) units with
maximum of 32 (256 points).
3 size– o Sets data size when transferring data from O–32
NC (sub station) to PC (main station). Sett- (1 byte or 8 points)
ing is made in l-byte (8-point) units with
maximum of 32 (256 points).
4 length Sets data bit length per character. O: 7 bits
1:7 bits
2:7 bits
~1 Ihl~b21b31*”**”*~”* ~br 38 bits
Start bit Data bits Parity bit
Stop bit

5 b- rate Sets rate at which data is transferred. O: 38400 bps

1:19200 4:2400
29600 5:1200
3:4800 6: 6Q0
6 s_ bit Sets stop bit length O: 1 bit
1:1 bit
22 bits
32 bits
7 parity Parameter used when parity bit is employwl O: No parity bit
in addition to data bits. 1: Parity bit
8 even Parameter used to select odd or even parity O: Odd parity
when above parity bit is used. When parity 1: Even parity
bit is not used, this parameter is ignored I

-361-
 .:.’:,.,,,,
,,:;..

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

v/335iki- v)
1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

9 Tout_ i Sets in #9 the time (time-out time) from o–999
termination of connection check sequence (0.1 See)
data output until termination of initial Note Time-out is not set
ordinary sequence data input at NC side with a setting of O
(sub-station). and so it is not
10 Tout i Sets in #10 the time (time-out time) from possible to detect
termination of ordinary sequence data cessation of com-
output until termination of next ordinary munication.
sequence data input at NC side (sub
station).
If the data transfer from the PC (main
station) should be suspended or the
assigned timeout time excedcd, emergency
stop (QO1 emergency) follows and the
system waits for the preparation sequence.
The time-out time must be changed accord-
ing to the transfer rate, data size and
number of sub-stations connected to the
main station.
13 dispax Sets the number of axes displayed on O– 6
screen.
If zero or a value exceeding number of
control axes is set, number of control axes
is displayed.
14 synerr Maximum sync error allowed with sync er- 0–99999.999 (mm)
ror check
When zero is set, sync check is made
invalid.
17 C_ min Sets minimum angle of rotation for C-axis 0.000–90.000 (“)
rotational movement at block joins during
C-axis normal line control.
18 C_ axis Sets number of axis which exercises C-axis 3–6
normal line control. (Normal line control
plane is plane of axes 1 and 2.)
19 c_ fed Sets movement rate for C-axis rotational o– 120000
movement at block joins during C-axis (1/10000”/min)
normal line control.
20 C_ type O setting: Grinding Oorl
1 setting Spring tool machining
25 chcomp During chopping, sets coefficient applying l–lo
to compensation for distance not traveled (Standard valud 8)
due to servo delay.

-362-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
v/335M- v)
L2 BASIC SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

26 chwid Sets allowable difference between assigned 0–10000 (pm)
stroke and actual stroke when distance not
traveled due to servo delay has been
compensated for during chopping.
27 chclsp Sets chopping axis clamp speed during 0–60000
chopping. (mm/m in)
28 chaxno Sets number of the chopping control axis. 1–6
33 GlbF Sets cutting feed rate during acceleration or 1–999999
deceleration prior to interpolation. (mm/min)
34 GlbtL Sets linear control time constant with cutt- 1—5000
ing feed acceleration during acceleration or (ins)
deceleration prior to interpolation.
35 GObdcc O Sets GO acceleration/deceleration to ac- Oorl
celeratiorddeceleration prior to interpola-
tion during high-precision mode only.
1: Sets GO acceleration/dmeleration to ac-
celeratiorddeceleration prior to interpola-
tion regardless of whether operation is in
high-precision mode.
41 reaL f O: Displays assigned sped. Oorl
1: Displays actual movement speed of
machine.
42 mlk. eo O:When machine lock is set ON during Oorl
block execution, this provides block stop
and makes machine lock valid from next
block.
1: When machine lock is set ON during
block execution, this makes machine lock
valid immediately.

,,

-363-
 ...,,,,
.!..,,,,
.,. ,.,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (it4330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

The axis specification parameter screen appears when the [AXES] menu key is pressed.

[AxisSPEC. PARAM] M_ PARAM 2. 1/2 ‘

(x) (Y) (z) (u) (’4 w

rapid 15000
c I amp 40W
Sm$st 621
Got L 200
Gotl 200
Go;; 60
30
Gltl 30

Glt2

11
O Ttm
GO back
II
10
12 G1 back
13 oT- -12345.67:
14 0 T+ 10.000
15 tlml 1234.567
16

# (@MIS ( ) DATA( )

BASE ~~~” \ ZP-RTN I SERVO\ MC-ERti I MACRO I I MENU

[&as SPEC. PARAM] M_ PARAM 2. 2/2

# {x) (Y) (z) (u) (w (w)

17
18
19 tap-g 10.00
20 abslmt 0.000
21 fwd-g 70
22
23
24

29
30

L BASE _ ZP-RTNI SERVO [ MC-ERR [ MACROI I I MENI.

-364-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

Axis specification parameters

After ,setting any parameter marked (PR) in the tables, switch off the NC system power. The parameter
in question will be valid when the power is switched back on again.

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1 rapid Rapid Sets rapid traverse rate for each axis. Remember 1–60UO0
traverse rate that maximum setting differs according to (mm/min)
machine system.
2 clamp Cutting feed Defines maximum cutting feed rate for each axis. 1–60000
clamp speed (mm/min)
smgst Acceleration/ Assigns modes for accelerationldeceleration
Pi) deceleration control; HEX input
mode
FE DC BA 98765 43210
OT OT OT1 C3 C2 c1 LC R3 R2 RI LR

Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type

LR:Linear acceleration, linear deceleration
RI:Prima~ delay
R2:Secondary delay
R3:Exponential acceleration, linear decelera-
tion
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration type
LC: Linear acceleration, linear deceleration
Cl: Primary delay
C2: Secondary delay
C3: Exponential acceleration, linear decelera-
tion
Acceleration/deceleration pattern combinations

Primmy deL3y
Rl=l(cl=l)
Linem-linmr %qmrdmy delay
Asdgned LR=I(LC=I) R2= 1(C2=1)
speed step Expcmendd funaion-linew
Lli=O(LC=O
) R3= I (C3=1)
step
R1-.R3= o
‘ ‘E (C1-C3= o )
(Values in parentheses are for cutting feed)

Both linear acceleration and deceleration for

rapid traverse and cutting feed are not possible.
R1 > R2 > R3 when multiple number of bits
among R1—R3 is set as “1.”
Stroke end stop type
Type 0T2 0T3
Linear deceleration o 0
Position loop step stop 1 0
Speed loop step stop o 1
Position loop step stop 1 1

-365-
 .>.
. ,.,,: ,;,...,,,.,.,
. .. .

APPENDIX 1. MA CHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
Smgst Acceleration/
P%) deceleration Deceleration with GOtl
mode OT1 ;
Deceleration with 2 x GOtl

Stroke end signal

““.-%
(O T1=l)
4 GOtL GO time Sets time constant for linear control with 1–5000 (ins)
constant rapid traverse acceleratiorddeceleration. Valid
(linear) when linear acceleration/linear deceleration
rapid traverse (LR) has been selected by ac-
celeration/deceleration mode (#3 smgst)
speed

Time
GOtL

5 GOtl GO time Sets primary delay time constant for rapid 1–5000 (ins)
constant traverse acceleration/deceleration. Valid when
@rimary primary delay rapid traverse @l), secondary
delay) delay rapid traverse (R2) or exponential ac-
celeration/linear deceleration rapid traverse
(R3) has been selmted by acceleration/
deceleration mode (#3 smgst).
< Prima~ delay rapid traverse>
speed
1

< Exponential acceleration/linear

deceleration rapid traverse >
speed

-366-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

# Item Details Setting range

(unit)
6 GOt2 GO time Sets secondary delay time constant for rapid 1–5000 (ins)
constant traverse acceleration/deceleration.
(secondary Valid when secondary delay rapid traverse (R2)
delay) has been selected by acceleration/deceleration
mode (#3 smgst).
Secondary delay is performed by GOtl and GOt2.
(Program so that GOt2 < 0.3x GOtl.)

speed

Time
D

7 GltL G1 time Sets time constant for linear control with cutting 1–5000 (ins)
constant feed acceleration/deceleration. Valid when linear
(linear) acceleration/linear dweleration cutting feed (LC)
has been selected by acceleration/deceleration
mode (#3 smgst).

speed

Time
m
IG 1 tL GltL
F 1’ -!

8 Gltl G1 time Sets primary delay time constant for cutting feed 1–5000 (ins)
constant acceleration/deceleration. Valid when primary
(’primary delay cutting feed (Cl), secondary delay cutting
delay) feed (C2) or exponential acceleration/linear
deceleration cutting feed (C3) has been selected
by acceleration/deceleration mode (#3 smgst).
< Primary delay cutting feed>

speed
1I

lGlt Glt
1.. -1

-367-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
< Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration 1–5000 (ins)
(msnt.) cutting feed >

speed

Time

9 Glt2 G1 time Sets scconda~ delay time constant for cutting 1–5000 (ins)
constant feed acceleration/deceleration. Valid when
(seconda~ secondary delay cutting feed (C2) has been
delay) selected by acceleration/deceleration mode (#3
smgst).
Secondary delay is performed by Gltl and Glt2.
(Program so that Glt2 e 0.3x Gltl.)

speed

10 OTtm OT time Isolates position loop and sets speed to zero only 1–32767
(external for set time during external deceleration. (ins)
deceleration)
11 GOback GO backlash Sets backlash amount to be compensated when * 9999
dirwtion is reversal in manual mode or by (command
movement command in rapid traverse mode. unit/2)
12 Glback G1 backlash Sets backlash amount to be compensated when A 9999
direction is reversed by movement command in (command
cutting feed mode. unit/2)
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M -V)
1.3 AXIS SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
13 OT - Sets soft limit area using basic machine k 99999.999
14 OT + coordinate system zero point as reference (mm)
point,

/ //////////////////// ////
Basicmachinecoordinate M / OT+( Y )
v
/* OT–(X) /
/ OT+ ;
/ (x) ;
OT-(Y)
/ /
/ Movable area /
?/,//////,////,///// ,//,; ‘

15 tlml TLM Sets distance from zero point of tool change o–99999.999
reference point (reference point) for cutter and tool (mm)
length length measurements to measurement refer-
ence point (surface).
(See section on tool length measurement.)
16

17

18

19 tap-g Position Sets position loop gain for linear axis with a 0.01–200.00
loop gain synchronous tap cycle. (rad/s)
with tap Standard value 10
cycle Set in 0.25 units.
20 abslmt Absolute Sets the guarantecxl machine movement O: Equivalent to
value amount in the power OFF status when ballscrew
detection absolute value detection system is uswl. pitch
required Normally, zero is set. When O is set, absolute o.ool–
amount position data is guaranteed until movement 99999.999 (mm)
amount during power OFF is
0.9 x PIT (ballscrew pitch) x 1000 (pm).
Default for rotary axis is abslmt = 0.9x 3G0
= 324. Therefore, permissible range is –324 to
324.
21 fwd. g Fe-cd Sets feed forward gain in high-precision o–loo%
forward control mode. (V series only)
gain Standard value 70%

-369-
 f. .:..
,,,,
“.,:.
,:, ,:, ..,, ,,. .

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.4 ZERO (REFERENCE) POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

1.4 ZERO (REFERENCE) POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

The zero point return parameter screen appears when the [ZP-RTN] menu key is pressed.
.
[ZERO-RTN PARAM] M_ PARAM 3. 1/2
# (x) (Y) (z) (u) (v) $4)
1 G28 rap 15000
2 G28 Cfp 150
3 G28sft 1250
4 grspc 2
5 grmask o
6
7 dir (-)
8 noref :

1:

;!
13 #1- rfp 10.000
14 #2- rfp -500.000
15 #3- rfp 0.000
16 #4- rfp w

# (@ AXIS( ) DATA( )

BASE I AXIS JZPARTN{ SERVO I MC-ERR I MACRO I I MENU

Zero point return parameters

Switch off the NC system power after setting any parameter marked with (PR) in the table. The parameter
will be valid once the power is switched back on again.

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

1 G28rap G28 rapid Sets dog-type rapid traverse rate for 1—60000 (mm/min)
traverse rate reference point return command.
2 G2&rp G28 Defines approach speed to reference 1–60003 (mm/min)
approach point after deceleration and stop by
speed dog detection for reference point
return command.
3 G28sft Reference Defines distances from electrical O–65535 (p)
point shift zero point detection position to
amount actual machine reference point for
reference point return control.
4 grspc Grid interval These intervals depend on number 0–100 (jxdse/round)
of pulses per rotation of detector.
If absolute position detection is not
used, grid intervals can be reduced.
Division reference value
= No. of detector pulses/1000
grspc setting
= Division reference value/n
where n is the number which is
divided into the division reference
value.

-370-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.4 ZERO (REFERENCE) POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
4 ;rspc Srid
nterval Division
Detector reference Setting
value
20000(5000P/rpm) 20 20
100000(25000P/rpm) I(K) 100 I
k. Setting 20 20/20 =1
1 grid per detector rotation
Setting 10 20/10 =2
o reference2 grids per detector rotation
~ivi~ion
alue 20
5 ~rmask Grid mask Sets intervals where grid points are ignored O–65535 (~)
amount when near-point dog OFF signal is near
grid point during reference point return.

~ Grid mask setting

Effective range of grid mask is distance

equivalent to 1 grid.
7 dir (-) Reference Sets ( – ) or (+) direction from near-point D Positive
?R: point dog for reference point position. direction
direction 1: Negative
(-) direction

8 noref Axis Designated for axk without reference point; O: Normal control
without reference point return is not necessa~ prior axis
reference to automatic operation. 1: Axis without
point reference point
13 #l_ rfp #l–#l Sets positions of lst, 2nd, 3rd and 4th * 999999.999
14 #2_ rfp reference reference points with basic machine (mm)
15 #3_ rfp points coordinate zero point as reference point.
16 #l_ rfp

Basic machine coordinatca

#1
Reference point

#2 ~[
Referencepoint +

#3 / )
“4 +
Referencepoint + Referencepoint

-371-
 ,:, .) ‘:.:’,,
“.,’ ,,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

The servo parameter screen appears when the [SERVO] menu key is pressed.

[SERVO PARAM] M_ PARAM 4. 1/2

# (x) (Y) (z) (u) (W M)

1 Pcl
2 PC2 ;
3 PGN 33.00
4 LGN
5 VG1 15:
6 VG2
7 VIL 9!32:
8 VIA 682

9 IOA 2048
10 IDA 2048
11 ICG 400
12 106 512
13 ILP 1230
14 ILN -1230
15 FFC 0
16 TGN 0

# (@AxB( ) DATA( )
........... .....
BASE. I AXIS IZP-RTN~ ~ MC-ERR I MACRO I I \ MENUJ

[SERVO PARAM] M_ PARAM 4. 2/2

(x} (Y) (z) (u) {v) W

1? STY
18 PIT 4k?
19 RNG 10
20 ORT
21 OLT 46;:
22 OLL
23 COl $:
24 ZRZ 100
25 MTY 3100
26 OD2 3100
;; :;; 101
0
29 SP2 0
30 SP3 0
31 SP4 0
32 SP5 0

# (@Ax~()DATA( )

L BASE I AXIS IZP-RTN ~$w~%~ MC-ERR. I MACRO I I I MENU

-372-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M-V)
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

Switch off the NC system power after setting any parameter marked with (PR) in the table. The paramet er
will be va~id once the power is switched back on again, (#17 —#32)

# item Details Setting range (unit)

1 Pcl Gear ratio 1 Sets number of motor gear teeth. 1–30
(Set lowest integral ratio for PC1 (Refer to MR-S
and PC2.) servo specifications
manual when
exceeding this
value.)
2 PC2 Gear ratio 2 Sets number of machine gear teeth. 1–30
(Set lowest integyal ratio for PC1 (Refer to MR-S
and PC2.) servo specifications
manual when
exceeding this
value.)
3 PGN Position Sets position loop gain; 0.25–200.00
loop gain notch = 0.25; (rad/see)
standard value = 33.oo for semi-
closed loop system.
4 LGN Not USCd HEX setting
Normally set to O.
5 VG1 Speed loop Sets speed loop gain. 1–500
proportional Standard value = 150;
gain 1 if set higher, responsiveness will rise
(about 200–300), and vibration and
noise will be increased.
6 VG2 Not USed -32768–32767
Normally set to zero.
7 VIL Speed loop Sets speed loop delay compensation 9000-10000
delay ratio.
compensa- No delay compensation at 10000
tion and gain will drop if further
reduced; if parameter SSF bit O is O,
this setting is invalid and treated as
10000.
Normally set to 9990 when
parameter is effective.
8 w Speed loop Sets frequency of speed loop adv- 163–16384
advance ante compensation, (0.085 rad/see)
compensa- Responsiveness rises when frequency
tion is increased but setting is normally
fixed at standard value, and
responsiveness is controlled by VG1.
Normally set to 682.

-373-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS {M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

Details Setting range

# Item
(unit)
9 IQA Current loop Internal compensation for current compensation. 1–7680
advance Standard value is normally set.
compensation

1 ~

10 IDA Current loop Internal compensation for current loop. 1–32767

adv ante Standard value (2048) is normally set.
compensation
2
11 IQG Current loop Internal compensation for current loop. 100–5000
proportional Standard value is normally set.
gain 1

12 IDG Current loop Internal compensation for current loop. 1–2560

proportional Standard value (512) is normally set.
gain 2
13 ILP Current limit Sets current limit value. 1–1364
+ side Value in table below is multiplied by peak cur-
rent value (A) to be limited and set,
Setting is not possible above maximum current
value.
Standard
value Motor name Max. Scale
current factor
(1230)
HA40,43 22A 62.0
14 ILN Current limit Standard 80,83 40 34.1 –1 – –1364
– side value 100 60 22.7
(-1230) 200 80 17.0
300 120 11.3

15 FFC Not US~ O–FFFF (%)

Normally set to O. HEX setting
16 TGN Normally set to O. HEX setting

-374-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS {M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M - V)
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
STY Servo Settings related to servo loop. HEX setting
;;) type
FE DC BA,98?6543Z 10
FB lWF w+PD w!

~ Speed detector connector ~ormally O]

O A, C directions (same as motor Cannon
plug or reverse direction)
1: B, D directions (directions differing by
90° from motor Cannon plug)
m I.Normally 01
m Speed feedback compensation ~ormally O]
O No compensation
1: Compensation (jitter with light load is
compensated)
~ Speed feedback compensation ~ormally O]
O No compensation
1: Compensation (used to reduce machine
vibration)
~ ~b~~~e:$~~etection

1: Detection (valid only with absolute

value system)
}=[ Position feedback polarity
O: Positive polarity (mounting on motor
non-load side, or same direction)
1: Reverse polarity (reverse direction from
motor non-load side)
~ Servo loop
O Semi-closed loop
1: Closed loop (including ball screw end
detection)
m card for Position det~tor ~nn=tion
destination
~ Card for SP~ detector connection
destination

-375-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/33SM/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.5 SER VU PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit )
STY Servo type Examplti Values are as in table below depending
$:) on servo system.
Servosystem PD2 PD1 VD2 VDl
E-ol Standard 0000 0
E-31 ScaleFB 0100 4
E-33 Submicron 0001 1
0101 5
z-33 Absolute 0100 4
value 0101 5

18 PIT Ball screw Sets ball screw pitch (lead) as is. 1–50 (mm)
(PR) pitch
RNG Movement Sets value in table below depending on position 1–1000
;:) unit detector.
Position detector RNG
Encoder3003p/r 12
OSE.5K-6-8-1O8 5000p/r 20
0AER5K-lX-3-8-108
0SE5K-EW-3-9.52-O
0AER5K-lX-ET-3-9.52-O
oAER25K-lx-3-tklo8 25000plr 100
Linear scale inducto~n
Pm x lf.L
Scale resolution ~)

ORT Regeneration Sets thermal time constant for overheating detec- 51–18000
;:) time constant tion [OR, WOR) of regenerative resistance. (100ms)

Standard
4680
no external regenerative resistance
With external regenerative resistance 3010

OLT OL time Sets time constant for motor overload detection 1– 18000
;;) constant (OL1, WOL). (100ms)
Standard value 60 sec. (setting 600)
OLL OL detection Sets detection level for motor overload detection 1–500 (%)
::) level (OL1, WOL).
Standard value 150%

-376-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM-
V.335M- V)
1.5 SE.R VO PARAMETERS “

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
OD1 Excessive Sets error range during servo ON. 1–32767
::) error with Maximum deviation from ideal droop (when (interpolation
servo ON load is low with rwpect to command) is set. units)
Deviation is ideally O but it is caused by ef-
feets of load and computation error of ideal
droop. Setting should therefore be made to
over 20% of maximum droop during rapid
traverse as a guideline.

::,,1.-.,,,
.@&&t

Excessive error alarm results if droop does not

enter diagonal lines.
Example Rapid traverse 15 m/min
Position loop gain: 33
Interpolation unit: 0.5 IL

15X106
X O.2=303OX31OO
60x33x 0.5

Rapidtnwerse Setting
1 m/min 300
2 500
3 700
4 900
5 1103
6 1300
8 1700
10 211m
12 2.5CHI
15 3103
16 3300
18 370U
20 4100
24 4900

Position loop gain: 33

Interpolation unit: 0..5 p
ZRz In-positio n Sets in-position width when in-position cheek O–32767
;:) width system has been selected. (output unit:
Servo parameter is not changed unless 0.5 p)
in-position mode is established.
Normal guideline is about 100.

-377-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.5 SERVO PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
25 MTY Motor Sets type of motor, detector. HEX setting
PR) type
FE DC BA 98765432 10

PEN ENT MTT

I

m Sets position detector from table below.

m Sets speed detector (attached to motor
load side) from table below.
PEN = ENT for semi-closed system

Detector PENIENT
30~ plr encoder o
5000p/r encoder 1
OSESK-6-8-1O8
OSESK-~-3-9.52-O
5000ph encoder + absolute value 9
OAER5K-1X-3-8-1O8
0AER5K-lX-FT-3-9.52
25000 p/r encoder + absolute value A
(OAER25K-1X-3-8-1O8)
Lhwar scale 4
(Inductoayn + A/D converter,
optical scale magnescale)

lm Sets motor type from table below.

Motor MTT
HA40 o
43 80
80 1
83 81
100 2
200 3
300 4

0D2 Excessive Sets error range during servo OFF. O–32767

;;) error Setting is same as for OD1. When O is set, (interpolation
with excessive error is not detected during servo OFF. unit)
seNo
OFF

-378-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M - V)
1.5 SER VQ PARAMETERS

1
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
SSF Selects special servo function. HEX setting
$)

FE DC BA9B 765432 10

DIR IND PID

~$~m~~$elay compensation

O No compensation
1: Compensation
~~ Set when inductosyn and MD
converter are used.

DIR IND
Zeropoint returndirection+
wheninductosynand A/D o 1
converter are used
Zero point return direction -
when inductosyn and A/D 1 1
converter are used

28 SP1 Not used; normally set to O.

(PR)
29 SP2 Not used; normally set to O.
(PR)
30 SP3 Not used; normally set to O.
(PR)
31 SP4 Not used; normally set to O.
(PR)
32 SP5 Not used; normally set to O.
(PR)

-379-
 ,.

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

The machine error compensation screen appears when the MC-ERR] menu key is pressed. The
memory-type pitch error compensation and memory-type relative position compensation data for the axes
can be displayed and set on these screens. The display pages can be turned by pressing the [PREVIOUS
PAGE] and NEXT PAGE] keys.

MC-ERR. CMP] M_ PARAM 5. 1/13

# (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1 cmpax x ‘f z x
2 drcax
3 rdvno ; 1; 3: 3:
4 mdvno 13 25 36
5 pdvno : 17 30 40
6 SC 1
7 spcdv 10000: 100000 10000: 10000;
8

1:
11
12
13
14

1:

# (8)NQ ( )DATA( )
BASE I AXIS I ZP-RTN I SERVO ~titi:-~gl MACRO! I I MENU

MC-ERR. CMP] M_ PARAM 5. 2/13

#
-2 17 6 33 0 49 65 81 97 113
; O 18 0 34 0 50 66 82 98 114
3 6 19 0 35 0 51 67 115
4 -4 20 036 0 52 68 !: 1% 116
5 -4 21 0 37 -2 53 69 85 101 117
6 2 22 03a -4 54 70 86 102 118
7 0 23 0 39 2 55 71 87 103 119
8 0 24 0 40 4 56 72 88 104 120

0 25 -2 41 0 57 73 89 105 121
1; o 26 -4 42 0 58 74 90 106 122
11 0 27 -2 43 0 59 75 91 107 123
12 0 28 4 44 0 60 76 92 108 124
13 -4 29 6 45 0 61 77 93 109 125
14 -2 30 6 46 0 62 78 94 110 126
15 -2 31 0 47 0 63 79 95 111 127
16 4 32 0 48 0 64 80 96 112 128

# (fi DATA( )

. BASE I AXIS IZP-RTN I SERVO h~&2$RWl MACRO I I IMENU

-380-
 APPENDI. 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM-
V/335M-V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

1.6.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

There are two machine error compensation functions: memory-type pitch error and memory-type relative
position compensation. These functions can be used independently.
1) Memory-type pitch error compensation
An axial feed error resulting from the ball screw pitch error is compensated for by preset
parameters.
As shown in Fig. 1, the compensation amount is set at the points provided by dividing the
machine coordinate at equal intervals, based on the reference point.
The compensation amount can be set by the incremental or absolute value system, and the
system is selected by the machine parameters.
The area between division points “n” and “n -t-1“ is compensate for smoothly by linear
approximation.
4 /
Actual Ideal machine position
machine
position

Actual machine position without

4
$\ Jk Ab >
Cmupemation Assigned machine position
Reference<point amount
between
division A: Division point
Compensation points
amount

& ,< :*

n n+l n + 2 Assigned machine position

Fig. 1 Relationship between compensation amount and machine position
2) Memory-type relative position compensation
The relative position error, caused by moving table deflection, of two axes intersecting at right
angles is compensated for by the preset parameters.
As shown in Fig. 2, the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction is set at the
division points produced by dividing the basic axis machine coordinate at equal intervals.
The “basic axis” is one of the two axes intersecting at right angles whose relative position is to
be compensated. It is the coordinate axis that serves as a reference when the relative error is
measured. The “compensation axis” is the coordinate axis that intersects with the basic axis at
right angles and this axis is the subject of actual compensation.
The area between division points “n” and “n -t-1“ is compensated for smoothly by linear
approximation.
4
Actual machine
position for
compensation
axis Actual machine position without
~ compensation

Reference
point

A: Division point

Assignwl machine position of

tn n +1 n +2 basic axis

Y? Yr Assigned machine
- position

Compensation
amount Compensation
amountbetween Fig, 2 Relationship between basic
+
division points axis and compensation axis

-381-
 ;,., !)

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

# Item Details Setting range

(unit)
1 Cmpax Basic axis (1) Pitch error compensation x, y, z u,
Sets coordinate axis for compensation with V, W, A, B,
axis name. C axis
(2) Relative position compensation address
Sets coordinate axis serving as reference with
axis name when relative error of 2 axes
intersecting at right angles is to be measured.
2 drcax Compensa- (1) Pitch error compensation x, Y, q u,
tion axis Sets same coordinate axis as cmpax (basic V, W, A, B,
axis) with axis name. C axis
(2) Relative position compensation address
Sets coordinate axis which intersects at right
angles with basic axis cmpax basic axis), or
in other words, with coordinate axis for
actual compensation.
3 rdvno Reference Sets division point compensation number of 0–128
point reference point position for basic axis. (for each
position Actually, reference point exists but division axis)
division points do not exist, and so this sets minus side
point division point compensation number. O–256 (for
number each axis)
4 mdvno Division Sets division point compensation number at most W’hyn.relative
point negative position from reference point of basic posltlon
number of axis. compensa-
most nega- tion is added
tive position
5 pdvno Division Sets division point compensation number at most
point positive position from reference point of basic
number of axis.
most positive
position
6 se Compensa- Sets scale factor of compensation amount which o–99
tion scale has been set in compensation number (compensa-
factor tion amount table.).
When scale factor has been set as 1, compensa-
tion amount units are same as output units.
Compensation amount unit
= Output unit x compensation scale factor
7 Spcdv Division Sets intervalsbetween division points produced o–99999999
intervals by dividing basic axis into equal intervals.

Linear axis
Input Rotaq
Machine Machine
unit constant axis
constant
(mm) (inch)
A 0.01 mm 0.001 inch O.O1°
B 0.001mm 0.0001 inch O.OO1°
c O.OCO1
mm 0. CN3C01inch o.0001”

-382-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
7 Spcdv Division (Note): No compensation when division interval
intervals setting is zero.
There is no limit to the minimum
division interval value but reference
should be made to the machine stroke
and other specifications, and the
appropriate data should be set.

1.6.2 COMPENSATION DATA SETTING METHODS

The compensation data can be set by the incremental or absolute value system.
Page 2 of basic specification parameter screen
“Pine” O absolute system, 1: incremental system
(1) Absolute svstem
When the machine can be sent from the reference point to the division points, as shown in Fig. 3,
the following will be set as the compensation amount:

(Assigned position - actual machine position) x 2 [output unit]

For instance, if the actual machine position is 99.990 mm when it is sent from the reference point to
the +100 mm position, the compensation amount at the + 100 mm position will be

(100000 - 99990) x 2 = 20 pulses

If the actual machine position is -99.990 mm when sent to the –100 mm position, the compensation
amount at the -100 mm position will be

(-100000 - (-99990)) x 2 = -20 pukes

-100
—.—— —
I
I

Compensation ‘— ‘—
amounti

———— ——.

{2) Incremental system

When, as shown in Fig. 4, the machine position is on the plus side from the reference point, the
compensation amount applying when the machine is fed only by the division interval from the
“n – 1“ division point to division point “n” will bti

(Division interval - actual movement amount) x 2 [output unit]

-383-
 .,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

When, as shown in Fig. 5, the machine position is on the minus side from the reference point, the
compensation amount applying when the machine is fed only by the division interval from the “n+ 1“
division point to division point “n” will be:

(Division interval + actual movement amount) x 2 [output unit]

n~l
p

~ <
‘q’ W%&%%,,
Fig. 5
Fig. 4
Unit: output unit
Rang~ –128 to 127
IWYI”E Output units serve as the setting units but the actual compensation pulse units will differ
according to the wmpensation scale factor.

1.6.3 SETTING EXAMPLES FOR LINEAR AXIS AS BASIC AXIS

(1) When “mdvno” and “pdvno” are on either side of “rdvno”

2- -

:
Ak AL Ab >
+ Basic axis machine
coordinates

-( 3 )— — (-3)
Compensation L (0) “ (-2) J
under absolute —(-1) (l)-
system

Division point no. #1 #2 #3 ?%4 #5 #6 rdvno 3

Ass@@ machine
-300.OUI –200.003 -loo.oal 100.OOO 200.000 300.ocHl mdvno 1
position
Actual machine
–299.999 -200.000 –100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 6
position m
Incremenkd 2 6 -6 -4 0 6
Compen- system
sation
amount Absolute
-2 0 6 -4 4 2
system

When the setting range (“pdvno” from “mdvno”) is exceeded, wmpensation is based on the amount at
“mdvno” or “pdvno”.

-384-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HA4-
V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHIN” ERROR COMPENSATION

(2) When compensation range is on the plus side only

Compensation
undei-
incremental -(-2,+(,,.~(o,~( 3,~(l)fl
system #17
#13 #14 *15 *16
Error ~ ~;
2- -

;. Basic axis machine

Jk dk 4b coordinates
–1 --
-2 --
-3 -.

—(-2)+
Compensation
under absolute (-1)-1
system (“1)+
(2) 4
(3)4

m
Division point no. #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 rdvno 12
Incrernental
Compen-
system
-4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 13
sation
amount Absolute
-4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 17
~stem
Y$%en the machine position exceeds “pdvno,” compensation is based on the amount at “pdvno. ”
Compensation is not conducted if the machine position is minus in this case.
(3) When compensation range is on the minus side only

Compensation
under ~(-l,+(U- +q-+-p)--p,).
incremental
system #E *26 $ 7 #2g *B *3O Error
II 3
2
1
< \ —0
4 b &
d Ak I!,
Basic axis
-1
machine
coordinatcx -2
–3

-( 3 )—

I I I I-(3)

Ill K(2)
Compensation , -–(-1)
under absolute ~L -2)
system
(-1)

Division point no. #25 #26 #27 #28 #29 #30 rdvno 30
IncrementaI
Compen-
system
-2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 2.5
sation
amount Absolute -2 -4 -2
system 4 6 6 pdvno 30
m
When the machine position exceeds “mdvno,” compensation is based on the amount at “mdvno. ”

-385-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.6 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

(4) Compensation in a range not including reference point

Compensation
under
increment al
Error ~ system r-l)T(-1’T(3)-t( l)l
3+ *35 #k #57 #’% #kg #’ m

Basic axis
_ machine
coordinates

Division point no. #35 #36 #37 #38 #39 #o rdvno 34

Incremental
Compen- -2 -2 6 2 mdvno 36
system
sation
amount Absolute
–2 -4 2 4 pdvno 40
system
~ B1
In this case, compensation is provided between “pdvno” and “mdvno.”
The settings are the same even when compensation is to be provided across a range which does not
include the reference point, with the machine position on the minus side.

1.6.4 WHEN BASIC AXIS IS A ROTARY AXIS

Compensation
uncle; incremental -( 1 )- -(–3)+
--(-2)7-( 1 )l-(o)7(3)-
system
; # 1 # ~

2- -
360°
; P Basic axis machine
coordinates
-1 -
-2 -
7

~4
–3

(-2) ,
Compensation
under absolute
system
l===+- (0)-=

❑
Division point no. #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 rdvno 22
Incremental
Compen- -4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 23
system
sation
amount Absolute
system
-4 –2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 28

In this case, the sum of the compensation amounts set by the incremental system must be zero.
The compensation amount of the end point (360°) under the absolute system must be zero.

-386-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.7 MACRO FILE

1.7 MACRO FILE

The macro file page appears when the MACRO] menu key is pressed.
This is assigned when user programs and subprograms are called by specific codes (G, M, S, T, and second
miscellaneous codes).
T
MACRO FILE] M_ PARAM 6

# <CODE> <TYPE> <PROORAM-NO. > < CODE>< TYPE>< PROGRAM-NO. 7

1 G(O1] 123 0 12345678 If M [01 ] 1234 3 23456789
2 G(021 255 1 19000 12 M [02] 2345 3 9000
3 G(03) 13 M [03)
4 G[04] 14 M [04]
5 G[05] 15 M [051
6 G(06j 16 M [06]
7 G(07j 17 M [071
8 G[08] 18 M [08]
; :~; 19 M [09]
) 20 M (10]

21 M2 mac o 100
22 Smac o 200
23 Tmac o 300

# (1) DATA ( )()( )

.,:.,..
.:.,,...,.,
BASE I AXIS IZP-RTNI SERVO I MC-ERR ~ii@~qj~ I ! MENU

Item Details Setting range (unit)

G [01] < CODE> 1–255
Sets any of 10 G codes from G [01] to G [10] when
user macro program is called by G command.
(This does not include G codes used with MELDAS
300 series.)
< TYPE> o–3
G [10]

10 I Call cxmivalent to M98P AAAA :

I
1 Call equivalent to G65P MAA ;

-----
2 Call equivalent to G66P AAM ;
3 Call equivalent to G66.lP AAAA ;
Other Call equivalent to M98P AAAA ;

< PROGRAM-NO. > 1–99999999

Assigns user macro program number to be calkd. I

-387-
 ..,:>,..,. ,,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

W’335M- V)
1.7 MACRO FILE

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

11 M [01] < CODE> 1–9999
Sets any of 10 M codes from M [01] to M [10] when
user macro program is called by M command.
(M96-M99 codes and M codes used with
MELDAS 300 series cannot be set.)
\
<TYPE > Same as for G call macros o–3
20 M [10]
e PROGRAM-NO. > Same as for G call macros 1–99999999
(Note) Macro programs are called by the M codes set on this page when
the M call macro (Mmac) basic specification parameter is valid.
21 M2mac Set when user macro program is called by second miscellaneous function
command (address set in basic specification parameter M2name).
(Note) Macro programs set on this page are called when second miscellane-
ous code call macro (M2mac) basic specification parameter is valid.
< TYPE> Same as for G call macros o–3
< PROGRAM-NO. > Same as for G call macros 1–99999999
22 Smac Set when user macro program is called by S command.
(Note) Macro programs set on this page are called when the S call macro
(Smac) basic specification parameter is valid.
c TYPE> Same as for G call macros o–3
<PROGRAM-NO. > Same as for G call macros 1–99999999

23 Tmac Set when user macro program is called by T command.

(Note) Macro programs set on this page are called when the T call macro
(Tmac) basic specification parameter is valid.
< TYPE> Same as for G call macros o–3
<PROGRAM-NO. > Same as for G call macros 1–99999999

-388-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M - V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

The spindle parameter screen appears when the [SPINDLE] menu key is pressed.
The spindle parameters are divided into those which are controlled by the NC system and those which are
controlled by the spindle when connection is made with the FR-SF spindle controller using a bus line.
Y
[SPINDLE SPEC.] M_ PARAM9

# #
smini
slimtl 1? 1 3! PG1 133 49 TSP 4500
; 2 79; 34 PG2 20 50 ZSP
3 3 4000 35 PGC 10.00 51 CSN 3%
4 4 0 36 ZRZ 1.00 52 SOT 10
5 smax 1 o 37 OSP 220 53 TLM 10
6 2 79: 22 sgear o 38 CSP 20 54 VKP 63
7 3 4CQ0 23 39 PST 2048 55 VK I 60
8 4 o 24 40 BRC O 56 TYP 0

ssiftl 0 25 41 57 GRA 1 100

1: 2 0 26 42 58 2 100
11 0 27 43 59 3 100
12 : 28 44 60 100
13 stap 1 52; 29 45 61 GRB; 100
14 2 2640 30 46 62 100
3 0 31 47 ORS 1 6601 63 ; 100
!: 4 0 32 48 ORS2 0 64 4 100

#( MDATA ( )

PLGDATA I PLC-TMRI I
PLC-CN’rR’ BIT-SELC I PLC-AX. I I I MENU

( 1 ) Parameter controlhxl by the NC system

# Item Details I Setting range

(unit]
1 dimt 1 Limit speed I!hese set spindle speed for maxi- 0–99;99 (rPm)
2 2 mum motor speeds with gears 00, 01,
3 3 10 and 11. remwctivelv.
4 4 They correspo~d to S’analog output
10V.
5 smax 1 Maximum speed These set maximum spindle speed
6 2 with gears 00, 01, 10 and 11,
7 3 respectively.
8 4 Set to slimt 2 smax.
9 ssift 1 Shift speed These set spindle speed for gear O–32767 (rPm)
10 2 shifting with gears 00, 01, 10 and 11,
11 3 respectively.
12 4
13 stap 1 Tap speed These set maximum spindle speed O–99999 (rPm)
14 2 during tap cycle with gears 00, 01,
15 3 10 and 11, respectively.
16 4

-389-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V,335M- V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
smini Minimum speed Sets minimum spindle speed. The O–32767 (rPm)
~~te) spindle rotates at this speed even
when an S command below this
value is assigned.
21 sori Orient speed Sets spindle orient speed. O–32767 (rpm)
22 sgear Encoder gear Sets spindle and eneoder gear ratio. o: 1/1
ratio 1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8

Relationship between spindle limit speed and maximum spindle speed

Output voltage
4 1
(V)lOVA ‘1
/l
/, / I
/ I
I
I
Ill
1111
1111
111]1
111111
* Spindle speed
o Srnaxl S limll Smax2 Slimt2 Smax(n) Slim~(n) (R. P.M)
I
L
L Limit speed for gear 1 used (parameter setting)

Maximum speed for gear 1 used (parameter setting)

Setting of zero for gear not used.

-390-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (’M330HM/335M/330HM -
W335M- V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

NOTE The screen and parameters shown below are for M320/330M system E and following and for
M330HM-V’335M-V.

[SPINDLE SPEC.] M_ PPJZAM 9

* ii
1 sl,mtl o 17 $Iapt1 1000 3! PG1 133 4! TSP 45OO
2 2 m 18 2 1000 34 PG2 20 30 25P
3 3 4030 19 3 10WI 35 Pcc 10.00 51 CSN 3%
4 0 20 4 1owl 36 282 1.00 52 SOT 10
5 Smz ; 0 21 $011 o 37 OSP 22UU:
6 2 W 22 sgear 0 3/3 .CSP ;;
7 3 4CC4123 $mlnj 100 39 PST 2048 55 VKI 60
8 4 0 24 40 anc 0 36 TYP o
9 $Slltl O 25 41 57 GSA1
10 2 0 26 42 5a2 ;%’
11 0 27 59-31W
12 .! :: 60 lCO
13 slap 1 52; % 45 61 GRE$ lN
14 2 2640 30 46 62 2 100
15 0 31 47 ORS1 6631 63 3 100
16 : 0 32 48 ORS2 0644100

S (lDATA [ )

lWRiWiHMO.DATAl Iurr.wm
PLC.TMRIPLC.CNTR I PT...*T I I I .,CN,l

# Item Setting range

Details
(unit)
17 stapt 1 Tap time These set time constant for sync tap 0–1500 (ZZIS)
18 2 constant cycle with gears 00, 01, 10 and 11,
19 3 respectively.
20 4
21 sori Orient speed Sets spindle orient speed. O–32767 (rPm)
22 sgear Encoder gear Sets spindle and eneoder gear ratio. o 1/1
ratio 1: 1/2
I I I2 1/4 I
3: 1/8
23 smini Minimum speed Sets minimum spindle speed. The O–32767 (rpm)
spindle rotates at this sped even
when an S command below this
value is assigned.

Relationship between spindle limit speed and maximum spindle speed

Spindlespeed(rPm)~ Spindlespeal (rPm)

slimt(n)- - ———- ——-. —.-— —._.

slimt2 . -——–—–——

slimt3 - -— -- I Scommmd--.—. — .

I ,
I I 1Time I Time
+Stapt l--i 1 I (ins) Erecution 1 i (ins)
I limeconstant I
I
5taPt(n)~
Starit(n) 1

-391-
 ,, ,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

(2) Parameters for control by spindle

These parameters are used when the spindle controller FR-SF is connected by a bus line.
Parameters with the same names are also held inside the spindle controller FR-SF. The parameters
on this page are valid when the bus line has been connected.

NOTE The parameters on this page are made invalid when switch SW5-1 on the SF-CA card is set ON.
Switch off the NC system power after setting any parameter marked with (PR) in the table. The
parameter will be valid on;e the power is swfich&l back on again.

# [tern Details Setting ra ge (unit)

PG1 Orient 1st Encoder orient Encoder Magnetic
deceleration Sets angle for entering creep sensor
point speed.
Standard value 180
Magnetic sensor orient
Sets angle for entering creep
speed after linear zone has 0—500 ms
been passed.
Standard value 133 o–359 f)

(%) PG2 Orient 2nd

deceleration
point
Sets angle for entering
position loop from orient
creep speed.
0–40 f)

Standard value 20
PGC Sync tap/C-axis Sets position loop gain of 0.01–999.99 (rad/s)
(3) position loop
gain
spindle during synchronous
tap cycle and C-axis control.
Standard value 10.00
ZRz Orient Sets range of position error at Encoder Magnetic
(%) in-position range which orient finish signal is
output.
sensor

Standard value 1.00 o–359 (“) ] o–39 (“)

OSP 0–1000 (rPm)
i3)- CSP 0–1000 (rPm)
_&)-

-392-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M33UHM/335M/330HM -
V/’335M-V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

# n 1 Details Setting ri ;e unit

PST Position Encoder orient Encoder
(%) shift Sets orient stop position.
klagnetic
sensor
Setting 1 corresponds to 3G0°/4096.
Magnetic sensor orient 0–4095 1S36–2S60
Sets orient stop position across –5” to (pulse)
+ 5° range,
Setting 2560
1

~etting 1536

When 0° is set to 2048:

2048 -tn in “+” direction
2048 – n in “-” direction
BRC Not used; set this to zero.
Ii&

-393-
 ,.

APPENDIX 1. MA CHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

setting
# Item Details range
=
3RS1 lrient Iets control system (gain, etc.) during orient stop. +EX
!top kandard v alua 6601 jetting
nntrol
FIEIDIC B\A 9 8 71615 4 312 1 0

W selection
~1 (rad/sl
Orient Orient g:
K scalefactor Kp scalefactor -%
i?M
; +

$2

1 I I I I f I I I I I

~~ u~

I I I
4+it
combination
4-bit
combination < 4-bit
combination
0: 0.6 [tkq 0: 0.6 w=] ~! ~fy’a~anm O: 0.55 [rad/sD
1: 0.7 1: 0.7 1: 1.1
2: 0.8 2: 0.8 2: 1.65
3: 0.9 3: 0.9 3: 2.2
4: 1 4: 1 4: 2.75
5: 1.2 5: 1.2 5: 3.3
6: 1.4 6: 1.4 6: 3.85
7: 1.6 7: 1.6 7: 4.4
8: 1.8 8: 1.8 8: 4.95
9: 2 9: 5.5
:: ;.2 A: 2.2 k 6.05
%: 2.4 B: 2.4 B: 6.6
C: 2.6 C: 2.6 c: 7.15
D: 28 D: 2.8 D: 7.7
E: 3 E: 3 E: 8.25
F: 3.2 F: 3.2 F: 8.8

0RS2 Orient Sets orient direetion, detector mounting direetion and motor
stop rotation direction.
control Standard value O (0100 with reversed detector mounting
2

FIE B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 312 g--j

J Uuuu
1111
I
o:
1:
(i:
1:
(+) direction
(-)
(i) dir@iO~
direclion
2-bit
combirmt it
O : PRE
1 : C(XI
(–) direction 2:CW
o: Closed system 3 :pmhli
1: semi-closedsystem
&medirw+io
o: Weak excitation m Cw Ccw
1: Strong excitation [.~+k%
I
L

1’
; :
0:
1:
(+)
(+)
(-)
direction
direction
direction
Norrnrdl
PRE

: (-) dmection

-394-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
v/335M- v)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
TSP Motor maximum Sets maximum speed of motor. O–32767 (rpm)
;;) speed (Rotational sped with analog com-
mand speed 10V)
ZSP Motor zero Sets speed at which zero speed 0– 1000 (rpm)
;:) speed output is issued.
Standard valuti 50
CSN Acceleration/ Sets time constant from zero to O–32767 (ins)
$;) deceleration maximum speed. (This is not valid
time constant with position loop.)
Standard value 300
SDT Speed detection Sets as a percentage the speed at o–loo (%)
;:) rat e which speed detection output for
maximum motor speed is issued.
Standard vahm 10
TLM Torque limit Sets torque limit signal TL2 limit 0–120 (%)
:R) rate.
Standard value 10
VKP speed loop Sets speed loop proportional gain. O– 1000 (rad/s)
;:) proportional Response rises when gain is
gain increased (100-150) but vibration
and noise also increase.
Standard value 60
VKI speed loop Sets speed loop integral gain. 0–1000
/:) integral gain This is set so that the proportion (1/10 rad/s)
with respect to Vkp is made virtually
constant.
Standard value 60
TYP Position loop IN Sets processing when switching from
::) type speed loop to position loop.
O: Position loop after orientation;
zero point return required
1: Position loop directly; zero point
return not required
GRA1 Spindle gear Sets number of teeth on spindle side
;;) troth ratio for gear 00 (’H gear)
GRA2 Sets number of teeth on spindle side
$:) for gear 01 (ML gear)
GRA3 Sets number of teeth on spindle side 1–32767
/:) for gear 10 (L gear)
60 GRA4 Sets number of teeth on spindle side
(PR) for gear 11 (M H gear)

-395-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.8 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)

(ii) GRB1 1
Motor gear
teeth ratio
Sets number of teeth on motor
side for gear 00 (H gear).
Setting is made so that:
Motor speed x No. of
teeth at motor shaft side/
No. of teeth at spindle
number of teeth on motor side = Spindle speed
(&) GRB2 Sets
side for gear 01 (ML gear). relationship.
Make the setting so that
the numbers of teeth both
GRB3 Sets number of teeth on motor
;;) side for gear 10 (L gear).
at the spindle and motor
sides form the lowest
integral ratio.
Sets number of teeth on motor
(R) GRB4 side for gear 11 (N4H gear).
1 – 32767

,:(

* ;,

-396-
 APPENDIX 1, MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
v/335M- v)
1..9 PLC CONSTANTS

1.9 PLC CONSTANTS

The PLC parameter screen appears when the (I?LC-DATA] menu key is pressed. The parameters used by
the user PLC can be set on this page. Reference should be made to the instruction manual issued by the
machine builder for details on the parameters.
f ?
~LC DATA] M. PARAM 10

3
4 36
21 37
: 22 38
7 23 39
8 24 40

25 41
1: 26 42
11 27 43
12 28 44
13 29 45
14 30 46
15 31 47
16 32 48

# (~) DATA( )
SPINDLE@@@k~~ PLC-TMRIPLC-CNTRIBIT-SELC-
I PLC-AX.~ 1 IMENU

( 1 ) PLC constants
The PLC constants are set by the data type in the parameters which can be used by the user PLC.
The data is set in the PLC R register and backed up. Alternately, it is backed up by setting the data
in the R register corresponding to the PLC constants using the sequence program MOV instruction.
The display remains unchanged, however, and so another page should be selected, and the former
page selected again.
A total of 48 constants can be set with a setting range of t 8 digits.

-397-
 .,.

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.10 PLC TIMER

1.10 PLC TIMER

The PLC timer screen appears when the ~LC-TMR] menu key is pressed.
The timer settings used by the user PLC can be set on this screen.

PLCTIMER] #O- #15:10 ms #16- #95:100 ms M. PARAM11

#96- #103:100 ms INC.
#
o 16 32 48 64 80 96
17 33 49 65 81 97
; 18 34 50 66 82 98
3 35 51 67 83
4 ;: 36 52 68 84 1%
5 21 37 53 69 85 101
6 22 38 54 70 86 102
7 23 39 55 71 87 103
88
24 40 56 72 89
: 25 41 57 73 89
10 26 42 58 90
II 27 43 59 ;: 91
12 28 44 60 76 92
13 29 45 61 77 93
14 30 46 62 78 94
15 31 47 63 79 95

# (@DATA( )
SPINDLEIPLGDATA PLCJ2NTR
]BIT-SELCI PLC-AX.’! I I MENU
-

Item Details Setting range (unit)

lores adding timer This timer has a least input increment of 3–32767
D.01 sec. When the input conditions are
established, it starts counting, and when it
reaches the setting, its contact goes ON.
If the input conditions are aborted, the
count remains at zero.
16 noints fTO-T15\
100ms adding timer This timer has a least input increment of 0.1 O–32767
sec.
Its functions are the same as those for the
10ms timer.
80 points (T16-T95)
100ms integrating This timer has a least input increment of O–32767
timer 0.1 sec.
When the input conditions are established, it
starts counting, and when it reaches the sett-
ing, its contact goes ON.
If the input conditions are aborted, the pres-
ent value (count) is retained and there is no
change in the contact status.
The count is released to zero by the RST
instruction and the contact goes OFF.
8 points (T96-T103)

NOTE The PLC timer screen settings are valid when bit selection parameter #49 bit is O.

-398-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/33 ilHM -
v/335M- v)
1.11 PLC COUNTER

1.11 PLC COUNTER

The PLC counter screen appears when the ~LC-CNTR] menu key is pressed.
The counter settings used by the user PLC can be set on this screen.

PLC COUNTER] M. PARAM12

#
o 1:
17
; 18
3
4 ;;
5 21
6 22
7 23

1;
II
12
13
14
15

# (~ DATA( )
SPINDLEI PLGDATA I PLC-TMR BIT-SELC I PLC-.4X. I I I MENU

# item Details Setting range (unit)

o Counter This is an adding type of counter which O–32767
\ detects the rise in the input conditions and
counts.
23
The count is not cleared even if the input
conditions are set OFF.
The count is reset to zero by the RST
instruction.
24 points (CO–C23)

NJOT12 The PLC counter screen settings are valid when bit selection parameter #49 bit is O.

-399-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS’ (M330HM/335M/330HM -
W335M- V)
1.12 PLC BIT SELECTION

1.12 PLC BIT SELECTION

The PLC bit selection screen appears when the ~IT-SELC] menu key is pressed.
The bit parameters used by the user PLC can be set on this screen.

~IT SELECT] M_ PARAM13

# 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210

1 01010101 17 11110000 33 11001100 49 00001111 65 00100100 81 10101010
2 00000000 18 00000000 34 00000000 50 00000000 66 00000000 82 00000000
3 00000000 19 00000000 35 00000000 51 00000000 67 00000000 83 00000000
4 00000000 20 00000000 36 00000000 52 00000000 tja 00000000 84 00000000
5 00000000 21 00000000 37 00000000 53 00000000 69 00000000 85 00000000
6 00000000 22 00000000 38 00000000 54 00000000 70 00000000 g6 00000000
7 00000000 23 00000000 39 00000000 55 00000000 71 00000000 87 00000000
8 00000000 24 00000000 40 00000000 56 00000000 72 00000000 ga 00000000
9 00000000 25 00000000 41 00000000 57 00000000 73 00000000 89 00000000
10 00000000 26 00000000 42 00000000 58 00000000 74 00000000 90 00000000
11 00000000 27 00000000 43 00000000 59 00000000 75 00000000 91 00000000
12 00000000 28 00000000 44 00000000 60 00000000 76 00000000 92 00000000
13 00000000 29 00000000 45 00000000 61 00000000 77 00000000 93 00000000
14 00000000 30 00000000 46 00000000 62 00000000 78 00000000 94 00000000
15 00000000 31 00000000 47 00000000 63 00000000 79 00000000 95 00000000
16 00000000 32 00000000 48 00000000 64 00000000 80 00000000 96 00000000

76543210
# (dDATA( )

SPINDLEIPLC-DATA
I PLC-TMRIPLC<NTR~
BIT-SELC( PI-C-AX.I I I MEN1

The bit selection parameters are set by bit type as the parameters which can be used by the user PLC. The
data is set in the PLC R register and backed up.
When the data is used for bit arithmetic operations in sequence programs, the contents of the R register
are sent to the temporary storage (M) by the MOV instruction. Conversely, the data is backed up if it is
set in the R register corresponding to the bit selection using the MOV instructions. The display remains
unchanged, however, and so another page should be selected and then this page selected again.

NOTE Bit selection parameters #49 through #96 are used by both MELDAS and the machine builder
and so their contents are fixed.
Refer to the following setting example when setting the parameters from the screen.
(Setting example) When setting W bit 2 to 1
\
[BIT S~ECT]
76543210 UP * 76543210
Set to # (2) DATA ( E) 1 01010101
and press the ~PUT] key.
2 00000100
3 00000000
/

-4CH3-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
v/335M- v)
1.13 PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS

1.13 PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS

(Starting from system version E)
The PLC control axis parameter screen appears when the ~LC-AX.] menu key is pressed.

-p
I
3(
(f 2/

~LC AXIS PARAM] 1 AX. M_ PARAM 14. 1/4

$
1 rapid 10000 17 G28 rap 1000 33 Pcl 1 49 STY 0005
2 clamp 100 18 G28 rrp 200 34 PC2 1 50 PIT
3GOt 20 19 G28 sft O 35 P~N 33.00 51 RNG 1;:
4Glt O 20 grspc 100 36 LGN 0000 52 ORT 4680
5 GO back O 21 grmask 0 37 VGI 150 53 OLT 6
6 G1 back o 22 38 VG2 O 54 OLL 150
7 OT– 10000000 23 39 VIL 10000 55 OD1 1O(x)o
8 OT+ 10000000 24 rfp O 40 VIA 682 56 ZRZ 100

25 41 IQA 1024 57 MTY AA02

1: 26 42 1DA 2048 58 OD2 10000
27 43 I QG 256 59 SSF 0000
{1 28 44 I DG 512 60 SP1 o
13 axcant 1000 29 45 ILP 1230 61 SP2 o
~$ mqm 21 30 46 ILN -1230 62 SP3 o
31 47 FFC 0000 63 S P4
16 32 48 TGN 100 64 SP5 :

#( )DATA( )
SPINDLE I PLC-DATA IPLC-TMR I PLC-CNTR I BIT-SELC I MENU
[

-401-
 ,, ..,- .,, , ,’,

APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (iW330HM/335M/330HM -

V/335M- V)
1.13 PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS

PLC axis specification parameters

After setting any parameter marked (PR) in the tables, switch off the NC system power. The parameter
in question will be valid when the power is switched back on again.

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1 rapid Rapid traverse Sets rapid traverse rate for each axis. Digital I/F
rate Remember that maximum setting differs ac- 1–60000
cording to machine system. mm/min
2 clamp Cutting feed Defines maximum cutting feed rate for each (O.1 inch/rein)
clamp speed axis. Analog I/F
1–30000
mm/min
(0.1 inch/rein)
3 GOt GO time Sets linear control time constant during rapid 1–1500 (ins)
constant traverse acceleration or deceleration.
(linear)
speed

GOt

4 Glt G1 time Sets primary delay time constant during cutt- 1–50M) (ins)
constant ing feed acceleration or deceleration.
(jrimary
delay)

5 GOback GO backlash Sets backlash amount to be compensated 9999

when direction is reversed in manual mode or (command
by movement command in rapid traverse unit/2)
mode.
6 Glback G1 backlash Sets backlash amount to be compensated 9999
when direction is reversed by movement com- (command
mand in cutting feed mode. unit/2)
7 OT - Sets soft limit area using basic machine * 99999999
8 OT + coordinate system zero point as reference (mm)
point.

-402-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/335M/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.13 .PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS

Item Setting range

# Details
(unit)
13 axcont Axis
control FE DcBA 9876543 210
ffag w I

dir ( -): Reference point direction ( - ) O Positive

dir~tion
1: Negative
direction
Sets the reference point position in the ( – ) or
(+) direction from the near-point dog.

@dirE&dirwtion
-

svofi Error correction O: Error is not

Defines whether error is to be corrected or corrected
not during servo OFF. 1: Error is
corrected
rot: Rotary axis O Linear axis
Defines whether axis is linear or rotary. k Rotary axis
CCW:Motor ccw Ocw
Defines direction of motor rotation with 1: Ccw
forward direction command.
14 mcpno PLC Card No. 1–4
mounting 2nd digit 1st digit Axis No. 1–5
card No. Card No. Axis No.

Two digits are assigned to indicate which mcp

(pos) card is mounted for which axis as the PLC
control axis.

-403-
APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/33.siW/330HM -
V/335M- V)
1.13 PLC CONTROL AXIS PARAMETERS

Setting range ]
# Item Details
(unit)
17 G28rap G28 Sets dog-type rapid traverse rate for reference Digital I/F
rapid point return command. 1–--(KKIOO
traverse mm/min
rate (0.1 inch/rein)
18 G28crp G28 Defines approach speed to reference point after Analog I/F
approach deceleration and stop by dog detection for refer- 1–30000
speed ence point return command. mm/min
(0.1 inch/rein)
19 G28sft Reference Defines distances from electrical zero point detec- 0—65535 (p)
point tion position to actual machine reference point
shift for reference point return control.
amount
20 grspc Grid These intervals depend on number of pulses per o–loo
interval rotation of detector. (pulse/round)
If absolute position detection is not used, grid
intervals can be reduced.
Division reference value
= No. of detector pulses/1000
grspc setting = Division reference value/n
where n is the number which is divided into the
division reference value.

Division
Detector reference Setting
vaIue
12000(3000P/rpm) 12 12
20000(5000P/rpm) 20 20
100WO(25000P/rpm) 100 10U

Setting 20 20/20=1
ex.
1 grid per detector rotation
Setting 10 20/10=2
o 2 grids per detector rotation
Divisionreferencevalue 20
21 grmask Grid Sets intervals where grid points are ignored when O–65535 (p)
mask near-point dog OFF signal is near grid point
amount during reference point return.

1
A 4

““r~-:.:z
R Grid.maslc setting

Effective range of grid mask is distance equival-

ent to 1 grid.

-404-
 APPENDIX 1. MACHINE PARAMETERS (M330HM/3.?5M/330HM -
v/3351kf- v)
1.13 PEC CON’TROL A.XIS PARAMETERS

Setting range
# Item Details
@nit)
24 rfp Reference Sets positions of reference point with basic *99999999 (pm)
point machine coordinate zero point as reference point. (inch/10000)
position

~ Basic machine
Reference point
coordinate system

Reference should be made to the servo parameters for #33 through #@ and for their contents and setting
ranges.

-405-
APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE
PROGRAMS
2.1 PARAMETERS FOR CANNED CYCLE OPERATION

APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF

CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS
Input/output and editing operations can be undertaken for the subprograms of the standard canned cycle
G73, G74, G76 and G81 to G89 commands.
ln addition, separate subprograms can be prepared and G70, G71, G72, G75, G77, G78 and G79 can be
used as user canned cycles so that these subprograms can also be input/output and edit cd.

2.1 PARAMETERS FOR CANNED CYCLE OPERATION

The operations applying to data input/output and editing for the G70 through G89 canned cycle
subprograms are the same as those applying to the ordinary user-generated machining programs. They
employ the data input/output and editing screens, and the parameters must be set in advance. Before
proceeding with the input/output and editing, “l” is set in parameter “fix-P” on the basic specifications
parameter page of the machine parameters. Once this parameter is made valid, the data input/output and
editing pages are used solely for operations covering the canned cycle control subprograms. Even the
program file displays apply only to the canned cycle programs. Consequently, parameter “fii-P” should
be returned to “O” after the canned cycle program operations have been mmpleted.

-’406-
 APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE
PROGRAMS
2.2 INPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS

2.2 INPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS

Canned cycle programs are input on the data input page. Check first that parameter “fix-P’ for canned
cycle operation has been made valid.
qeration is the same as for user machining programs. Generally, a group of 12 canned cycle subprograms
constitutes a set and, therefore, greater convenience is afforded if programs are prepared in such a way
that the data can be input continuously.
After program entry, it should be checked that the programs have been entered correctly on the program
file and editing pages.
....... ... ...... ..... .... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .... ..

Select the data input age. The data is input in sequence as ~

Set “l” into the # ( 7 parentheses. E’ ~ indicated in the figure below.
The DATA ( ) setting is not required
if the data is to be input with the ..... .......... .... ...... ........ .................... ........
program number, which h?s been
output to the tape, remammg
unchanged.

1) When data input is started, the

“DATA IN EXECUTION” mess-
age appears.
2) When the EOR code is read, the data
input is completed and the “DATA
IN COMPLETE” message appears.

0810/DR I L L; ~
I Control out
Data below is input as program 0810.
G.l;
IF 111301GOTO1 :
ZH?Gi16H7#7 ;
l12=ti#5 ;
#3003=80Rl ; Data is input as 0810 subprogram data.
GlZi13;
#3003=118
GOZ-#3–if2 ; (Note 1) Since input is terminated as soon as the% (EOR)
N1 M99 ; code is entered, continue with the next program.
, au
0820/COUNTIIR-BOR I NG :–
G.I; ~ Data below is input as program 0820.
IF [#301 GOTO1 :
Z/f2G#6H7fi7 ;
!2=##5 ; I

ti3003=80Rl ;
GlZ#3 ; Data is input as 0820 subprogram data.
G4P#4 ;
i13003=#8;
GOZ–lf3-#2;
N1 M99 ;
0830/ DEEP–DR I LL–CYCLE
> Data below is input as program 0830.

Data is input as 0830 subprogram data.

N1 M99 ; I
% This isthe code for terminating data input.
~ (Note 2)
It should be entered only at the end of the tape.

-407-
 ,..

APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE

PROGRAMS
2.3 OUTPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS

2.3 OUTPUTTING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS

The canned cycle programs are output on the data output page. Check first that parameter “fix-P” for
canned cycle operations has been made valid.
Operation is the same as for user machining programs. There are two ways of outputting the canned cycle
programs which have been entered: output of one program at a time or output of all programs together.
When all the programs are to be output together, greater convenience is afforded (as with their input) by
inputting all the programs continuously in a single operation.
After the programs have been output, they must be checked on the tape to veri~ that there are no data
output errors (such as punching errors).

(Example 1) When all the programs are to be output together

Select the data output page.

Set “l” into the # ( ) and then ALL .............---------------------------------------------------
into the DATA- ( j. ‘ \ All the programs will now be output in I
Press the ~PUT] key. DE : the order in which they were entered. ~
................................................................

First program Second and subsequent programs

(Example 2) When one program is to be output

e,=
Set “l” into the # ( ) and then the
................................................................

~ The assigned program is output. ~

................................................................

-408-
 ,!,

APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE

PROGRAMS
2.4 CLEARING CANN..ED CYCLE PROGRAMS

2.4 CL13ARING CANNED CYCLE PROGRAMS

Canned cycle programs are ckared on the program clear page. Check first that the parameter “fix-F’” for
canned cycle operations has been made valid.
Except for the data classification settings, operation is the same as for user machining programs.

‘PROGRAM ENTRY 12 REMAIN

When the data input/output page is CHARACTER 1374 REMAIN 30i:
selected with the parameter “fix-P” <PROGRAM> <CHR> <ST> <COMMENT>
valid, a list of the canned cycle Uw 810 75 DRILL
rograms appears, as shown in the 820 81 COUNTER+30R ING
Figure on the right. DEEP-OR ILL
830 182
831 182 STEP–CYCLE
840 117 TAP–CYCLE
Upto 24 programs can be entered. 841 115 COUNTER–TAP–CYCLE
up to 6,000 memory characters 850 77 BOR ING–1
< CHARACTER> can be entered. 860 87 BOFII NG–2
861 102 F INE–BORI NG
870 165 BACK-BORING
880 108 BOR ING–3
890 83 BOfl I NG-4
.---— —. -.. ---- ----- .. -—.

(Example 1) When clearing a single program

?ROGRAM ENTRY 1 I REMAIN ~3

Select th~ pro ram clear page. ;HARACTER 1192 REMAIN 2750
Set “4” mto tEe # ( ) and the <PROGRAM
> <CHR> <ST> <COMMENT>
program number 831 into the DATA ~~ 810 75 DRILL
$r~s the ~NpuT1 key 820 81 COUNTER–BOR IFIG
830 182 OEEP-ORILL
840 117 TAP-CYCLE
841 115 COUNTER-TAP-CYCLE
1 ) #4 is the canned cycle program (1
designation. ----- ----- - -— -- --—- ---
2 ) Upon completion of the processing,
the new program file appIying after
the ckxwing appears on the program
file page.
3 ) In the example, program number
831 (G73 subprogram) is cleared and
its pIace is taken by program number
840 and the subsequent programs.

(Example 2) When clearing all the canned cycle programs

x“~-
1
Set “4” mto the # ( ) and fiL into

1 ) #4 is the canned cycle program

L ---- -— -- ----- —---- ---

designation.
2 ) Upon completion of the processing,
the new program file is initialized as
shown in the figure on the right.
3 ) CLR can also be designated in place
of ALL.

-409-
 ,,’,;~ ,

APPENDIX 2, ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE

PROGRAMS
2.5 ST~DARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

2.5 STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

G81 (0810 } Drilling, spot drilling

G.1 ; Canned cycle 1st block movement command

1P [#30] GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check
Ztt2G#6H17;
#2=U#5
#3003=i8 OR1; Single block stop inhibit
G1‘L#3;
#3003=#8;
COZ–#3–lt2 ; Return
N1 M99%

G82 ( 0820) Drilling, counterboring

G.1 ; Canned cycle Ist block movement command

[F [#30] GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check
z!12G#6H#7:
#2=##5
#3003=#8OR1; Single block stop inhibit
GI z#3 ;
G4P#4; Dwell
#3003=#8;
GOZ–/l3-#2 ; Return
N1 M99%

G83 (0830 ) Deep hole drilling cycle

G.1 ; Canned cycle 1st block movement command

IF [#30] GOT02; Canned cycle invalid check
#29= #11 Cutting amount setting
U28=0 ; Return amount (= overall cutting amount)
initialization
Z#2 G#6 H#7;
#2=##5
U3003=#8 OR1; Single block stop inhibit
DO 1;
#28= #28–#11 Next block return amount setting
//26= –#28– #29 Feed amount calculation
Z#26 ; Feed
ISmS:I~lcuttingamount(returnamount)g~ater than cut
IF [ABS[n28] GE[ABS[#31 1 1 GOTO1;
G1 Z#29 ; Cutting feed
GOZ#28 ; Return
#29=#11+#14 ; Cutting amount setting for 2nd and subsequent
blocks

-410-
 APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE
PROGRAMS
2.5 STXNDAR!D CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

END1
;
N1 G1 2#3-#26 : Cutting feed
U3003=!J8;
GO2–#3–#2 ; Return
N2 M99%

G84 (0840) Tap cycle

G.1 ; Canned cycle 1st block movement command

IF [$1301GOTO1 ; Canned cycle invalid check
Z#2Gi16tlt17;
#2=#$5
t13003=!18 OR1 ; Single block stop inhibit
113004=#9OR3: Feed hold/override inva~id
G1Z#3:
G4P84; Dwell
M4; Spindle reverse rotation
#3900=l ;
Cl Z-i13 :
?f3004=#9;
G4P#4; Dwell
1!3; Spindle fonvard rotation
#3003=#8;
GoZ=iiz ; Return
N1 M99%

G85 (0850) Boring 1

G.1 : Canned cycle 1st block movement command

lF [#301 GOTO1
: Canned cycle invalid check
z#2 G#6 Hfl ;
#2=#t15
#3003=#8 OR1: Single block stop inhibit
G1 Zf13;
#3003=i18;
Z-!J3 :
GOZ–U2 ; Return
N1 M99%

G86 (0860) Boring 2

G.1 ; Canned cycle 1st block movement command

IF [#301 GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check
ZU2Glf6H#i’;
#2=##5

-411-
 ,!

APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE

PROGRAMS
2.5 STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

#3003=#8 OR1; Single block stop inhibit

G1 Z#3 ;
G4 P#4 ; Dwell
M5; Spindle stop
GOZ–#3–#2 ; Return
#3003=#8 ;
!J3; Spindle forward rotation
N1 M99%

G87 (0870) Backboring

G.1 : Canned cycle 1st block movement command

IF [#301 GOTO1
: Canned cycle invalid check
#3003=#8 OR 1: Single block stop inhibit
M19 ; Spindle orient
xil12 Y#13 :
#3003=#8 ; Single block stop inhibit release
Z#2 G#6 H17 ;
#3003=tt8 OR 1 ; Single block stop inhibit
G1 X–112 Y–$13 :
tJ3003=#8 ; Single block stop inhibit release
M3 ; Spindle forward rotation
tt3003=t18 OR 1 ; Single block stop inhibit
z#3 ;
M19 ; Spindle orient
GO Xti12 Y#13 : Shift
2–i12-#3 ; G87 is not affected by G98, G99 commands.
#3003=#8 ; Single block stop inhibit release
X–U12 Y–1113 : Shift
M3 ; Spindle forward rotation
N1 M99%

G88 (0880) Boring 3

\
G.1 : Canned cycle 1st block movement command
lF [#301GOTO1
: Canned cycle invalid check
Z#2G#6H#7;
i12=##5
#3003=#8OR1 ; Single block stop inhibit
G1Z#3;
G4P#4; Dwell
i13003=l18
; Single block stop inhibit release
M5: Spindle stop
#3003=#8OR1: Single block stop inhibit
GOZ–#3–i12 : Return

-412-
 APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE
PROGRAMS
2.5 STANDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

#3003=i18 ; Single block stop inhibit release

M3; Spindle forward rotation
N1 ki99%

G89 (0890) Boring 4

G.1 ; Canned cycle 1st block movement command

lF [#30] GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check
Z#2Gli6H/17;
#2=#$5
#3003=#8OR1 ; Single block stop inhibit
Gl L!3 ;
G4PU4; Dwell
#3003=t18;
2–#3 ;
GOZ-#2 ; Return
N M99%

G73 (0831) Step cycle

G.1 ; Canned cycle Ist block movement command

IF [#30] GOT02; Canned cycle invalid check
#29=0 Total cutting amount initialization
ti28=#ll ; Cutting amount setting
Zt2 G#6 H#7;
ff2=#ti5
#3003=#8 OR1 ; Single block stop inhibit
DO1;
#29=#29+#11 ; Total cutting amount count
w [ABs [#291 GE[ABs [u31 11 GOTO1; Is overallcuttingamountgreaterthan cut
amountZ?
GI Z#28 ; Cutting feed
G4 Pi14; Dwell
GOZ-1114 ; Return
Cutting amount setting for 2nd and subsequent
#28=lill+#14 ; blocks
END1
;
?!1 G1 Z#3–#29+!#28 ; Cutting feed
G4 P#4 ; Dwell
#3003= }8 ;
GOZ–#3–!J2; Return
X2 M99%

I I
G74 (0841) Reverse tap cycle

G.1 ; Canned cycle Ist block movement command

[F [//30] GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check

-413-
APPENDIX 2. ENTRY AND EDITING OF CANNED CYCLE
PROGRAMS
2.5 STMDARD CANNED CYCLE SUBPROGRAMS

Zt12Gtt6H#7;
#2=##5
#3003=#8 OR1 ; Single block stop inhibit
U3004=#9 OR3 ; Feed hold/override invalid
G1 ZU3;
G4 P#4 ; Dwell
M3; Spindle forward rotation
#3900= 1 ;
z–#3 ;
#3004= !9 :
G4 Pi14; Dwell
M4: Spindle reverse rotation
!J3003=#a ;
co 2–#2 ; Return
N1 M99%;

G76 (0861) Fine boring

G.1 ; Canned cycle Ist block movement command

lF [~301GOTO1
; Canned cycle invalid check
H2 G86HH7;
U2=#i5
#3003=i8 OR1: Single block stop inhibit
G1zti3 :
M19: Spindle orient
x#12Ytt13; Shift
GOZ–#3–#2 ; Return
#3003=f8 ;
x–#12 Y–#13 ; Shift
!li3; Spindle forward rotation
N1 M99%

:., , ,’

.414.
APPENDIX 3. EXAMPLES OF RS-232C 1/0 DEVICE PARAMETER
SETTINGS AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

APPENDIX 3. EXAMPLES OF RS-232C1/0

DEWCE p~~m~ sm~m
AJ!4111
CL4BLECO~ONS
W device Floppy
Floppy Reader & Floppy
Printer
disk drive puncher disk drive disk drive
(Mitsubishi)
(Kyoritsu) (Kyoritsu) (Ricoh) (1’anaka
I Business)
?arameter PTR-240 PTR-02A I PTF-02A PRT-02A D-30 KRP-8250 FD-3.5 TBM-F1
Device name
Baud rate 2 2 12 2 2 2 2 2
Stop bit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Parity effective 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Evenparity 1 0 0 0 0 0 n o
Chamcter length 3 =+= 3 3 3 3 3 3
Input 1,
Terminator type 1
-4--+i-
0 0 0 0
output o
Code 1 00 co 03 00 00 00
Code 2 00 co m 00 00 00
: with no
rewinding
Rewindcode : with
o 0 o 0 0 0 0
rewinding
Handshake 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
DC code parity 1 + 1 1 0 1 n 1 1
Dc2/Dc4output 1 with .
1
-+-l--+
o o 1 0
puncher
CR output o 0/1 0 0 o o
EIA outDut 0 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1
Title feed outmut o
* o 0 0/1 0 0

Feed number o No. of No.of

o 0 0 0 o
chaructera charactem
ParitvV o o 0/1 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1
Time-out time 100 100 100 10Q 100 100 100
Cable connection =+=
(acccssmy cable) NC 1/0INC 1/0 NC 1/0 NC 1/0 NC 1/0

1,

-415-
APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT

SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT
If a setting operation error occurs on the screen of the CRT setting and display unit, an error No. EOO
and also a message describing the nature of the error will appear on the line above the corresponding data
setting section.
A: Message indicating that data must be reset
X Message indicating that error conditions must be released before data resetting
(I’he bold characters appear on the screen as the actual error message.)

F1-rnr
—----- No.
.-. I Flrrnr —--.
—---- messacm
—- I Descrintinn
—----- .. . ..
EO1 SETTING A ● There is an error in the setting data. Only numbers
ERROR may be set and so this error arises when any other
characters have been entered and the setting input.
o It arises when a setting has been input without a sett-

E02 DATA OVER A . The setting data has exceeded the setting range.
. When the tool offset data was input, the specification
of the compensation data exceeded the assigned
range, preventing the corresponding block from being
input. By pressing the ~NPUT] key again with the
input screen still displayed, the input operation can be
continued from the next block.
E03 NO. NOT A ● The setting number (#) in question does not exist.
FOUND With a parameter setting, this error arises when a
setting number which is not on the screen has been set
and input; with a common variable setting, it arises
when a variable number not included in the specifica-
tions has been set and input.
E04 DEV. NOT x o NO power is ,mpplied h the 1/0 device.
READY ● Disconnected cable.

E05 NOT x e Settings cannot be made for the PLC timer from the
ACCEPTABLE screen in the program valid state (when the machine
parameter bit select #49 bit O is l).
. Settings cannot be made for the PLC counter from
the screen in the program valid state (when the
machine parameter bit select #49 bit 1 is 1).
. Data setting for the tool registration is prohibited
(when the special relay E71 bascxl on PLC is valid).
E06 NO SPEC x ● A menu key corresponding to a function which does
not exist in the specifications has been pressed.
. An attempt was made to set a control parameter
which is not in the specifications.
E07 RESET END A . AIY1/0 operation was forcibly stopped by NC reset,
etc. (including EM G).
E08 PHYSICAL x ● Inmrrect setting of an NC 1/0 parameter or incorrect
ERR 1/0 device setting.

-416-
 APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

Error No. Error message Description

E09 TIM E OUT x o The setting of the “time-out time” for the 1/0 device
parameter is too short.
. There is no EOB code in the machining program.
Elo MEMORY x * The storage capacity of the memory has been
OVER exceeded and no further programs can be written.
This error occurs when the MDI data setting on the
MDI page exceeds 500 characters or it occurs during
MDI entry, program editing or preparation on the
editing page, tape input on the data 1/0 page and
during program copying. It also occurs during buffer
correction in the memo~ operation mode on the
position display page.
. Files cannot be formatted since the capacity of the
mounted RAM is not large enough to accommodate
the parameter.
Ell PROG NO. A . This error arises when an attempt has been made to
DI.JPLI enter a machining program in the memory but it has
the same number as a program already in the
memory. Check the unused program numbers in the
program listing, and reset the number.
This error occurs during MDI entry on the MDI page
or during data preparation on the editing page.
E12 FILE ENTRY x . This error arises when an attempt has been made to
OVER enter a machining program in the memory. It cannot
be entered because the entry will exceed the total
number of programs allowed by the specifications.
This error occurs during MDI entry on the MDI
page, data preparation on the diting page, tape input
on the data 1/0 page and during program copying.
E13 NB NOT A o The block with the assigned sequence or block
FOUND number does not mist in the specified program.
E14 PROG NOT A o The assigned program does not exist in the memory.
FOUND ~ With a graphic check, the program number in
question does not exist even when a check search is
conducted in the tape or memory operation mode.
E15 EDIT LOCK B x . An attempt has been made to conduct an operation
(edit or input/output) which has been prohibited for
machining programs B and C.
E16 EDIT LOCK C x . An attempt has been made to conduct an operation
(edit or inputloutput) which has been prohibited for
machining programs C.
E17 PARITY x ● A parity H error has been detected during data input,
ERROR etc.
Check the paper tape or input device. This error
sometimes occurs when the paper tape has oil or
other dirt on it.

-417-
APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

Error No. Error message Description

E18 PARITY x ● A parity V error has been detected during data input,
ERROR etc.
Check the paper tape and also check that the number
of characters in the significant data interval within a
block is not odd.
Also check the connected equipment (cable connec-
tions, noise measures, etc.).

E20 OVER RUN x ● The control method using DC codes, etc. of an input
ERR or output operation is incorrect.
Check the setting of the NC 1/0 device parameters
and the 1/0 device settings, and reset the parameters.
E21 PROGRAM x o An attempt has been made to erase a machining
RUNNING program during operation.
* An attempt has been made to conduct a search during
operation.
e AII attempt has been made to to change a parameter
or other data during operation.
o An attempt has been made to start a graphic check
during operation.
E22 CODE x . There is an illegal code on the paper tape.
CHANGE ERR
E23 NOT ADD 1/0 x ● An attempt has been made to execute an 1/0 function
when the data 1/0 card (IOP) was not installed.
Install the card first and execute the function again.
E24 PLC RUN x . An attempt has been made to conduct an input,
output or compare operation with maintenance data
when the PLC was not in the stop mode.
E25 DATA x e When the tool offset data was input by tape, an offset
MEMORY type outside the range of the specifications was as-
ERR signed, preventing the corresponding block from being
input. By pressing the ~NPUT] key once again while
leaving the input screen displayed, the input operation
can be continued from the next block.
E26 NO A ● This error occurs when an attempt has been made to
CHARACTERS search a particular character string using the data
search function on the editing page. However, the str-
ing in question does not exist among the data extend-
ing between the block displayed on the screen and the
program end. When the ~NPUT] key is pressed
again, the search can be conducted from the head of
the program.

-418-
 APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

Error No. Error message Description

E35 COMPARE x . During a compare operation, an inconsistency

ERRORM between the data on the paper tape and the data in
the memo~ was detected.
E50 FILE ERROR x . If any of these errors should occur, editing or
E51 FILE OPEN input/output cannot be continued. In this case,
ERROR contact the nearest MELDAS Service Center.
E52 FILE CLOSE With an E50 or E60 error, a classification number
ERR appears after the message. Inform the Service Center
E53 FILE SEEK of this number.
E54 ERR
E55 FILE READ
ERR
E56 FILE DELETE
ERR
E60 FILE INS ERT
ERR
IOP ERROR CCI

E64 PROGRAM A . The same number as the assigned program number

NO. ERR was found in the memory when a program was being
copied.
. During tape input, the character at the head of the
block in the machining program was program number
address “O’ or “L”.
E65 PROG NO. A . During tape input, the same number as that of the
DUPLI assigned program already mists in the memory.
E66 NO PROG L . During tape input, the program number does not ex-
NUMBER ist on the paper tapq nor is the program number
specified on the screen data setting area. Set the
program number and enter it again.

-419-
APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

F.rrcmNn.
—---- ---- I Error mcxsage
u-
I
1
Tlescrintinn
—----- -----

E70 TOOL NO. A * An attempt has been made to newly register a tool
DUPLI that was already registered on the tool life manage
ment screen.
E71 TOOL EINTRY x ● An attempt has been made on the tool life manage-
OVER ment screen to register data that exceeded the
maximum number of tools which can be registered.
. When the tool offset data was input, a compensation
number outside the range of the specifications was
assigned, preventing the corresponding block from
being input. By pressing the ~NPUT] key again while
leaving the input screen displayed, the input operation
can be continued from the next block.
E78 PROG. x o h attempt has been made to conduct a search
CHECK operation (operation search, check setting, restart
MODE search, machining time calculation) during a program
check or in the program search mode.
After the program check is completed or after the
search is released by resetting, conduct the operation
again.
E79 TIME COUNT x e An attempt has been made to conduct a search
MODE operation (operation search, check setting, restart
search, machining time calculation) in the machining
time calculation mode.
After the machining time calculation mode is released
by resetting, conduct the operation again.
E80 TOP SEARCH A ● A program head search (unmodal type of search) was
ERR not conducted prior to the type 2 restart when the
program was restarted. First, make the type unmodal
and search from the program head, and then search
the restart block using the type 2 search.
E81 PROGRAM x e A program error was detected during the search of an
ERROR assigned block using the type 1 or type 2 search
function when the program is restarted. The POOO
program error is also indicated, and remedial action
should be taken in accordance with the display.
IZ82 ALREADY & e An attempt has been made to conduct a type 1 or
RESERCH type 2 search again after the completion of a type 1
or type 2 search when the program is restarted.
If the steps taken to restart the program are
continued without further ado (automatic or manual
return to restart position), the search can be
conducted again from the block which was searched
first.
To conduct the search again, first cancel the previous
search by resetting, and then search again.
E83 COUNT A ● Although, when the program was restarted, the as-
OVERFLOW signed block existed, the search could not be
performed for the assigned number of times. Recheck
the number of times that the assigned block appears.
E84 CAN’T x ● During the exmution of One input/output function, an
IN/OUT attempt has been made to execute another
input/output function. Wecute the other function
after having completed the first function.

-420-
 APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

Error No. Error message Description

E85 LINE BUSY x e When a computer link function was activated from
the NC side (HOST No. search, data input, BTR
operation), port 2 was already being used by a
function other than the computer link. To execute the
computer link, wait until the ongoing function has
been completed.
E86 INPUT DATA x e When the tool offset data was input, the data format
ERR was incorrect, preventing the corresponding block
from being input.
By pressing the ~PUT] key again while leaving the
input screen displayed, the input operation can be
continued from the next block.
. The data format was not correct when a parameter
was input on tape.
E87 NOT EDIT x * Playback editing was performed for a subprogram
PROG. used for a canned cycle.
E88 CAN’T ADD x . Playback editing cannot be undertaken when the
BLOCK block edited by playback is not displayed until the
end (EOB) in the machining program display area on
the left-hand side of the screen. Press the [ J, ] cursor
key, display the block to the end, and then input.
E91 MODE x o G90 was set with the “playback G90” function OFF.
ERROR (PBK) . G91 was set with the “playback G90” function ON.

,,-

-421-
APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

The following messages indicate the status of the setting and display functions. They are not operating
errors. They are mainly intendal to inform the operator that operation is normal and serve as guidance
for the subsequent setting operations. These messages are not classified using numbers.
( 1 ) Search and operation

Message Description
I SEARCH EXECUTION I . The search operation is being performed problem-free. I
I SEARCH COMPLETE I e The search operation has been completed problem-free. I
RESEARCH EXECUTION @ The restart search operation is being conducted
problem-free. I

IID
I

RESEARCH COMPLETE The restart search operation has been completed

problem-free. I
I BUFFER EDIT I . The buffer editing mode has been established. I
I PROG. TIME COUNTING I . The math”mmg
“ time is being calculated problem-free. I
COUNT UP END o The machining time has been calculated problem-free.

(2) MDI/editing

Message Description
MDI NO SETTING . MDI data display (no execution).
MDI SETTING COMPLET e The MDI data setting has been completed (and the
data can now be executed).
MDI ENTRY COMPLETE e The MDI data has been entered into the memory using
the assigned program number.
MDI RUNNING e The ongoing NC operation is based on an MDI
program and the MDI data cannot be revised.
PUSH KEY SERCH/PROG e Status in which no programs to be edited have been
called on the editing screen. When editing, press the
[SEARCH] or ~ROGRAM] menu key.
EDITING . The contents of a program are being revised on the
screen. Input is required to write the data into the
memory.
PROGRAM RUNNING . The program which is to be edited is the program now
subject to memory operation, and it cannot be edited.
VOICE OUTPUT ● The program indicated on the editing or MDI page is
being output vocally or the voice output mode has been
established.

-422-
 APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT

(3) Data input/output

Message Dcacription
DATA IN EXECUTION ● Data is now being read problem-free from the paper
tape.
EE ROM WRITING . Parameters have been input on tape normally and the
input data is being written into the E ROM.
DATA IN COMPLETE . The data has been stored problem-free.
VARIABL CONVERT ERR e This message appears under the following conditions
only when the M2/MO format applies.
During tape input, the message appears upon
completion of the tape input if there is a user macro
variable which cannot be converted. Since “lERR” is
added to the start of the block and stored in the
memo~, search for the error using an editing operation
and correct it.
The condition in which a block cannot be converted
refers to a case in which variables existing only for
M2/MO have been assigned or in which the tool
compensation variables were converted when the type II
tool offset memorv was used.
COMPARE EXECUTION . The compare operation is being executed problem-free.
COMPARE COMPLETE . The compare operation has been completed problem-
free.
DATA OUT EXECUTION . The data is being output problem-free onto the paper
tape.
DATA OUT COMPLETE ● The data output has been completed problem-free.
ERASE EXECUTION . The data is being erased problem-free.
ERASE COMPLETE ● The data erasing has been completed problem-free.
COPY EXECUTION ● The machining program is being copied problem-free.
COPY COMPLETE ● The machining program copying has been completed
problem-free.
4

CONDENSE EXECUTION . The machining program is being condensed problem-

free.
CONDENSE COMPLETE . The machining program condensing has been completed
problem-free.
MERGE EXECUTION . The machining program is being merged problem-free. I
MERGE COMPLETE ● The machining program merging has been completed
problem-free.

-423-
 ... .,,

APPENDIX 4. OPERATION MESSAGES ON CRT SETTING AND

DISPLAY UNIT

Message Description
NO. CHANGE EXECUTION e The number of the machining program is being changed
problem-free.
NO. CHANGE COMPLETE . The machining program number change has been
completed problem-free.

(4) Graphic

Message Description
TRACE EXECUTION o The graphic display trace mode is valid.
PROGRAM STOP e Tracing has been stopped by the MOO/MOl code in the
graphic check mode.
PROG. CHECK COMPLETE @ Tracing has been terminated by the M02/M30 code in
the graphic ch~k mode.

(5) Automatic programming

Message Dcscrintion
AUTO-PRO LOADING The automatic program is being loaded from the floppy
disk into the memory.
One of the following operations has been conducted while
the automatic program was being loaded.
. h attempt was made to input or output data on the
data input/output screen,
. An attempt was made to conduct a search (operation
search, restart search, graphic check search).
@ The [SFP] automatic program selector key was pressed.
Wait until the automatic programming system has
completed the loading.
(This takes approx. 1.5 minutes after the power has
been switched on.)
AUTO-PRO LOAD ERR g It is no longer possible for the automatic programming
system to load the program from the floppy disk into
the memory for some reason or other.
o Cheek the ‘floppy disk or disk drive.
NO AUTO-PRO . The floppy disk containing the automatic programming
system has not been installed in the disk drive.
Install the disk m-o~erlv.

(6 ) Others

Messaee Description
DATA PROTECTING @ A data protection key is valid, and any settings or dele-
tions to the data are prohibited.

-424-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

APPENDIX 5. LISTOF ALARMS

5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

M 01 OPERATION Alarms resulting from incorrect operation by the operator during

ZRRO R NC operation and alarms resulting from a breakdown or
malfunction on the machine side are displayed.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
0001 DOG OVERRUN (Dog overrun) e Increase the length of the near-point
When the axis returned to the reference dog.
point, the near-point detection limit switch o Reduce the speed at which the axis
did not stop above the dog but overran returns to the reference point.
the dog.
0002 ZAX NO CRSS (Z axis not crossed) e Move the axis by an amount equivalent
One of the axes did not cross the Zaxis of to one or more rotations of the detector
the detector on the initial return of the in the reverse direction to that of the
machine to the reference point after the reference point, and proceed with refer-
power was switchwl on. ence point return again.
0003 INVALID RET (Invalid return) . A [AXIS SELECT] key corresponding
When returning the axis manually to the to the wrong dirwtion has been
reference point, the direction of the return selected. The error is released by select-
differs from the axis movement direction ing the correct key to feed the axis in
which has been assigned by the [AXIS the correct direction.
SELECTJ key.
0004 EXT INTRLK (External interlock) * Since the interlock function has been
The external interlock function has been activated, it must first be released
activated (the input signal is OFF), and before operation is continued.
one of the axes is interlocked as a result. o Check the sequence on the machine
side.
* Check for a break or disconnection in
the interlock signal line.
0005 SERVO OFF AX (Servo off axis) . Since the servo “off” function has bem
The NC has been set to the internal activated, it must first be released
interlock status. before operation is continued.
e An axis which is to be removed was
assigned. Perform the correct operation.
e The axis was assigned in the same
direction as that in which the manual
skip function was set ON. Perform the
correct operation.
0006 I-VW STRK END (H/W stroke end) . Since the stroke end limit switch has
The stroke end function is activated (the been activated (the stroke end status
input signal is OFF), and one of the axes has been established), move the
is in the stroke end status. machine by operating it manually.
. Check for a break or disconnection in
the stroke end signal line.
. Check for a failure or malfunction in
the limit switch.
0007 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end) . Since the machine is in the stroke end
The stored stroke limit I or II function has status, move it by operating it
been activated. manually.
● Incorrect setting of stored stroke limit
in parameter.

-425-
 ..

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0101 NOT OP MODE (Not operating mode) . Check for a break or disconnection in
the input mode signal line.
o Check for a failure or malfunction in
the mode selector switch.
e Check the sequence program.
0102 OVERRIDE ZERO (Override zero) e The error is released by setting the
The FEED RATE OVERRIDE switch on switch to any position except zero.
the machine operation board is at zero. e If the switch has bwn set to any
position except zero, check whether the
signal line has been shortail.
. Check the sequence program.
0103 EX F SPD ZRO e The error is released by setting the
(External feed speed zero) switch on the machine control panel to
The MANUAL FEED RATE switch on any position mcept zero.
the machine operation board has been set e If the switch has been set to any
to zero when the machine was in the jog position except zero, check whether the
mode and automatic dry run mode. signal line has been shorted.
. Check the sequence program.
0104 F1 SPD ZRO (F1-digit spindle zero) * Set the F1-digit feed rate on the user
The F1-digit feed rate is zero when the parameter screen.
F1-digit feed command is executed. ID Increase the speed using the spindle
manual handle.
0105 SPINDLE STP (Spindle stop) e Rotate the spindle.
The spindle was at a standstill when the e Establish the dry run mode except when
synchronous fed command was assigned. a workpiece is being cut.
e Chexk for a break or disconnection in
the spindle encoder cable.
. Check the connections of the spindle
encoder connectors.
. Chak the spindle encoder puls=.
0106 HNDL FD NOW e Check for a break or disconnection in
(Handle feed number wrong) the handle feed axis selection signal
M axis which does not exist in the line.
specifications has been assigned for handle . Rmnsider the sequence program.
feed or the handle feed axis has not been e Check the number of axes listed in the
selected. specifications.
0107 SPDL RPM EXS (Spindle speed excessive) o Reduce the assigned spindle speed.
The spindle speed has exceeded the clamp
speed of the axis when a thread cutting
command was assigned.
0109 BLK ST INTLK (Block start interlock) ● Check the sequence program.
An interlock signal for locking the block
start has been input.

-426-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0110 CTBL ST INTLK @ Check the sequence program.
(Cutting block start interlock)
An interlock signal for locking the cutting
block start has been input.
0111 RESTART SRCH ON (Restart search on) . Search for the block to be restarted.
The restart switch has been set ON and a 9 Set the restart switch to OFF.
manual mode selected in the restart search
not-ready status.
0112 PROG CHK MODE o The program check mode is released by
(Program check mode) resetting.
The automatic start button has been pres-
sed during a program check or in the
program chezk mode.
0113 BUFF CORRECTING (Buffer correcting) . The buffer correction is released by
The automatic start button has been pres- resetting or screen selection.
sed during buffer correction. @ Buffer correction is completed by press-
ing the ~NPUT] key.
0114 AUTO PRO LOADING o Press the automatic start button after
(Automatic program loading) the automatic programming system has
The automatic start button has been pres- been loaded.
SEXI when the automatic programming
system was being loaded from the floppy
disk into the memory.
0115 RESET PROCESSING (Reset processing) @ During tape rewinding, wait for the
The automatic start button has been pres- rewinding to be completed or press the
sed during reset processing or tape rewind- RESET button to suspend the rewind-
ing. ing, and then press the automatic start
button.
● During resetting, wait for resetting to
be completed and then press the
automatic start button.
0116 CYC TM COUNT (Cycle time counting) . Wait for the counting to be completed
The automatic start button has been pres- or suspend it by resetting, and then pr-
sed while the cycle time was being counted ess the automatic start button.
or in the cycle time counting mode.
0117 NO PLAYBACK (No playback) ● During editing, use the ~PUT] or
The playback switch was set ON during PREVIOUS PAGE] key to release the
editing or in the full-size mode (9 inches). editing, and then set the PLAYBACK
switch to ON.
. First set the (9-inch) editing screen to
the half-size mode and then set the
PLAYBACK switch to ON.
0118 (Not used) For special function . Refer to the instruction manual for
details on the special-purpose functions.
0119 (Not used) For special function ● Refer to the instruction manual for
details on the special-purpose functions.

-427-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0120 (Not used) For special function . Refer to the instruction manual for
details on the special-purpose functions.
0121 (Not used) For special function e Refer to the instruction manual for
details on the special-purpose functions.
0122 (Not used) For special function @ Refer to the instruction manual for
details on the specizd-purpose functions.

.t
,:

,,,

,,
... ,.
.

-.
 ,.
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.1 OPERATION ALARMS

M 02 NEED R.P . RTN When an absolute position detection system is used, this alarm
appears when the absolute position data has been lost or when
the detector is defective.
No. Description
0001 An error has arisen as a result of checking the absolute position data as below when the
power was switched on. The absolute position data is lost.
Check sum check: Obtain the total sum of the data.
Paritv check in vertical direction: Exclusive OR the data total
0002 The machine moved more than the allowable distance with the power OFF.
Allowable distance > (Absolute position when power is switched ON – Absolute
position when power is switched OFF)
---------- ------------ --------------- ------------- .. . . . ... . .. . ..-------------- ---------- . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .
1The allowable distance is set in #20 abslmt on the axis specification parameter screen.
~The setting range is from 0.001 to 99999.999 mm. A zero setting is treated as: ball
:screw pitch * 0.9
,--------------- --------------------------- -------------- ------------ ------------

0003 Absolute value ~ at the reference point in dog-type zero point return has exceeded the
regulated range.
0004 I Dog-type zero point return (reference point setting) incomplete state.

NOTE L Return oneration when alarm has occurred

Since au~omatic operation cannot be performed when the M02 NEED R.P. RTN alarm has
occurred, perform dog-type zero point return. Automatic operation is enabled when the alarm
is released.
NOTE 2 When alarm 0003 has occurred, first check the parameter (’grspc= RNG), turn the power
OFF/ON, and perform dog-type zero point return again. If the alarm still occurs, the detector
may be defective and the MELDAS Service Center should therefore be contacted.

,,

-429-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.2 STOP CODES

5.2 STOP CODES

These codes denote a status which, due to some reason or other, has caused by NC system to stop.

FO1 CAN’T CYCLE ST In this status, automatic operation cannot be executed when an
attempt has been made to execute it from the NC stop status.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
0101 AX IN MOTION (Axis in motion) e Try automatic start again after all the
Since one of the axes is in motion, axes have stopped.
automatic start is not possible.
0102 READY OFF (Ready off) o Since another alarm is to blame, check
Automatic start is not possible because the this out first and take remedial action.
NC ready has not been supplied.
0103 RESET ON (Reset on) e Set the reset input signal to “off.”
Automatic start is not possible because the The reset switch has malfunctioned (or
reset signal has been input. is “on” at all times).
e Reconsider the sequence program.
0104 A-OP STP SGL . Take another look at the FEED HOLD
(Automatic operation stop signal “on”) switch which has a normally closed
The FEED HOLD switch on the machine (NC) contact.
operation board is ON (activated). e Check for a break or disconnection in
the feed hold signal line.
e Reconsider the sequence program.
0105 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis) e If the stroke end has been reached by
Automatic start is not possible because the axis end, move the axis by operat-
one of the axes has reached the stroke ing it manually.
end. . Check for a break or disconnection in
the stroke end signal line.
@ Check for a failure or malfunction in
the stroke end limit switch.
0106 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis) . Move the axis manually.
Automatic start is not possible because s Check the contents of the parameter
one of the axes has reached the stored unless the axis end is at the stored
stroke limit. stroke limit.

-’430-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.2 STOP CODES

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0107 NO OP MODE (No operation mode) ● Select the automatic operation mode.
The operation mode has not been selected. e Check for a break or disconnection in
the automatic mode (memory, tape,
MDI) signal line.
0108 OP MODE DUPLI . Check for shortcircuiting in the mode
(Operation mode duplicated) selection signal line (memory, tape,
Two or more automatic operation modes MDI).
have been selected. . Check for a switch failure or
malfunction.
o Reconsider the sequence program.
0109 OP MODE CI-ING @ Return to the previous automatic
(Operation mode change) operation mode and conduct automatic
One automatic operation mode has been start.
changed to another automatic operation
mode.
0110 TAPE SRCH Tape searching) o Conduct automatic start upon
Automatic start is not possible because a completion of the tape search.
tape search is being conducted.
0111 PROG RESRCH INCMPT 6 Conduct automatic start upon
(Program restart search incomplete) completion of the program restart
Automatic start is not possible because the search.
program restart search has not been
completed.
0112 PROG RST NO-RTN . Perform the restart position return
(Program restart position non-return) manually.
Automatic start is not possible because no e Set the automatic restart valid
return has bem made to the restart parameter to ON and conduct
position, automatic start.
0113 TEMP ALM . The NC control system has exceeded
(Temperature alarm generated) the regulated temperature. Devise a
Automatic start is not possible because a means of cooling.
temperature alarm (2253TEMP. OVER)
has been generated.

T02 FEED HOLD The feed hold mode has been established during automatic
operation due to some condition or other.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
0201 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis) . Move the axis from the stroke end limit
One of the axes has reached the stroke switch manually.
end. . The machining program must be
revised.
0202 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis) . Move the axis manually.
One of the axes has reached the stored ● The machining program must be
stroke limit. revised.

-431-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.2 STOP CODES

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0203 RST SGNL ON (Reset signal ON) . Since the position at which the program
The reset signal has been input. is executed returns to the head,
automatic operation is conducted from
the start point of the machining
program.
0204 FD HD SGNL ON (Feed hold signal ON) o Automatic operation can be resumed by
The FEED HOLD switch is at the ON pressing the CYCLE START switch.
position.
0205 OP MODE CHNG e Return to the previous automatic
(Operation mode change) operation mode and conduct automatic
One automatic operation mode has been start using the CYCLE START switch.
changed to another automatic operation
mode.

T03 BLOCK STOP Operation stops after a single block in the program has been
executed during automatic operation.
Error
Details Rem&y
No.
0301 SNGL BLK ON (Single block on) e Automatic operation can be resumed by
The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the establishing the automatic operation
machine operation board is at the ON mode.
position.
0302 MACRO BLK STP (M acro block stop) See above.
0303 AUTO MD CHNG
(Automatic mode change)
0304 MDI BLK STP (MDI end block stop) a After the settings have been completed,
operation starts from the block with the
cursor when the CYCLE START
switch is set to ON.

T04 COLLATION STOP The collation stop mode is establish during automatic
operation.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
0401 Collation stop o Automatic operation can be resumed by
establishing the automatic operation

-432-
 .

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.3 SERVO ALARMS

5.3 SERVO ALARMS

These alarms pertain to trouble and malfunctioning in the drive amplifiers, motors, encoders and other
servo systems.
Indicated on the alarm message screen are the error messages, axis addresses and error numbers. The axes
subject to the error and error number are also indicated on the servo monitor page. When a multiple
number of errors has occurred, up to two errors per axis are indicated on the servo monitor screen, and
these should be checked.
If the axis address does not appear on the alarm message screen, a spindle alarm is signified. Refer to the
section on the spindle alarms.

;01 SERVO ALARM: The alarm can be released by first removing the cause of the
PR alarm and then switching off the NC power and switching it back
Address of axis where error on again.
las arisen is indicated.)
Error
Details Remedy
No.
10 VOLT LOW (Low voltage) e Check the input voltage with a
The voltage has dropped below AC 160 voltmeter. It should be AC 200/220V
AC (* 5V). (T;: %).
Temporary stop. o Check the input voltage with a
synchroscope and check whether
operation has stopped momentarily.
Approx. 25 msec or more with an input
voltage of 200V.
11 OVERSPEED 2 (Overspwd 2) o The assigned speed is too high. R&uce
The position feedback signal PPS was the feed rate.
excessively high, causing an overflow to * Check the parameters (ball screw pitch,
occur in the internal processing. movement unit, position loop constant
1, position loop constant 2, position
loop gain).
12 MEM ABNML 1 0 Check the connections of the
(Memo~ abnormality 1) connectors.
EPROM check sum during initialization; * Check for a break or disconnection in
SRAM or 2-port RAM check malfunction. the cables.
EPROM or 2-port RAM malfunction. . Replace the RFO1 card.
A Initiate resetting by switching off the
amplifier power.
13 EXT CLK ABNML o Check the connectors of the cables link-
(External clock abnormality) ing the NC system and amplifiers and
The processing of the position command linking the amplifiers with other
data supplied from the NC system was not amplifiers.
completed within the normal time span . Check for breaks or disconnections in
allowed by the servo amplifier software. the cables linking the NC system and
There is a malfunction in the timing signal amplifiers and linking the amplifiers
from the NC system, with other amplifiers.
. Replace the control card (R FO1).
14 WATCH DOG (Watch dog) . Check the connations of the
Servo IT was not executed for more than connectors.
the specified time. . Check for breaks or disconnections in
There is a malfunction in the 2-port signal the cables.
or timing signal from the NC. . Check whether the EPROMs have been
mounted properly. Check whether they
have been mounted in the locations
marked “EPROM” and whether any of
their pins are bent.
● Replace the RFO1 card or add-on card
(RF31/33).

-433-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.3 SERVO ALARMS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
15 MEMRY ABNL 2 . Check the connectors of the cables linking
(Memory abnormality 2) the NC system and amplifiers and linking the
There is a 2-port RAM check amplifiers with other amplifiers.
malfunction or, alternatively, parity @ Check for breaks or disconnections in the
was detected when the initial cables linking the NC system and amplifiers
paramders were received. and linking the amplifiers with other
There is a malfunction in the cable amplifiers.
connecting the NC or in the 2-port e Replace the control card.
RAM. . Take measures to deal with the noise.
There is a high level of noise in the
cables linking the NC system and
amplifiers and linking the amplifiers
with other amplifiers.
16 MGNT PL ABNL * Check the cormcctions of the detector
(Magnetic pole abnormality) connectors.
When the initial magnetic pole * Check for a break or disconnection in the
position was detected, it was not pos- cable between the amplifier and detector.
sible to detect the pole position * Defective position detector (encoder).
properly. o Check the STY setting on the servo
parameter page.
o Check the MTY setting on the servo
parameter page.
o Replace the control card.
17 CRCT BD ABNL ● Replace the control card (RFO1).
(Circuit board abnormality)
The A/D converter value was not
correct at the time of initialization on
the RFO1 card.
There are defective parts around the
A/D converter.
20 NO SIGNAL 1 (No signal 1) o Check the connections of the detector
There is a malfunction in the signal connectors.
(U, V, W, A, B, Z) of the encoder o Check for a break or disconnection in the
connected to the RFO1 card. cable between the amplifier and detector.
* Defective encoder.
21 NO SIGNAL 2 (No signal 2) . Check the connections of the detector
There is a malfunction in the signal connectors.
(~ B, Z) of the encoder connected to . Check for a break or disconnection in the
the RF31/33 card. cable between the amplifier and detector.
. Defective encoder.
22 NO SIGNAL 3 (No signal 3) . Check the connections of the detector
There is a malfunction in the signal of connectors.
the resolver 1X connected to the . Check for a break or disconnection in the
RF33 card. cable between the amplifier and detector.
Something is wrong with the excita- . Defective resolver.
tion signal. . Replace the AMP card RF33.
25 BATTERY ABNML ● Replace the batteries.
(Battery abnormality) . Zero point return must be performed again
The voltage from the batteries used to since it is possible that the absolute values
back up the absolute value detector have been lost.
circuits on the RF32 and 33 cards has
dropped.

-434-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.3 SERVO ALARMS

1
Error Remedy
Details
No.
30 EXC REGENRTN . Check the ORT setting on the sewo
(Excessive regeneration) parameter page.
Acceleration/deceleration has been @ Reduce the frequency of rapid traverse
conducted too frequently. acceleration/deceleration.
(Care is required since the regenerative o Reduce the rapid traverse rate.
resistance overheats.) e Reconsider the unbalanced load on the
This creates an excessively unbalanced moving axis.
load on the moving axis. aI Add the optional regenerative
Defective power transistor for regenera- resistance.
tion. . Replace the power transistor for
regeneration or replace the unit.
31 EXCS SPEED 1 (Excessive speed 1) e The assigned speed is too high.
The speed has exceeded 2400 rpm in the e Check the acceleration/deceleration time
HA40, 80, 100, 200 or 300 model and constant if overshooting results during
3600 rpm in the HA43 or HA83 model. acceleration.
With an ultra-precision encoder, the speed o Check the gain when the servo system
has exceeded 1400 rpm in HA40, HA80, is unstable and overshooting results.
HAlOO, HA200 or HA300 model. VG1, PGN
. Check the parameters.
MTY, RNG, PIT
. Reduce the rapid traverse rate.
● Check the cables between the position
detectors and servo amplifiers.
o Defective position detector.
e Check the least command increment.
32 OVER-CURRENT (Overcurrent) . Ground the motor bus.
An overcurrent has flowed from the DC e Shortcircuit the motor bus.
bus (+) side. @ Replace the speed detection cable.
o Check the mounting direction of the
speed detector.
STY
● Replace the speed detector.
. Replace the RFO1 card.
● Defective main circuit.

33 OVER-VOLTAGE (Over-voltage) . Check the connections of the regenera-

te DC bus voltage has exceeded 400V. tion terminal board.
. When the acceleration/deceleration
frequency is too high and the
acceleration/deceleration time constant
is too low:
(1) Try increasing the acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
(2) Reduce the acceleration/deceleration
frequency.
(3) Reduce the rapid traverse rate.
● Reconsider the unbalanced load on the
moving axis.
. Replace the regenerative resistance.
. Replace the power transistor for
regeneration or replace the unit.

-435-
APPENDIX 5. LIST t2F ALARMS
5.3 SERVO ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
34 DATA PARITY (Data parity) ● Check the connections of the CNIA
Parity occurred when data was being and CNIB connectors on the RFO1
received from NC system. card.
D Check for a break or disconnection in
the cable linking the NC system with
the servo amplifier.
e It is conceivable that then error was
caused by noise and so check that
measures to counter the noise have
been taken.
o
— Replace the NC card (M C611/MC632).
35 DATA ABNORML (Data abnormality) e Reduce the speed if the assigned speed
There has been too great a change in the is too high.
assigned position from the NC system. e Check the connections of the CNIA
and CNIB connectors on the RFO1
card.
o Check for a break or disconnection in
the cable linking the NC system with
the servo amplifier.
● It is conceivable that the error was
caused by noise and so check that
measures to counter the noise have
been taken.
e Replace the NC card (M C611/MC632).
36 TRANSM ERROR o Check the connections of the CNIA
(Transmission error) and CNIB connectors on the RFO1
Periodic data transmission from the NC card.
system has been cut off. Q Ch~k for a break or disconnection in
the cable linking the NC system with
the servo amplifier.
● 11 is conceivable that the error was
caused by noise and so check that
measures to counter the noise have
been taken.
e Replace the NC card (M C61VMC632).

S 02 INIT PARAM ERR There is something wrong with a parameter or parameters

transmitted from the NC system to the amplifier when the NC
power was switched on.

I Error
Nn I Details I Remedy

37 PARAMT ERROR (Parameter error) ● Check the parameters.

The parameters transmitted at the time of e The NC power must be switched off
initialization are not correct. after the parameters have been changed.

-436-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.3 SERVO ALARMS

$03 SERVO ALARM : These alarms are displayed when something has gone wrong with
NR the servo system.
After the cause of the alarm has been removed, release the alarm
by entering the NC RESET key.
Error
Details Remedy
no.
45 FIN OVERHEAT (Fin overheating) @ Reduce the load.
The thermal protector on the fin in the @ When the thermal protector is defective,
amplifier’s power section has been activ- replace the unit.
ated, warning that the amplifier has been
operating on a current which is in excess
of its continuous output current. The
regenerative resistance or a regenerative
power transistor has been overloaded.
46 MTR OVERHEAT (Motor overheating) . Reduce the load.
The thermal protector built into the motor @ Check the terminal board connections.
has been activated, warning that the motor o When the thermal protector is defective,
has been operating on a current which is replace the motor.
in excessive of its continuous output cur-
rent.
50 OVERLOAD 1 . Reduce the load when the load inertia
The time, during which the motor current and friction are excessively high.
has exceeded the parameter OLL o Check the OLL and OLT servo
(overload detection level) as converted into parameters.
the rating when the motor has stalled, has e If hunting occurs, proceed with
exceeded the parameter OLT (overload adjustment using the servo parameters.
time constant). The load inertia and fric- o Incorrect amplifier U, V, W wiring.
tion are excessively high. Hunting may @ Try replacing the detector and detector
occur due to an incorrect parameter sett- cable.
ing.
51 OVERLOAD 2 (Overload 2) * Increase the time constant if the load
The command for the current exceeding inertia is extremely high. Alternatively,
9570 of the current limit has continued for reduce the load.
more than half a second. o If hunting has occurred, proceed with
The load inertia is extremely high. adjustment using the servo parameters.
The machine has collided. e Try replacing the detector and detector
cable.
o When the voltage of the DC bus inside
the unit has dropped, replace the unit.
52 EXCESS ER120R (Excessive error) e Try increasing the time constant when
The actual machine position with respect the inertia is excessively high and ac-
to the command has exceeded the celebration is disabled. Alternatively, try
parameter settings OD1 (excessive margin reducing the rapid traverse rate.
for error with sewo “on”) and 0D2 @ If overshooting or hunting arises,
(excessive margin for error with servo proceed with the adjustment by means
“off”). of the servo parameters.
The error may be caused by excessive . Inmrrect amplifier U, V, W wiring.
inertia which disables acceleration or by o Try replacing the detector and detector
overshooting or hunting. cable.
e When the voltage of the DC bus inside
the unit has dropped, replace the unit,
. Adjust the servo system gain. VG1,
PGN

-437-
 ,.,

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.3 SERVO ALARMS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
55 EXT EMRG STP e Check the cause of the error at the NC
(External emergency stop) or machine side.
The shortcircuiting of B and R on the e When a contact inside the unit is
terminal board has been released. defective, replace the unit.
An emergency stop signal has been input
from the NC or machine side.
56 AXIS ABNORML 0 Axis alarm
(Other axis abnormality) e Terminal conneztor has not been
An alarm has arisen in any of the axes connected.
connected to CNIB. . Check the power input for the axes
which are not used.

(Parameter No.) (Axis name)

S 51 PARAMETER [11 The alarm is released when the parameter is checked and
the proper value ret. Illegal parameters are ignored and
ERROR
the value aisting prior to the illegal arameter setting is
retained.(SeIVoOFF doea not result.5
The Darameter
. number in which‘Tthe
alarm has occurred and the axis Referto Seztion5.4on the spindlealarmswhenthe
name are indicated. axisnamek not indicated.

Parameter No. I Details I Remedv

1–32 Illegal data set in servo parameter. Refer to warning No. ~ in
the AC Servo Maintenance
Tnstructirm Manual.

; 52 This indicat~ a servo warning,

Address of axis in which
varning has occurred is
lisplay&l
Varning
Details
no.
m Excessive regeneration warning
This occurs when 80% of the excessive regeneration alarm level has been reached.
An alarm does not result immediately and care is required.
(No servo OFF)
El Overload warning
This occurs when 80’% of the overload 1 alarm level has been reached.
An alarm does not result immediately and care is required.
(No servo OFF)
EM Parameter error warning
An illegal parameter has been set.
IllegaI parameters are ignored and the value existing prior to the illegal parameter sett-
ing is retained.
Check the parameters and the warning will be released when the proper value is set.
(No servo OFF)

-438-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.3 SERVO ALARMS

Warning
Details
no,
E5 Absolute position detection warning
The value of absolute position detector 1X is incmreet. A malfunction occurs when the
value of 1X on the servo monitor page is 278 < 1X < 4722 or 1X > 5070.
Absolute value detection is not being conducted properly.
The following steps must be taken.
(1) Perform dog-type reference point return again.
(2) If the warning is not released even after performing step (l), replace the deteetor and
RF33 card.
(No servo OFF)
E6 Overtravel warning
Overtravel has occurred with speed loop step stop.
(No servo OFF)
E7 NC emergency stop
Emergeney stop has been assigned from the NC.

‘!’

-439-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

These alarms are based on malfunctions in the spindle amplifiers, motors, encoders and other parts of the
spindle system.
The error message and error number are displayed on the alarm message page. When a multiple number
of errors have occurred, the second and third error numbers appear on the spindle monitor page and thus
should be checked.
An alarm from the spindle side is signified when the axis address (X, Y, Z, A, B, C) display does not appear
after the message display on the alarm message page. When the axis address does appear, it signifies a
servo alarm. Refer to the section on servo alarms.

S01 SERVO ALARM: After the cause of the alarm has been removed, switch off the
PR NC system’s power and set it back on again to release the alarm.
S03 SERVO ALARM:
NR
Error
Details Remedy
no.
10 Insufficient voltage . Check the input voltage using a
This occurs when the input supply voltage voltmeter.
has fallen below the value guaranteed by (Specification: AC200/230V Y~~%)
the specifications or when the power has . Check the input voltage on a
been cut off momentarily for more than synchroswpe and check whether a
15 ms. momentary stop of more than 15ms has
occurred.
12 Memory malfunction 1 . Check whether the EPROMs have been
This occurs when read and write mounted properly (whether the ROM
operations cannot be wnducted properly number locations tally and whether any
for the internal memory used to control of the pins have been bent).
the controller. EPROM locations:
(Check when the controller’s power is FR-SF: SF-CA card 2F, 4F
switched on.) FR-SFJ: SFJ-CA1 card 16G, 17G
15 Memory malfunction 2 . Check the connections of the cable con-
This occurs when the 2-port memo~, nectors between the NC system and
which is used for wmmunication when amplifier and between the amplifier and
coupling by bus the M300 series CNC, spindle.
does not operate properly. . Check that the screws used to secure
the connectors have been tightened up.
. Check for breaks or disconnections in
the cables between the NC system and
amplifier and between the amplifier and
spindle.
. Replace the SF-TL/TLJ card.
. Check whether the amplifier, NC
system and motor grounding terminals
have been grounded and whether the
cables have been shielded.
17 Card malfunction e Replace the SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card.
This occurs when the parts on the PCB for
control applications do not function
properly.

-440-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
no.
20 No signal 1 (PLG) o Check the voltage level of the detmtor
This occurs when the signal from the attached to the motor.
detector (motor built-in encoder) attachwl (Chwk that it is 3V peak-to-peak; if the
to the motor is not at its proper level. value differs greatly from this, replace
the PCB for the detector attached to
the motor.)
< Check terminals>
FR-SF: SF-CA card
CH45-CH9, CH44-CH9
FR-SFJ: SFJ-CA1 card
CH31-CH35, CH32-CH35
@ Replace the SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card.
21 No signal 2 (spindle encoder) e Check for breaks or disconnections in
This occurs when no signal from the orient the CONB cable.
encoder is input or when the signal is not . Replace the orient encoder.
at its proper level.
22 IC (MAC012) malfunction @ Check whether the SF-CA card IC
(MAC012) is mounted properly.
@ Replace the SF-CA card.
23 Excessive speed deviation o Set to “l” if the VKI parameter is O.
This occurs when the difference between @ When the speed displayed is O rpm
the command speed and motor speed although the motor is rotating at
exceeds the rating. several dozen rpm:
Remedy the problem in the same way
as for alarm no. 20.
@ When motor is not running smoothly
or it is not running at all:
Check for breaks or disconnections in
the U, V and W power lines between
the amplifier and motor.
24 Breaker tripped FR-SF @ Check for a malfunction in the supply
voltage, capacity and waveform.
@ Check whether this happens during
deceleration, or whether there is a
momentarily power failure or moment-
ary power drop.
e Replace the SF-CA card.
Main circuit malfunction FR-SFJ e Check whether any of the power
This occurs when the main transistors, transistors are damaged.
contractors or other main circuit parts are @ Replace the unit.
not operating properly.
25 Converter overcurrent FR-SF o Check for a malfunction in the supply
voltage, capacity and waveform.
Q Check whether this happens during
deceleration, or whether there is a
momentarily power failure or moment-
ary power drop.
. Replace the SF-CA card.
Breaker circuit malfunction FR-SFJ . Check whether any of the power
This occurs when the breaker circuit is not transistors are damaged.
operating properly. o Replace the unit.

-441-
 ,, ...

APPENDIX 5. L.IS T OF ALARMS

5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

Error Details Remedy

no.
26 dissing power supply phase \ Check the input power supply.
he of the 3 input power supply phases, b Check the control power supply fuses.
vhich is not used for the control power
,upply, is missing.
27 :PU malfunction (division error) E Check and compare the NC screen
l?his occurs when a division error has oc- spindle parameters among the
:urred in the arithmetic operation of the parameter setting list adhered to the
2PU since the parameter has been cover of the FR-SF/SFJ main unit.
ncorrectly set.
31 ~cessive speed D The Cornmancl speedistoo high.
rhis occurs when the motor sped has B When the speed control system is unst-
xceeded 115$%of the maximum speed. able and overshooting results:
Check the gain VKP and VK1.
1. Has the error arisen with VKP set to
63 and VKI to 1?
2. When the alarm occurs:
Replace the SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card.
When the alarm does not occur
Set the gain to the maximum value.
32 Dvercurrent e Set the parameter 02 motor selection on
This occurs when the parameter 02 motor the FR-SF/SFJ main unit properly.
selection is not corrmt when an overcur- @ Check for a malfunction in the supply
rent exceding the rating has flowed to the voltage, capacity and waveform.
controller. o Check whether the motor bus is
grounded or shorted.
o Replace the SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card.
. Replace the unit.
33 (lvervokage * High power supply impedance.
This occurs when the main circuit capaci- e Check for a malfunction in the supply
tor voltage has exceeded the rating due to voltage, capacity and waveform.
the regenerative energy during motor o Check whether this happens during
deceleration. deceleration, or whether there is a
momentarily power failure or moment-
ary power drop.
0 Replace the SF-CA card.
e Check for breaks or disconnections in
the resistor unit.
● Replace the SFJ-CA1 card.
*
— Replace the unit.
34 Data parity The error may be due to noise between
This occurs when a parity error has occur- the NC system and spindle and so it
red with bus coupling with the M300 series should be ch~ked to see whether noise
CNC. countermeasures have been taken.
35 Data malfunction A defective cable or malfunction in the
This occurs when a movement command memory for bus coupling transmission
exceeding the rating has been supplied may be to blame and so take the
from the CNC system with bus coupling remedial measures for alarm no. 15.
with the M300 s~ries CNC. - - Check that the screws on the contractors
between the NC system, servo amplifier
36 Transfer malfunction and spindle are tight.
This occurs when the data was not Replace the NC card (MC611/MC632).
transferred properly with bus coupling
with the M300 series CNC.

-442-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

Error
Details Remedy
no,
37 Parameter error Take the same remedial action as for
This occurs when any parameter value alarm no. 27.
outside the allowable range has been set
(check this when switching on the controll-
er’s power).
45 Controller overheating . Reduce the load.
This occurs when there is something . Check whether the air-cooling fan
wrong with the ambient temperature, when inside the unit is running.
there is an overload or when the . Check for malfunctioning in the
air-cooling fan stops and the main circuit thermal protector inside the unit.
devices have overheated. e Replace the SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card.
46 Motor overheating in FR-SF FR-SF/SFJ
Motor and resistor unit overheating in . Reduce the load.
FR-SFJ @ Check for breaks or disconnections
This occurs when there is an overload or between motor OHS1 and CON2 pin 3,
when the motor cooling blower stops and and between 0HS2 and CON2 pin 2.
the motor has overheated. @ Check whether the motor cooling fan is
This occurs when the motor acceleration/ running.
deceleration is repeated at a frequency
exceeding the rating or when the resistor we R uce t e acceleration/deceleration
air-cooling fan stops and the resistor unit frequency.
has overheated. . Check for breaks or disconnmtions
This occurs when TBZ is not connected or between A and wire AL1 and between
when CON2 has become disconnected. B and wire AL2 of FR-SFJ main unit
TB2 and the terminal board of the
resistor unit.
@ Check whether the air-cooling fan of
the resistor unit is running.
52 Excessive error . Check whether the orient detector
(including orientation) direction of parameter 0RS2 is correct.
This occurs when the position tracking . Check whether the position loop detec-
error exceeds the rating during position tor direction of parameter 0RS2 is
loop operation. correct.
This occurs when the mounting direction
selection (parameter 30 bit 8) of the
encoder is reversed.
55 External emergency stop FR-SF/SFJ
This occurs when an emergency stop signal . Release the external emergency stop.
has been supplied from the outside.
-ether FR-SFJ main unit
parameters 09 and OA have been set to
<’3;9
(When 09 has been set to “3,”
shortcircuit between CON1 pins 47
and 10.
When OA has been set to “3,”
shortcircuit between CON1 pins 48
and 10.)
56 Malfunction in another axis . ChNk whether the CNIB termination
This occurs when a malfunction has occur- resistance has bexm connected.
red in any other semo axis with bus coupl- o Check whether the CNIB connector
ing with the M300 series CNC. screw is tight enough.
This occurs when the CNIB termination
resistance has become disconnected.

-443-
 ,,,,,..,,,,. ,, ,

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.4 SPINDLE ALARMS

(Parameter No.)
,....,
S51 PARAMETER mu :: This indicates a warning when a parameter
permissible range has beerr set.
outside the
ERROR
T
The Darameter number in which the L Refer to Section 5.3 on the servo alarrnswhen the axis
alar~ has occurred and the axis nameis indicated.
name are indicated.

Parameter
Details Remedy
error No.
21 Parameter warning
A parameter value outside the permissible range Check the contents of the spindle
\
has been set. parameter number for which the
28
The warning number denotes the number error is displayed.
(hexadecimal notation) of the parameter for the Refer to the parameter setting list
spindle where the warning occurred. attached to the FR-SF spindle
Parameters #21 through #28 (HEX) are reset on amplifier.
the spindle parameter screen of the NC system. Refer to warning No. E4 in the
(Even when set from the spindle side, the setting troubleshooting swtion of the
made in the NC system will be valid.) Spindle Drive Maintenance Instruc-
Parameters #21 through #28 at the spindle side tion Manual.
are equivalent to ~arameters #33 through #40 at
the N-C side. ‘

S52 This indicates the spindle warning.

Spindle warning when the
address (X, Y, ~ A, B, C) of
the axis in which the alarm has
occurred i not present.

F
Warning
Details
no.
m Momentary stop warning
Warning when a tempora~ voltage drop has occurred in the voltage
(No servo OFF)
El Overload warning
Warning when overload in controller or motor continues for a period exceeding the
rated time
(No servo OFF)
E4 Parameter warning
Warning when a parameter outside the allowable range has besn set
(No servo OFF)
NC emergency stop

L
E7
Emergenq stop from the NC system
(Servo OFF after deceleration and stop)

-444-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.5 MCP ALARMS

5.5 MCP ALARMS

These alarms denote that trouble has arisen in the drive amplifiers or other interfacing areas.
(The characters in bold appear on the screen as the actual messages.)

’01 M EM OILY ALARM Trouble in memory.

Check out the RAMs and ROMs.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
Ooo1 LCL RAM ABNL e Replace the MC611 card.
(local RAM abnormality)
0002 2 PT RAM ABNL * Replace the MC611 card.
(2-port RAM abnormality)
0004 ROM ABNORMAL (ROM abnormality) e Replace the MC411, MC413 cards.

(02 SYSTEM ALARM There is something wrong with the data transmission between the
MCP and amplifier after the NC power was switched on.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
0002 BUS ERROR (bus error) . Chink the mounting status of the
amplifiers.
e Check the connections of the connec-
tors and check the amplifier power.
0003 ADRSS ERROR (address error) . A software or hardware failure may be
to blame. Contact the nearest
0004 ILLEG INSTRC (illegal instruction)
MELDAS Service Center.
0005 ZERO DIVISION (zero division)
0050 BCKGRND ERROR
(background processing error)
0051 DATA SEND ERR
(data transmission error)
0052 CHK SUM ERR (check sum error)
0060 PARITY ERR (parity error)
\
0069
0070 AMP 2-P ERR (amplifier 2-port error)
\
0079

-445-
 .. .

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.5 MCP ALARMS

Y03 AMP. UNEQUIP - Check mounting status of amplifiers.

PED . Check the destinations of the cable connections.
e Check for breaks and disconnections in the cables.
e Check the connections of the connectors.
The amplifier input power is not supplied.
Ille~al amtdifier axis number switch

Y04 M CP RAM PARITY I

Y05 INIT PARAM ERR I Error in parameter which is required when the NC power is
] switched on

Error
Details Remedy
No.
1 Input setting unit error e Contact service center.
There is an internal setting error.
2 Illegal value setting for RNG (movement . Chwk parameter settings.
unit) or PC2 (’gear ratio 2) Check #2 “PC2” and #19 “RNG” on
the servo parameter page of the
machine parameter screen.

3 No RNG (movement unit) or PC2 (gear e Check parameter settings.

ratio 2) setting Check #2 “PC2” and #19 “RNG” on
the servo parameter page of the
machine parameter screen.
4 No PIT @all screw pitch) or PC1 (gear o Check parameter settings.
ratio 1) setting Check #1 “PCl” and #18 “PIT” on the
servo parameter page of the machine
parameter screen.

Y06 mcD_ no ERROR I There is an error in the mcp-no settin~.

I

Details Remedy

Error in mcp-no TLC axis mounting card @ Check the parameter settings.
number) e Check #14 [mcp_ no] on the PLC axis

-446-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.5 MCP ALARMS

(Alarm no.) Z phase B phnse A plme

Alarm No. nmsing missing missing
Y08 NO SPINDLE [010101
1
S GNL 1 x

2 x

3 x x

4 x

5 x x

6 x x

7 x x x

Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
0001 There is something wrong with the spindle @ Check the feedback cable of the spindle
encoder signal. encoder and the encoder itself.
\
The data transfer to the servo amplifier . No-signal detection is invalid if the
0007
and spindle amplifier now stops and so spindle encoder feedback is not supplied
alarm 36 (transfer error) applies to these to the NC side. (MC632 S1 setting)
amplifiers.

Y51 PARAMETER Something is wrong with the parameters which generate the
ERROR alarm when the control axis is moving.
Error
Details Remedy
No.
1 LN R-T ERR (linear acceleration/ @ Check #4 GOtL on the axis specifica-
deceleration rapid traverse time constant tion parameter page of the machine
error) parameter screen.
The time constant has not been set or the
value set is outside the setting range.
2 LN C-F ERR (linear acceleration/dccelera- @ Check #7 GltL on the axis specifica-
tion cutting feed time constant error) tion parameter page of the machine
The time constant has not been set or the parameter screen.
value set is outside the setting range.
3 DELAY R-T ERR (primary delay rapid * Check #S GOtl on the axis specification
traverse time constant error) parameter page of the machine
The time constant has not been set or the parameter screen.
value set is outside the setting range.
4 DLY C-F ERR (primary delay cutting @ Check 4% Gltl on the axis specification
feed time constant error) parameter page of the machine
The time constant has not been set or the parameter screen.
value set is outside the setting range.
9 GRID INTVL ERR (grid interval error) . Check #4 grspc on the zero point
The time constant has not been set or the return parameter page of the machine
value set is outside the permissible setting parameter screen.
range.

-447-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.5 MCP ALARMS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
12 SYN TAP ERR (synchronous tapping e Check #22 tap-tl on the basic
cycle acceleration/deceleration time eonst- parameter screen.
ant error)
The time constant has not been set or the
value set is outside the setting range.

,: !
,,.

-448-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.6 SYSTEM ALARMS

5.6 SYSTEM ALARM S

1. When the system has been stopped by a system error, the following messages are displayed on the
screen together with the registe; applying “at the time when the error occurs.

Mes,sacze I Details Remedy

Parity error RAM error Make a note of the register indicated
Write guard A write-protected address has been writ- and contact the MELDAS Service
error ten. Center.
Bus error A non-existent memory has been ac-
cessed.
Zero divide A division has been made with zero as
the denominator.
Watch dog The software processing is not operating
error properly.
Illegal Other illegal software operation.
exception

9-inch CRT (4Ct-character mode) 9-inch CRT (80-character mode),

14-inch CRT
$R.xXXX Pc-xxxxxxxx

rl
Do-xxxxxxxx

!3
s F-xxxxxxxx
D1-xxXXXXXX o 2-XXXXXXXX
Do-xxxxxxxx D3-XX XXX XXX o 4.-XXXXXXXX
D1-xxxxxxxx n 5- XX XXX XXX D6-XXXXXXXX
Dz-xxxxxxxx D7-X XXXXXXX Ao-xxxxxxxx
Retiter D3.XXXXXXXX Al .. Xxxxxxxx
disfilay D4-xxxxxxxx A3-XXXXXXXX

1-
05-XXXXXXXX A5-XXXXXXXX
D6-XXXXXXXX
07-XXXXXXXX Register display
.O-xxxxxxxx
A1-XXXXXXXX
A2-XXXXXXXX
A 3-XXXXXXXX
A4-XXXXXXXX
A5-XXXXXXXX
A6-XXXXXXXX

2. (The characters in bold appear on the screen as the actual messages.)

Message 13etails Remedy

P 990 PREPRO S/W ERR e Contact the MELDAS Service
(preprocessing software error) Center.
The software is not operating properly.
Z09 This occurs when a failure arises in a e Replace the cable.
REMOTE system using a remote 1/0 unit. e Replace the remote 1/0 unit.
1/0 ERR . Broken or disconnected cable . Switch on the power to the remote
. Data transmission error 1/0 unit.
. Data 1/0 error
. Remote 1/0 failure
. Remote 1/0 unit power OFF
(see Note 1)

-449-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.6 SYSTEM ALARMS

Error No. Details Remedy

Z51 This arises when it was not possible for Q Set “e2rom” on the basic specifica-
EE ROM the parameters to be written properly tion parameter page of the machine
ERROR into the E2ROM. parameter screen to zero.
Z52 This arises when there is a drop in the . Recharge the battery.
BATTERY voltage of the battery provided to retain o Replace the battery.
FAULT the data inside the NC system. @ Check the machining programs after
(See Note 2) having dealt with the batteq.
Z53 The temperature of the MC1ll or e Cooling measures must be taken.
TEMP. operation board has risen above the Either switch off the NC power or
OVER rating. use a cooler to reduce the
(See Note 3) temperature.
Z54 The power supply of the insulation o The DIO card may be defective.
DIO 5V photocoupler is not output. Replace it.
DOWN (See Note 4)
Z55 The 24V power supply used for the ~ Check for + 24V load shortcircuiting
DIO 24V DIO 1/0 card is not output. on the machine side.
DOWN (See Note 4) @ Check the PD19/20/21 power suppl-
ies inside the NC system.
e Replace the DIO card.
Z56 (For special function) @ Refer to the separately provided
specifications manual.
MC44U An error (memory parity, etc.) has oc- @ Recharge or replace the battery.
S RAM curred in the memory (MC44CI) storing e Initialize the memory.
ERR the machining programs.

-450-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.6 SYSTEM ALARMS

NOTE 1: Remote 1/0 failsafe

This error is indicated when a fault occurs in a system using a remote 1/0 unit. As a result, the
emergency stop mode is established and the contact output at the remote 1/0 side is set OFF.
The alarm is released by resetting.
NOTE 2 Battery drop
When-the p~wer is switched on, battery malfunctioning is checked. If the battery is found to be
malfunctioning, this alarm is indicated. The alarm display can be cleared by pressing the
RESET switch, and it does not affect operation,
Z52 BATTERY FAULT O 00 ~
HEX setting
Mclll/Mcl16
MC471/MC472
MC442/MC446 SRAM
P MC442/MC446 DRAM
NOTE 3: Temperature alarm
When the overheating alarm is detected, the alarm is displayed and, simultanmusly, the
overheating signal is output. If the syst em is in automatic operation, operation is continued but
it cannot be started after it has been terminated by resetting or by the M02/M30 command.
(Operation can be started after block stop and feed hold.) The alarm is released when the
temperature falls below the rating, and the overheating signal is canceled.
253 TEMP. OVER 000
HEX setting % ❑
~ High temperature inside control system
High temperature inside CRT setting and display unit
The ambient temperature must be reduced speedily when the overheating alarm occurs. If machining must
proceed, the alarm can be made invalid by setting the following parameter to OFF.
-. .

PLC parameter Bit select #49 Flriffll’il b

CRT setting and display unit o : ?&yy
~ Control system [
1 : Detectionvalid

NOTE A DI05V/24V error

If the 5V or 24V power supply on the DIO card is malfunctioning, the emergency stop mode
is established (STOP display) and this alarm appears. This status is maintained until the power
is switched on again.

Z54 DIO 5V DOWN 000

(Z55 DIO 24V DOWN) HEX display
First DIO card
Sand DIO card
Third DIO card
E 4th DIO card
When the DI05V/24V error occurs, the corresponding card must be replaced although the alarm can be
temporarily released by setting the following parameter ON.

PLC parameter Bit select #49 rffl’fm

O : Detection invalid
‘[ 1 : Detection valid
The alarm is not detected when this bit is set to 1. Reset the NC system if it was set to 1 while the alarm
has arisen, Make absolutely sure that the parameter is set OFF after replacement with the proper card.

-451-
 ,, . .

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

(The characters in bold appear on the screen as the actual messages.)
These alarms occur during automatic operation and they are mainly caused by program errors which
occur, for instance, when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or
when programs which conform to the NC specifications have not been prepared.

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P 10 EXCS . AXIS No. o Divide the commands in the alarm
The number of axis addresses assigned in block into two blocks.
the same block exceeds the specification. e Check the specifications.
Pll AXIS ADR. ERROR e Revise the axis name in the program.
The axis address assigned by the program
and the axis address set by the parameter
do not match.
P20 DIVISION ERROR ● Reconsider the program.
An axis command which cannot be
divided by the command unit has been
assigned.
P30 PARITY H * Check the paper tape.
The number of holes per character on the @ Check the tape puncher and tape
paper tape works out to be even for the reader.
EIA code and odd for the ISO code.
P31 PARITY V o Make the number of characters per
The number of character per block on the block on the paper tape even.
paper tape is odd. e Set the parameter parity V selection
OFF.
P32 ADDRESS . ERROR e Check and revise the program address.
An address not listed in the specifications * Check the specifications.
has been used.
P33 FORMAT ERROR ● Reconsider the program.
The command format in the program is
not correct.
P34 G-CODE ERROR ● Check and correct the G code address
A G code not listed in the specifications in the program.
has been used.
P35 CM D-VALUE OVER . Reconsider the program.
The setting range for the addresses has
been exceeded.
P36 PRO GRAM END ERR e The M02 or M30 command has not
“EOR” has been read during tape and been entered at the end of the program.
memory operation. e The M99 command (G23 or G68 com-
mand for M2/MO format) has not been
entered at the end of the subprogram.

-452-
 ,’

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P37 PRO(3. No. ZERO o The program numbers are assigned
Zero has been assigned for a program or across a range from 1 to 99999999.
sequence number. e The sequence numbers are assigned
across a range from 1 to 99999.
P38 NO BLOCK SKIP e Reconsider the program.
A /2—/9 command has been assigned. (/2—/9 commands cannot be assigned.)
P40 PREREAD BL. ERR @ Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the pre-read block
when cutter compensation is executed and
so the interference check is disabkd.
P 50 NO INCH/MM SPEC @ Check the specifications.
A command has been assigned with a G
code for inch/mm conversion even though
such a G code specification does not exist.
P 60 OVER C~P. LENG. o The setting range for the axis addresses
The assigned movement distance is too is wide.
great (it exceeds 231).
P61 NO S-DIR SPEC e Check the specifications.
The G60 command has been assigned even @ Change the G60 program command to
though the uni-directional positioning GOO.
specification does not exist.
F 62 F-CMD. NOTHING e This alarm occurs because the
The feed rate command has not been movement modal command is set to
entered, GO1 when the power was switched on,
and so movement is based on the G1
command, provided that a movement
command is present, even when GO1 is
not assigned in the program.
P 63 NO G05 SPEC o Check the specifications.
The high-speed mode has been assigned
even though such a specification does not
exist.
P70 ARC ERROR @ Check the address values assigned for
There is an error in the arc start and end the programmed start point, end point
points as well as in the arc center. and arc center.
@ Check the plus and minus directions for
the address values.
P71 Al?C CENTER o Check the numerical values of the
The arc center is not calculated during programmed addresses.
R-specified circular interpolation.
P72 NO HELICAL SPEC @ Chwk the helical specifications.
A helical command was assigned even @ A 3-axis command is assigned with
though such a specification does not exist. circular interpolation commands. Un-
less this is a helical command, move the
linear command axis to the next block.

,’,:,

-453-
 .,

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
P73 NO SPIRAL SPEC o The G02.1 and G03.1 commands are
A spiral command was assigned even assigned for circular interpolation.
though no such command exists in the ~ Check the spiral specifications.
specifications.
P 80 NO G07 SPEC e Check the imaginary axis specifications.
An imaginary axis command (G07) was . Change the G07 command.
assigned even though no such command
exists in the specifications.
P 90 NO THREAD SPEC e Check the specifications.
A thread-cutting command was assigned
even though no such command exists in
the specifications.
P 93 SCREW PITCH ERR o Assign the thread-cutting mmmand and
The screw pitch has not been set correctly then set the screw pitch command
when the thread-cutting command was properly.
assigned.
P 100 NO CYLIND SPEC * Check the specifications.
A cylindrical interpolation command was
assigned even though no such command
exists in the specifications.
Pllo PLANE CHG (PR) o Delete the plane selection command
A plane selection command (G17, G18, (G17, G18, G19) from the pattern rota-
G19) was assigned in a coordinate rotation tion subprogram.
command.
Pill PLANE CHG (CR) o Upon completion of the G68 command,
A plane selection command (G17, G18, the plane selection command must be
G19) was assigned in a coordinate rotation assigned following the G69 (coordinate
command (G68). rotation cancel) command.
(h the case of the M2/MO format, the
pattern rotation command is G68.1 and
the pattern rotation cancel command is
G69.1.)
P 112 PLANE CHG (CC) e Assign the plane selection command
A plane selection command (G17, G18, after the cutter compensation command
G19) was assigned when a cutter has been issued (assign the G40 cancel
compensation command (G41, G42) was command).
assigned.
P 120 NO SYNC. FEED o Check the synchronous feed command
A synchronous feed command was specifications.
assigned even though no such command . Change the synchronous feed command
exists in the specifications. (G95) to a per-minute feed command
(G94). (The F command value must
also be changed.)
P121 FO ARC MODAL @ Rapid traverse cannot be assigned and
The FO command (F1-digit rapid traverse so any F1-digit command except FO
command) was assigned when the circular should be assigned for the circular
interpolation command (G02, G03) was interpolation command.
assigned in a F1-digit feed command. . Assign the GO or G1 command unless
the block which caused the alarm is the
circular command block.

-454-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P 122 NO AUTO C-OVR @ Check the specifications.
An automatic corner override command . Delete the G62 command from the
(G62) was assigned even though no such program.
command exists in the specifications.
P 130 2nd AUX. ADDR . Check and correct the second
The second miscellaneous function address miscellaneous function address in the
assigned in the program and the address program.
set by the parameter do not match.
P 131 NO G96 SPEC o Check the specifications.
The constant peripheral speed command @ Change from the constant peripheral
(G96) was assigned even though no such speed command (G96) to the speed
command exists in the specifications. command (rpm/min).
P 132 SPINDLE S =0 o Reconsider the program.
The spindle speed command has not been
input.
P 140 NO T-POS OFST. @ Check the specifications.
There are no position compensation com-
mand (G45—G48) specifications. (Usually,
these are standard specifications.)
P 141 PAT-ROT ERROR . Reconsider the program.
Position compensation has been assigned
in a pattern rotation or coordinate rota-
tion command.
P 142 T-OFFS G2 ERR . Reconsider the program.
An arc command has been assigned for a
circle incapable of position compensation.
P 150 NO C-CMP SPEC ● Check the cutter compensation
A cutter compensation (G41, G42) has specifications.
been assigned even though no such com-
mand exists in the specifications.
P151 G2,3 CMP. ERR ● Assign the linear command (GO1) or
A compensation command (G40, G41, rapid traverse command (GOO)in the
G42, G43, G44) has been assigned in the compensation command block or cancel
arc mode (G02, G03). block. (Set the modal to linear
interpolation.)
P 152 1.S .P NOTHING * Reconsider the program.
The machine does not stop at the intersec-
tion point when one block is skipped dur-
ing the processing of an interference block
when cutter compensation (G41, G42) is
executed.

-455-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P 153 I.F ERROR @ Reconsider the program.
h interference error has arisen while a
cutter compensation command (G41, G42)
was examted.
P 154 NO 3D-CMP SPEC o Check the specifications.
A 3-dimensional compensation command
was assigned even though no such com-
mand mists in the specifications.
P 155 F-CYC ERR (CC) . Since the cutter compensation is
A canned cycle command was assigned in established when a canned cycle com-
the cutter compensation mode. mand is exccutcd, assign the cutter
compensation cancel command (G40).
P 170 NO CORR. No. o Add the compensation offset number
The compensation number command command to the compensation com-
(DOO) was not assigned when the cutter mand block.
compensation command (G41, G42, G43) Check the number of compensation
was assigned. Alternatively, the compensa- number sets and correct the number to
tion number is higher than the number of a compensation number command
sets in the specifications. within the permitted number of sets.
P 171 NO G1O SPEC . Check the specifications.
A G1O command has been assigned even
though no such command exists in the
specifications.
P 172 U31O L-No. ERR . Check the address L number of the
The address command is not correct when G1O command and correct the number.
the G1O command is assigned.
P 173 G1O P-No. ERR . First check the number of compensa-
When the G1O command was assigned, a tion sets, and then set the address P
compensation number outside the permit - assignment to within the permitted
ted number of sets in the specifications number of sets.
was assigned for the compensation number
command.
P 174 NO Gll SPEC . Check the specifications.
A Gll command was assigned even
though no program tool compensation
input (Gil) command exists in the
specifications.
P 180 NO BORING CYC. e Check the specifications.
A canned cycle command was assigned o Revise the program.
even though no such commands (G72—
G89) exist in the specifications.
P181 NO S-CMD (TAP) o Assign the spindle speed command (S)
The spindle speed command was not as- when the boring canned cycle command
signed when the boring canned cycle was (G84, G74) is assigned.
assigned.
P 182 SYN TAP ERROR . Check the coupling with the spindle
Coupling with the spindle unit is not pos- unit.
sible. . Check whether the spindle encoder is
present.

-456-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P183 PTC/THD NO. . Use the F or E command to assign the
The pitch or thread number command has pitch and thread number.
not been assigned in the tap cycle of a
boring canned cycle command.
I?184 NO PTC/THD CMD @ Check the pitch or thread number.
The pitch or thread command is not
correct in the tap cycle of a boring canned
cycle command.
F 220 NO SPECIAL CYC o Check the specifications.
The special canned cycle specifications do
not exist.
P221 NO HOLE (S-CYC) o Reconsider the program.
Zero has been assigned as the hole number
in a special canned cycle.
P 222 G36 ANGLE ERR ● Reconsider the program.
Zero has been assigned as the angle
interval with G36.
P 223 G12 G13 R ERR e R~nsider the program.
The radial value is less than the compensa-
tion amount with the G12 or G13 com-
mand.
P 224 NO G12, G13 SPC o Check the specifications.
Circular cutting specifications do not exist.
P 230 NESTING OVER * Check the number of subprogram calls
A subprogram has been called 8 or more and correct the program so that it does
times in succession from a subprogram. not exceed 8 times.
P231 NO N-NUMBER a Assign the sequence numbers in the
There were no sequence numbers when the proper block.
subprogram was called or when a return
was made from the subprogram.
Alternatively, the sequence numbers as-
signed by GOTO were not set.
P 232 NO PROGRAM No. e Register the subprogram.
The subprogram has not been registered
when the subprogram was called.
P 240 NO VARBL. SPEC o Check the specifications.
A variable command was assigned even
though no variable commands (#00) exist
in the specifications.

-457-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error Remedy
Details

F
No.
P241 NO VARI NUMBER . Check the specifications.
The variable number assigned is higher e Check the program variable numbers.
than the numbers regulated by the
specifications.
P 242 EQL. SYM. MSSG. . Assign the “=” sign in the variable
The “=” sign was not assigned when definition of the program.
defining a variable.
P 243 VARIABLE ERR. e Revise the program.
A variable has been assigned which cannot
be used in the left-side or right-side
member of an arithmetic expression.
P 250 NO PAT-ROT SPC e Check the specifications.

k
A pattern rotation command has been as-
signed even though no such command ex-
ists in the specifications.
P251 DUPL. PAT-ROT @ Check the program.
A pattern rotation command was assigned
during another pattern rotation command.
P 252 PAT. & COOD-ROT e Check the program.
A pattern rotation command and graphic
rotation command have been assigned
simultaneously.
P 260 NO COOD-RT SPC o Check the specifications.
A coordinate rotation command was as-

I
signed even though no such command ex-
ists in the specifications.
P 270 NO MACRO SPEC o Check the specifications.
A macro specification was assigned even
though no such command exists in the
specifications.
P 271 NO MACRO INT. @ Check the specifications.
A macro interrupt command was assigned
even though no such command exists in
the specifications.
P 272 NC/MACRO ILL. e Reconsider the program, and place the
An NC statement and macro statement NC and macro statements in separate
exist together in the same block. blocks.
P 273 MACRO OVERCALL . Reconsider the program, and correct it
The frequency of the macro call has so that the macro calls do not exceed
exceeded the limit. the limit regulated by the specifications.
P 275 MACRO ARG. EX. ● Reconsider the program.
The number of macro call argument type
} II sets has exceeded the limit.

-458-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No. I
P276 CALL CANCEL e Reconsider the program.
A G67 command was assigned even @ Since the G67 is the call cancel com-
though it was not during the G66 com- mand, the G66 command must be as-
mand modal. signed first.
P 277 MACRO ALM MESG e Refer to the operator messages appear-
An alarm command was assigned in ing on the diagnosis screen.
#30(lo. . Refer to the operating instructions is-
sued bv the machine builder.
P 280 EXC. ~ ] e Rwmsider the program, and correct it
More than five pairs of parentheses [, ] so that the number of “~’ and “]” pairs
have been assigned in a single block. does not exceed five.
P281 L ] ILLEGAL a Reconsider the program, and correct it
The numbers of “~’ and “1” parentheses so that the number of “~’ and “]”
assigned in a single block do not match. parenthmes are paired up p roperly.
P 282 CALC. IMPOSS. e Reconsider the program, and correct
The arithmetic formula is incorrect. the formula.
P 283 DIVIDE BY ZERO o Reconsider the program, and correct it
The denominator of the division is zero. so that the denominator for division in
the formula is not zero.
P 284 INTEGER O VIZR e Reconsider the arithmetic formula in
In the process of the calculation, the the program, and correct it so that the
integral number has exceeded –231 value of the integer after calculation
(231– 1). does not exceed –231.
P 285 OVERFLOW VALUE ● Reconsider the variable data in the
The variable data has overflowed.
P 290 IF SNT. ERROR
There is an error in the IF [<conditional
expression > ] GOTOCi statement. -
P291 WHILE SNT. ERR o Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the WHILE
[< conditional expression>] DOD –
ENDD statement.
P292 SETVN SNT. ERR
There is an error in the S13TVNCI state- . Set the number of the characters in the
ment when the variable name was set. variable name of the SETVN statement
~

-459-
 .,.

APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS

5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P293 DO—END EXCESS . Revise the program so that the number
The number of DO—END’s in the of DO—END statements does not
WHILE [<conditional expression >] tXCWd 27.
DOCI-ENDD statement has exceeded
27.
P 294 DO—END MMC. e Reconsider the program and correct it
The DOS and END’s are not paired up so that the DO’s and END’s are paired
properly. up properly.
P 295 WHILE/GOTO TPE o During tape operation, a program
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on which includes a WHILE or GOTO
the tape during tape operation. statement cannot be executed and so
the memory operation mode is
established instead.
P296 NO ADR (MACRO) o Reconsider the program.
The user macro address has not been as-
signed although it is required.
P297 ADR-A ERR. . Reconsider the program.
No variable has been assigned for address
A in a user macro.
P 298 PTR OP (MACRO) o Reconsider the program.
One of the user macro G200–G202 u)m-
mands has been assigned with tape or
MDI operation.
P 300 VAR. NAME ERROR . Reconsider the program so that the
The variable names have not been variable names are correct.
assigned properly. Reconsider the variable names in the
program so that they are corrected.
P301 VAR NAME DUPLI * Correet the program so that the name
The name of a variable has been duplic- is not duplicated.
ated.
P 350 NO SCALING SPC . Cheek the specifications.
A scaling command (G50, G51) has been
assigned even though no such command
exists in the specifications.
P360 NO PROG. MIRR. ● Check the specifications.
A mirror image command (G50.1, G51.1)
was assigned even though no such com-
mand exists in the specifications.

-460-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
P380 NO CORNER R/C o Check the specifications.
A command was assigned for corner s Remove the corner rounding or
rounding/chamfering I or II even though chamfering command from the
no such command exists in the specifica- program.
tions.
P381 NO ARC R/C S~C QI Check the specifications.
A corner rounding or chamfering coLu-
mand 11was assigned in a circular
interpolation block even though no such
command exists in the specifications.
P382 CORNER NO MOVE @ Assign a 601 command to the block
The block following the corner rounding/ following the corner rounding/chamfer-
chamfering did not contain a movement ing.
command.
P383 CORNER SHORT a Make the corner roundingfchamfering
In the comer roundin~chamfering com- less than the movement distance since
mand, the movement distance was shorter this distance is shorter than the corner
than the value in the corresponding com- rounding or chamfering.
mand.
P384 CORNER SHORT e Make the corner roundingfchamfering
In the corner rounding/chamfering com- less than the movement distance since
mand, the movement distance in the this distance in the following block is
following block was less than the corner shorter than the corner rounding or
roundindchamferimz. chamferimz.
P390 NO GEOMETRIC @ Check the specifications.
A geometric command was assigned even
though no such command exists in the
smcifications.
P391 NO GEOMETRIC 2 * Check the specifications.
There are no geometric specifications IB
or 11.
P392 LES AGL (GEOMT) e Corr@ the geometric angle.
The difference in the angle between a
geometric line and line is less than 1°.
P393 INC ERR (GEOMT) . Assign the 2nd geometric block using
The 2nd geometric block has been an absolute value.
assimml usin~ an incremental value.
P 394 NO GO1 (GEOMT) . Assign the GO1 command.
There is no linear command in the 2nd
geometric block.

-461-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P 395 NO ADRS (GEOMT) . Rmnsider the program.
The geometric format is incorrect.
P396 PL CHG. (GEOMT) @ Switch the plane before the geometric
A plane selection command has been is- command.
sued in a geometric command.
P41O NO ADDRS. CHG. e Check the specifications.
There are no absolute/incremental address
conversion specifications.
P 420 NO PARM. IN SPC ~ Check the specifications.
A parameter input command was assigned
even though no such command exists in
the specifications.
P421 PARM . IN ERROR . Enter the correct parameter input data.
The parameter input data is illegal.
P 430 AXIS NOT RET. ~ Perform reference point return manu-
A command was assigned to move an axis, ally.
which had not been returned to the refer-
ence point, away from that reference
point.
P431 NO 2nd REF. SPC . Cheek the specifications.
A command for the second, third or
fourth reference point return was assigned
even though no such command exists in
the specifications.
P 432 NO G29 SPEC . Check the specifications.
A start position return command (G29)
was assigned even though no such com-
mand exists in the specifications.
P433 NO G27 SPEC o Check the specifications.
A zero point collate command (G27) was
assigned even though no such command
exists in the specifications.
P 434 COLLATION ERR . Reconsider the program.
One of the axes did not return to the start
position when the zero point collate com-
mand (G27) was assigned.
P 435 G27/M ERROR . An M independent command cannot be
An M independent command was assigned assigned in a G27 command block, and
simultaneously in a G27 command block. so the G27 command and M independ-
ent command must be placed in separ-
ate blocks.

-462-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error Remedy
Details
No.
P436 G29/M ERROR B AII M independent command cannot be
4n M independent cnmmand was assigned assigned in a G29 command block, and
jimukaneously in the G29 command so the G29 command and M indemmd-
.
~lock. ent command must be placed in separ-
ate blocks.
P451 NO PROG. LIMIT D Check the specifications.
rhe stroke check function (G22) prior to
movement was assigned even though no
such command exists in the specifications.
P 452 MOVEMENT LIMIT e Reconsider the axis address coordinates
An alarm arises prior to the mecution of in the program.
the movement block in question when the
end point of an axis movement is entered
into a prohibited area assigned by the
stroke check function (G22) prior to
movement. (G22.1 command applies for
M2/MO format.)
P 460 TAPE 1/0 ERROR
An error has arisen in the tape reader or
in the printer during macro printing.
P461 FILE 1/0 ERROR
A file of the machining program cannot be
read.
P 462 DNC ERROR e Proc~ with resetting.
A communication error has arisen during
BTI-1operation.
P 600 NO AUTO TLM - o Check the specifications.
An automatic tool length measurement
command (G37) was assigned even though
no such command exists in the specifica-
tions.
P601 NO SKIP SPEC. . Check the specifications.
A skip command (G31) was assigned even
though no such command exists in the
specifications.
P 602 NO MULTI SKIP . Check the specifications.
A multiple skipping command (G31.1,
G31.2, G31.3) was assigned even though
no such command exists in the specifica-
tions.
P 603 SKIP SPEED O ● Assign the skip speed.
The skip speed is zero.

-463-
APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.7 PROGRAM ERRORS

Error
Details Remedy
No.
P 604 G37 ILL. AXIS ● Assign only one axis.
The axis has not been assigned in the
automatic tool measurement block or two
or more axes have been assigned.
P 605 H-CMD IN BLOCK e Assign the H command before the
The H code is in the same block as the automatic tool measurement command
automatic tool measurement command. block.
P 606 NO H-CMD BEIWR . The H command must be assigned
The H code has not yet been assigned dur- before the automatic tool measurement
ing an automatic tool measurement. command block.
P 607 G37 ILL. SIGNL @ Reconsider the program.
The measurement position arrival signal
has been set ON before the area assigned
by the parameter deceleration area “d” or
D command. Alternatively, the signal was
not set ON until the end.
P 608 SKIP ERROR (CC) e Issue the cutter compensation cancel
The skip command was assigned during a command (G40) or remove the skip
cutter compensation command. command.
P 900 (Special function accommodated) . Refer to the separate specifications
manual.
P91O (Special function accommodated) . Refer to the separate specifications
manual.
P911 (Special function accommodated) o Refer to the separate specifications
manual.
P 920 (Special function accommodated) e Refer to the separate specifications
manual.
P921 (Spmial function accommodated) o Refer to the separate specifications
manual.
P 922 (Special function accommodated) o Refer to the separate specifications
manual.

-464-
 APPENDIX 5. LIST OF ALARMS
5.8 MESSAGES FOR EMERGENCY STOP

5.8 MESSAGES FOR EMERGENCY STOP

Error
Details Remedy
No.
IOAD ?his indicates that the emergency stop Release the EMERGENCY STOP
node has been established by the emerg- button on the operation board.
:ncy stop input signal on the operation Check for breaks or disconnections in
~oard side. the wiring.
Setting pin can be used to select
ralid/invalid.)
?LC rhe user PLC has ban set to the emerg- r Find the cause of the emergency stop
:ncy stop mode by sequence processing, and remove it.
‘320M/330M/330HM/335M ... Y29F)
[OP 1) With 9-inch CRT for 320M/330M B Check out the emergency stop button
MC721 (CRT control card) emergency on the operation board.
stop input is ON (open). B Check for breaks or disconnections in
:2) With 14-inch CRT for 330HM/335M the wiring between the NC control
MC721 (KS-232-C IOP card) emerg- system and operation board.
ency stop input is ON (open).
(Setting pin can be used to select
valid/invalid.)
[n both cases, the wiring connections with
the operation board are almost always to
dame.
ExIo The emergency stop input signal on one of I) Release the emergency stop signal.
the DIO cards mountd in the NC system B Check for breaks or disconnections in
is ON (open). the wiring.
(There is an emergency stop input for each
DIO card.)
SRV An alarm has arisen in the servo system . Check out the cause of the servo alarm
which has been set to emergen q stop. and remove it.
STOP (1) The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not Check whether the RUN switch (second
running. MC1ll DIP switch from top) for the
PLC ladder on the CPU card is at the
OFF position.
Check whether the [4RUN/SP] (run
stop) switch on the PLC editing file
entry screen (on-board function) is at
the ON position.
(2) This error also occurs when an error Check for irregularities in the connec-
arises in data communication with the tions between the control system and
remote 1/0 unit. remote 1/0 unit.

-465-
 . .

APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK

APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
The playback function enables programs to be prepared while sample machining is being performed by
manual (handle, jog) or mechanical handle fed.
Machining programs can be prepared using the movement values yielded by manual operations as the
program command values.

m
, ?
0 100 PLAYBACK !
:x .Io.,w x -,ua
w m .“2. ;; .::m : -W&
mm Klo”w.

u
012313678
,, 0 ~mamostv ~
\IG28XOYOZO:
;L4DDI
Movement x 2 GMlx-in.Y-lo. :
1. amount \ ?GoIX-iO. Y-20. FIOOO:
FILE SEARCH PROGRAM :
d
1 s 4 X-23. Y-20. :
Playback editing X 5 S-’25. Y-IO. :

e Dade on absolute or incremental

Conduct a data semch on the editing screen

for the number of the nrrddrring program
to be preprtred using the playbfick timction.
values

I Set the PLAYBACKswitchto ON. I

Provide movement in manual mode.

I
Data repmation
4 Machining
G co f es, ~ Y and other axis commands, program
F cmnmmrds, etc.
ID

I Set PLAYBACK switch to OFF. I

-466-
 APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

6.1.1 PLAYBACK SCREEN

( 1 ) Playback editing with preparation of new program
1 ) Prepare the program.

0( )COMMENT( )

>FUE SEARGR PROGRAM

= ‘“

The setting area for preparation now appears.

Set the program number and comment

into the data setting area.
(Example) O (100) COMMENT
(TESTPROG)
OW
L
3 100 TESTPROG ; EDIT

Press the ~NPUT] key. IJw L

The program number and comment ap-

pear at the top of the screen, and the data
is automatically entered into the memory
as a single character “’2Z0.”
2 ) Bring up the playback screen.

100 PLAYBACK :
EDIT
: UJACHDJ31[PLAYBACK ABSI
ii 10.!CO ; ;’.
: Y Z3.18
r“ : z O.am z O.on
jUlmMmyl

Since nothing is entered in the program,

only “9ZO”appears on the left-hand side of
the screen. ~EMORYl on the right is
blank.

-467-
APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

(2) Playback editing with already entered program

1 ) Bring up the editing screen.

Press the ~DIT MDI] key, and press the

~IT] and [SEARCH] menu keys. Uw 0[ )N[ )-1 1
FILE
SEARCH
PROGRAM
, ::!
1
I

The setting area for data search now appears.

Set the program number and sequence

number to be called into the data setting

a&?:;i$6y :k)YF] ?(” )

O 100 PLAYBACK ~
DE’
I Press the PLAYBACK switch.
I
E6GmXw.wa:
N5 X1 QYIC4Z1O. EDIT
; IMACIHNEI[PLAYEACK:
: x Io.lm x O.m
: Y ZO.in Y O,m
ABSI

(1) The character string in question is ! &E&%RYl

Z ““~
N5GOIx%lvw,
searched from the head of the assigned
program and the program appears with ~UDDIo

the block at the head.

(2) The cursor appears at the head of the
searched character string. FILESEARCH PROGRAM
(3) The program is written in the block
following the assigned block. The
searched block appears in
MEMORY].
(4) The cursor
-. appears in the [ADD] area
and editing is now possible.
When performing playback editing either for new prepared programs or for already entered programs,
select the playback screen and edit on that screen. Editing during davback is done in the [ADD1 area on
the right-hand side of the screen. This makes machini~g pro~am- editing no longer ~ossibl~ on the
left-hand side of the screen.
The cursor on the left-hand side of the screen indicates the block which appears in ~EMORY] on the
right-hand side of the screen.
(3) Searching another program and playback editing
Press the [SEARCH] menu key again and proceed with the operations in (2) 1).

.468.
 APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

6.1.2 PLAYBACK EDITING

1 ) Set the control parameter to CONTROL PARAM

determine whether absolute #
incremental values will be used f::
davback editiniz.
W~en editing w~h absolute values, set
“playback G90” to ON; when editing 35 PLAYBACK G90
with incremental values, set it OFF.
If incremental values have been
!$( )
selected, “INC!” appears on the
playback screen; if absolute values
have been selected, “ABS” appears.
2 ) Select the editing screen.

Press the ~DIT MDI] key and press

the ~DIT] menu key.

Select data search.

k
I E
I Press the [SEARCH] menu key.

Assign the program number and playback.

L
Set the program number, sequence
number and block number of the
program to be playback edited, and
press the ~NPUT] key.
@ample) O ( 100) N ( ) - ( )

O 100 PlAYBACK j
EDIT
Press the PLAYBACK switch. Ow NIG~XYZ.
N2Gm Xlo. rm, i MAI=IJ31[PLAYEACIC
AW
~ K Io,!m r O.m
. Y m,la Y a.cm
: z O,ml z O,ml

The playback screen is now seen to occupy

the right-hand side of the screen.
The insertion position can be changed by
operating the cursor keys. For details,
refer to the editing operations in 1.3. FILE SEARCHFROGRAM

3 ) Conduct movement in the manual mode.

Move the axis from the machining ~LAYBACK: ABS]

X 0.125
Y 1.034
E ‘“ z 0.381

-469-
 ,,. .

APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

4 ) Convert the playback movement

into the machining program type.

Enter the sequence number, G codes

‘F L&~~ACK:

‘1’ 1:034
ABS]

Ow z 0.010
&dagyiW%iiiidiij
MEMORY]

[ADD] N1OGOO ❑
L )

Ia:mp- ~,=
Press the X, Y or other axis address

(1) When the axis address key is premed,

I yg~’ms] I
the playback movement is displayed
following the axis address.
(2) If an axis address key is pressed L?&H2uJ
while the playback counter i; work-
ing, the playback data at the time
when the key was pressed will be
displayed.

I
Press the ~NPUT] key.

‘“ r
~EMORY] N1OOOOXO.12SY1.O34
;

[ADD] ❑

5 ) Terminate the davback editing.

‘ Playback editi~g ii terminated-when the playback switch is set to OFF, and operation returns
to the ordinary editing screen.

6.1.3 PLAYBACK CHECKPOINTS

(1) The maximum number of characters which can be set in [ADD] is 96.
(2) When EOB ~) is not entered at the end of a program prepared in [ADD], it will be added
automatically when the flNPUT] key is pressed.
(3) A block can be divided by entering EOB ~) between X and Y.
(4) If there is an error in the data, an error message will appear during input. (See the CRT operation
messages.)
(5) Do not edit macro statements in the playback editing mode. When, for instance, an attempt has been
made to enter “XOR,” “ X“ will be played back when it is entered.
(6) A different program may be searched or the non-search status may be established when any of the
following operations are conducted during playback editing.
. Operation search, erase, condense, number change

-470-
 APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.1 PLAYBACK OPERATION

6.1.4 PLAYBACK COUNTER DISPLAY

The program counter may be characterized by a different correspondence depending on the CNC system
mode.

Playback G92 OFF Playback G90 ON

Counter at playback start O is displayed. Present value (2) counter
(if a manual interrupt
amount is present, this
will be addcxi) is
displayed.

Es I m P
Theedifference between the The playback counter
:

;;5, ‘Fl ‘Sl

The playback counter is The axis command value

[ADD] G92x10: set to zero regardless of followin G92 is set in
the axis command value the play %ack counter.
following G92.
o
tllPu3

6.1.5 COORDINATE VALUES ENTERED IN MEMORY

1 ) The coordinates entered by the playback functions are numerical values with a decimal point.
Trailing zeros are omitted.
(Example) Playback counter Value entered in memory
x 0.000 + Xo
x 10.OOO+ Xlo.
2 ) When the playback function is used, the axis command units differ according to the input unit
used for each axis.

Input setting unit Playback counter Value enterti in memory

Millimeter Type A X1O.56 X1O.56
Type B X1O.567 X1O.567
VP eC X1O.5678 X1O.5678
Inch TYP eA X1O.56 X1O.56
Type B X1O.567 X1O.567
Type C X1O.5678 X1O.5678

-471-
APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.2 EDITING OPERATIONS

6.2 EDITING OPERATIONS

6.2.1 CURSOR MOVEMENT

Block insertion positions and deletion blocks can be assigned by moving the cursor on the left-hand side
of the screen.
( 1 ) When moving the cursor down

1
Move the cursor to the third Iine of [ADD]. ,
,

OR ,
(~) ,
,
,
,

,-----------------
‘[ADD]
,---------------- --
,
;-----------------
t ❑
1-------------. ---

I N1 I
Press the [J, ] key again. ,
E’ I
1
I
~
1
,

The cursor at the left-side of the screen ,

N5 ,
moves down. ,
1
,---- -------------

When the [ $ ] key is pressed with the I [ADD]

L ----------------
cursor at the bottom of the screen, the ,
,------- ----------
data is successively scrolled up one line at ,
L-.-..-...-.----- •1
a time. The cursor remains at the bottom.
(2) When moving the cursor up

1
b
N1 I

lm----J
Move the cursor to the first line of [ADD]. I
,
*
w G
N4 I
,
N5 ,
1
,,--------.---..-..-
I [ADD]
1---------- ❑--------
1
:------------------
1
,------------------
1
k 1 J

I
,
Press the [ t ] key again. B ,
1
~ I
1
,
N4 ,
The cursor at the left-side of the screen ,
N5 I
moves up.
i--------------- --
When the [ ~ ] key is pressed with the I [ADD] ❑
1.----.-----------
cursor at the top of the screen, the data is i,---------- ------.
successively scrolled down one line at a I
!---------- -------

time, and the block data before the 1

previous block appears at the top.

-472-
 APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.2 EDITING OPERATIONS

6.2.2 BLOCK INSERTION

Blocks can be inserted after the block with the cursor on the left-hand side of the screen.

6.2.3 BLOCK DELETION

1
I Move the cursor to the block which is Nll
to be deleted. Ow ❑ lz \
N13 1
(OQ) 1
,
t
I

,
1
,

.----- . --------1 --------------

Nll 1
,
Press the [SHIFT] and [C.B CAN] keys, nw ❑ I
1

N13 ,
,
I
,

The N12 block is deleted. ,

U& ,
Press the ~PUT] key.
I,
----------------------------

The revised data is written into the 1

memory. Nll
The space left by the deleted data is filled ❑ 13 i
in. 1
1
,
I
I
8
I

6.2.4 ADD PROGRAM DELETION ([C.B CAN]] ,

1

------- ------- [-----.. ------

The entire program being preparcxl in [ADD] on the right-

hand side of the screen is deleted by pressing this key.
,
I
, Thisis
# deleted.
1
,
,
, 1
I[ADD]

ic
---- . --------- 1------------- .

-473-
APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.3 RESTRICTIONS

6.3 RESTRICTIONS
(1) Playback editing is not possible in the machine lock mode.
(Movement amounts in this mode are not added.)
(2) Playback editing is not possible for programs in automatic operation.
(Programs in automatic operation cannot normally be edited.)
(3) Playback editing is not possible for canned cycle subprograms.
(Canned cycle subprograms cannot normally be edited.)
An error results when the playback switch is set ON on the data search screen.
(4) Playback editing is not conducted when the “EDITING” message has appeared.
An operation error results when the playback switch is set ON.
(5) Playback editing is not possible in the full-size mode.
An operation error results when the playback switch is set ON.
(6) If the playback switch is set ON while the address menu is displayed, the address menu is cleared and
the playback screen is displayed instead. In this case, the address menu will not be displayed even if
the playback switch is set OFF.

-474-
 APPENDIX 6. PLAYBACK
6.3 RESTRICTIONS

PAST RECORD OF REVISIONS

Supplementary
Date of revision Details of revision
code

-475-